Service Manual
Uploaded by
Hugues Le PennecService Manual
Uploaded by
Hugues Le PennecHP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise X557, X55745
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5800
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X57945
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X58045
Service Manual
www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700 www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP
www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP
HP Color LaserJet 5700, X557,
X55745, MFP 5800, X57945,
X58045 - Service Manual
SUMMARY
This guide provides theory of operation, troubleshooting, and repair information.
Legal information
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2023 HP
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein
is subject to change without
notice.
The only warranties for HP
products and services are set
forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed
as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 12, 12/2024
Revision history
View a list of document revisions.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only
warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should
be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for
technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Table Revision history
Revision number Revision date Revision notes
12 12/2024 Removed part number RK3-1509-000CN
Updated printer list for Cable, flat HVT part in "Parts and
diagrams: Internal assemblies", see Parts and diagrams:
Internal assemblies (4 of 7) and Parts and diagrams:
Internal assemblies (4 of 9).
11 11/2024 Corrected part number for SCB in R&R procedure:
Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB)
(MFP models)
Added part number for 32GB eMMC to R&R and parts
table:
● Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia
Card (eMMC)
● Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9)
X57945 models
10 10/2024 Corrected Formatter connection information and added
seperate images 1 for SFP and 1 for MFP. DC controller
PCA connections
Fixed 8 Typos of X577 changed to correct X557.
Updated LED Formatter information, see LED diagnostics
(formatter).
iii
Table Revision history (continued)
Revision number Revision date Revision notes
9 9/2024 Corrected the part number in Removal and replacement
for SCIB, see Removal and replacement: Scanner control
board (SCB) (MFP models).
8 8/2024 Updated repetitive defect ruler Repetitive image defect
ruler
Updated part numbers for Convenience Stapler; Parts
and diagrams: Covers 5700/X557 models
7 7/2024 Updated control panel part number for 10.9 cm (4.3 in). See
Control panels and Removal and replacement: Control
panel (SFP models).
Updated mass storage, wirelees/bluetooth capabilities,
and author information in certificates of volatility, see
Certificate of Volatility.
6 6/2024 Updated the remove/replace procedure for Main-drive
assembly, see Removal and replacement: Main-drive
assembly. Changes include the following:
● Corrected caution statements, see in Remove the left
upper cover (MFP models) and Remove the main-drive
assembly.
● Added step to close front door, see Close the front
door.
Updated printer dimensions. See:
Printer dimensions 5700/X557 models
Printer dimensions 5800 models
Printer dimensions x57945 models
5 5/2024 Updated instructions in Removal and Replacement: Toner
supply drive assembly, see Remove the toner supply drive
assembly (X654/X677 models).
4 4/2024 Updated Fax accessory part number, see Removal and
replacement: Fax PCA (fax models).
3.5 3/2024 Updated Internal assemblies part list for Memory PCA
and FFC, see Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
iv Revision history
Table Revision history (continued)
Revision number Revision date Revision notes
3.4 2/2024 Edited printer models for part numbers "6QN27-67002"
and "6QN29-67002". See "Part Description" column in
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9).
Updated printer model in the description for part
number "6QN29-67002", see Removal and replacement:
Formatter.
Edited model numbers in the description for DC controller
part numbers, see Removal and replacement: DC
controller (DCC).
Updated part number for X58045 model , see Parts and
diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9). See also: Removal
and replacement: DC controller (DCC).
3.3 2/2024 Updated installation warning when replacing the Main
drive assembly, see Remove the main-drive assembly.
3.2 2/2024 Corrected the following:
Remove and replace: Waste toner duct (X57945) changed
to Remove and replace: Waste toner carry assembly.
Updated Remove and replace: Waste toner duct assembly
to include X57945 part number.
3.1 1/2024 Update DC Controller part numbers in Parts tables
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 7)
5700/5800 models
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/
X57945/X58045 models
3 12/2023 Multiple Service part numbers added throughout the
document.
Add models X58045z, X58045zs, X58045dn throughout
the document where appropriate.
2 11/2023 Service manual updated to include new removal and
replacement procedure for Convenience stapler.
Updated ALL procedures that have removing the
Formatter cover to add 2 options depending on back
covers.
Updated ALL procedures that have removing the upper
rear cover to add 3 options depending on back covers.
v
Table Revision history (continued)
Revision number Revision date Revision notes
1.1 04/2023 Service manual updates include, but not limited to:
● Updated wast toner duct remove/replace (unseat ITB)
● Additional reinstall content to main drive assembly
remove/replace
● Updated HCI lifter drive remove/replace
Added managed toner cartridges manual unlock
procedure. See Removal and replacement: Toner
cartridges (manual unlock) (X57945 models).
1 03/2023 Service manual initial release.
vi Revision history
Conventions used in this guide
Learn about the conventions used in this publication.
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to
complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid
losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow
to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the
product.
vii
HP service and support
Learn about access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners
Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services
Delivery Platform (CSDP) to access the HP Web-based Interactive Search
Engine (WISE).
Find information about the following topics.
● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories
● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information
● Install, configure, and how to information
View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.
Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the
sign-in page).
2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).
3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.
4. Select the Technical Documentation item.
5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)
viii HP service and support
1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.
3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.
4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel
HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search
Engine (WISE) sites:
View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
● WISE - English
Additional technical support WISE videos
The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using
WISE.
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model
number search).
ix
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos
(Product detail page [PDP] search).
x HP service and support
Table of contents
1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications ...........................................................................1
Document feeder / scanner.....................................................................................................................................2
Information (document feeder and scanner)......................................................................................2
Document feeder and scanner front view....................................................................................2
Technical specifications ............................................................................................................................2
Information (base printer) ..........................................................................................................................................4
Printer front view (5700 models) ...................................................................................................................4
Printer front view (X557 models) ...................................................................................................................4
Printer back view (5700/X557 models) .....................................................................................................5
Printer front view (5800/X57945 models) ............................................................................................. 6
Printer back view (5800/X57945 models) ............................................................................................. 8
Configuration (base printer).................................................................................................................................. 10
Configuration (base printer SFP)............................................................................................................... 10
Configuration (base printer MFP)................................................................................................................11
Specifications (base printer) ................................................................................................................................ 13
Technical specifications (5700) .................................................................................................................. 13
Technical specifications (X55745) ............................................................................................................ 14
Technical specifications (5800).................................................................................................................. 16
Technical specifications (X57945)............................................................................................................ 19
Printer dimensions (5700/X557 models) ...............................................................................................21
Printer dimensions...............................................................................................................................................22
Printer dimensions (X57945 models)......................................................................................................23
Printer space requirements..........................................................................................................................26
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions..................... 27
Operating-environment range .................................................................................................................... 27
Information (input devices).....................................................................................................................................28
550-sheet paper feeder front view..........................................................................................................28
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder front view.......................................................................29
xi
Information (output devices)................................................................................................................................. 31
3-bin stapler-stacker front view.................................................................................................................. 31
2 Printer installation and maintenance................................................................................................................ 33
Document feeder / scanner................................................................................................................................. 34
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP) .......... 34
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges............................................................................ 35
Base printer...................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (5700/5800 models)....................................... 38
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (X57945 models)............................................... 39
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X57945 models) ....................................................41
Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers .............................................................................. 44
Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers.............................................................................. 48
3 Theory of operation..........................................................................................................................................................51
Document feeder / scanner..................................................................................................................................52
Document feeder simplex operation .....................................................................................................52
Scanning and image capture system ................................................................................................... 53
Base printer...................................................................................................................................................................... 55
Basic operation..................................................................................................................................................... 55
Sequence of operation ........................................................................................................................... 55
Formatter-control system...............................................................................................................................57
Power management.................................................................................................................................. 58
Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of
power........................................................................................................................................................... 59
Set the sleep schedule................................................................................................................... 59
Printer job language (PJL)...................................................................................................................... 60
Control panel.................................................................................................................................................. 60
Walk-up USB.................................................................................................................................................... 60
Low end data model (LEDM) overview .......................................................................................... 61
CPU......................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Input/output (I/O)........................................................................................................................................... 61
Memory ...............................................................................................................................................................62
Engine-control unit.............................................................................................................................................. 63
DC controller .................................................................................................................................................. 63
Motors......................................................................................................................................................... 68
Fans ...............................................................................................................................................................70
Low-voltage power supply ......................................................................................................................71
Low-voltage power supply voltages description .......................................................... 72
xii
Over-current/over-voltage protection...................................................................................73
Low-voltage power supply safety ............................................................................................73
Low-voltage power supply functions..................................................................................... 74
High-voltage power supply.................................................................................................................... 74
Fuser control....................................................................................................................................................75
Fuser heater protection................................................................................................................. 80
Fuser control functions................................................................................................................... 81
Engine laser/scanner system ......................................................................................................................82
Laser scanner failure detection ....................................................................................................... 83
Laser scanner safety ............................................................................................................................... 83
Image-formation process ..................................................................................................................... 83
Step 1: Pre-exposure (X57945 models only)......................................................................87
Step 2: Primary charging................................................................................................................87
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure.................................................................................................... 88
Step 4: Development........................................................................................................................ 88
Step 5: Primary transfer................................................................................................................. 89
Step 6: Secondary transfer......................................................................................................... 90
Step 7: Separation.............................................................................................................................. 90
Step 8: Fusing ......................................................................................................................................... 91
Step 9: ITB cleaning............................................................................................................................ 91
Toner cartridges............................................................................................................................................ 91
Design..........................................................................................................................................................92
Toner cartridge functions............................................................................................................. 93
Intermediate transfer belt assembly............................................................................................ 94
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) functions ........................................................................ 94
Secondary transfer roller assembly............................................................................................. 95
Secondary transfer roller functions..................................................................................... 95
Calibration........................................................................................................................................................ 95
Calibration functions ....................................................................................................................... 96
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system........................................................................................... 96
Sensors and switches ............................................................................................................................. 98
Motors, clutches, and solenoids.....................................................................................................100
Feed speed control ......................................................................................................................... 103
Pickup and feed delivery features........................................................................................ 104
Media detection................................................................................................................................. 105
Jam detection/prevention .................................................................................................................. 106
Input devices................................................................................................................................................................... 110
550-sheet paper feeder................................................................................................................................. 110
xiii
550-sheet paper feeder paper path ............................................................................................ 110
Paper feeder controller ......................................................................................................................... 110
550-sheet paper feeder electrical components...................................................................111
550-sheet paper feeder motor control .......................................................................................112
550-sheet paper feeder other functions...................................................................................112
550-sheet feeder jam detection...................................................................................................... 113
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder.............................................................................................. 113
HCI paper path............................................................................................................................................. 113
HCI controller ................................................................................................................................................ 114
HCI electrical components ................................................................................................................. 115
HCI motor control....................................................................................................................................... 116
HCI other functions .................................................................................................................................. 116
HCI jam detection........................................................................................................................................117
Output devices.............................................................................................................................................................. 118
3-bin stapler-stacker......................................................................................................................................... 118
3-bin stapler-stacker paper path .................................................................................................... 118
3-bin stapler-stacker controller........................................................................................................ 119
3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components......................................................................... 119
3-bin stapler-stacker motor control ...............................................................................................121
3-bin stapler-stacker fan control.....................................................................................................122
3-bin stapler-stacker other functions..........................................................................................122
3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection..............................................................................................122
4 Solve problems.................................................................................................................................................................124
How to search for printer documentation.................................................................................................125
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation...................................125
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)...................................................................... 131
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)......................................... 133
Determine the problem source........................................................................................................................ 136
Pre-troubleshooting checklist .................................................................................................................. 136
Troubleshooting flowchart .......................................................................................................................... 138
Firmware upgrades ............................................................................................................................................141
Determine the installed revision of firmware.........................................................................142
HP Embedded Web Server................................................................................................................. 143
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) ............................................................................. 144
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) .................................................................. 145
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools..........................................................................................147
Engine test ...............................................................................................................................................................147
xiv
Control panel checks .......................................................................................................................................147
Touchscreen diagnostic mode........................................................................................................ 148
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests............................................................... 149
Screen test.......................................................................................................................................................151
Touch test........................................................................................................................................................ 154
SoftKey test ................................................................................................................................................... 156
Backlight test ................................................................................................................................................157
Sound test ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
Keyboard test (flow models only)................................................................................................... 159
Version .............................................................................................................................................................. 160
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts ........................................................................................... 161
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) ................................................................. 161
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone......................................................................... 162
No control panel sound................................................................................................................ 163
Home button is unresponsive ................................................................................................. 164
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel
functional) .............................................................................................................................................. 165
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP)................................................................................ 166
Defeating interlocks........................................................................................................................................ 200
LED diagnostics (formatter).......................................................................................................................202
Scanner tests (MFP).........................................................................................................................................207
Disable cartridge check .............................................................................................................................. 208
Print/stop test...................................................................................................................................................... 209
Individual component diagnostics........................................................................................................ 210
Paper path test ........................................................................................................................................... 210
Paper path sensors test.........................................................................................................................211
Individual component test ....................................................................................................................211
Manual sensor test...................................................................................................................................212
Tray/bin manual sensor test...............................................................................................................212
Diagrams: Block diagrams...........................................................................................................................213
Diagrams: External plug and port locations ...........................................................................213
Sensors and switches ............................................................................................................................214
Diagrams: Major component locations .................................................................................... 219
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations ......................................................235
Diagrams: General timing chart .....................................................................................................244
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams ...........................................................................................246
Internal test and information pages .................................................................................................... 257
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................................261
xv
Settings menu..................................................................................................................................................... 263
General menu.............................................................................................................................................. 264
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) .................................................................................. 275
Fax menu (MFP)........................................................................................................................................... 291
Manage Supplies menu......................................................................................................................... 311
Networking menu.......................................................................................................................................317
Support Tools menu........................................................................................................................................ 326
Maintenance menu................................................................................................................................. 326
Backup/Restore menu ................................................................................................................. 326
Calibration/Cleaning menu .......................................................................................................327
USB Firmware Upgrade menu................................................................................................. 331
Service menu ...................................................................................................................................... 331
Troubleshooting menu........................................................................................................................... 331
Service menu....................................................................................................................................................... 339
Printer resets ....................................................................................................................................................... 345
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions .........................................................................................347
Power on troubleshooting................................................................................................................................... 353
Power-on checks ............................................................................................................................................... 353
Power on troubleshooting overview.................................................................................................... 353
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems.................................... 353
Engine diagnostics ...........................................................................................................................................357
Engine test......................................................................................................................................................357
Defeating interlocks................................................................................................................................357
Disable cartridge check...................................................................................................................... 360
LED diagnostics (formatter)...................................................................................................................... 360
Use the solve problems checklist......................................................................................................... 365
Control panel troubleshooting......................................................................................................................... 369
Control panel system diagnostics........................................................................................................ 369
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.............................................................. 369
Screen test......................................................................................................................................................371
Touch test........................................................................................................................................................375
SoftKey test ...................................................................................................................................................376
Backlight test ...............................................................................................................................................378
Sound test ......................................................................................................................................................379
Version ............................................................................................................................................................. 380
Control panel messages document (CPMD).......................................................................................... 381
Print the supplies status page ................................................................................................................. 381
Pre-boot menu options .................................................................................................................................. 381
xvi
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel .................................... 381
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel ......... 383
Remote Admin ............................................................................................................................................ 384
Required software and network connection ............................................................... 384
Connect a remote connection............................................................................................... 386
Disconnect a remote connection ......................................................................................... 391
Print the event log..............................................................................................................................................392
How to search for printer documentation ...................................................................................... 393
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation........................ 393
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) ........................................................... 399
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) ................................ 401
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview ............................ 403
Error codes (types and structure)................................................................................................ 404
Solve paper handling problems.......................................................................................................................407
Clear paper jams (SFP models)...............................................................................................................407
Paper jam locations.................................................................................................................................407
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams.................................................................................407
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? ............................................................. 408
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) .................................................................. 408
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2..................................................................................................................412
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3........................................................................................................................ 418
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4........................................................................................................................424
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI).............................................................. 431
13.B2 jam error in right door.............................................................................................................. 438
13.B4 jam errors in the right door .................................................................................................. 441
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser ............................................................................................................ 443
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer .....................................................................................................447
13.E1 jam error in the output bin ..................................................................................................... 449
Clear paper jams (MFP models)............................................................................................................. 450
Paper jam locations................................................................................................................................ 450
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams..................................................................................451
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? ...............................................................451
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder...............................................................................452
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) .................................................................. 456
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2................................................................................................................ 460
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3....................................................................................................................... 466
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4........................................................................................................................ 472
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI)..............................................................479
xvii
13.B2 jam error in right door.............................................................................................................. 486
13.B4 jam errors in the right door ................................................................................................. 489
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser ............................................................................................................. 491
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer .................................................................................................... 495
13.E1 jam error in the output bin ...................................................................................................... 497
13.E2 jam error in top cover............................................................................................................... 498
13.60 jam errors in the fuser exit area when printing to a stapler/stacker
or floor-standing finisher ....................................................................................................................500
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker.................................... 502
Printer feeds incorrect page size...........................................................................................................507
Printer pulls from incorrect tray..............................................................................................................507
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models) .......................................507
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X ....................................................................................................... 508
Output is curled or wrinkled...................................................................................................................... 509
The printer does not pick up paper....................................................................................................... 510
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper .............................................................................. 510
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper
(MFP)..............................................................................................................................................................................511
Paper does not feed automatically .......................................................................................................512
Image-quality troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................513
Print-quality troubleshooting......................................................................................................................514
Repetitive image defect ruler............................................................................................................514
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects.................................................516
Print from a different software program...................................................................................519
Check the paper-type setting for the print job......................................................................519
Check the paper type setting on the control panel..................................................519
Check the paper type setting (Windows)....................................................................... 520
Check the paper type setting (macOS).............................................................................521
Check toner-cartridge status............................................................................................................521
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page........................................................................521
Step two: Check supplies status............................................................................................521
Print a cleaning page..............................................................................................................................522
Check paper and the printing environment...........................................................................522
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications................................................522
Step two: Check the environment ........................................................................................523
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment ...............................................................523
Try a different print driver....................................................................................................................524
Troubleshoot image defects .............................................................................................................524
xviii
Copy-quality troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 535
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges ................................................................ 535
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks..................................................................................................... 538
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality............................................. 543
Light or faint copies (color models)............................................................................................. 545
Performance and connectivity troubleshooting ................................................................................ 548
Solve fax or email problems...................................................................................................................... 548
Solve performance problems.................................................................................................................. 549
Factors affecting print performance......................................................................................... 549
Print speeds ...................................................................................................................................................551
The printer does not print.....................................................................................................................551
The printer prints slowly.......................................................................................................................552
Solve connectivity problems.................................................................................................................... 553
Solve USB connection problems.................................................................................................. 553
Solve wired network problems....................................................................................................... 553
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 553
Poor physical connection .......................................................................................................... 554
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer .................... 554
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer ................................ 554
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network... 555
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems.......... 555
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly................................ 555
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect .................. 555
5 Removal and replacement..................................................................................................................................... 556
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories.....................................................................557
Customer-replaceable units......................................................................................................................557
Internal parts and assemblies.........................................................................................................557
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (5700/X557/5800
models).....................................................................................................................................................557
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (X57945 models) ..................... 561
Removal and replacement: Imaging drums (X57945 models) .........................567
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) .........................................571
Removal and replacement: 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge (3-
bin stapler-stacker)..........................................................................................................................575
Removal and replacement: Convenience staple cartridge
(convenience stapler models).................................................................................................578
Removal and replacement: Fuser........................................................................................ 580
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)............................................ 583
xix
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller......................................... 586
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (MFP models)......... 589
Installation: Keyboard overlay (MFP models)................................................................592
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation roller
assemblies ........................................................................................................................................... 596
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup and separation roller
assemblies ............................................................................................................................................ 601
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories.................................................................... 605
Customer-replaceable units..................................................................................................................... 605
Internal parts and assemblies........................................................................................................ 605
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (MFP models)............................................. 605
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD).................................................... 611
Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (SFP
models)..................................................................................................................................................... 616
Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (fax models)................................................... 620
Removal and replacement: Workflow accelerator...................................................624
Removal and replacement: USB expansion kit .......................................................... 629
Removal and replacement: Solid state drive (SSD) ................................................ 633
Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (MFP
models)......................................................................................................................................................651
Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)............... 654
Document feeder / scanner.............................................................................................................................. 659
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)................................................................................................................. 659
Internal parts and assemblies........................................................................................................ 659
Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (MFP
models).................................................................................................................................................... 659
Removal and replacement: White backing (MFP models).................................. 666
Whole-unit replacement (WUR) .............................................................................................................. 668
Automatic document feeder (WUR)............................................................................................ 668
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (MFP models) ......................... 668
Integrated scanner assembly (WUR).......................................................................................... 674
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner assembly (MFP models)..... 674
Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base printer)...................... 682
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)................................................................................................................. 682
Covers, panels, and doors ................................................................................................................. 682
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover .............................................................. 682
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover .............................................................. 684
Removal and replacement: Front door .............................................................................687
xx
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridge access door (X557/
X57945 models) ................................................................................................................................ 692
Removal and replacement: Rear cover ........................................................................... 696
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (MFP models)............................701
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (MFP models) ............................. 707
Removal and replacement: Left cover.................................................................................711
Removal and replacement: Left handle.............................................................................715
Removal and replacement: Front left cover ..................................................................720
Removal and replacement: Front right cover............................................................... 723
Removal and replacement: Right door..............................................................................726
Removal and replacement: Right lower door (X57945 models)...................... 732
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (X57945 models).....................736
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover (X57945 models)....................... 740
Removal and replacement: Output bin ............................................................................. 745
Removal and replacement: Right handle ........................................................................ 749
Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP models)...............................................756
Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP models)..............................................763
Removal and replacement: Top front cover (MFP models).................................768
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover....... 775
Removal and replacement: Control panel (SFP models)...................................... 778
Removal and replacement: Control panel (MFP models) .....................................781
Internal parts and assemblies.........................................................................................................783
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (manual unlock) (X57945
models).....................................................................................................................................................784
Removal and replacement: Convenience stapler.....................................................788
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly...............................798
Removal and replacement: Registration density sensor assembly........... 803
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly................................................. 810
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (5700/X557/5800/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs models)......................................................................... 816
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (X57945 models) .... 823
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly ..........................................................827
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly .......................................... 832
Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC) ...................................................... 839
Removal and replacement: Formatter............................................................................. 845
Removal and replacement: Formatter cage assembly (SFP models).........851
Removal and replacement: Formatter cage assembly (MFP models)...... 858
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly (X57945 models)............867
xxi
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs models)......................................................................... 874
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (X57945 models)....... 883
Removal and replacement: Toner supply motor assembly (X57945
models)....................................................................................................................................................890
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs models)........................................................................ 895
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (X57945 models).......... 903
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (5700/X557/5800
models)....................................................................................................................................................909
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (X57945 models) ............917
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X557
models).....................................................................................................................................................923
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly
(X57945 models)............................................................................................................................... 932
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly.................................................. 938
Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly.................................................... 949
Removal and replacement: Interlock assembly......................................................... 972
Removal and replacement: Waste toner carry assembly (X57945
models).................................................................................................................................................... 996
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (5700/X557/
X579/5800 models)...................................................................................................................... 1020
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (5700/
X557/5800/X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs models)........................................... 1031
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly
(X57945 models)............................................................................................................................. 1049
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly (X57945
models)...................................................................................................................................................1067
Removal and replacement: Toner supply assembly (X57945 models) .... 1074
Removal and replacement: Toner supply buffer assembly/
intermediate pipe (X57945 models) .................................................................................. 1077
Removal and replacement: Feed assembly (X57945 models)......................1086
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ..................... 1093
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)...................1100
Removal and replacement: Drive PCA ..............................................................................1112
Removal and replacement: Feed/toner supply controller PCA (X57945
models)................................................................................................................................................... 1120
Removal and replacement: Right PCA..............................................................................1125
Removal and replacement: Rear PCA.............................................................................. 1129
xxii
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor PCA .....................................1137
Removal and replacement: Drum home position PCA .........................................1142
Removal and replacement: Drum motor........................................................................ 1150
Removal and replacement: Developer motor............................................................ 1158
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) motor ........................... 1166
Removal and replacement: Developer alienation motor.................................... 1174
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor....................................................................... 1185
Removal and replacement: Duplex motor .................................................................... 1193
Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan............................................................ 1201
Removal and replacement: Cartridge fan ................................................................... 1209
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan...............................................................................1217
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder .....................................................................................................1228
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)................................................................................................................1228
Covers, panels, and doors ................................................................................................................1228
Removal and replacement: Front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)...1228
Removal and replacement: Front right cover (550-sheet paper
feeder) ................................................................................................................................................... 1230
Removal and replacement: Right door (550-sheet paper feeder) ..............1232
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)............ 1236
Removal and replacement: Left cover (550-sheet paper feeder) ...............1240
Internal parts and assemblies.......................................................................................................1245
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (550-sheet paper
feeder) ....................................................................................................................................................1245
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper
feeder) ................................................................................................................................................... 1250
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper
feeder) ................................................................................................................................................... 1256
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (550-sheet paper
feeder) ................................................................................................................................................... 1263
Removal and replacement: Media size detection assembly (550-sheet
paper feeder).................................................................................................................................... 1269
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder) ... 1275
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (550-sheet
paper feeder).................................................................................................................................... 1280
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper
feeder) ....................................................................................................................................................1282
Removal and replacement: 2,100-sheet paper deck...................................................................... 1286
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)............................................................................................................... 1286
Covers, panels, and doors ............................................................................................................... 1286
xxiii
Removal and replacement: Right door (HCI).............................................................. 1286
Removal and replacement: Front left cover/left cover (HCI).......................... 1288
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (HCI) .............................................................1292
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (HCI).............................................. 1295
Internal parts and assemblies...................................................................................................... 1299
Removal and replacement: Cassette assembly (HCI)........................................ 1299
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (HCI).............................................. 1302
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (HCI) .................................... 1306
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (HCI) .................................... 1309
Removal and replacement: Pickup alienation assembly (HCI)...................... 1313
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (HCI)...................................1317
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (HCI)....................................................1323
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (HCI)...................... 1328
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (HCI) ................................ 1330
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker multi-bin mailbox................................................................ 1334
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)............................................................................................................... 1334
Covers, panels, and doors ............................................................................................................... 1334
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker).................... 1334
Removal and replacement: Staple cover and staple door (3-bin
stapler-stacker) ............................................................................................................................... 1336
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker).... 1340
Removal and replacement: Right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker).. 1342
Removal and replacement: Right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)..... 1346
Removal and replacement: Rear inner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)....... 1352
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin
stapler-stacker) ............................................................................................................................... 1355
Removal and replacement: Stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-
stacker) ................................................................................................................................................. 1363
Internal parts and assemblies....................................................................................................... 1377
Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)..... 1377
Removal and replacement: Jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)..... 1382
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 (3-bin stapler-stacker)...................1387
Removal and replacement: Upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-
stacker) ................................................................................................................................................. 1390
Removal and replacement: Lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-
stacker) .................................................................................................................................................. 1401
Removal and replacement: Solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker).. 1416
Removal and replacement: MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)..........................1424
xxiv
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker feed motor (3-bin stapler-
stacker) ................................................................................................................................................. 1428
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker)........... 1432
6 Parts and diagrams....................................................................................................................................................1437
Document feeder / scanner............................................................................................................................ 1438
Integrated scanner assembly ............................................................................................................... 1438
Base printer................................................................................................................................................................. 1440
Control panels................................................................................................................................................... 1440
Control panels .......................................................................................................................................... 1440
Covers, panels, and doors........................................................................................................................ 1442
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5700/X557 models............................................................. 1442
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5800 models.......................................................................... 1444
Parts and diagrams: Covers X57945 models .................................................................... 1446
Internal parts and assemblies .............................................................................................................. 1448
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models ...................... 1448
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models ..................... 1450
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models ......................1452
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/X58045
models............................................................................................................................................................ 1454
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 9) X57945 models ..................... 1456
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models ......................1457
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models...................... 1459
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models ..................... 1460
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (9 of 9)X57945 models ...................... 1462
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models .............. 1463
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 7)5700/5800 models .............. 1466
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 7)5700/5800 models .............. 1468
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models ..............1470
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 7) 5700/5800 models .............. 1472
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models ..............1473
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 7)5700/5800 models................1475
Input devices................................................................................................................................................................ 1477
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder............................................................................................. 1477
Covers, panels, and doors ................................................................................................................ 1477
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder) .......................................... 1477
Internal parts and assemblies.......................................................................................................1478
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder).................................1478
xxv
Output devices.......................................................................................................................................................... 1480
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker.................................................................................................1480
Covers, panels, and doors ...............................................................................................................1480
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945
models ................................................................................................................................................... 1480
Internal parts and assemblies....................................................................................................... 1481
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945
models .................................................................................................................................................... 1481
Alphabetical parts list .......................................................................................................................................... 1484
Document feeder / scanner ................................................................................................................... 1438
Integrated scanner assembly....................................................................................................... 1438
Base printer ........................................................................................................................................................ 1440
Control panels .......................................................................................................................................... 1440
Control panels.................................................................................................................................. 1440
Covers, panels, and doors ............................................................................................................... 1442
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5700/X557 models .................................................... 1442
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5800 models ................................................................. 1444
Parts and diagrams: Covers X57945 models............................................................ 1446
Internal parts and assemblies...................................................................................................... 1448
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models.............. 1448
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models............. 1450
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models..............1452
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models............................................................................................................................... 1454
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 9) X57945 models............. 1456
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models..............1457
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models............. 1459
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models............. 1460
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (9 of 9)X57945 models.............. 1462
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models...... 1463
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 7)5700/5800 models...... 1466
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 7)5700/5800 models...... 1468
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models......1470
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 7) 5700/5800 models...... 1472
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models......1473
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 7)5700/5800 models.......1475
Input devices....................................................................................................................................................... 1477
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder.................................................................................... 1477
xxvi
Covers, panels, and doors........................................................................................................ 1477
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder).................................. 1477
Internal parts and assemblies..............................................................................................1478
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder)........................1478
Output devices .................................................................................................................................................1480
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker ........................................................................................1480
Covers, panels, and doors.......................................................................................................1480
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945
models .......................................................................................................................................... 1480
Internal parts and assemblies.............................................................................................. 1481
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945
models ........................................................................................................................................... 1481
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................ 1505
Document feeder / scanner ................................................................................................................... 1438
Integrated scanner assembly....................................................................................................... 1438
Base printer ........................................................................................................................................................ 1440
Control panels .......................................................................................................................................... 1440
Control panels.................................................................................................................................. 1440
Covers, panels, and doors ............................................................................................................... 1442
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5700/X557 models .................................................... 1442
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5800 models ................................................................. 1444
Parts and diagrams: Covers X57945 models............................................................ 1446
Internal parts and assemblies...................................................................................................... 1448
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models.............. 1448
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models............. 1450
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models..............1452
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models............................................................................................................................... 1454
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 9) X57945 models............. 1456
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models..............1457
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models............. 1459
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models............. 1460
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (9 of 9)X57945 models.............. 1462
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models...... 1463
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 7)5700/5800 models...... 1466
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 7)5700/5800 models...... 1468
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models......1470
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 7) 5700/5800 models...... 1472
xxvii
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models......1473
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 7)5700/5800 models.......1475
Input devices....................................................................................................................................................... 1477
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder.................................................................................... 1477
Covers, panels, and doors........................................................................................................ 1477
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder).................................. 1477
Internal parts and assemblies..............................................................................................1478
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder)........................1478
Output devices .................................................................................................................................................1480
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker ........................................................................................1480
Covers, panels, and doors.......................................................................................................1480
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945
models .......................................................................................................................................... 1480
Internal parts and assemblies.............................................................................................. 1481
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945
models ........................................................................................................................................... 1481
Appendix A Certificate of Volatility.................................................................................................................... 1526
Certificate of Volatility......................................................................................................................................... 1526
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700, 6700, X557, X55745, X654, X65455, X65465,
MFP 5800, 6800, X57945, X58045, X677, X67755, X67765 WIFI - Supplemental
Certificate of Volatility ........................................................................................................................................ 1533
Appendix B Glossary of terms .............................................................................................................................. 1534
Index........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1549
xxviii
List of videos
View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE....................................... viii
View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users....................................................................... ix
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number
search)............................................................................................................................................................................................. ix
View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail
page [PDP] search)................................................................................................................................................................... x
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass...................................... 35
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges...................................................................................38
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges...................................................................................40
View a video of how to replace the imaging drums........................................................................................41
View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners.......................................................... 133
View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners.......................................................... 401
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the
number of paper jams.....................................................................................................................................................408
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1..................................................................................................... 408
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 2...................................................................................................... 412
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays............................................... 418
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 4..................................................................................................... 424
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4............................................. 431
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area..............................................439
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area..............................................442
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area............................................. 444
xxix
View a video of how to clear a jam in the duplexer area......................................................................... 447
View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin................................................................................. 449
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the
number of paper jams..................................................................................................................................................... 452
View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder................................................................453
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1...................................................................................................... 457
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 2......................................................................................................461
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays.............................................. 466
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 4......................................................................................................472
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4.............................................479
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area..............................................487
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area............................................. 490
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area..............................................492
View a video of how to clear a jam in the duplexer area.........................................................................495
View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin.................................................................................. 497
View a video of how to clear a jam in the top cover................................................................................... 498
View a video of how to clear a jam in the fuser exit area on finisher............................................ 500
View a video of how to clear a jam in the 3-bin stapler/stacker area............................................503
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass...................................536
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges........................................................... 557
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges............................................................561
View a video of removing and replacing the image drums...................................................................567
View a video of removing and replacing the TCU..........................................................................................571
View a video of removing and replacing the staple cartridge............................................................ 575
View a video of removing and replacing the staple cartridge............................................................ 578
View a video to remove and replace the fuser..............................................................................................580
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the image transfer belt............... 584
View a video of removing and replacing the T2 roller...............................................................................586
xxx
View a video of removing and replacing the document feeder rollers........................................589
View a video of how to install the keyboard overlay...................................................................................592
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 rollers.....................................................................596
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 rollers.....................................................................601
View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard................................................................... 605
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the hard-disk drive............................611
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the DIMM................................................ 616
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fax PCA.......................................... 620
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the workflow accelerator...........624
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the USB expansion kit..................629
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the SSD...................................................633
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the NFC PCA........................................ 651
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the eMMC............................................. 654
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the control panel............................... 781
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges (manual unlock).................... 784
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly...... 816
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly............ 895
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser drive assembly...........938
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the main drive assembly............949
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the HVPS.............................................. 1100
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the drive PCA......................................1112
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the rear PCA.......................................1129
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser fan.......................................1217
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly...........1250
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly......1256
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the auto close assembly..........1263
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the media size detection
assembly................................................................................................................................................................................. 1269
xxxi
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly....... 1317
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the upper feed assembly........ 1390
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lower feed assembly...........1401
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the solenoid assembly............... 1416
xxxii
1 Printer information,
configurations, and
specifications
Learn about printer configuration and specifications.
Printer information, configurations, and specifications 1
Document feeder / scanner
Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner configuration and
specifications.
NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.
Information (document feeder and scanner)
Learn about the document feeder and scanner.
Document feeder and scanner front view
Learn about the document feeder and scanner components.
Figure 1-1 Document feeder and scanner front view
3
2
1 4
Item Description
1 Document feeder
2 Output bin
3 Jam access
4 Input tray
5 Flatbed scanner
Technical specifications
Learn about the document feeder and scanner specifications.
Review the technical specifications for the document feeder and scanner.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP for current information.
2 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Table 1-1 Copy and scan specifications (document feeder and scanner)
Copy and scan 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800 X57945d X57945z X579
features Configur n Configur
able able
ADF copy/scan Not Availabl Not Availabl
speed 100 images- available e option available e option
per-minute (ipm)
single-sided, and 50
ipm double-sided
ADF copy/scan Not Not Availabl Not Availabl
speed 120 ipm available available e option available e option
single-sided, and 60
ipm double-sided
100-page document
feeder with dual-
head scanning
for single-pass
duplex copying and
scanning
Technical specifications 3
Information (base printer)
Learn about the base printer.
Printer front view (5700 models)
Identify the parts on the front of the printer (5700 models).
Figure 1-2 Printer front view (5700 models)
1
8 2
3
7
4
6
5
Item Description
1 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
2 On/off button
3 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB flash drive for printing without a computer or to update the printer
firmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
4 Right door, access for clearing jams
5 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) and right door (access for clearing jams)
6 Tray 2
7 Front door, for access to the toner cartridges
8 Output bin
Printer front view (X557 models)
Locate features on the front of the printer.
4 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Figure 1-3 Printer front view
1 2
10 3
9 4
5
8
6
7
Item Description
1 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
2 On/off button
3 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer or to update
the printer firmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
4 Right door, for access for clearing jams
5 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
6 Tray 2 jam access door
7 Tray 2
8 Toner cartridge access door
9 Front door, for access to the imaging drums and toner collection unit
10 Output bin
Printer back view (5700/X557 models)
Identify the parts on the back of the printer (SFP).
Printer back view (5700/X557 models) 5
Figure 1-4 Printer rear view, 5700/X557 models
1
2
Item Description
1 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
2 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 interface port
3 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port (for job storage and private printing)
NOTE: This port should remain covered when not in use.
4 Power connection
Printer front view (5800/X57945 models)
Identify the parts on the front of the printer (MFP).
6 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Figure 1-5 Printer front view, 5800 models
1 2 3
4
11 5
6
7
10
9 8
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder output tray
2 Automatic document feeder cover, for access for clearing jams
3 Automatic document feeder input tray
4 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
5 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer or to update
the printer firmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
6 On/off button
7 Right door, for access for clearing jams
8 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
9 Tray 2
10 Front door, for access to the toner cartridges
11 Output bin
Printer front view (5800/X57945 models) 7
Figure 1-6 Printer front view, X57945 models
1 2 3
4
13 5
6
12
7
11 8
10 9
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder output tray
2 Automatic document feeder cover, for access for clearing jams
3 Automatic document feeder input tray
4 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
5 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer or to update
the printer firmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
6 On/off button
7 Right door, for access for clearing jams
8 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
9 Tray 2 jam access door
10 Tray 2
11 Toner cartridge access door
12 Front door, for access to the imaging drums and toner collection unit
13 Output bin
Printer back view (5800/X57945 models)
Identify the parts on the back of the printer (MFP).
8 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Figure 1-7 Printer back view, 5800/X57945 models
Item Description
1 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
2 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 interface port
3 Fax models only: Telephone "line out" port (for attaching an extension phone,
answering machine, or other device)
NOTE: This port should remain covered when not in use.
4 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port (for job storage and private printing)
NOTE: This port should remain covered when not in use.
5 Fax models only: Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to the printer)
6 Power connection
Printer back view (5800/X57945 models) 9
Configuration (base printer)
Learn about the base printer configurations.
Configuration (base printer SFP)
Learn about the base printer SFP configurations.
Figure 1-8 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700/X55745 printer
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700
● 45/43 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● FutureSmart 5 firmware
● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)
● HP Web JetAdmin
● Automatic duplex printing
● 650-sheet standard capacity
● 2,300-sheet maximum capacity
● 109.2 mm (4.3 in) color non-touchscreen control panel
● 1.5 GB RAM memory
● 16 GB eMMC mass storage
● 550-sheet paper feeder (optional)
HP Color LaserJet Managed X55745
10 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
● Same features as the HP LaserJet Enterprise 5700
● Locking tray guides
● Smart device services (SDS) firmware features
Configuration (base printer MFP)
Learn about the base printer MFP configurations.
Figure 1-9 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5800 printer
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5800
● 45/43 pages per minute (letter/A4)
● FutureSmart 5 firmware
● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)
● HP Web JetAdmin
● Automatic duplex printing
● 100-sheet document feeder (duplex scanning)
● Single pass double-sided scan/copy
● Fax (optional on 5800dn models; standard on 5800f and 5800zf models)
● 650-sheet standard capacity
● 2,300-sheet maximum capacity
● 5800dn/5800f: 203 mm (8 in) color touchscreen control panel
Configuration (base printer MFP) 11
● 5800zf: 256.5 mm (10.1 in) color touchscreen control panel
● 6 GB RAM memory
● 32 GB eMMC mass storage
Figure 1-10 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X57945
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP X57945
● Same features as the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5800
● X57945dn: 203 mm (8 in) color touchscreen control panel
● X57945z: 256.5 mm (10.1 in) color touchscreen control panel
● Fax is optional on all X57945 models
● Locking tray guides
● Smart device services (SDS) firmware features
12 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Specifications (base printer)
Learn about the base printer specifications.
Technical specifications (5700)
Review the technical specifications for the printer.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP for current information.
Product numbers for each model
● 5700dn - #6QN28A
● 5700 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Table 1-2 Paper handling specifications
Paper handling features 5700dn 5700 Configurable
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)
Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Available option
Printer stand Optional Available option
Printer stand with storage compartment Optional Available option
Automatic duplex printing
Table 1-3 Connectivity specifications
Connectivity features 5700dn 5700 Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4
and IPv6
Dual-band Wireless Optional Available option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Available option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and Hi-Speed
USB 2.0 front port for walk-up USB printing
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for
connecting accessory and third-party devices
Specifications (base printer) 13
Table 1-4 Print specifications
Print features 5700dn 5700 Configurable
Prints 43 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 45
ppm on letter-size paper
Job storage and private printing
Table 1-5 Other specifications
Other features 5700dn 5700 Configurable
1.5 GB base memory, expandable to 3.5 GB
16 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC) Available option
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller Not available Available option
(eMMC)
256 GB Solid-state drive Optional Available option
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Available option
512 GB Hard Disk Drive Optional Available option
Color touchscreen control panel
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all
data that passes through the printer
Technical specifications (X55745)
Review the technical specifications for the X55745 printer.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP for current information.
Product numbers for each model
● X55745dn - #6QP97A
● X557 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Table 1-6 Paper handling specifications
Paper handling features X55745dn X557 Configurable
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
14 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Table 1-6 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Paper handling features X55745dn X557 Configurable
Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)
Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Available option
Printer stand Optional Available option
Printer stand with storage compartment Optional Available option
Automatic duplex printing
Table 1-7 Connectivity specifications
Connectivity features X55745dn X557 Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4
and IPv6
Dual-band Wireless Optional Available option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Available option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and Hi-Speed
USB 2.0 front port for walk-up USB printing
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for
connecting accessory and third-party devices
Table 1-8 Print specifications
Print features X55745dn X557 Configurable
Prints 43 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 45
ppm on letter-size paper
Job storage and private printing
Table 1-9 Other specifications
Other features X55745dn X557 Configurable
1.5 GB base memory, expandable to 3.5 GB
16 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC) Available option
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller Not available Available option
(eMMC)
256 GB Solid-state drive Optional Available option
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Available option
Technical specifications (X55745) 15
Table 1-9 Other specifications (continued)
Other features X55745dn X557 Configurable
512 GB Hard Disk Drive Optional Available option
Color touchscreen control panel
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all
data that passes through the printer
Custom color printer skins Not available Available option
Technical specifications (5800)
Review the technical specifications for the 5800 printer.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP for current information.
Product numbers for each model
● 5800dn - #6QN29A
● 5800f - #6QN30A
● 5800zf - #58R10A
● 5800 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Table 1-10 Paper handling specifications
Paper handling features 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800
Configurable
Tray 1 (50-sheet capacity)
Tray 2 (250-sheet capacity)
Optional 550-sheet accessory Optional Optional Optional Available
tray option
Printer stand Optional Optional Optional Available
option
Printer stand with storage Optional Optional Optional Available
compartment option
Convenience stapler Not available Available
option
16 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Table 1-10 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Paper handling features 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800
Configurable
3-bin Stapler/stacker Not available Not available Not available Available
option
Automatic duplex printing Available
option
Table 1-11 Connectivity specifications
Connectivity features 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800
Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN
connection with IPv4 and IPv6
Dual-band wireless Optional Optional Optional Available
option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Optional Optional Available
option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear
ports and Hi-Speed USB 2.0
front port for walk-up USB
printing
Hardware integration pocket
(HIP) for connecting accessory
and third-party devices
Table 1-12 Print specifications
Print features 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800
Configurable
Prints up to 43 pages per
minute (ppm) on A4 and 45 ppm
on letter-sized paper
Job storage and private
printing
Technical specifications (5800) 17
Table 1-13 Copy and scan specifications
Copy and scan features 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800
Configurable
ADF copy/scan speed 100 Not included Available
images-per-minute (ipm) single- option
sided, and 50 ipm double-sided
ADF copy/scan speed 120 Not included Not included Available
ipm single-sided, and 60 ipm option
double-sided
100-page document feeder
with dual-head scanning for
single-pass duplex copying and
scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB,
and Scan to Network Folder
options
Table 1-14 Other specifications
Other features 5800dn 5800f 5800zf 5800
Configurable
6 GB base memory
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Not included Available
Controller (eMMC) option
500 GB hard disk drive Optional Optional Available
option
256 GB solid-state drive Optional Optional Optional Available
option
512 GB FIPS hard disk drive Optional Optional Optional Available
option
Small color touchscreen Not included Available
control panel option
Large color touchscreen Not included Not included Available
control panel option
Fax features Optional Available
option
HP Trusted Platform Module for
encrypting all data that passes
through the printer
18 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Technical specifications (X57945)
Review the technical specifications for the X57945 printer.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP for current information.
Product numbers for each model
● X57945dn - #6QP98A
● X57945z - #6QP99A
● X579 Configurable (can be custom-configured when ordered)
Table 1-15 Paper handling specifications
Paper handling features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)
Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Optional Available option
Printer stand Optional Optional Available option
Printer stand with storage Optional Optional Available option
compartment
Convenience stapler Not available Available option
3-bin Stapler/stacker Not available Not available Available option
Automatic duplex printing
Table 1-16 Connectivity specifications
Connectivity features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection
with IPv4 and IPv6
Dual-band wireless Optional Optional Available option
Wifi-Direct and BLE Optional Optional Available option
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 front port for walk-
up USB printing
Technical specifications (X57945) 19
Table 1-16 Connectivity specifications (continued)
Connectivity features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for
connecting accessory and third-party
devices
Table 1-17 Print specifications
Print features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
Prints up to 43 pages per minute
(ppm) on A4 and 45 ppm on letter-
sized paper
Job storage and private printing
Table 1-18 Copy and scan specifications
Copy and scan features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
ADF copy/scan speed 100 images- Not included Available option
per-minute (ipm) single-sided, and 50
ipm double-sided
ADF copy/scan speed 120 ipm single- Not included Available option
sided, and 60 ipm double-sided
100-page document feeder with dual-
head scanning for single-pass duplex
copying and scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan
to Network Folder options
Table 1-19 Other specifications
Other features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
6 GB base memory
32 GB embedded Multi-Media Not included Available option
Controller (eMMC)
500 GB Hard Disk Drive Optional Available option
256 GB Solid-state drive Optional Optional Available option
20 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Table 1-19 Other specifications (continued)
Other features X57945dn X57945z X579
Configurable
512 GB FIPS Hard Disk Drive Optional Optional Available option
Small color touchscreen control panel Not included Available option
Large color touchscreen control panel Not included Available option
Fax features Optional Optional Available option
HP Trusted Platform Module for
encrypting all data that passes
through the printer
Custom color printer skins Not available Not available Available option
Printer dimensions (5700/X557 models)
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the
printer.
Figure 1-11 Printer dimensions, 5700/X557 models
1 1
2 2
3
3
Table 1-20 Dimensions for the printer
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 500 mm (19.7 in) 885 mm (34.8 in)
2. Height 415 mm (16.3 in) 470 mm (18.5 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 770 mm (30.3 in)
Printer dimensions (5700/X557 models) 21
Table 1-20 Dimensions for the printer (continued)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
Weight (with 28.6 kg (63 lb) 28.6 kg (63 lb)
cartridges)
Printer dimensions
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the
printer.
Figure 1-12 Printer dimensions (5800dn model)
1
2
2
Table 1-21 Dimensions for the printer (5800dn model)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 500 mm (19.7 in) 885 mm (34.8 in)
2. Height 583 mm (23 in) 828 mm (31.9 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 810 mm (31.9 in)
Weight (with 39 kg (86 lb) 39 kg (86 lb)
cartridges)
22 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Figure 1-13 Printer dimensions (5800f and 5800zf models)
1
2
2
Table 1-22 Dimensions for the printer (5800f and 5800zf models)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 547 mm (21.5 in) 885 mm (34.8 in)
2. Height 583 mm (23 in) 810 mm (31.9 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 828 mm (32.6 in)
Weight (with f model: 38.9 kg (85.76 lb) f model: 38.9 kg (85.76 lb)
cartridges)
zf model: 39.1 kg (86.2 lb) zf model: 39.1 kg (86.2 lb)
Printer dimensions (X57945 models)
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the
printer.
Printer dimensions (X57945 models) 23
Figure 1-14 Printer dimensions (X57945dn model)
1
3
3
Table 1-23 Dimensions for the printer (X57945dn model)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 500 mm (19.7 in) 885 mm (34.8 in)
2. Height 583 mm (23 in) 828 mm (32.6 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 810 mm (31.9 in)
Weight (with 46.3 kg (102 lb) 46.3 kg (102 lb)
cartridges)
24 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Figure 1-15 Printer dimensions (X57945z model)
1
3
3
Table 1-24 Dimensions for the printer (X57945z model)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 547 mm (21.5 in) 885 mm (34.8 in)
2. Height 703 mm (27.7 in) 948 mm (37.3 in)
3. Depth 460 mm (18.1 in) 810 mm (31.9 in)
Weight (with 47.2 kg (104 lb) 47.2 kg (104 lb)
cartridges)
Printer dimensions (X57945 models) 25
Figure 1-16 Printer dimensions (X57945zs model)
1
3
3
Table 1-25 Dimensions for the printer (X57945zs model)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 500 mm (19.7 in) 885 mm (34.8 in)
2. Height 894 mm (35.2 in) 1139 mm (44.8 in)
3. Depth 476 mm (18.7 in) 726 mm (32.5 in)
Weight (with 60.1 kg (132.5 lb) 60.1 kg (132.5 lb)
cartridges)
Printer space requirements
Learn about the printer space requirements
HP recommends that 30 mm ( (1.81 in)) be added to the printer dimensions to
make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide
proper ventilation. See the printer dimensions sections in this manual.
26 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic
emissions
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets
certain power specifications.
See http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the
printer is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer
and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets
certain specifications.
Table 1-26 Operating-environment specifications
Environment Recommended Storage
Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity 10% to 80% RH
(RH)
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions 27
Information (input devices)
Learn about the printer input devices.
550-sheet paper feeder front view
Identify the parts on the 550-sheet paper feeder.
Figure 1-17 550-sheet paper feeder front view
1
2
3
5 4
Number Description
1 Connector
2 Lock
3 Right door (for access to tray rollers and jams)
4 Tray cassette
5 Left cover
6 Lock lever
Technical specifications
Table 1-27 550-sheet paper feeder technical specifications
Feature Specification
Media types Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, glossy
paper, label, and index card
Media sizes Standard: A5-R, B5, A4, Letter, and Legal
Custom minimum: 101.6 mm (4 in) (W) x 148 mm (5.8 in) (L)
Custom maximum: 215.9 mm (8.5 in) (W) x 355.6 mm (14 in) (L)
Media weights Non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to 200 g/m2 (53 lb)
28 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Table 1-27 550-sheet paper feeder technical specifications (continued)
Feature Specification
Capacity 55 mm (2.2 in) stack (approximately 550 sheets of 75g/m2 (20 lb)
paper)
Dimensions Width: 500 mm (19.7 in)
Depth: 460 mm (18.1 in)
Height: 120 mm ( 4.7 in)
Weight Approximately 6.1 kg (13.42 lb)
Power requirements DC24V, DC3.3V (supplied from the printer engine)
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder front view
Identify the parts on the HCI paper feeder.
Figure 1-18 HCI paper feeder front view
1
5 2
Number Description
1 Connector
2 Lock
3 Right door
4 HCI cassette
5 Lock lever
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder front view 29
Technical specifications
Table 1-28 HCI paper feeder technical specifications
Feature Specification
Media types Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, and bond paper
Media sizes A4, Letter, and Legal
Media weights 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Capacity 210 mm (8.3 in) stack (approximately 2,100 sheets of 75g/m2 (20
lb) paper)
Dimensions Width: 520 mm (20.5 in)
Depth: 520 mm (20.5 in)
Height: 364 mm (14.3 in)
Weight Approximately 21.1 kg (46.7 lb)
Power requirements DC24V, DC3.3V (supplied from the printer engine)
30 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
Information (output devices)
Learn about the printer output devices.
3-bin stapler-stacker front view
Identify the parts on the 3-bin stapler-stacker output device.
NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.
Figure 1-19 3-bin stapler-stacker front view
1
3
Number Description
1 Stapler-stacker door
2 Staple door
3 Output bin 2
4 Output bin 1
5 Jogger guide
Technical specifications
Table 1-29 3-bin stapler-stacker technical specifications
Feature Specification
Media types Plain paper, recycled paper, heavy paper, bond paper, and glossy
paper
Media sizes, output bin 1 Stack mode: 148 mm (5.8 in) (W) x 210 mm (8.3 in) (L) to 216 mm
(8.5 in) (W) x 355 mm (14 in) (L)
Staple mode/job offset mode: A4, Letter, and Legal
Media sizes, output bin 2 Stack mode: 148 mm (5.8 in) (W) x 210 mm (8.3 in) (L) to 216 mm
(8.5 in) (W) x 355 mm (14 in) (L)
Information (output devices) 31
Table 1-29 3-bin stapler-stacker technical specifications (continued)
Feature Specification
Media weights, output bin 1 Stack mode/job offset mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to
163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Stack mode/job offset mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to
200 g/m2 (53 lb)
Staple mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
Staple mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
Media weights, output bin 2 Stack mode, non-glossy paper: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Stack mode, glossy paper: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) to 200 g/m2 (53 lb)
Capacity, output bin 1 Stack mode/job offset mode: 48 mm (1.9 in) stack (approximately
400 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Staple mode: 48 mm (1.9 in) stack (approximately 6 sets of 50
sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Capacity, output bin 2 Stack mode: 19 mm (0.75 in) stack (approximately 100 sheets of
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper)
Capacity, staple cartridge 5,000 staples/cartridge
Capacity, stapler Up to 50 sheets (60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) paper)
Convenience stapler Up to 20 sheets of 75 g/m2
Stapling position Upper left corner at one point
Dimensions Width: 510 mm (20.1 in)
Depth: 475 mm (18.7 in)
Height: 280 mm (11 in)
Weight Approximately 8.7 kg (19.2 lb)
Power requirements DC24V, DC3.3V (supplied from the printer engine)
32 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications
2 Printer installation and
maintenance
Learn about printer installation and maintenance.
Printer installation and maintenance 33
Document feeder / scanner
Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner installation and
maintenance.
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document
feeder (MFP)
Learn about cleaning the document feeder rollers and pads.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the document feeder rollers and
pads which can affect performance.
NOTE: The figures in this topic show a typical MFP printer. However, the
procedure is correct for all MFP printers.
1. . Open the document-feeder cover. Figure 2-1 Open the document-feeder
cover
2. . Remove any visible lint or dust Figure 2-2 Clean the document feeder
from each of the feed rollers rollers
and the separation pad using
compressed air or a clean lint-free
cloth moistened with warm water.
Carefully rotate the roller as you
clean it.
34 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
3. . Close the document-feeder cover.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document
feeder white plastic backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following
procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted
lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the
power cable from the electrical outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges 35
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout
2, callout 3) with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl
alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can
damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They
might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using
the document feeder, be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left
side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge
to prevent spotting.
5. Close the scanner lid.
Figure 2-3 Close the scanner lid
36 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to
turn the printer on.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges 37
Base printer
Learn about the base printer installation and maintenance.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges
1. . Open the front door.
2. . Grasp the end of the toner cartridge
and pull it straight out of the printer.
3. . Remove the new toner cartridge
from its package. Save all packaging
for recycling the used toner
cartridge.
38 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
4. . Hold both ends of the toner
cartridge and rock it back and forth
end to end to evenly distribute the
toner that is inside.
5. . Align the toner cartridge with its slot
and insert it into the printer.
6. . Close the front door.
7. . Pack the used toner cartridge
into the box that the new toner
cartridge came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about
recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid
shipping label is included in the
box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-
paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label
to the box, and return the used
cartridge to HP for recycling.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.
Remove and replace the toner cartridges (X57945 models) 39
View a video of how to replace the toner cartridges
1. . Release the toner cartridge by
following the instructions on the
control panel.
2. . Open the toner cartridge door on the
front of the printer.
3. . Grasp the end of the toner cartridge
and pull it straight out of the printer.
4. . Remove the new toner cartridge
from its package. Save all packaging
for recycling the used toner
cartridge.
5. . Hold both ends of the toner
cartridge and rock it to evenly
distribute the toner that is inside.
40 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
6. . Align the toner cartridge with its slot
and insert it into the printer.
7. . Close the toner cartridge door.
8. . Pack the used toner cartridge
into the box that the new toner
cartridge came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about
recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid
shipping label is included in the
box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-
paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label
to the box, and return the used
cartridge to HP for recycling.
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to replace the imaging drums.
View a video of how to replace the imaging drums
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X57945 models) 41
1. . Open the front door.
NOTE: If necessary, remove two screws
holding the imaging drum access cover
in place, and then lower the cover to
access the imaging drums. See the
figure below.
Figure 2-4 Remove two screws, open the
cover
2. . Grasp the end of the imaging drum
and pull it straight out of the printer.
3. . Remove the new imaging drum from
its package. Save all packaging for
recycling the used imaging drum.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to
the imaging drum, do not expose it to
light for more than a few minutes.
Cover the imaging drum if it must be
removed from the printer for an
extended period of time. Do not
touch the blue imaging drum.
42 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
4. . Hold both ends of the imaging drum
and rock it back and forth end to end
to evenly distribute the toner that is
inside.
5. . Align the imaging drum with its slot
and insert it into the printer.
NOTE: If necessary, close the imaging
drum access cover, and then install the
two screws to secure the cover. See the
figure below.
Figure 2-5 Close the cover, install two
screws
Remove and replace the imaging drums (X57945 models) 43
6. . Close the front door.
7. . Pack the used imaging drum into the
box that the new imaging drum came
in. See the enclosed recycling guide
for information about recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid
shipping label is included in the
box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-
paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to
the box, and return the used imaging
drum to HP for recycling.
Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers
Learn about cleaning the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers.
1. Open Tray 1.
Figure 2-6 Open Tray 1
44 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
2. Locate and release the blue pickup roller assembly release tab (callout 1).
Figure 2-7 Locate the pickup roller assembly tab
3. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the printer.
Figure 2-8 Remove the pickup roller assembly
Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers 45
4. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then lift
the assembly up.
Figure 2-9 Lift the separation roller assembly
5. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
Figure 2-10 Remove the separation roller assembly
6. Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to
gently clean the rollers.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the
roller can cause paper-handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends
using disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands before handling
the assembly.
46 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
7. Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer.
Figure 2-11 Insert the separation roller assembly
8. Push down on the Tray 1 separation roller until it snaps into place.
Figure 2-12 Secure the separation roller assembly
9. Insert the keyed right end of the pickup roller assembly into the provided
slot, and then rotate the left end into place to install it.
Figure 2-13 Install the pickup roller assembly
Clean the Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers 47
Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers
Learn about cleaning the Tray 2 rollers.
1. Depending on the printer model, perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the right door.
● X57945 models: Open the lower right door.
2. Slide the blue lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the separation
roller assembly (callout 2) by pulling it out from the printer.
Figure 2-14 Remove the separation roller assembly
48 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
3. Locate the pickup roller assembly, and then pull it away from the printer to
remove it.
Figure 2-15 Remove the pickup roller assembly
NOTE: As the roller assembly can be hard to grip, you might need to reach
under and behind the rollers to securely grip it.
CAUTION: Skin oils on the roller can cause paper-handling and print-quality
problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves or thoroughly washing
your hands before handling the assembly.
4. Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to
gently clean the rollers.
5. Position the pickup roller assembly in the printer in the correct orientation,
and then press the assembly into place.
Figure 2-16 Install the pickup roller assembly
Clean the Tray 2 pickup and separation rollers 49
6. Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer to install it.
Figure 2-17 Install the separation roller assembly
50 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance
3 Theory of operation
Learn about the printer theory of operation.
Theory of operation 51
Document feeder / scanner
Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner components.
NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.
Document feeder simplex operation
Learn about document feeder operation.
The document feeder will not function when the document feeder cover is open.
The paper path is incomplete if the document feeder cover is lifted from the
glass.
When the printer duplex scans from the document feeder, the paper moves
through one time, because the document feeder has a contact image sensor
(CIS) scanner for side two which is scanned simultaneously with side one.
NOTE: Duplex scanning is model specific. Some printer models might not
support duplex scanning and printing.
The standard operation of the document feeder consists of the standby (paper
loading) mode, pick, feed, and lift steps:
● Standby (paper-loading) mode
In standby mode, the lift plate is in the down position. When a document is
loaded into the input tray, the paper-present sensor detects its presence.
When a copy/scan is initiated, the document feeder motor engages the gear
train and raises the lift plate until the document makes contact with the pick
roller. The document feeder then begins the pick, feed, and lower sequence.
● Pick
The pick roller rotates and moves one or more sheets forward into the
document feeder where the sheets engage with the separation roller. The
separation roller contacts the document feeder separation pad, which
separates multiple sheets into a single sheet.
● Feed
52 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
The single sheet continues through the document feeder paper path (aided
by the pre-scan rollers) until the leading edge of the page activates the
top-of-form sensor. Activation of this sensor initiates the scan process, and
the scanner acquires the image as the document moves over the document
feeder glass. The post-scan rollers then eject the sheet into the output area.
The pick and feed steps are repeated as long as paper is detected by the
paper-present sensor.
● Home
When the top-of-form sensor detects the trailing edge of the last page, the
last sheet is ejected and the motor turns on a sequence that rests the
separation floor back down in standby mode, which allows it to detect when
more media is loaded.
Scanning and image capture system
Learn about the scanning and image capture system.
NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.
The flatbed image scanner captures an electronic image of the document on
the glass. The scanner does this by illuminating the document with LEDs (red,
green, and blue) and capturing the image in the image sensor to create an
electronic format of the document. The flatbed scanner consists of three main
elements.
● CIS scanner
The CIS (contact image sensor) scanner captures an image using the
printer's optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a
small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the optical system
captures each color in a single row of CCD sensors that cover the entire
page width. Because only one color is captured for each line per exposure,
the three colors are recombined electronically to create the full color image.
For monochromatic scans or copies, all three LEDs are illuminated to create
a white light for the scan so the raster line can be captured in one exposure.
● Mechanical drive system
Scanning and image capture system 53
The drive system moves the CIS scanner along the document length to
create the image. In this printer, the drive system consists of a small DC
motor with an optical encoder, a drive belt, and a guide rod. The speed of the
drive system is proportional to the scan resolution (300 ppi is much faster
than 1200 ppi) and also proportional to the type of scan (color scans are
slower than monochromatic scans).
● Image processing system (formatter)
The formatter processes the scanner data into either a copy or a scan to the
computer. For copies, the image data is sent directly to the printer without
being transmitted to the computer. Depending on user selections for the
copy settings, the formatter enhances the scanner data significantly before
sending it to the printer. Image data is captured at 300 ppi for copies and is
user selectable for scans to the computer. Each pixel is represented by 8 bits
for each of the three colors (256 levels for each color), for a total of 24 bits
per pixel (24-bit color).
54 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Base printer
Learn about the base printer components.
Basic operation
Learn about the basic operation of the printer.
The printer routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores
font information, processes the print image, and communicates with the host
computer.
The basic printer operation comprises the following systems:
● Engine-control system
● Laser/scanner system
● Image-formation system
● Pickup, feed and delivery system
● Accessory (optional paper feeders)
● Integrated scanner assembly (document feeder and sub-scanner assembly)
(not shown)
Figure 3-1 Relationship between the main printer systems
Sequence of operation
Learn about the printer sequence of operation.
The DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence, as described in the
following table.
Base printer 55
Table 3-1 Sequence of operation
Period Duration Description
Waiting From the time the power is turned on, ● Heats the fuser roller in the fuser
the door is closed, or when the printer
exits sleep mode until the printer is ● Pressurizes the fuser film
ready for printing.
● Detects the toner cartridges
● Separates all of the developing
rollers from the photosensitive
drums in the toner cartridges
● Rotates and stops each motor
● Cleans the intermediate transfer
belt (ITB) and secondary transfer
roller
● Detects cable breakage on the
thermistor
● Rotates and stops each fan
● Detects any residual paper in the
engine
Standby From the end of the waiting sequence, ● Is in the Ready state
the last rotation until the formatter
receives a print command, or until the ● Enters Sleep mode if the formatter
printer is turned off. sends the sleep command
● The printer calibrates if it is time for
an automatic calibration
Initial rotation From the time the formatter receives a ● Rotates each motor
print command until the paper enters
the paper path. ● Rotates each fan
● Activates the high-voltage power
supply
● Prepares the laser/scanner unit
● Warms the fuser to the correct
temperature
Printing From the time the first sheet of paper ● Forms the image on the
enters the paper path until the last photosensitive drums
sheet has passed through the fuser.
● Transfers the toner to the paper
● Fuses the toner image onto the
paper
56 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-1 Sequence of operation (continued)
Period Duration Description
Last rotation From the time the last sheet of paper ● Moves the last printed sheet into
exits the fuser until the motors stop the output bin
rotating.
● Stops each motor
● Stops the high-voltage power
supply
● Stops the laser/scanner unit
● Turns the fuser heater off
● Cleans the ITB and secondary
transfer roller
● If another print command is
received, the printer enters the
initial rotation period when the last
rotation is complete.
Formatter-control system
Learn about how the formatter operates.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different
printer be installed during the repair or troubleshooting processes. The
formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is installed in
and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.
Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:
● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported
cartridges information change and might make a product unusable
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover
the costs of the repair in the form of a product replacement. There is no
method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is installed.
IMPORTANT: When a formatter PCA or DC controller is replaced a pairing
operation must be completed to make the printer functional.
The formatter performs the following functions:
● Controls the sleep delay function
Formatter-control system 57
● Receives and processes print data from the various printer inputs
● Monitors control panel functions and relaying printer status information
through the control panel and the network or bi-directional interface
● Develops and coordinates data placement and timing with the DC controller
PCA
● Stores customer configuration settings and paper types.
● Stores font information
● Communicates with the host computer through the network or the
bidirectional interface
The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface
and separates it into image information and instructions that control the
printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the image formation
system with the paper input and output systems, and then signals the formatter
to send the print image data.
Power management
Learn about printer power management.
Power management conserves power after the printer has been idle for an
adjustable length of time. When the printer is in sleep mode, the control-panel
back-light is turned off, but the printer retains all printer settings, downloaded
fonts, and macros. Power management can be modified or turned off from the
control-panel menus.
The printer exits sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the
following occurs.
● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the serial port.
● A print job or fax (fax models) is received.
● The control panel is touched (button press or touchscreen touch depending
on model).
● A document is loaded in the document feeder (MFP only).
● Opening the scanner lid (model dependent).
● The power button is pressed for 3 seconds or less.
58 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● Connecting an operational live network Ethernet cable or fax line (fax
models).
● Inserting a USB drive in either the front USB port or the USB port on the back
of the device.
● Connecting a USB cable to an operating computer.
● Opening the cartridge, front, or rear door (model dependent).
NOTE: Opening a paper tray does not wake up the printer.
TIP: Error messages override the sleep delay message. The printer enters
sleep mode at the selected time, but the error message continues to appear.
Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
The sleep settings affect how much power the printer uses, the wake/sleep time,
how quickly the printer enters sleep mode, and how quickly the printer wakes up
from sleep mode.
To configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power while in sleep mode, enter
the time for the Sleep after Inactivity setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.
2. Open the following menus:
● General
● Energy Settings
● Sleep Settings
3. Select Sleep after Inactivity to specify the number of minutes the printer is
inactive before it enters sleep mode. Enter the appropriate time period.
4. Select Done to save the settings.
Set the sleep schedule
Use the Sleep Schedule feature to configure the printer to automatically wake
or go into Sleep mode at specific times on specific days of the week.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings
application, and then select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
Set the sleep timer and configure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power 59
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Schedule
3. Select the New Event button, and then select the type of event to schedule:
Wake Event or Sleep Event.
4. For a wake or sleep event, configure the time and the days of the week for
the event. Select Save to save the setting.
Printer job language (PJL)
Learn about printer job language (PJL).
PJL is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL
and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a
variety of functions.
● Dynamic I/O switching: The printer can be configured with a host on each I/O
by using dynamic I/O switching. Even when the printer is offline, it can receive
data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.
● Context-sensitive switching: The printer can automatically recognize the
personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that
personality.
● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next:
For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode, the
subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for
landscape printing.
Control panel
Learn about the control panel.
The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from
the control panel.
Walk-up USB
Learn about the walk-up USB function.
NOTE: Touchscreen models only.
This printer features printing from a USB flash drive. This printer supports
printing the following types of files from the USB flash drive.
● .pdf
60 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● .jpg
● .prn and .PRN
● .pcl and .PCL
● ps and .PS
● doc and .docx
● .ppt and .pptx
When a USB flash drive is inserted into the front of the printer, the control panel
will display the USB Flash Drive menu. The files present on the USB flash drive
can be accessed from the control panel.
NOTE: The USB flash drive must be formatted using the FAT32 format. Drives
formatted with NTFS will not work.
Any files in a supported format on the USB flash drive can be printed directly
from the printer control panel. Pages also can be scanned and saved to the USB
flash drive from the control panel.
Low end data model (LEDM) overview
Learn about the low-end data model (LEDM).
The low-end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation
method and defines the dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between
clients and devices, as well as the access protocol, event, security, and
discovery methods.
CPU
Learn about the printer microprocessor.
The formatter incorporates a 1200 MHz processor.
Input/output (I/O)
Learn about printer I/O functionality.
NOTE: Some of the following printer I/O functions are model specific. For
example, not all printer models have a fax function.
Walk-up USB
The printer includes a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 front port for walkup USB printing.
Low end data model (LEDM) overview 61
Universal serial bus (USB) hosts
The printer includes SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear hosts for USB flash drive and job
storage.
10/100/1000 networking
The printer includes a 10/100/1000 network (Ethernet) connection.
Fax
The printer includes a fax phone line connection.
NOTE: Fax models only. For some fax model printers, the telephone extension
port is plugged and not operational.
Wireless
Wireless products contain a wireless card to enable 802.11b/g/n wireless
communication with dual band support for 2.4Ghz and 5 Ghz.
NOTE: Wireless models only.
Memory
Learn about printer memory functionality.
NOTE: Some of the following printer memory functions are model specific.
For example, not all printer models have Flash memory.
Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A firmware upgrade process is used
to overwrite and upgrade the firmware.
NOTE: For more information about a specific printer model, see the Printer
information, configurations, and specifications section in the service manual.
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)
The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information
about the print environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained
when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
Flash memory
NAND: Stores fax memory.
62 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Random access memory
The printer uses the following RAM:
● SFP: 1.5 GB
● MFP: 6 GB
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
The HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the
standard memory through a variety of font- and data-compression methods.
NOTE: MEt is available only in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in
PS mode.
Engine-control unit
Learn about the engine control unit.
The engine-control unit includes the following:
● DC controller
● High-voltage power supply
● Low-voltage power supply
● Fuser control
Figure 3-2 Engine-control unit
DC controller
Learn about the DC controller.
Engine-control unit 63
The DC controller controls the operation of the printer and its components.
The DC controller starts the printer operation when the printer power is turned
on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the DC controller. After the
printer enters the standby period, the DC controller sends out various signals
to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based on the print
command and image data that the host computer sends.
Figure 3-3 DC controller diagram
Fan
Motor
Clutch Drive PCA
Solenoid
Photointerrupter
Motor
Fan Clutch
Solenoid
LED
Switch
Photointerrupter
Photointerrupter
Cartridge DC controller
(Y/M/C/K) High-voltage Sensor
power supply
LED
T2 roller
Input accessory
ITB ass’y
Laser scanner ass’y
Switch
Fuser Oupput accessory
Control panel
Fan
Low-voltage
AC input power supply
Formatter
Sensor
64 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-2 Printer electrical components
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Motor SCN_MTR_12st Scanner motor
Motor SCN_MTR_34st Scanner motor
Motor LIFT_MTR Lifter motor
Motor FEED_MTR Pickup motor
Motor FEED_MTR (X57945 Feed motor
only)
Motor FSR_MTR Fuser motor
Motor ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor
Motor 3DRM_MTR Drum motor
Motor 4DEV_MTR Developer motor
Motor DEV_MTR Developer alienation motor
Motor DUP_MTR Duplex motor
Motor CAC_MTR (X55745 Cartridge access release motor
only)
Motor TS_MOTOR (X57945 Toner-supply motor
only)
Fan FSR_FAN Fuser fan
Fan CRG_FAN Cartridge fan
Fan PS_FAN Power supply fan
Solenoid T1_SL Tray 1 (MP) alienation solenoid
Solenoid DUP_SL Duplex flapper solenoid
Solenoid MP_SL Tray 1 (MP) pickup solenoid
Clutch FEED_CL Tray 2 pickup clutch
Clutch REFEED_CL Duplex re-pickup clutch
Clutch U_CL1 (X57945 only) Toner-supply upper feed clutch 1
Clutch T_CL1 (X57945 only) Toner-supply clutch 1
Clutch U_CL2 (X57945 only) Toner-supply upper feed clutch 2
Clutch T_CL2 (X57945 only) Toner-supply clutch 2
Clutch U_CL3 (X57945 only) Toner-supply upper feed clutch 3
Clutch T_CL3 (X57945 only) Toner-supply clutch 3
DC controller 65
Table 3-2 Printer electrical components (continued)
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Clutch U_CL4 (X57945 only) Toner-supply upper feed clutch 4
Clutch T_CL4 (X57945 only) Toner-supply clutch 4
Switch 24V_ILK_SW 24V interlock switch
Switch FR_DOOR_SW Front door switch
Switch FDOOR_SW Toner-supply door switch
(X57945 only)
Switch R_DOOR_SW Right door switch
Switch R_DOOR_SW Right door switch 2
(X57945 only)
Switch POWER_SW Power supply switch
Switch CST_SIZE 1 (X55745/ Tray 2 media size switch 1
X57945 only)
Switch CST_SIZE 2 (X55745/ Tray 2 media size switch 2
X57945 only)
Switch CST_SIZE 3 Tray 2 media size switch 3
(X55745/X57945
only)
Switch CST_SIZE 4 Tray 2 media size switch 4
(X55745/X57945
only)
Switch CST Tray 2 cassette presence switch
Photo interrupter LIFT_SNS Tray 2 lifter motor rotation sensor
Photo interrupter DRM_HP123_SNS Drum home position sensor YMC
Photo interrupter DRM_HP4_SNS Drum home position sensor K
Photo interrupter DEV_HP_SNS Developer alienation sensor
Photo interrupter DUP_FL_SNS Duplex flapper position sensor
Photo interrupter OUT_FULL_SNS FD1 media full sensor, fuser output
sensor
Photo interrupter CST_PAP_SNS Tray 2 media out sensor
Photo interrupter CST_FACE_SNS Tray 2 media surface sensor
Photo interrupter LOOP_SNS Fuser loop sensor
66 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-2 Printer electrical components (continued)
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Photo interrupter REFEED_SNS Duplex feed sensor
(X55745/X57945
only)
Photo interrupter ENC_SNS Registration roller rotation sensor
Photo interrupter REG_SNS Registration sensor
Photo interrupter MP_PAP_SNS Tray 1 media out sensor
Photo interrupter TCU_FULL_SNS ITB toner collection unit near full sensor
Photo interrupter T1_HP_SNS ITB alienation sensor
Photo interrupter TCU_VSCW_SNS Toner collection unit screw rotation
sensor
Photo interrupter FSR_PRS_SNS Fuser pressure release sensor
Photo interrupter PAPOUT-M_SNS Fuser output sensor 2
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (X55745 Cartridge access home position sensor
only)
Photo interrupter ENCORDER-SNS Pressure roller rotation sensor
Photo interrupter TRANS_SNS Tray 2 feed sensor
(X57945 only)
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (1st) Cartridge release unit home position
(X57945 only) sensor Y
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (2nd) Cartridge release unit home position
(X57945 only) sensor M
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (5rd) Cartridge release unit home position
(X57945 only) sensor C
Photo interrupter CAC_SNS (4th) Cartridge release unit home position
(X57945 only) sensor K
Sensor - (media sensor Media sensor
PCA)
Sensor - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor 1
Sensor - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor 2
Sensor PAPOUT-L_SNS Fuser output sensor 1
Sensor ENV SNS Environment sensor
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (1st) Toner supply sensor Y
(X57945 only)
DC controller 67
Table 3-2 Printer electrical components (continued)
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA Toner supply sensor M
(2nd) (X57945 only)
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (3rd) Toner supply sensor C
(X57945 only)
Sensor BUFF_PTR_PCA (4th) Toner supply sensor K
(X57945 only)
LED 3rd (X57945 only) Pre-exposure LED 3
LED 4th (X57945 only) Pre-exposure LED 4
LED LED6 Power supply switch LED
Motors
Learn about the printer motors.
The printer uses several motors for the paper-feed and image-formation
processes.
NOTE: The DC controller determines the following motor failures.
● Developer motor ([color] developer motor startup failure)
● Developer motor ([color] developer motor rotation failure)
● Drum motor ([color] drum motor startup failure)
● Drum motor ([color] drum motor rotation failure)
● ITB motor (ITB motor start-up failure)
● ITB motor (ITB motor rotation failure)
● Fuser motor (fuser motor start-up failure)
● Fuser motor (fuser motor rotation failure)
● Developer alienation motor (developer alienation motor failure)
● Scanner motor (scanner motor startup failure)
● Scanner motor (scanner motor rotation failure)
● Toner-supply motor ([color] toner replenish motor failure)
68 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-3 Motors
Component name Components driven
4DEV_MTR Developer motor ● Yellow developer
● Magenta developer
● Cyan developer
● Black developer
● Waste toner feed screw
3DRM_MTR Drum motor ● Yellow photosensitive drum
● Magenta photosensitive drum
● Cyan photosensitive drum
ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
● Black photosensitive drum
● Toner feed screw
FSR_MTR Fuser motor ● Pressure roller and output roller
● Pressurizes/releases the pressure roller
● Engages/disengages the T1 roller
● Engages/disengages the T2 roller
FEED_MTR Pickup motor ● Tray 1 pickup roller (5700/5800 models only)
● Tray 1 feed roller (5700/5800 models only)
● Tray 2 pickup roller
● Tray 2 feed roller
● Feed roller (X57945 models only)
● Registration roller (5700/5800 models only)
● Intermediate feed roller (5700/5800 models
only)
● Duplex re-pickup roller (5700/5800 models
only)
Motors 69
Table 3-3 Motors (continued)
Component name Components driven
FEED_MTR Feed motor (X57945 models ● Tray 1 pickup roller
only)
● Tray 1 feed roller
● Registration roller
● Intermediate feed roller
● Duplex re-pickup roller
DEV_MTR Developer alienation motor Engages/disengages the developer rollers
SCN_MTR_12st Scanner motor Scanner mirror
SCN_MTR_34st
LIFT_MTR Lifter motor ● Lifts up the Tray 2 lifting plate
● Engages/disengages the Tray 2 pickup roller
DUP_MTR Duplex motor ● Duplex switchback roller
● Duplex feed roller
CAC_MTR Cartridge access release Cartridge lock door lever
motor
(X55745 models only)
TS_MOTOR Toner-supply motor Toner feed screw
(X57945 models only)
Fans
Learn about the printer fans.
The printer has three fans for preventing the temperature from rising in the
printer and for cooling the printed pages.
NOTE: The DC controller determines the following fan failures.
● Cartridge fan (fan motor 1 failure)
● Power supply fan (fan motor 2 failure)
● Fuser fan (fan motor 3 failure)
70 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-4 Fans
Compon Description Cooling area Type Speed
ent
name
FSR_FAN Fuser fan Around the fuser Intake Full
CRG_FA Cartridge fan Around the toner Intake Variable (full/95%)
N cartridges
PS_FAN Power supply fan Around the low-voltage Intake Variable (full/half)
power supply unit
Low-voltage power supply
Learn about the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into the DC voltage that
the printer components use.
Low-voltage power supply 71
Figure 3-4 Low-voltage power supply
AC input
Low-voltage power supply
Fuse
FU401 (100V)
Fuser DC controller
Fuse
FU401 (200V)
Fuse
FU101
Zero crossing /ZEROX
detection circuit
+3.3VM +3.3VB
+3.3V +5VC
generation FET FET
circuit
+3.3VB2
Rectifying FSRPS_CLK
circuit FET
+24VA
+24V/+5V FET +3.3VC
generation
circuit
FET
+24VB
24V/5V CHG
Protection
circuit
24V interlock switch
SW1
+5VA
+24/5VA
Formatter +3.3VA
Low-voltage power supply voltages description
Learn about LVPS voltages.
The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into three DC voltages,
which it then subdivides, as described in the following table.
Table 3-5 LVPS voltages
DC power supply Reference item Inactive OFF Active OFF Print/Standby
+24V +24VA OFF OFF ON
+24V +24VB OFF OFF ON
72 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-5 LVPS voltages (continued)
DC power supply Reference item Inactive OFF Active OFF Print/Standby
+5V +5VA OFF ON ON
+5V +5VC OFF OFF ON
+3.3V +3.3VA ON ON ON
+3.3V +3.3VB OFF ON ON
+3.3V +3.3VB2 OFF Intermittent ON
+3.3V +3.3VC OFF OFF ON
+3.3V +3.3VM OFF OFF ON
Over-current/over-voltage protection
Learn about LVPS protections.
The low-voltage power supply automatically stops supplying the DC voltage
to the printer components whenever it detects excessive current or abnormal
voltage. The low-voltage power supply has a protective circuit against over-
current and over-voltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit.
CAUTION: If DC voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power
supply, the protective function might be running. In this case, turn the power
switch off and unplug the power cord.
Do not turn the power switch on until the root cause is found and corrected.
If the protective function is active, the DC controller notifies the formatter of a
low-voltage power supply failure. In addition, the low-voltage power supply has
two fuses to protect against over-current. If over-current flows into the AC line,
the fuse stops the AC power.
Low-voltage power supply safety
Learn about LVPS safety.
For the customer and service technician safety, the printer has a function to
stop +24VB power when the 24V interlock switch is turned off. This stops the DC
power supply to the following loads.
● High-voltage power supply
● Fuser motor
● Pickup motor
Over-current/over-voltage protection 73
● Developer alienation motor
● Duplex switchback motor
The remote switch control circuit turns on or off the printer power so that the AC
power flows even if the power switch is turned off. Unplug the printer power cord
before disassembling the printer.
Low-voltage power supply functions
Learn about LVPS functions.
The printer has the following low-voltage power supply functions.
Table 3-6 Low-voltage power supply functions
Function Description
Active OFF Inactive OFF is a state that the power supply is OFF.
Inactive OFF Active OFF is a state of sleep. The low-voltage power supply is output only
to formatter and DC controller.
Low-voltage power When +24V is supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the DC
supply failure controller always monitors output status of 24VA. The DC controller
detection determines it as low-voltage power supply malfunction if 24VA would
not become the specified value at the specified timing. When the DC
controller monitors AC voltage input from inlet, it also determines it as
low-voltage power supply malfunction if AC voltage input from inlet would
not reach the specified voltage.
High-voltage power supply
Learn about the high-voltage power supply.
The DC controller controls the high-voltage power supply to generate high-
voltage biases. The high-voltage power supply generates the high-voltage
biases that are applied to the following components:
● Primary charging roller (in the toner cartridges)
● RS roller (in the toner cartridges)
● Developer blade (in the toner cartridges)
● Developer roller (in the toner cartridges)
● Primary transfer roller
● Secondary transfer roller
74 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● Static charge eliminator
Figure 3-5 High-voltage power supply
Static charge eliminator
T1 roller
T2 roller
Y M C K
Developing bias Primary charging
T1 bias circuit T2 bias circuit RS bias circuit
circuit bias circuit
Blade bias circuit High-voltage power supply
DC controller
Fuser control
Learn about the fuser control process.
Fuser control 75
The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser safety circuit control the fuser
temperature based on the commands from the DC controller. The printer uses
an on-demand fusing method. There are two types of fusers, a conventional
ODF fuser and a zone-heated A2ODF fuser in which a heater is divided into
seven zones.
Figure 3-6 ODF fuser control
TH3 Fuser film
H1,H2
TH1 Rear side of printer
FU1
Pressure roller
TH2
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Front side of printer
Fuser heater Fuser heater
control circuit safety circuit
Low-voltage power supply DC controller
Table 3-7 ODF fuser components
Abbreviation Component Function
name
H1 Fuser main Heats the fuser film (Letter width compatible)
heater
H2 Fuser sub Heats the fuser film (A4 width compatible)
heater
TH1 Main thermistor Detects the center temperature of the fuser film
(contact type)
TH2 Sub thermistor 1 Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser
heater (contact type)
76 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-7 ODF fuser components (continued)
Abbreviation Component Function
name
TH3 Sub thermistor Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser
2 heater (contact type)
FU1 Thermal fuse Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of fuser
heater (non-contact type)
Figure 3-7 A2ODF fuser control
Fuser film
Rear side of printer
TP1
Fuser heater (see detailed view) Pressure roller
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Front side of printer
Fuser heater Fuser heater
control circuit safety circuit
Low-voltage power supply DC controller
Detailed view of fuser heater
Zone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TH22 TH32 TH4R TH4F TH52 TH62
TH11 TH21 TH31 TH41 TH51 TH71
Fuser control 77
Table 3-8
Abbreviation Component Function
name
H1 Fuser heater 1 Heats the fuser film (zone 1)
H2 Fuser heater 2 Heats the fuser film (zone 2)
H3 Fuser heater 3 Heats the fuser film (zone 3)
H4 Fuser heater 4 Heats the fuser film (zone 4)
H5 Fuser heater 5 Heats the fuser film (zone 5)
H6 Fuser heater 6 Heats the fuser film (zone 6)
H7 Fuser heater 7 Heats the fuser film (zone 7)
TH11 Main thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 1 (built-in
type)
TH21 Main thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 2 (built-in
type)
TH41 Main thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 4 (built-in
type)
TH51 Main thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 5 (built-in
type)
TH71 Main thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 7 (built-in
type)
TH22 Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 2 (built-in
type)
TH32 Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 3 (built-in
type)
TH4R Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 4 (built-in
type)
TH4F Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 4 (built-in
type)
TH52 Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 5 (built-in
type)
TH62 Sub thermistor Detects the temperature of the fuser zone 6 (built-in
type)
TH31 Sub thermistor Detects the excursion of the fuser heater (built-in
type)
TP1 Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of fuser
heater (non-contact type)
78 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-8 ODF fuser control block diagram
AC input
DC controller
Zero crossing /ZEROX
detection
circuit
Relay drive FSR_PRS_RLD Fuser heater
RL401 circuit safety circuit
RL402 Relay drive
circuit
Fuser heater FSRD
control circuit
FSR_RX
Low-voltage suppry supply
Fuser
Fuser heater control circuit
FSAFE4
SUB_TH2 FSAFE3
TH3
MAITN_TH FSAFE2
TH1
SUB_TH1 FSAFE1
TH2
+24VBRL
+24VB
FU1
H1, H2
Fuser film ass’y
Pressure roller
Fuser control 79
Figure 3-9 A2ODF fuser control block diagram
AC input
DC controller
Zero crossing /ZEROX
detection
circuit
Relay drive FSR_PRS_RLD Fuser heater
RL401 circuit safety circuit
RL402 Relay drive
circuit
Fuser heater FSRD
control circuit
FSR_RX
Low-voltage suppry supply
Fuser
Fuser heater control circuit
+24VBRL
+24VB
TP1
FSAFE4
TH FSAFE3
FSAFE2
H1-7
TH1-7 FSAFE1
Fuser film ass’y
Pressure roller
Fuser heater protection
Learn about fuser heater protection.
The fuser heater protective function detects an excessive temperature rise of
the fuser and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater. The printer has the
following protective functions to prevent the fuser heater from excessive rising
temperature.
80 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● DC controller: The DC controller constantly monitors the temperature of the
thermistor. The DC controller stops the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
output and turns off the relays (RL401/RL402) to interrupt power supply to
the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature.
● Fuser heater safety circuit: The fuser heater safety circuit constantly
monitors the temperature of the thermistor. The fuser heater safety circuit
turns off the relays (RL401/RL402) or the triacs (Q409/Q410/Q411) and the
fuser heater control circuit to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater
when it detects an excessive temperature. Triac (Q409) corresponds only to
the A2ODF fuser.
● Thermal fuse (ODF fuser): Contact of the thermal fuse opens and it
interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when the temperature of the
fuser heater is abnormally high.
● Thermoswitch (A2ODF fuser): The contact of the thermoswitch breaks to
interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the temperature of the fuser
heater is abnormally high.
Fuser control functions
Learn about fuser control functions.
The printer has the following fuser control functions.
Table 3-9 Fuser control functions
Function Supported feature
Fuser temperature control Yes
Fuser failure detection Yes
Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes
Fuser pressure release mechanism failure detection Yes
Fuser type discrepancy detection Yes
Fuser type identification detection No
Fuser presence detection Yes
Fuser life detection Yes
Relay failure detection No
Pressure roller cleaning Yes
Fuser control functions 81
Engine laser/scanner system
Learn about the engine laser/scanner system.
The DC controller controls the laser scanner system by following the instruction
from the formatter. The DC controller formats the latent electrostatic image on
the surface of photosensitive drum by controlling the components of the laser
scanner system as dictated by the VIDEO signals.
The main components of the image-formation system are as follows:
● Laser assembly
● Scanner motor assembly
● Beam detect (BD) sensor
● Scanner mirror
NOTE: The printer has one laser scanner assembly each for yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black.
Figure 3-10 Laser scanner system
Photosensitive drum
Laser ass’y
Y BD sensor Photosensitive drum
C
BD sensor
Laser ass’y
K
Scanner motor ass’y
Scanner mirror Scanner motor ass’y
Scanner mirror
DC controller
82 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Laser scanner failure detection
Learn about laser scanner failure detection functions.
The DC controller detects the following laser scanner failures.
Table 3-10 Laser scanner failure detection
Function Supported feature
BD failure detection No
Scanner motor start-up failure detection Yes
Scanner motor rotational failure detection Yes
Laser scanner failure detection No
Laser scanner safety
Learn about laser scanner safety.
The printer has door interlock switches. In the case that one of the following
doors opens, the interlock switches stop output to the laser for the user or
service technician’s safety.
● Front door
● Right door
Image-formation process
Learn about the image-formation process.
The DC controller controls the image-formation system according to commands
from the formatter. The DC controller controls the internal components of the
image-formation system to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum
surface. The toner image is then transferred to the print media and fused. The
system consists of the following components:
● Toner cartridges
● Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
● Primary transfer (T1) roller
● Secondary transfer (T2) roller
● Fuser
● Laser scanner assembly
Laser scanner failure detection 83
● High-voltage power supply
Figure 3-11 Image-formation system
Fuser
ITB
T1 roller
T2 roller
Y M C K
Laser scanner ass’y
Cartridge
High-voltage power supply
DC controller
Image-formation system motors
The following figure shows the motors for the image-formation system.
84 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-12 Image-formation system motors
Y M C K
3DRM 4DEV DEV ITB FSR
DC controller
Table 3-11 Image-formation system motors
Item Abbreviation Component
4DEV 4DEV_MTR Developer motor
3DRM 3DRM_MTR Drum motor
ITB ITB_MTR ITB motor
FSR FSR_MTR Fuser motor
DEV DEV_MTR Developer alienation motor
Image-formation system sensors
The following figure shows the sensors for the image-formation system.
Image-formation process 85
Figure 3-13 Image-formation system sensors
TCU_FULL
DRM_HP123
T1_HP DRM_HP4
RD1
RD2
Y M C K MS
DEV_HP
ENV
DC controller
Table 3-12 Image-formation system sensors
Item Abbreviation Name
DRM_HP123 DRM_HP123_SNS Drum home position sensor
YMC
DRM_HP4 DRM_HP4_SNS Drum home position sensor
K
DEV_HP DEV_HP_SNS Developer alienation sensor
TCU_FULL TCU_FULL_SNS ITB toner collection near full
sensor
T1_HP T1_HP_SNS ITB alienation sensor
MS - (Media sensor PCA) Media sensor
RD1 - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor
1
RD2 - (RD sensor PCA) Registration density sensor
2
ENV ENV_SNS Environment sensor
86 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Step 1: Pre-exposure (X57945 models only)
Learn about the image formation pre-exposure step.
NOTE: This step applies to the X57945 models only.
Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum
to remove any residual electrical charges from the drum surface.
Figure 3-14 Pre-exposure
LED
Photosensitive drum
Step 2: Primary charging
Learn about the image formation primary charging step.
To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is
charged with a uniform negative charge. The primary charging roller receives
the primary charging bias, and then the roller charges the drum by direct
contact.
Step 1: Pre-exposure (X57945 models only) 87
Figure 3-15 Primary charging
Primary charging roller
Primary charging bias
Photosensitive drum
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure
Learn about the image formation laser-beam exposure step.
The laser beam strikes the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative
charge on the portions of the drum surface where the image will form. An
electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized.
The neutralized areas on the drum are ready to accept toner.
Figure 3-16 Laser-beam exposure
Step 4: Development
Learn about the image formation development step.
A developing bias is applied to the developing roller. The toner acquires a
negative charge as a result of the friction from the developing roller rotating
against the developing blade. Because the negatively charged surface of the
photosensitive drums were neutralized where they have been struck by the
88 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
laser beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the drums. The latent image
becomes visible on the surface of the drum.
Figure 3-17 Development
Developer roller
Developer blade
Developing bias
Photosensitive drum
Step 5: Primary transfer
Learn about the image formation primary transfer step.
The toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the ITB. T1 bias is applied
to the T1 roller to charge the ITB positive. The ITB attracts the negatively
charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum. The complete
toner image forms on the ITB.
Figure 3-18 Primary transfer
Photosensitive
drum
ITB
T1 roller
T1 bias
Step 5: Primary transfer 89
Step 6: Secondary transfer
Learn about the image formation secondary transfer step.
The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary-transfer roller, and
attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete
toner image transfers onto the paper.
Figure 3-19 Secondary transfer
ITB
Paper
T2 roller
T2 bias
Step 7: Separation
Learn about the image formation separation step.
The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends.
The static-charge eliminator removes excess charge from the paper for stable
paper feeding and print quality.
Figure 3-20 Separation
ITB
Paper
Static charge eliminator
T2 roller
Static charge eliminator bias
90 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Step 8: Fusing
Learn about the image formation fusing step.
The printer uses an on-demand fusing method to adhere the toner image onto
the page. As the page passes through the heated and pressurized rollers in the
fuser the toner melts onto the page. The toner image is now permanently fused
to the page. A fusing bias applied to the pressure roller improves image quality.
Figure 3-21 Fusing
Fuser heater
Fuser film
Paper
Pressure roller
Step 9: ITB cleaning
Learn about the image formation ITB cleaning step.
ITB cleaning process is to remove the residual toner on the ITB surface.
The residual toner is scraped off by the cleaning blade and then collected into
the toner collection box ass’y by the toner feed screw.
Figure 3-22 ITB cleaning
Toner cartridges
Learn about the toner cartridges.
The following sections discuss the printer toner cartridges. The printer has four
toner cartridges, one for each color: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Step 8: Fusing 91
Design
Learn about toner cartridge design.
Each toner cartridge is filled with toner and consists of the following
components:
● Photosensitive drum
● Developer
● Primary-charging roller
● Memory chip
The printer has four cartridges, one for each color: yellow, magenta, cyan and
black. Each of them has the same structure
The X57945 models have two cartridge types: four (YMCK) toner cartridges and
four imaging drums (YMCK).
Figure 3-23 Standard toner cartridge block diagram
DC controller
DEV
DRM_HP4
DRM_HP123
M 4DEV/3DMR/ITB
Photosensitive
drum
Primary charging
Developer roller
roller
E-label
Cartridge
DEV_HP
92 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-24 Toner cartridge and imaging drum block diagram
Feed/toner-supply controller
P-cartridge
M TS_MOTOR
Toner feed direction
T-cartridge
BUFF_PTR_PCA(1st/2st/3st/4st)
Toner supply mechanism
Toner cartridge functions
Learn about toner cartridge functions.
The printer has the following cartridge functions.
Table 3-13 Cartridge functions
Function Supported feature
Cartridge presence detection (not applicable to T-cartridges) Yes
Toner level detection Yes
Cartridge life detection Yes
Cartridge misinstallation detection Yes
Developer alienation control Yes
Developer alienation motor failure detection Yes
Drum discharge mechanism No
Toner cartridge functions 93
Intermediate transfer belt assembly
Learn about the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) assembly.
The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and
transfers the completed image to the paper. The ITB unit has the following main
components:
● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
● ITB-drive roller
● Primary-transfer roller
● ITB cleaner
Figure 3-25 ITB unit
DC controller
Waste toner duct ass’y
SL FSR Fuser motor
T1 roller alienation
solenoid
TCU_FULL
ITB motor ITB
ITB drive roller
Toner collection box ass’y ITB
4DEV
Developer motor
T1_HP
ITB cleaner
T1 roller
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) functions
Learn about intermediate transfer belt functions.
The printer has the following ITB assembly functions.
Table 3-14 Intermediate transfer belt functions
Function Supported feature
T1 roller alienation control Yes
T1 roller alienation mechanism failure detection Yes
ITB assembly life detection Yes
ITB assembly presence detection No
Blade cleaning mechanism Yes
94 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-14 Intermediate transfer belt functions (continued)
Function Supported feature
Electrostatic cleaning mechanism No
ITB toner collection box full detection No
ITB toner collection box presence detection No
ITB perimeter detection Yes
ITB seal detection sensor failure detection No
New ITB detection Yes
ITB cleaning mechanism No
Toner collection box full detection Yes
Toner collection box presence detection No
Secondary transfer roller assembly
Learn about the secondary transfer roller assembly.
The secondary transfer roller assembly transfers the toner image on the ITB to
the paper.
Secondary transfer roller functions
Learn about secondary transfer roller functions.
The printer has the following secondary transfer roller functions.
Table 3-15 Secondary transfer roller functions
Function Supported feature
Secondary transfer roller cleaning mechanism Yes
Secondary transfer roller presence detection No
Secondary transfer roller life detection Yes
Secondary transfer roller alienation control Yes
Calibration
Learn about the printer calibration process.
Secondary transfer roller assembly 95
The printer calibrates itself to maintain proper print-quality. The calibration
corrects color-misregistration and color-density variation due to environmental
changes or internal variation in the printer.
Calibration functions
Learn about color calibration functions.
The printer has the following calibration functions.
Table 3-16 Calibration functions
Function Supported feature
Color-plane registration correction control Yes
Environment correction control Yes
Image density control (DMAX) Yes
Image halftone control (DHALF) Yes
Registration density sensor failure detection Yes
Color sensor control No
Gray axis control (GAS) No
Environment sensor failure detection Yes
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system
Learn about the printer pickup, feed, and delivery system.
The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to
commands from the formatter. The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a
series of rollers to move the paper through the printer.
The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of the following three functional
blocks.
● Pickup-and-feed-block: Controls the movement of the paper from each
pickup source to the fuser inlet
● Fuser-and-delivery-block: Controls the movement of the paper from the fuser
to the delivery destination
● Duplex block: Controls the movement of the paper from the duplex
switchback unit to the duplex re-pickup unit
96 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-26 Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system (5700/5800 models)
Fuser-and-delivery block
Simplex paper path
Pickup-and-feed block
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path Duplex block
Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system 97
Figure 3-27 Engine pickup, feed, and delivery system (X57945 models)
Simplex paper path Fuser-and-delivery block
Pickup-and-feed block
Sensors and switches
Learn about the pickup, feed, and delivery sensors and switches.
The following figure shows the sensors and switches for the pickup, feed, and
delivery system.
98 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-28 Photo sensors and switches
DUP_FL_SNS
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
LOOP_SNS
REFEED_SNS
MS
REG_SNS
RREREG_SNS
MP_PAP_SNS
TRANS_SNS
CST_FACE_SNS
CST_PAP_SNS
CST_SIZE1
CST_SIZE2
CST
CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Table 3-17 Photo sensors and switches
Abbreviation Component
CST_SIZE1 Tray 2 media size switch 1 (X557/X579 models only)
CST_SIZE2 Tray 2 media size switch 2 (X557/X579 models only)
CST_SIZE3 Tray 2 media size switch 3 (X557/X579 models only)
CST_SIZE4 Tray 2 media size switch 4 (X557/X579 models only)
CST Tray 2 cassette presence switch
DUP_FL_SNS Duplex flapper position sensor
OUT_FULL_SNS FD1 media full sensor
CST_PAP_SNS Tray 2 media out sensor
CST_FACE_SNS Tray 2 media surface sensor
LOOP_SNS Fuser loop sensor
REFEED_SNS Duplex feed sensor (X557/X579 models only)
REG_SNS Registration sensor
MP_PAP_SNS Tray 1 media out sensor
Sensors and switches 99
Table 3-17 Photo sensors and switches (continued)
Abbreviation Component
PAPOUT-M_SNS Fuser output sensor 2
TRANS_SNS Tray 2 feed sensor (X57945 models only)
MS (Media sensor PCA) Media sensor
PAPOUT-L_SNS Fuser output sensor 1
Motors, clutches, and solenoids
Learn about the pickup, feed, and delivery motors, clutches, and solenoids.
The following figure shows the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the pickup,
feed, and delivery system.
Figure 3-29 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (5700/5800 models)
FSR DUP ITB
D_SL
R_CL
MPSL
F_CL
LIFT FEED
Abbreviati Abbreviation 2 Component
on 1
ITB ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor
100 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Abbreviati Abbreviation 2 Component
on 1
FSR FSR_MTR Fuser motor
FEED FEED_MTR Pickup motor
LEFT LIFT_MTR Lifter motor
DUP DUP_MTR Duplex motor
MPSL MP-SL Tray 1 pickup solenoid
D_SL DUP_SL Duplex flapper solenoid
F_CL FEED_CL Tray 2 pickup clutch
R_CL REFEED_CL Duplex re-pickup clutch
Motors, clutches, and solenoids 101
Figure 3-30 Motors, clutches, and solenoids (X57945 models)
FSR DUP ITB
D_SL
R_CL
MPSL
FEED2
F_CL
LIFT FEED1
Abbreviati Abbreviation 2 Component
on 1
ITB ITB_BK_MTR ITB motor
FSR FSR_MTR Fuser motor
FEED1 FEED_MTR Pickup motor
FEED2 FEED_MTR Feed motor
LEFT LIFT_MTR Lifter motor
DUP DUP_MTR Duplex motor
MPSL MP-SL Tray 1 pickup solenoid
D_SL DUP_SL Duplex flapper solenoid
F_CL FEED_CL Tray 2 pickup clutch
102 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Abbreviati Abbreviation 2 Component
on 1
R_CL REFEED_CL Duplex re-pickup clutch
Feed speed control
Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery feed speed control.
The DC controller adjusts the feed speed to improve the print quality depending
on the paper type. The paper is fed at a specified speed according to the print
mode designated by the formatter.
Table 3-18 Print mode and feed speed
Print mode Feed speed, monochrome Feed speed, full color
Auto 3/4/5 3/4/5
Normal media 1 3/4 3/4
Normal media 2 3/4 3/4
Heavy media 1 3/4 3/4
Heavy media 2 3/5 3/5
Heavy media 3 4/5 4/5
Light media 1 3 3
Light media 2 3 3
Light media 3 3 3
Glossy media 1 5 5
Glossy media 2 5 5
Glossy media 3 5 5
Glossy film 5 5
Photo media 1 Not applicable Not applicable
Photo media 2 Not applicable Not applicable
Photo media 3 Not applicable Not applicable
Envelope 3/4 3/4
OHT 5 5
Extra light media 3 3
Label 3/4 3/4
Designated media 1 3/4 3/4
Feed speed control 103
Table 3-18 Print mode and feed speed (continued)
Print mode Feed speed, monochrome Feed speed, full color
Designated media 2 4/5 4/5
Designated media 3 3 3
Pickup and feed delivery features
Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery print mode and feed speed features.
The printer has the following pickup, feed and delivery functions.
Table 3-19 Print mode and feed speed
Function Supported feature
Cassette (Tray 2) media size detection Yes (X557/X57945/X58045
models only)
Cassette (Tray 2) presence detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) media surface detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) media presence detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) media level detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) lift-up control Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) lift-down control Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) multiple-feed prevention mechanism No
Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller presence detection Yes
Cassette (Tray 2) pickup roller alienation detection Yes
Tray 1 (MP) tray media presence detection Yes
Tray 1 (MP) tray media width detection No
Tray 1 (MP) tray last-media detection No
Skew-feed prevention mechanism Yes
Feed speed control Yes
Loop control Yes
Media detection Yes
OHT detection Yes
Image leading edge positioning Yes
Media length detection No
104 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-19 Print mode and feed speed (continued)
Function Supported feature
Media width detection Yes
Pressure roller pressure release control Yes
Output bin media-full detection Yes
Automatic delivery Yes
Duplex switchback control Yes
Duplex feed control Yes
Media detection
Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery media detection.
The printer is equipped with media sensor on paper path, and can detect media
type fed. The media sensor consists of an optical sensor which detects surface
roughness and ultrasonic sensor which detects paper weight, and the distance
between the optical sensor and the print media is kept constant by roller.
The DC controller detects media type using the media sensor and switches to
an optimized print mode for the media, if Auto mode is designated from the
formatter and media type for the specified input source is not designated from
the formatter.
The followings are print modes that can be switched for media detection.
● Normal
● Heavy media 1
● Heavy media 2
● Heavy media 3
● Light media
● Glossy media 1
● Glossy media 2
● Glossy media 3
● Rough media
● OHT
Media detection 105
● Glossy film
Jam detection/prevention
Learn about pickup, feed, and delivery jam detection.
The printer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to
check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed.
● Registration sensor (REG_SNS)
● Fuser output sensor 1 (PAPOUT-L_SNS)
● Fuser output sensor 2 (PAPOUT-M_SNS)
● Fuser loop sensor (LOOP_SNS)
● FD1 media full sensor (OUT_FULL_SNS)
● Duplex feed sensor (REFEED_SNS) (X557/X57945/X58045 models only)
● Tray 2 feed sensor (TRANS_SNS) (X57945 models only)
● PF feed sensor (PS23) (550-sheet paper feeder only)
● HCI feed sensor (SR4) (HCI only)
Figure 3-31 Jam detection sensors (X57945 models models)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
REFEED_SNS
REG_SNS
PREREG_SNS
TRANS_SNS
106 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-32 Jam detection sensors (5700/5800 models and 550-sheet paper
feeder)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
REFEED_SNS
REG_SNS
PREREG_SNS
SR23
Jam detection/prevention 107
Figure 3-33 Jam detection sensors (5700/5800 models and HCI)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
REFEED_SNS
REG_SNS
PREREG_SNS
SR4
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if one of these sensors detects
paper at an inappropriate time. The DC controller stops the print operation and
notifies the formatter.
The printer detects the following jams:
● No pick jam 1
● No pick jam 2
● No pick jam 3
● Pickup stay jam 1
● Fuser delivery delay jam 1
● Fuser delivery delay jam 2
108 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● Fuser delivery stay jam 1
● Fuser delivery stay jam 2
● Residual paper jam 1
● Door open jam 1
● Fuser wrap jam 1
● Fuser wrap jam 2
● Duplex feed delay jam
● Duplex re-pickup delay jam
● Delivery delay jam 1
● Inappropriate to the delivery path jam 2
● Transfer area wrapping jam
Jam detection/prevention 109
Input devices
Learn about the input devices.
550-sheet paper feeder
Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3).
The 550-sheet paper feeder is installed at bottom of the printer. It picks up the
print media and feeds it to the printer. The paper feeder controller controls the
operational sequence of the paper feeder.
550-sheet paper feeder paper path
Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder paper path.
The figure below shows the 550-sheet paper feeder paper path.
Figure 3-34 550-sheet paper feeder paper path
Paper feeder controller
Learn about the paper feeder controller.
The figure below shows the paper feeder controller block diagram.
110 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-35 Paper feeder controller
550-sheet paper feeder
Motor
+3.3VB2
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller Paper feeder controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
550-sheet paper feeder electrical components
Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder electrical components.
The figure below shows the paper feeder electrical components. The table in
this section describes the paper feeder electrical components.
Figure 3-36 Paper feeder electrical components
M12
CL6
SR24 SR23
SR22 SW16
SW4
SW6
SW5 SW7
SR21
M15
Table 3-20 Electrical component list, paper feeder
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Motor M12 Paper feeder feed motor
Motor M15 Paper feeder lifter motor
Clutch CL6 Paper feeder pickup clutch
Switch SW4 Paper feeder media size switch 1
Switch SW5 Paper feeder media size switch 2
550-sheet paper feeder electrical components 111
Table 3-20 Electrical component list, paper feeder (continued)
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Switch SW6 Paper feeder media size switch 3
Switch SW7 Paper feeder media size switch 4
Switch SW16 Paper feeder door switch
Photo interrupter SR21 Paper feeder lifter motor rotation sensor
Photo interrupter SR22 Paper feeder media out sensor
Photo interrupter SR23 Paper feeder feed sensor
Photo interrupter SR24 Paper feeder media surface sensor
550-sheet paper feeder motor control
The 550-sheet paper feeder has two motors for the paper-feed and cassette
lift-up.
The table below describes which components the paper feeder motors drive.
Table 3-21 Paper feeder motors
Abbreviatio Component Drives Failure
n detection
M12 Paper feeder feed motor Paper feeder cassette pickup roller No
Paper feeder cassette feed roller
Paper feeder feed roller
M15 Paper feeder lifter motor Paper feeder cassette lifter drive No
assembly
550-sheet paper feeder other functions
Learn about the other paper feeder pickup and feed functions.
The paper feeder has the following pickup and feed functions.
● Cassette lift-up control
● Cassette presence detection
● Cassette media size detection
● Cassette media stack surface detection
112 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● Cassette media out detection
● Cassette media level detection
● Multiple-feed prevention
● Automatic delivery
550-sheet feeder jam detection
Learn about the 550-sheet feeder jam detection function.
The paper feeder uses the following sensor to detect the presence of paper and
to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed.
● Paper feeder feed sensor (SR23)
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if the sensor detects paper at
an inappropriate time.
High capacity input (HCI) paper feeder
Learn about the HCI.
The HCI is optionally installed at bottom of the printer. It picks up the print media
and feeds it to the printer. The HCI controller controls the operational sequence
of the HCI.
HCI paper path
Learn about the HCI paper path.
The figure below shows the HCI paper path.
550-sheet feeder jam detection 113
Figure 3-37 HCI paper path
HCI controller
Learn about the HCI controller.
The figure below shows the HCI controller block diagram.
114 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Figure 3-38 HCI controller
HCI
Motor
+3.3VB2
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller HCI controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
HCI electrical components
Learn about the HCI electrical components.
The figure below shows the HCI electrical components. The table in this section
describes the HCI electrical components.
Figure 3-39 HCI electrical components
M13
CL2
SR5 SR4
SR3 SW13
SR6
SW9
SW10
SW8
M14
HCI electrical components 115
Table 3-22 Electrical component list, HCI
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Motor M13 HCI feed motor
Motor M14 HCI lifter motor
Clutch CL2 HCI pickup clutch
Switch SW8 HCI cassette lifting plate position switch
Switch SW9 HCI cassette media size switch 1
Switch SW10 HCI cassette media size switch 2
Switch SW13 HCI door switch
Photo interrupter SR3 HCI cassette media out sensor
Photo interrupter SR4 HCI feed sensor
Photo interrupter SR5 HCI cassette media surface sensor
Photo interrupter SR6 HCI cassette pickup rotation sensor
HCI motor control
The HCI has two motors for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up.
The table below describes which components the HCI motors drive.
Table 3-23 Paper feeder motors
Abbreviatio Component Drives Failure
n detection
M13 HCI feed motor HCI cassette pickup roller No
HCI cassette feed roller
HCI feed roller
M14 HCI lifter motor HCI cassette lifter drive assembly No
HCI other functions
Learn about the other HCI pickup and feed functions.
The HCI has the following pickup and feed functions.
● Cassette lift-up control
● Cassette presence detection
116 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
● Cassette media size detection
● Cassette media stack surface detection
● Cassette media out detection
● Cassette multiple-feed prevention
● Automatic delivery
HCI jam detection
Learn about the HCI jam detection function.
The HCI uses the following sensor to detect the presence of paper and to check
whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed.
● HCI feed sensor (SR4)
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if the sensor detects paper at
an inappropriate time.
HCI jam detection 117
Output devices
Learn about the output devices.
3-bin stapler-stacker
Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker.
The 3-bin stapler-stacker is installed on the upper side of the printer. It delivers
the print media to the output bin after the staple process. The unit's controller
controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.
3-bin stapler-stacker paper path
Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker paper path.
The figure below shows the 3-bin stapler-stacker paper path.
Figure 3-40 3-bin stapler-stacker paper path
118 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
3-bin stapler-stacker controller
Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller.
The figure below shows the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller block diagram.
Figure 3-41 3-bin stapler-stacker controller
3 Bin Stapler Stacker
Motor
+3.3VB2
+24VA
Fan
DC controller SS controller Solenoid
Photointerruptor
Switch
Formatter
3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components
Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components.
The figures below show the 3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components. The
table in this section describes the 3-bin stapler-stacker electrical components.
3-bin stapler-stacker controller 119
Figure 3-42 3-bin stapler-stacker motors and solenoids
M27 M24
M21
SL22
M25
M22
SL23
SL21
Figure 3-43 3-bin stapler-stacker sensors and switches
PS207
PS206 PS204
PS201
PS205
PS211
PS202
PS212 PS213
PS208 PS214 PS203
PS209 PS215
SW3
SW4
PS210 SW21
Table 3-24 Electrical component list, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Motor M21 Stapler-stacker output motor
Motor M22 Stapler-stacker feed motor
Motor M24 Jogger motor
Motor M25 Y alignment motor
Motor M26 Stapler motor
Motor M27 Lifter motor
120 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
Table 3-24 Electrical component list, 3-bin stapler-stacker (continued)
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Fan FAN21 Stapler-stacker fan
Solenoid SL21 Inlet flapper solenoid
Solenoid SL22 Stamp solenoid
Solenoid SL23 Output bin 2 flapper solenoid
Photo interrupter PS201 Bin 1 media presence sensor
Photo interrupter PS202 Stapler-stacker exit sensor
Photo interrupter PS203 Staple inlet sensor
Photo interrupter PS204 Y alignment home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS205 Bin 1 media full sensor 1
Photo interrupter PS206 Alienation home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS207 Jogger home position sensor
Photo interrupter PS208 Bin 2 media presence sensor
Photo interrupter PS209 Bin 2 media full sensor
Photo interrupter PS210 Stapler-stacker inlet sensor
Photo interrupter PS211 Bin 1 upper limit sensor
Photo interrupter PS212 Bin 1 lower limit sensor
Photo interrupter PS213 Staple low sensor
Photo interrupter PS214 Staple ready sensor
Photo interrupter PS215 Staple home position sensor
Switch SW3 Stapler-stacker door switch
Switch SW4 Staple door switch
Switch SW21 Interlock switch
3-bin stapler-stacker motor control
The 3-bin stapler-stacker has six motors for paper feed, paper alignment, output
bin lift up/down, and staple functions.
The table below describes which components the 3-bin stapler-stacker motors
drive.
3-bin stapler-stacker motor control 121
Table 3-25 Paper feeder motors
Abbreviatio Component Drives Failure
n detection
M21 Stapler-stacker output Output bin 1 delivery roller No
motor
Output bin 1 exit feed roller
M22 Stapler-stacker feed Output bin 2 delivery roller No
motor
Output bin 2 inlet feed roller
M24 Jogger motor Jogger guide Yes
M25 Y alignment motor Alignment roller Yes
Engages/disengages the output bin 1
delivery roller
M26 Staple motor Staple Yes
M27 Lifter motor Output bin 1 lifter No
3-bin stapler-stacker fan control
The 3-bin stapler-stacker has one fan.
The table below describes the stapler-stacker fan functions.
Table 3-26 3-bin stapler-stacker fan
Abbrevi Component Cooling area Type Speed Failure
ation detectio
n
FAN21 Stapler-stacker fan Stapler-stacker interior Intake Full/low Yes
3-bin stapler-stacker other functions
Learn about the other 3-bin stapler-stacker delivery functions.
The 3-bin stapler-stacker has the following delivery functions.
● Mailbox mode
● Staple control
● Automatic delivery
3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection
Learn about the 3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection function.
122 Chapter 3 Theory of operation
The 3-bin stapler-stacker uses the following sensors to detect the presence of
paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed.
● Stapler-stacker inlet sensor (PS210)
● Staple inlet sensor (PS203)
● Stapler-stacker exit sensor (PS202)
The printer determines that a jam has occurred if the sensors detect paper at
an inappropriate time. The stapler-stacker detects the following jams.
● Residual paper jam
● Feed delay jam
● Feed stay jam
3-bin stapler-stacker jam detection 123
4 Solve problems
Learn about solving printer problems.
124 Chapter 4 Solve problems
How to search for printer documentation
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is
available on the HP portals.
For HP internal access to WISE, go to WISE.
For HP channel partners access WISE, see Accessing WISE for HP channel
partners (HP Partner Portal) or Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP).
WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and HP internal users. The
level of detail available depends on your access credentials. To learn how to find
support content in WISE, watch the video here.
How to search WISE for printer information and
documentation
These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians,
and other internal users.
To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error
Code and Control Panel Message Document in WISE.
TIP: The Product Detail Page (PDP) is available from the WISE home page.
Enter, and then select a product name or number in the Go to a Product Detail
Page area (callout 1), or select the …or select your product from a list item
(callout 2) on the WISE home page.
Many types of printer documentation and information are available on WISE.
This section details methods for finding error code descriptions and solutions.
TIP: To view a list of control panel message documents (CPMD) per printer,
search for the following topic in WISE: HP LaserJet, OfficeJet, PageWide,
ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message document (CPMD) list or click the
link below.
● HP LaserJet, HP OfficeJet, HP PageWide, HP ScanJet - Control panel
messages document (CPMD), Service manual, and Service cost data list
How to search for printer documentation 125
Use one of the following methods to search for CPMD error code information.
● Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
● Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
● Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
Use the WISE Error Code Lookup tool to find error code troubleshooting
procedures using the following steps.
1. On the WISE home page, click the Error Code Lookup tool icon.
Figure 4-1 WISE Error Code Lookup tool icon
2. Enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Error Code Lookup
dialog box.
Figure 4-2 WISE Error Code Lookup tool dialog box
3. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example,
HP LaserJet Enterprise M606 series) in the list.
NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended
for the most accurate search return.
126 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-3 WISE Error Code Lookup tool drop-down list
M606
4. Type the error code (for example, 13.b2.d2) in the Error Code Lookup keyword
field, and then select the search icon.
Figure 4-4 WISE Error Code Lookup tool search
5. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results
area.
Figure 4-5 WISE Search results
Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
Use the WISE search function to find error code troubleshooting procedures
using the following steps.
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 127
1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in
the Search dialog box.
Figure 4-6 WISE Search dialog box
2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example,
HP LaserJet Enterprise M606 series) in the list.
NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended
for the most accurate search return.
Figure 4-7 WISE Search drop-down list
3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Search keyword field, and
then select the search icon.
Figure 4-8 WISE Search
1 2
4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results
area.
128 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-9 WISE Search results
Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Use the WISE Product Detail Page (PDP) to find error code troubleshooting
procedures using the following steps.
1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in
the Go to a Product Detail page dialog box.
TIP: To find a PDP from a list of products by product type, select the …or
select your product from a list item just below the dialog box.
Figure 4-10 WISE PDP dialog box
2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example,
HP LaserJet Enterprise M606 series) in the list.
NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended
for the most accurate search return.
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 129
Figure 4-11 WISE PDP drop-down list
3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Error Code Lookup field, and
then select the search icon.
Figure 4-12 WISE PDP search
1 2
4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results
area.
130 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-13 WISE PDP search results
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Channel Services Delivery
Platform (CSDP) if you are an HP Channel Partner.
IMPORTANT: A Partner Admin must requested access, via the CSDP portal,
to create a new user before you can sign into the CDSP portal.
1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
Figure 4-14 CSDP sign-in page
2. On the CSDP home page, click the Knowledge and Training item.
TIP: Use the Knowledge and Training item at the top of the CSDP home
page (callout 1), or the Knowledge and Training action icon (callout 2).
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) 131
Figure 4-15 CSDP portal home page
1
3. Select HP Technical Documentation on the Knowledge and Training page to
open the WISE portal home page.
Figure 4-16 CSDP portal HP Knowledge and Training page
4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Figure 4-17 WISE portal home page
132 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Partner Portal if you are an HP
Channel Partner.
NOTE: If this is your first visit to the HP Partner Portal, you will be asked to
create an account. Follow the setup directions using your HP Partner
credentials.
View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners
1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the
sign-in page).
Figure 4-18 HP Partner Portal sign-in page
2. On the HP Partner Portal home page, click the Services & Support item.
Figure 4-19 HP Partner Portal home page
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 133
3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.
Figure 4-20 HP Partner Portal Service & Support page
4. Select the Technical Documentation item.
Figure 4-21 HP Partner Portal Technical Support (WISE)page
134 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Figure 4-22 WISE portal home page
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 135
Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the
printer control panel alerts the user to the situation.
This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flow
chart to filter out many possible causes of the problem.
● Use the pre-troubleshooting check list to gather information about the
problem from the customer.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware
malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that
contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using
supplies that are in good condition.
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help
define the problem(s).
136 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist
General topic Questions
Environment ● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?
● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified
power source?
● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the wall
outlet (not a surge protector)?
● Is the operating environment within the specified
parameters?
● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that
produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials?
NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the
copying processes. Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or
a diazo copier) can have an adverse effect on some printer
components (for example, the toner cartridge or cartridges
OPC).
● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
● Is the printer exposed to an air conditioning or heating vent
that can cause temperature fluctuations?
Media ● Does the customer use only supported media?
● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?
● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental
limits?
Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
● Is the media correctly placed in the tray?
● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack (no gaps in the
stack or excessive pressure causing the stack to bow)?
● Is the tray (or trays) correctly installed in the printer?
Toner cartridge ● Is the toner cartridge (or cartridges) installed correctly?
NOTE: If country/region specific toner cartridges are available
for the printer, make sure the correct cartridge is installed.
Transfer unit and fuser ● Are the transfer unit and fuser installed correctly?
NOTE: For printers with an intermediate transfer belt (ITB),
is the ITB installed correctly and fully seated. If a
replacement ITB was installed, was all of the packing
materials removed?
Covers ● Is the toner cartridge door closed?
Pre-troubleshooting checklist 137
Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
General topic Questions
Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change
(particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe
affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20
minutes.
● Was a toner cartridge (or cartridges) opened soon after
being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the
toner cartridge (or cartridges) to sit at room temperature for
1 to 2 hours.
Miscellaneous ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (toner
cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the
printer.
● Remove the printer from the network and ensure that
the failure is associated with the printer before beginning
troubleshooting.
● For any color print-quality issues (color printers only),
calibrate the printer, and then print a diagnostics page to
verify print quality.
Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes to follow to quickly isolate and
solve printer hardware problems.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. Follow a “yes” answer to a
question to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more
testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter and follow the
instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in
this troubleshooting flowchart.
Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart
Step Question Action
1 Is the printer on and
does a readable
Power message display?
on
138 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
Step Question Action
Yes No Basic printer functions should start up
when the printer is connected into an
electrical outlet and the power switch is
pushed to the on position.
During normal operation cooling fans
and/or motors should be operating. Place
a hand over fan intake or exhaust vents to
determine if the fan or fans are spinning.
Lean close to the printer to hear motors
rotating.
If fans and/or motors are operating, the dc
side of the power supply is functioning.
Always make sure that the printer is
plugged into a known-functioning wall
receptacle. Remove power strips and plug
the printer directly into a wall receptacle.
After the control panel display is
functional, see step 2.
2 Does the message
Control
Ready display on
the control panel?
panel
messag
es
Yes No After the errors have been corrected, go
to step 3.
Use the control panel message document
(CPMD) section in this manual to correct
any displayed error messages.
3 Open the
Troubleshooting
Event log menu and print an
event log to see
the history of errors
with this printer.
Does the event log
print?
Troubleshooting flowchart 139
Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
Step Question Action
Yes No If the event log does not print, check for
error messages.
If paper jams inside the printer, see
the jams section of the printer service
manual.
If error messages display on the control
panel when trying to print an event log,
see the control panel message document
(CPMD) section of this manual.
After successfully printing and evaluating
the event log, see step 4.
4 Open the Reports
menu and print the
Informati configuration pages
on to verify that all
pages the accessories are
installed.
Are all
the accessories
installed?
Yes No If accessories that are installed are not
listed on the configuration page, remove
the accessory and reinstall it.
Make sure that the most recent
firmware is installed. See the firmware
upgrade section of this manual for more
information.
After evaluating the configuration pages,
see step 5.
5 Does the print
quality meet
Print the customer's
quality requirements?
Yes No Compare the images with the
sample defects in the Image-quality
troubleshooting section of this manual.
Solve print-quality and copy-quality issues
as needed.
After the print quality is acceptable, see
step 6.
140 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
Step Question Action
6 Can the customer
print successfully
Interface from the host
computer?
Yes. This is No Verify that all I/O cables are connected
the end of correctly and that a valid IP address is
the troubleshooting listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration
process. page.
If error messages display on the control
panel or appear in the event log, see the
control-panel message document (CPMD)
section of this manual.
When the customer can print from the
host computer, this is the end of the
troubleshooting process.
Firmware upgrades
Learn about printer firmware upgrades.
To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the printer, go to:
● In the US, go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP.
a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the
appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to
select the correct model so that the upgraded firmware supports all of
the printer functions.
b. Select the driver language and operating system.
c. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.
● Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.
– Select your country/region.
– Select Drivers & Downloads.
Firmware upgrades 141
– Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then
select Go.
TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a
short video on identifying the printer's name and number.
– Select the appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to
select the correct model so that the upgraded firmware supports all of
the printer functions.
– Select the driver language and operating system.
– Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.
Determine the installed revision of firmware
Learn about how to determine the version of installed printer firmware.
Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status pages menu.
3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.
142 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Find the firmware revision on the configuration page.
Figure 4-23 Configuration page firmware version
Firmware Revision
Rev
HP LaserJet M
Sep\13\2019 6:56:00 AM
HP Embedded Web Server
Learn how to perform a firmware upgrade using the HP Embedded Web Server.
NOTE: The printer should be at the Ready state.
The firmware update might take 10 minutes or longer based on the input/output
(I/O) transfer rates and the time it takes for the printer to reinitialize.
1. Open an Internet browser window.
2. Enter the printer IP address in the URL line.
3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link from the General tab or from the
Troubleshooting tab.
HP Embedded Web Server 143
4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to,
and then select the firmware file. The file has a .bdl file extension. Select the
Install button to perform the upgrade.
NOTE: Do not close the browser window OR interrupt communication until
the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page.
5. After the printer reinitializes, print a configuration page and verify that the
latest firmware version has been installed.
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu)
Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from
the control panel.
1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo.
Figure 4-24 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3 Administrator, and then touch the OK
button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +1 Download, and then touch the OK
button.
5. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the
printer.
NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on
the control panel display, try using a different portable storage device.
6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK
button.
144 Chapter 4 Solve problems
7. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the .bdl file, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.
TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to
select the correct file for this printer.
8. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, touch
the down arrow button several times until the message Continue displays.
9. Touch the OK button to begin the upgrade. When the upgrade is complete,
the printer will initialize to the Ready state.
10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and
verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed.
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu)
Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update
from the control panel.
1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2. Turn the printer on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.
3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
4. Open the Maintenance menu.
5. Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.
6. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the
printer.
7. Touch the .bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button.
TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to
select the correct file for this printer.
8. Select one of the following options:
● Upgrade
NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.
● Re-install
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) 145
● Downgrade
9. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state.
10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and
verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed.
146 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools
Learn about the printer troubleshooting tools.
Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.
When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is
functioning correctly.
NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a
duplex engine test page, or both simplex and duplex engine test pages might
be available.
Use a small pointed object to depress and hold the engine test button (location
varies depending on the printer model). An engine test page prints. The test
page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded
in Tray 2.
Possible engine test pages (printer dependent)
● A series of lines parallel to the short end of the page.
● A series of lines parallel to the long end of the page.
Figure 4-25 Engine test button
Control panel checks
Learn about control panel troubleshooting.
The printer includes a diagnostic test mode for the touchscreen control panels.
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools 147
Touchscreen diagnostic mode
Learn about touchscreen diagnostic mode.
Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control-panel hardware
and embedded firmware. These tests are useful for checking control-panel
functionality independent of the printer control-panel system diagnostics.
1. Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control panel,
and then press the button.
Figure 4-26 Diagnostic-tests access button — 8-inch control panel
Figure 4-27 Diagnostic-tests access button — 10-inch control panel
2. Observe the control panel screen as it cycles through the following colors:
● Red
● Green
● Blue
● Black
148 Chapter 4 Solve problems
● White
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests
Learn about accessing the control panel system diagnostics tests from a
touchscreen control panel.
Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests.
1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo.
Figure 4-28 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the
tests.
Figure 4-29 Pre-boot menu
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests 149
Table 4-3 Pre-boot menu button descriptions
Button Description
Use this button to see more information
about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu
items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu
item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu
items.
Use this button to go back to the previous
menu.
Not used.
4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press
the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-30 Access the administration menu
150 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press
the OK button to select it.
NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.
Figure 4-31 Access the diagnostics menu
Screen test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic screen test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-32 Open the screen test
Screen test 151
The blue horizontal gradient screen appears.
Figure 4-33 Blue horizontal gradient screen
3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test
screens.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.
Table 4-4 Touchscreen test screens
Screen Description
Green horizontal gradient
Red horizontal gradient
Blue vertical gradient
Green vertical gradient
152 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-4 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
Red vertical gradient
Blue with horizontal interlaced
Green with horizontal interlaced
Red with horizontal interlaced
Blue with vertical interlaced
Green with vertical interlaced
Screen test 153
Table 4-4 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
Red with vertical interlaced
Black with white center
White with black center
Checkerboard
Multicolor stripes
Blue green grid meshing
Touch test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic touch test.
154 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK
button to select it.
Figure 4-34 Open the touch test
3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.
Figure 4-35 Touch the white grid
A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.
Touch test 155
Figure 4-36 Verify the mark
SoftKey test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic SoftKey test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the
OK button to select it.
Figure 4-37 Open the softkey test
156 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. When prompted, touch the Home button.
Figure 4-38 Touch the Home button
If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.
NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.
Figure 4-39 Successful test
Backlight test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic backlight test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
Backlight test 157
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the
OK button to select it.
After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then
returns to full brightness.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
Figure 4-40 Open the backlight test
Sound test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic sound test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK
button to select it.
After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
158 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-41 Open the sound test
Keyboard test (flow models only)
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic keyboard test.
IMPORTANT: The control-panel system diagnostic tests include a 6 Keyboard
Test item. This test is not valid for printers that do not have a pull out keyboard
installed, even though this option is present in the control-panel system
diagnostic tests menu.
If the 6 Keyboard Test is opened on a non-flow printer, the printer power must
be turned off to exit the test.
HP does not recommend turning the printer power off during the control-panel
system diagnostic tests.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
Keyboard test (flow models only) 159
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 6 Keyboard Test, and then press the
OK button to select it.
Figure 4-42 Open the keyboard test
3. When prompted, touch the H key on the keyboard or the Home button to exit
the test.
Version
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic version information.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK
button to select it.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
Select 7 Version to view the following types of information:
NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not
the printer.
● Panel ID
● Hardware (version)
● Firmware (version)
● KB Hw (version)
● KB Firm (version)
● LCD Vendor
● Touch Controller Version
160 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-43 Open the version information
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel
problems.
● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
● No control panel sound.
● Home button is unresponsive.
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel
functional).
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control
panel.
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts 161
Figure 4-44 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)
Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button
Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button
to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.
Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter
LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.
N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the control panel.
Turn the product power off. N
Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control
panel.
162 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-45 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the
touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously
inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously
N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the
control panel.
No control panel sound
To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control
panel.
No control panel sound 163
Figure 4-46 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:
Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?
Home button is unresponsive
To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control
panel.
164 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-47 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
Unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED
illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,
and then on again.
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED
illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the
control panel. control panel.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Review the following information when the HIP is not functioning, but the control
panel is functional.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) 165
Figure 4-48 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel
functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration
pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP)
Learn about the control-panel Print menu (SFP) and the Copy/Print menu (MFP).
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select
the Print menu (SFP) or the Copy/Print menu (MFP).
To print: At the printer control panel, touch the printer icon .
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Image Make optional Use this menu
preview to configure
MFP Require preview how Copy
behaves.
Disable preview
Copy Settings Copies 1-9999 Configure the
default
MFP Default = 1 options for
copy jobs. If
the user does
not specify the
job options
when creating
the job, the
default
options are
used.
166 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Sides Original 1-sided Use to indicate
Sides whether the
MFP 2-sided original
document is
Flip pages up
printed on one
or both sides.
For example,
select Original
Sides 1-sided
and Output
Sides 2-sided
when the
original is
printed on one
side, but you
want to make
two-sided
copies.
Select Flip
pages up to
print the
pages with
long edge of
the in the
landscape
orientation.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 167
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Sides Output 1-sided Use to indicate
Sides whether the
MFP 2-sided copies should
be printed on
Flip pages up
one or both
sides. For
example,
select Original
Sides 1-sided
and Output
Sides 2-sided
when the
original is
printed on one
side, but you
want to make
two-sided
copies.
Select Flip
pages up to
print the
pages with
long edge of
the in the
landscape
orientation.
Copy Settings Watermark Watermark None* Use to set a
Type text
MFP Text watermark.
Copy Settings Watermark Watermark Draft Select a
Text predefined
MFP Confidential text
watermark.
Secret
Top Secret
Urgent
Copy Settings Watermark Text Font Letter Gothic* Select the font
of the text
MFP Antique Olive watermark.
New Century
Schoolbook
Roman
Garamond
Antiqua
168 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Watermark Text Size 30 point Select the font
point size of
MFP 40 point* the text
watermark.
60 point
Copy Settings Watermark Darkness 1 - (Lighter) Select the
darkness of
MFP 2 the text
watermark.
3*
5 - (Darker)
Copy Settings Stamps Stamp User-defined Use to set a
Content value stamp in any
MFP or all the
None* following
locations in
IP address
the document:
User name
● Top Left
Product
● Top Center
information
● Top Right
Page number
● Bottom
Date and time
Left
● Bottom
Center
● Bottom
Right
Copy Settings Stamps Text Font Letter Gothic* Select the font
of the stamp.
MFP Antique Olive
New Century
Schoolbook
Roman
Garamond
Antiqua
Copy Settings Stamps Text Size 8 point Select the font
point size of
MFP 12 point* the stamp.
20 point
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 169
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Stamps White Disabled* Select the
background check box to
MFP Enabled enable a white
background
for the stamp.
Copy Settings Scan Mode Standard Use to indicate
document* the type of
MFP original
Prompt for document to
additional pages be scanned.
Book Select Prompt
for additional
2-sided ID
pages to copy
or scan an
original
document that
has more
pages than
the document
feeder can
accommodate
at one time, or
to scan
originals of
different sizes
that cannot be
scanned
together, and
then combine
these
separate scan
jobs into a
single job.
170 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Reduce/ Automatic* Scale the size
Enlarge of the
MFP Include margins document up
or down.
Manual
To reduce the
Default=100
image, select
a scaling
percentage
that is less
than 100. To
enlarge the
image, select
a scaling
percentage
that is greater
than 100.
When Include
margins is
enabled, the
printer
reduces the
image slightly
to fit the entire
scanned
image within
the printable
area on the
page.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 171
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Original Size Automatically Specify the
detect* size of the
MFP original
Letter (8.5x11) document.
Mixed Letter/
Legal
Legal (8.5x14)
Executive
(7.25x10.5)
Statement
(5.5x8.5)
Oficio (8.5x13)
4x6
5x7
5x8
A4 (210x297 mm)
A5 (148x210 mm)
A6 (105x148 mm)
RA4 (215x305
mm)
B5 (182x257 mm)
B6 (128x182 mm)
10x15cm
16K (195x270
mm)
16K (184x260
mm)
16K (197x273
mm)
DPostcard JIS
(148x200 mm)
Oficio (216x340
mm)
172 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Paper Paper Size Match original Select the size
Selection size* of paper to
MFP use when
Letter (8.5x11) printing or
making
Legal (8.5x14)
copies.
Executive
(7.25x10.5)
Statement
(5.5x8.5)
Oficio (8.5x13)
3x5
4x6
5x7
5x8
A4 (210x297 mm)
A5 (148x210 mm)
A6 (105x148 mm)
RA4 (215x305
mm)
B5 (182x257 mm)
B6 (128x182 mm)
10x15cm
16K (195x270
mm)
16K (184x260
mm)
16K (197x273
mm)
Postcard JIS
(100x148 mm)
DPostcard JIS
(148x200 mm)
Envelope #9
Envelope #10
Envelope
Print menu (SFP) and Monarch
Copy/Print menu (MFP) 173
Envelope #10
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Paper Paper Type Any Type Select the
Selection type of paper
MFP Plain* to use when
printing or
Light 60-74g
making
Intermediate copies.
85-95g
Mid-Weight
96-110g
Heavy 111-130g
Extra Heavy
131-175g
Cardstock
176-220g
Mono
Transparency
Labels
Letterhead
Envelope
Preprinted
Prepunched
Colored
Bond
Recycled
Rough
HP EcoFFICIENT
Light Bond
Copy Settings Paper Paper Tray Automatically Select which
Selection detect* tray to use
MFP when printing
Manually Feed or making
copies.
Tray 1
Tray 2
174 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Booklet Booklet Enabled Select to have
Format Booklet
MFP Disabled* Format off or
on.
Copy Settings Booklet Booklet Borders on Enabled Select to have
Format each page borders
MFP Disabled* printed on the
page.
Copy Settings Content Portrait* Specify the
Orientation way the
MFP Landscape content of the
original
document is
placed on the
page.
Copy Settings Pages per One* Select how
Sheet many pages to
MFP Two print on one
sheet.
Four
Copy Settings Page Order Right, then down Select to print
the pages in
MFP Down, then right rows or
columns.
Copy Settings Add page Enabled Select the Add
borders page borders
MFP Disabled* checkbox to
add borders to
the pages.
Copy Settings Image Darkness 1 - (Lighter) Adjust to
Adjustment increase or
MFP 2 decrease the
amount of
3
white and
4 black in the
colors.
5*
9 - (Darker)
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 175
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Image Contrast 1 - (Less) Adjust to
Adjustment increase or
MFP 2 decrease the
difference
3
between the
4 lightest and
darkest color
5* on the page.
6
9 - (More)
Copy Settings Image Background 1 - (Normal) Adjust if you
Adjustment Cleanup are having
MFP 2 trouble
copying a faint
3*
image.
4
5*
9 - (Cleaner)
Copy Settings Image Sharpness 1 - (Less) Adjust to
Adjustment sharpen or
MFP 2 soften the
image.
3*
5 - (More)
Copy Settings Optimize Text/ Text Select to
Picture optimize for
MFP Mixed* the output of a
particular type
Printed picture
of content.
Photograph
176 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Edge-to-Edge Normal When the
(recommended) Edge-to-Edge
MFP feature is
Edge-to-Edge enabled, the
output product
minimizes
margins and
prints as close
to the edge of
the paper as
possible.
Copy Settings Erase Edges Use inches Enabled* Use the Erase
Edges feature
MFP Disabled to remove
blemishes,
such as dark
borders or
staple marks,
by cleaning
the edges of
the scanned
image.
Disabling Use
inches
changes the
measurement
s to
millimeters.
Copy Settings Erase Edges Front Side Specify a Sets the width
different width of the edge to
MFP for each edge clean.
Apply same
width to all
edges*
All edges value
Default = 0.00
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 177
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Copy Settings Erase Edges Back Side Specify a Sets the width
different width of the edge to
MFP for each edge clean.
Apply same
width to all
edges
Mirror front side*
Copy Settings Collate Collate on* When Collate
on is selected,
MFP Collate off each set of
copied pages
are
assembled in
the same
order as the
original
document.
Copy Settings Multi-feed Disabled Use this
Detection feature to
MFP Enabled* detect when
multiple pages
are fed
simultaneousl
y into the ADF
(automatic
document
feeder) or
sheet-feed
scanner.
Copy Settings
MFP
Enable Print Enabled Enables the
from USB printer to open
Drive Disabled* a file from a
USB drive.
Manage Job Sort Job Name* This option
Stored Jobs Order allows you list
Date* the jobs either
alphabetically
or
chronologicall
y.
178 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Retain Do not retain Sets which
Stored Jobs Temporary temporary
Jobs Personal jobs jobs will be
only retained in the
event of a
All temporary
printer reboot.
jobs
Manage Temporary 1-300 Configure
Stored Jobs Job Storage global settings
Limit Default = 32 for jobs that
are stored in
the printer
memory.
The
Temporary
Job Storage
Limit feature
specifies the
number of
temporary
jobs that can
be stored on
the printer. The
maximum
allowed value
is 300.
Manage Temporary Off Configure
Stored Jobs Job Storage global settings
Retention 30 minutes for temporary
jobs that are
1 hour
stored in the
4 hours printer
memory.
1 day
The
1 week Temporary
Stored Job
4 weeks Retention
3 days feature
specifies the
amount of
time
temporary
jobs can be
stored on the
printer.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 179
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Standard Off Configure
Stored Jobs Stored Job global settings
Retention 30 minutes for jobs that
are stored in
1 hour
the printer
4 hours memory.
1 day The Standard
Stored Job
1 week Retention
feature
4 weeks specifies the
3 days amount of
time jobs can
be stored on
the printer.
Default Print Number of Range: 1-32000 Sets the
Options Copies default
Default = 1 number of
copies for a
copy job. This
default applies
when the Copy
function or the
Quick Copy
function is
initiated from
the printer
Home screen.
Default Print Paper Paper size Select from a list Configures
Options Selection of sizes that the the default
Paper type printer supports. paper size,
type and tray
Paper tray
used for print
jobs.
Default Print Default X Dimension Range: 3.00-8.50 Configures
Options Custom Paper inches the default
Size paper size
Default = 8.5 that is used
inches when the user
selects
Custom as the
paper size for
a print job.
180 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Default Print Default Y Dimension Range: Configures
Options Custom Paper 5.00-14.00 the default
Size inches paper size
that is used
Default = 14 when the user
inches selects
Custom as the
paper size for
a print job.
Default Print Default Use Inches Enabled*
Options Custom Paper
Size Disabled
Default Print Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate
Options whether the
2-sided original
document is
printed on one
or both sides.
Default Print Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid
Options (recommended)* shadows that
can appear
Edge-to-Edge along the
output edges of
copies when
the original
document is
printed close
to the edges.
Default Print Resolution FastRes 1200* Use to select
Options the level of
ProRes 1200 desired print
quality.
Default Print Resolution Economode Enabled Text is printed
Options using less
Disabled* toner. This
setting is
useful when
you are
printing drafts.
You can turn
on this option
independently
of other print
quality
settings.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 181
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
PCL and Courier Font Regular* Select which
Postscript version of the
Settings Dark Courier font
you want to
use. The
factory default
setting is
Regular, which
uses an
average
stroke width.
The Dark
setting can be
used if a
heavier
Courier font is
needed.
PCL and Wide A4 Enabled Changes the
Postscript printable area
Settings Disabled* of A4-size
paper. If you
enable this
option, eighty
10-pitch
characters
can be printed
on a single line
of A4 paper.
PCL and Print PS Enabled Use this
Postscript Errors feature to
Settings Disabled* select
whether a
PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when
the printer
encounters a
PS error.
PCL and Print PDF Enabled Selects
Postscript Errors whether a PDF
Settings Disabled* error page is
printed when
the printer
encounters a
PDF error.
182 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
PCL and Personality Automatic* Configures
Postscript the default
Settings PCL print language
or personality
PS
for the printer.
PDF Normally you
should not
change the
printer
language. If
you change
the setting to
a specific
printer
language, the
printer does
not
automatically
switch from
one language
to another
unless
specific
software
commands
are sent to it.
PCL and PCL Font Font Source Internal Selects the
Postscript Settings font source for
Settings Disk resident* the user-soft
default font.
The list of
available
options varies
depending on
the installed
printer
options.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 183
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
PCL and PCL Font Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the
Postscript Settings font number
Settings Default = 0 for the user-
soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in
the Font
Source menu.
The printer
assigns a
number to
each font and
lists it on the
PCL font list.
The font
number
displays in the
Font # column
of the printout.
PCL and PCL Font Font Pitch Range: If the Font
Postscript Settings 0.44-99.99 Source option
Settings and the Font
Default = 10 Number
setting
indicate a
contour font,
then use this
feature to
select a
default pitch
(for a fixed-
spaced font).
184 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
PCL and PCL PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the
Postscript lines PCL print-
Settings command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands
that HP
developed to
provide
access to
printer
features.
Use the Form
Length feature
to select the
user soft
-default
vertical form
length.
PCL and PCL PCL Settings Orientation Portrait* Select the
Postscript orientation
Settings Landscape that is most
often used for
copy or scan
originals.
Select the
Portrait option
if the short
edge is at the
top or select
the Landscape
option if the
long edge is at
the top.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 185
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
PCL and PCL PCL Settings Symbol Set Select from a list Select any one
Postscript of symbol sets. of several
Settings available
symbol sets
from the
control panel.
A symbol set is
a unique
grouping of all
the characters
in a font. The
factory default
value for this
option is PC-8.
Either PC-8 or
PC-850 are
recommended
for line-draw
characters.
PCL and PCL PCL Settings Append CR to Enabled When enabled,
Postscript LF this option
Settings Disabled* appends a
carriage
return to each
line feed
encountered
in backwards-
compatible
PCL jobs.
PCL and PCL PCL Settings Suppress Enabled This option is
Postscript Blank Pages for users who
Settings Disabled* are generating
their own PCL,
which could
include extra
form feeds
that would
cause blank
pages to be
printed. When
the On option
is selected,
form feeds are
ignored if the
page is blank.
186 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
PCL and PCL PCL Settings Media Source Standard* Use to select
Postscript Mapping and maintain
Settings Classic input trays by
number when
you are not
using the
printer driver,
or when the
software
program has
no option for
tray selection.
The following
options are
available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on
newer HP
LaserJet
models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on HP
LaserJet 4 and
older models.
Print Quality General Toner A sliding bar Lighten or
Density appears with the darken the
indicator set in print on the
the middle page by
between Less changing the
and More. toner density
setting.
Print Quality General REt Disabled Use this
setting to
Enabled* enable or
disable
Resolution
Enhancement
technology
(REt), which
produces
smoother
angles, curves,
and edges.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 187
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Print Quality Image Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to
Registration be adjusted
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Depends
upon the
number of
trays installed
188 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Print Quality Image Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 Shift the
Registration Horizontal mm margin
Shift alignment to
center the
Front-side image on the
Vertical Shift page from top
to bottom and
Back-side
from left to
Horizontal
right. You can
Shift
also align the
Back-side image on the
Vertical Shift front with the
image printed
on the back.
The direction
that is
perpendicular
to the way the
paper passes
through the
printer is
referred to as
X. This is also
known as the
scan direction.
X1 is the scan
direction for a
single-sided
page or for the
second side of
a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction
for the first
side of a two-
sided page.
The direction
that the paper
feeds through
the printer is
referred to as
Y. Y1 is the
feed direction
for a single-
sided page or
for the second
side of a two-
sided page. Y2
is the feed
direction for
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu first side 189
the(MFP)
of a two-sided
page.
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Print Quality Image Print Test Use the Print
Registration Page Test Page
option to print
a page to test
the image
registration. It
provides
alignment
guides in the X
and Y
directions so
you can
determine
which
adjustments
are necessary.
Print Quality Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every
Behavior page
Sense first page
Sense
transparency
only
Print Quality Auto Sense All Other Sense first page
Behavior Trays
Sense
transparency
only
190 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from Print mode Select from a list Changing the
types a list of of paper types Print mode
paper types setting is
that the Reset Paper usually the
printer Types first thing to
supports. try to resolve
The print-quality
available problems.
options are Problems can
the same for include toner
each paper not sticking
type. well to the
page, a faint
image of the
page repeated
on the same
or following
page,
incorrect
gloss level,
and so on.
Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from Resistance Normal* Use this
types a list of mode setting to
paper types Up 1 correct print
that the quality
Up 2
printer problems in
supports. low-humidity
The environments
available and highly
options are resistive
the same for paper.
each paper
type. Use the Up
options to
solve print
quality
problems that
are related to
faded images
or scattered
toner on
certain paper
types.
The Up
options raise
the secondary
transfer bias.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 191
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from Paper curl Normal* Use this
types a list of mode setting to
paper types Reduced reduce paper
that the curl in print
printer jobs.
supports.
The
available
options are
the same for
each paper
type.
Print Quality Optimize Line Detail Normal* Use this
setting if you
Off have
scattered
Alternate
lines in printed
pages.
Print Quality Optimize Moisture Normal*
Control
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Envelope Normal
control
Reduced Temp
Print Quality Optimize Tray 1 Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Background Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Uniformity Normal
Control
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Print Quality Optimize Cac03 Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Best Normal Off
On
192 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Print Quality Optimize Tracking Off
Control
On
Print Quality Optimize Registration Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Transfer Normal
Control
Alternate 1
Print Quality Optimize Moisture Normal
Control
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Reset Reset
Optimize
Print Quality Edge Control Off
Light
Normal*
Maximum
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 193
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Use Exclusively* Controls how
Requested the printer
Tray When available handles jobs
that have
specified a
specific input
tray. Two
options are
available:
Exclusively:
The printer
never selects
a different tray
when the user
has indicated
that a specific
tray should be
used, even if
that tray is
empty.
When
available: The
printer pulls
from another
tray if the
specified tray
is empty, even
though the
specific tray
was indicated
for the job.
194 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Manually Always prompt* Indicate
Feed Prompt whether a
Prompt on prompt should
mismatch appear when
the type or
size for a job
does not
match the
specified tray
and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options
are available:
Always: A
prompt always
displays
before using
the
multipurpose
tray.
Prompt on
mismatch: A
prompt
displays only if
the size or
type do not
match or the
tray is empty.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 195
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Size/Type Display* Controls
Prompt whether the
Do not display tray
configuration
message
displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options
are available:
Display:
Shows the tray
configuration
message
when a tray is
closed. The
user is able to
configure the
tray settings
directly from
this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the
tray
configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.
196 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Use Another Allow* Use to turn on
Tray or off the
Do not allow control panel
prompt to
select another
tray when the
specified tray
is empty. Two
options are
available:
Allow: When
this option is
selected the
user is
prompted to
either add
paper to the
selected tray
or to choose a
different tray.
This is the
factory
default.
Do not allow:
When this
option is
selected, the
user is not
given the
option of
selecting a
different tray.
The printer
prompts the
user to add
paper to the
tray that was
initially
selected.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 197
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Alternative Off* Use to load
Letterhead letterhead or
Mode On preprinted
paper into the
tray the same
way for all
print jobs,
whether you
are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to
both sides of
the sheet.
When this
option is
selected, load
the paper as
you would for
printing on
both sides.
See the user
documentatio
n that came
with the
printer for
instructions
about loading
letterhead for
printing on
both sides.
When this
option is
selected, the
printer speed
slows to the
speed
required for
printing on
both sides.
198 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how
Pages the printer
Always handles two-
sided jobs
(duplexing).
Two options
are available:
Automatic:
Choose this
option to skip
printing blank
sides during a
two-sided
print job. The
printer can
print jobs
faster when
blank sides
are skipped.
Always:
Choose this
option to print
all sides of a
two-sided job,
even if one
side is blank.
This might be
preferable for
certain jobs
that use paper
types such as
letterhead or
prepunched
paper.
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 199
Table 4-5 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Manage Trays Override A4/ Yes* Prints on
Letter letter-size
No paper when an
A4 job is sent
but no A4-size
paper is
loaded in the
printer (or to
print on A4
paper when a
letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size
paper is
loaded). This
option will also
override A3
with ledger-
size paper and
ledger with A3-
size paper.
Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly
or noise isolation, run the diagnostic test when the front, right or toner supply
(model specific) door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation.
Defeat the front door interlock
1. Open the front door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card,
into a strip, and insert the strip into the slot for the door interlock logic
switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door
interlock.
200 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-49 Defeat the front door interlock
Defeat the right door interlock
1. Open the right door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card,
into a strip, and insert the strip into the slot for the door interlock logic
switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door
interlock.
Figure 4-50 Defeat the right door interlock
Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X57945 models)
1. Open the toner supply door.
Defeating interlocks 201
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card,
into a strip, and insert the strip into the slot for the door interlock logic
switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door
interlock.
Figure 4-51 Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X57945 models)
LED diagnostics (formatter)
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using formatter LEDs.
Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.
202 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-52 LEDs (formatter)
Table 4-6 LEDs (formatter)
Item Description
Heartbeat LED Indicates that the formatter is functioning.
LED diagnostics (formatter) 203
Table 4-6 LEDs (formatter) (continued)
Item Description
HP Jetdirect LEDs (2 LEDs) Indicates network activity and link status.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different
printer be installed during the repair or troubleshooting processes. The
formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is installed in
and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.
Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:
● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported
cartridges information change and might make a product unusable.
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover
the costs of the repair in the form of a product replacement. There is no
method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is installed.
This part contains components that are electrostatic discharge (ESD)
sensitive. To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, always touch the sheet-
metal chassis to ground yourself before touching an ESD sensitive part.
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While
the printer is initializing after it is turned on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns
off. When the printer has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED
pulses on and off.
The following list describes the heartbeat LED operation while the printer is
executing the firmware boot process.
NOTE: If after initialization, the heartbeat LED is not solid green, see Table
4-7 Heartbeat LED, printer operational.
Heartbeat LED, printer firmware boot
● Green
– Blinking: The printer is correctly functioning.
204 Chapter 4 Solve problems
– Solid: The FW has not yet booted.
● Yellow (Amber)
– Blinking: The control panel is not detected.
– Solid: The FFC between the formatter and DC controller is not connected
or is damaged.
● Red
– Solid: Valid SPI code; there is a problem releasing ASIC and running the
BIOS.
Solid: BIOS initiates PROSAC to change the LED from red to green.
Solid: PROSAC is not running (No ROM or SPI code).
– Blinking: Valid SPI code not found.
● Off: No 5V or 3.3V PROSAC power.
The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation when the printer
completes the firmware boot process and is in the Ready state.
Table 4-7 Heartbeat LED, printer operational
Green ● Normal operation
– Formatter is operating normally
– Firmware is operating normally
– Control panel is connected
Yellow ● Formatter cannot connect to the control panel
– Check control panel connections
– Verify control panel functionality
Red ● Formatter error or failure
– Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error
– Power on self test (formatter) failed
– Diagnostic (formatter) failed
LED diagnostics (formatter) 205
Table 4-7 Heartbeat LED, printer operational (continued)
Off TIP: The heartbeat LED is off if the power cable is disconnected, the product
power switch is in the off position, or the product is in Sleep Mode.
● Firmware or system freeze
– Check control panel for an error message
– Control panel failure
NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power
off, and then on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. When the printer is
connected to a properly working network through a network cable, the yellow
LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status.
Figure 4-53 Yellow and green LEDs on the network port
A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed. For link failures, check all of the network cable connections.
206 Chapter 4 Solve problems
In addition, try to manually configure the network card link speed setting by
using the printer control panel. To change the link speed, complete the following
steps.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Settings button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Touch the desired link speed setting, and then touch the Done button.
Scanner tests (MFP)
Learn about troubleshooting the MFP scanner tests.
Use the scanner tests
The Scanner Tests screen shows the sensor name, sensor state (active or
inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated).
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and select the
Support Tools item.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Scanner Tests
● – Sensors
3. Touch the sensor name on the Scanner Tests screen to display a sensor
location graphic on the control panel display.
4. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to
verify the sensor state (active or inactive).
● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name
illuminates green when the sensor is active.
Scanner tests (MFP) 207
● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name
illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one
each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated).
For example, opening the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed cover
Toggle item count two times—once when the door is opened, and once
when the door is closed.
5. Select the Reset sensors item to reset the Toggle count item.
-or-
Touch the Cancel button to exit the Scanner Tests screen, and then touch the
Cancel button again to return the Diagnostic Tests menu.
Scanner test sensors
● ADF paper present
● ADF Y (length)
● ADF jam cover
● ADF paper path deskew
● ADF paper path pick success
● Paper path sensor 1 (unreachable)
● Flatbed Y (length)
● Flatbed cover
Disable cartridge check
Learn about the disable cartridge check troubleshooting diagnostic.
CAUTION: Do not perform a disable cartridge check on color printers that
use a two-part cartridge design. Doing so might result in toner cross
contamination in the supply lines.
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the
printer when a toner cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are
ignored while the printer is in this mode.
When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print
internal pages (the print quality pages will be the most useful). This test can be
208 Chapter 4 Solve problems
used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate print-quality problems
that are related to a toner cartridge.
NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning
the disable cartridge check diagnostic.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Disable Cartridge Check
Print/stop test
Learn about the print/stop test troubleshooting diagnostic.
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-
formation defects and jams within the engine.
During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test
can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when
the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop
from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print
time, the printer can recover in one of two ways.
Printer recovery (print/stop test)
● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the
Troubleshooting menu before the timer times out.
● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to
restart the engine and return it to a normal state.
Common print/stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops
● 600 ms: The page has passed the registration area and the leading edge is
just short of entering the fuser. The image can be seen on the paper but has
not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause might be the drum, transfer
roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.
Print/stop test 209
● 1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The
image has gone through the fuser. If the defect was not visible prior to the
fuser, and is visible after the fuser, then the fuser it is the likely cause of the
print quality defect. Inspect the fuser for damage, debris, or labels stuck to
the fuser. Replace the fuser. Discuss media specifications and proper care
of the fuser with the customer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Print/Stop Test
3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.
Individual component diagnostics
Learn about printer individual component diagnostics.
Paper path test
Learn about the paper path test troubleshooting diagnostic.
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages. Use these pages to
isolate the cause of jams.
To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, and specify the number of
copies to print. Print multiple copies to help isolate intermittent problems. The
following options become available after beginning the diagnostic feature:
● Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no
duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and
select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start
the test.
● Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.
● Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,
10, 50, 100, or 500.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
210 Chapter 4 Solve problems
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Paper Path Test
3. Select the paper path test options for the test.
Paper path sensors test
Learn about the paper path sensors test troubleshooting diagnostic.
This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of
sensor status while printing internal pages.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Paper Path Sensors
3. Touch the Start button to run the test.
Individual component test
Learn about the individual component test troubleshooting diagnostic.
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If the Repeat option
is enabled from the drop-down menu, the test cycles the component on and off.
This process continues for two minutes, and then the test terminates.
NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component
tests. A control panel display prompt appears to indicate removing the toner
cartridge, during certain tests.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
Paper path sensors test 211
● Diagnostic Tests
● Component Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.
Manual sensor test
Learn about the manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.
The Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name (model
specific), sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor
has been toggled (activated).
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Manual Sensor Test
3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control panel display to
verify the sensor state (active or inactive).
● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name
illuminates green when the sensor is active.
● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name
illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one
each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated).
For example, opening a door increments the appropriate sensor item
count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door
is closed.
Tray/bin manual sensor test
Learn about the tray/bin manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.
The Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor
name (model specific), sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times
the sensor has been toggled (activated).
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
212 Chapter 4 Solve problems
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test
3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control panel display to
verify the sensor state (active or inactive).
● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name
illuminates green when the sensor is active.
● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name
illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one
each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated).
For example, opening a door increments the appropriate sensor item
count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door
is closed.
Diagrams: Block diagrams
View block diagrams for the printer.
Diagrams: External plug and port locations
View printer external plugs and ports diagrams.
Diagrams: Block diagrams 213
Figure 4-54 External plug and port locations
Item Description
1 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
2 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 interface port
3 Fax MFP models only: Telephone "line out" port (for attaching an extension
phone, answering machine, or other device)
NOTE: This port should remain covered when not in use.
4 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port (for job storage and private printing)
NOTE: This port should remain covered when not in use.
5 Fax MFP models only: Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to
the printer)
6 Power connection
Sensors and switches
View printer and paper feeder sensor and switch diagrams.
214 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Sensors and switches, printer base
Figure 4-55 Sensors and switches, printer base
DUP_FL_SNS
OUT_FULL_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
PAPOUT-L_SNS
LOOP_SNS
REFEED_SNS
MS
REG_SNS
RREREG_SNS
MP_PAP_SNS
TRANS_SNS
CST_FACE_SNS
CST_PAP_SNS
CST_SIZE1
CST_SIZE2
CST
CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Table 4-8 Sensors and switches, printer base
Abbreviation Component
CST_SIZE1 (X557/X57945/ Tray 2 media size switch 1
X58045 models only)
CST_SIZE2 (X557/X57945/ Tray 2 media size switch 2
X58045 models only)
CST_SIZE3 (X557/X57945/ Tray 2 media size switch 3
X58045 models only)
CST_SIZE4 (X557/X57945/ Tray 2 media size switch 4
X58045 models only)
CST (5700/5800 models only) Tray 2 cassette presence switch
DUP_FL_SNS Duplex flapper position sensor
OUT_FULL_SNS FD1 media full sensor
CST_PAP_SNS Tray 2 media out sensor
CST_FACE_SNS Tray 2 media surface sensor
LOOP_SNS Fuser loop sensor
Sensors and switches 215
Table 4-8 Sensors and switches, printer base (continued)
Abbreviation Component
REFEED_SNS (X557/X57945/ Duplex feed sensor
X58045 models only)
REG_SNS Registration sensor
MP_PAP_SNS Tray 1 media out sensor
PAPOUT-M_SNS Fuser output sensor 2
TRANS_SNS (X57945 models Tray 2 feed sensor
only)
MS (Media sensor PCA) Media sensor
PAPOUT-L_SNS Fuser output sensor 1
Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder
Figure 4-56 Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder
M12
CL6
SR24 SR23
SR22 SW16
SW4
SW6
SW5 SW7
SR21
M15
Table 4-9 Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder
Abbreviation Component name
SW4 Paper feeder media size switch 1
SW5 Paper feeder media size switch 2
SW6 Paper feeder media size switch 3
SW7 Paper feeder media size switch 4
SW16 Paper feeder door switch
SR21 Paper feeder lifter motor rotation sensor
216 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-9 Sensors and switches, 550-sheet paper feeder (continued)
Abbreviation Component name
SR22 Paper feeder media out sensor
SR23 Paper feeder feed sensor
SR24 Paper feeder media surface sensor
Sensors and switches, HCI
Figure 4-57 Sensors and switches, HCI
M13
CL2
SR5 SR4
SR3 SW13
SR6
SW9
SW10
SW8
M14
Table 4-10 Sensors and switches, HCI
Abbreviation Component name
SW8 HCI cassette lifting plate position switch
SW9 HCI cassette media size switch 1
SW10 HCI cassette media size switch 2
SW13 HCI door switch
SR3 HCI cassette media out sensor
SR4 HCI feed sensor
Sensors and switches 217
Table 4-10 Sensors and switches, HCI (continued)
Abbreviation Component name
SR5 HCI cassette media surface sensor
SR6 HCI cassette pickup rotation sensor
Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Figure 4-58 Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker
PS207
PS206 PS204
PS201
PS205
PS211
PS202
PS212 PS213
PS208 PS214 PS203
PS209 PS215
SW3
SW4
PS210 SW21
Table 4-11 Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Abbreviation Component name
PS201 Bin 1 media presence sensor
PS202 Stapler-stacker exit sensor
PS203 Staple inlet sensor
PS204 Y alignment home position sensor
PS205 Bin 1 media full sensor 1
PS206 Alienation home position sensor
PS207 Jogger home position sensor
PS208 Bin 2 media presence sensor
PS209 Bin 2 media full sensor
PS210 Stapler-stacker inlet sensor
PS211 Bin 1 upper limit sensor
PS212 Bin 1 lower limit sensor
PS213 Staple low sensor
218 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-11 Sensors and switches, 3-bin stapler-stacker (continued)
Abbreviation Component name
PS214 Staple ready sensor
PS215 Staple home position sensor
SW3 Stapler-stacker door switch
SW4 Staple door switch
SW21 Interlock switch
Diagrams: Major component locations
View printer major component locations diagrams.
Diagrams: Major component locations 219
Major components, printer base
Figure 4-59 Major components, printer base (1 of 5)
8
1
6
7
Item Description Item Description
1 Fuser drive assembly 5 Intermediate transfer belt
(ITB) assembly
2 Secondary transfer (T2) 6 Pickup drive assembly
assembly
3 Pickup assembly 7 Registration assembly
4 Formatter cage assembly 8 Waste toner duct assembly
220 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-60 Major components, printer base (2 of 5)
2
6
3
Item Description Item Description
1 Delivery assembly 4 Fuser
2 Interlock assembly 5 Laser scanner assembly
3 Lifter drive assembly 6 Registration density sensor
assembly
Diagrams: Major component locations 221
Figure 4-61 Major components, printer base (3 of 5)
4
2
Item Description Item Description
1 Main drive assembly 3 Tray 2 media size detect
assembly
2 Auto close assembly 4 Pre-exposure PCA holder
assembly
222 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-62 Major components, printer base (4 of 5)
6 2
Item Description Item Description
1 Waste toner feed assembly 4 Toner supply assembly
(X57945 models) (X57945 models)
2 Feed drive assembly 5 Toner supply buffer
(X57945 models) assembly/intermediate pipe
(X57945 models)
3 Toner supply motor 6 Toner supply drive assembly
assembly (X57945 models) (X57945 models)
Diagrams: Major component locations 223
Figure 4-63 Major components, printer base (5 of 5)
Item Description
1 Feed assembly (X57945 models)
Motors, printer base
Figure 4-64 Motors, printer base
1
6
2
5
4
Item Description Item Description
1 Fuser motor 4 Developer motor
2 Duplex motor 5 Drum motor
3 ITB motor 6 Developer alienation motor
224 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Fans, printer base
Figure 4-65 Fans, printer base
3
1
Item Description Item Description
1 Fuser fan 3 Cartridge fan
2 Power supply fan
Diagrams: Major component locations 225
Rollers and toner collection unit, printer base
Figure 4-66 Rollers and toner collection unit, printer base
5
2
Item Description Item Description
1 Secondary transfer roller 4 Tray 1 pickup roller assembly
assembly
2 Tray 2 separation roller 5 Tray 2 pickup roller
assembly assembly
3 Tray 1 separation roller 6 Toner collection unit
assembly
226 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Printed circuit assemblies, printer base
Figure 4-67 Printed circuit assemblies, printer base (1 of 2)
7
2
6
3
Item Description Item Description
1 Low-voltage power supply 5 Rear PCA
2 DC controller 6 Environment sensor PCA
3 Drive PCA 7 Drum home position sensor
PCA
4 Right PCA 8 High-voltage power supply
Diagrams: Major component locations 227
Figure 4-68 Printed circuit assemblies, printer base (2 of 2)
Item Description
1 Feed/toner supply controller PCA
Major components, 550-sheet paper feeder
Figure 4-69 Covers and doors, 550-sheet paper feeder
5 1
3 2
Item Description Item Description
1 Rear cover 4 Front left cover
2 Right door 5 Left cover
3 Front right cover
228 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-70 Major parts, 550-sheet paper feeder
4 1
Item Description Item Description
1 Lifter drive assembly 4 Paper feeder cassette
media size detect assembly
2 Pickup drive assembly 5 Auto close assembly
3 Pickup assembly
Figure 4-71 Printed circuit assemblies, 550-sheet paper feeder
Item Description
1 Controller PCA
Diagrams: Major component locations 229
Figure 4-72 Cassette assemblies, 550-sheet paper feeder
2
1
Item Description Item Description
1 Cassette separation roller 2 Cassette pickup roller
assembly assembly
Major components, HCI
Figure 4-73 Doors and covers, HCI
5 1
4 3
Item Description Item Description
1 Rear cover 4 Front left cover
2 Right door 5 Left cover
3 Rear lower cover
230 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-74 Main parts, HCI (1 of 2)
4 1
Item Description Item Description
1 Pickup drive assembly 4 Auto close assembly
2 Lifter drive assembly 5 Pickup alienation assembly
3 Pickup assembly
Diagrams: Major component locations 231
Figure 4-75 Main parts, HCI (2 of 2)
Item Description
1 Cassette assembly
Figure 4-76 Printed circuit assemblies, HCI
Item Description
1 Controller PCA
232 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-77 Cassette assemblies, HCI
2
1
Item Description Item Description
1 Cassette separation roller 2 Cassette pickup roller
assembly assembly
Major components, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Figure 4-78 Doors and covers, 3-bin stapler-stacker
2
8 3
4
7
51
16
Item Description Item Description
1 Rear cover 6 Staple rear cover
2 Right corner cover 7 Staple door
3 Right upper cover 8 Staple cover
4 Stapler-stacker door 9 Rear inner cover
5 Right lower cover
Diagrams: Major component locations 233
Figure 4-79 Main parts, 3-bin stapler-stacker (1 of 2)
6
1
Item Description Item Description
1 Upper feed assembly 4 Jogger assembly
2 Stapler-stacker feed motor 5 Solenoid assembly
3 Stapler assembly 6 Output bin 1 assembly
234 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-80 Main parts, 3-bin stapler-stacker (2 of 2)
Item Description Item Description
1 MBM fan 2 Lower feed assembly
Figure 4-81 Printed circuit assemblies, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Item Description
1 Controller PCA
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations
View printed circuit assembly (PCA) diagrams.
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 235
DC controller PCA connections
Figure 4-82 DC controller PCA connections
J121 J130 J132 J135 J133 J131
J125 J127 J138
J150 J124
J137
J128
J139
J126
J136
J140
J141 J142
J112
J108
J105
J115 J145
J114 J104
J107
J146 J151
J109 J103
J106
Item Description Item Description
J103 Drive PCA J130 Drive PCA
J104 Drive PCA J131 High-voltage power supply
(X57945 models)
J105 Formatter J132 High-voltage power supply
(X57945 models)
J106 Not used J133 High-voltage power supply
(5700/5800 models)
J107 Laser scanner assembly J135 High-voltage power supply
(5700/5800 models)
J108 Formatter J136 Rear PCA
J109 Low-voltage power supply J137 Rear PCA (X557 models)
J112 Front door switch J138 Rear PCA (5700/5800
models)
Right door switch
J114 Right PCA 139 Rear PCA (X57945 models)
J115 Right PCA J140 Not used
236 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Item Description Item Description
J121 Duplex flapper solenoid J141 Not used
FD1 media full sensor
Duplex flapper position
sensor
J124 Output accessory (MFP J142 Not used
models)
J125 Fuser J145 Not used
J126 Not used J146 Not used
J127 Duplex motor J150 Cartridge access release
motor (X557 models)
Cartridge access home
position sensor (X557
models)
J128 Fuser J151 E-label (X57945 models)
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 237
Formatter PCA connections 5700/X557 models
Figure 4-83 Formatter PCA connections
J8 J1
J14 J24 J17
J2
J4 ASIC
J16
J28
J5
J12
J10
MEMORY
J7
J26
J30
J6
BATTERY
J21
238 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Item Description Item Description
Item Description Item Description
J2 Island of Data (IOD) J16 USB device
J4 USB (walk-up) J17 LAN
J5 UISB (HIP) J21 Engine power
J6 HDD riser J24 BASH
J7 Engine VIF J26 USB host
J8 Control panel J28 USB device
J10 eMMC J30 USB host
J12 DIMM
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 239
Figure 4-84 Formatter PCA connections 5800/X57945 models
J96
J8
J24 J24
J4 BATTERY J9
J18
J29 J12
J32 J5
J21
J64
ASIC
J22
J38
MEMORY
J7 J20
J26
J15 J11
J14
240 Chapter
Item
4 SolveDescription
problems Item Description
J2 Control Panel J21 LAN
Item Description Item Description
J5 FAX J22 USB Device
J7 SC Controller/Engine VIF J24 BASH
J8 Stapler J26 EMMC
J9 USB (Walk-up) J28 JETLINK
J11 Trusted Platform Module J32 IOD/MEMORY
(TPM)
J12 USB (HIP) J37 WIFI
J14 Engine power J38 USB Device
J15 HDD riser J64 SICB Power
J18 OCR Accelerator J96 Scanner
J20 USB host
550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors
Figure 4-85 550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors
J531 J541 J542 J522
J521
J511
J552
J512
J554 J551 J532
J544
Item Description Item Description
J511 Printer or paper feeder J541 Media size switch 1
Media size switch 2
Media size switch 3
Media size switch 4
J512 Not used J542 Not used
J521 Not used J544 Door switch
J522 Not used J551 Lifter motor
Lifter motor rotation sensor
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 241
Item Description Item Description
J531 Feed motor J552 Not used
Pickup clutch
J532 Media out sensor J554 Not used
Feed sensor
Media surface sensor
HCI controller PCA connectors
Figure 4-86 HCI controller PCA connectors
J531 J541 J542 J522
J521
J511
J552
J512
J554 J551 J532
J544
Item Description Item Description
J511 Printer or paper feeder J541 Not used
J512 Not used J542 Media size switch 1
Media size switch 2
Lifting plate position switch
J521 Not used J544 Door switch
J522 Not used J551 Not used
J531 Feed motor J552 Lifter motor rotation sensor
Pickup clutch
J532 Media out sensor J554 Lifter motor
Feed sensor
Media surface sensor
242 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA connectors
Figure 4-87 3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA connectors
J503
J401 J301
J402
J202 J501
J104
J302 J102
J103
J204
J105
J203
J201
J101
J505 J502 J205
Item Description Item Description
J101 Printer J205 Staple door switch
J102 Not used J301 Stapler-stacker output
motor
Y alignment home position
sensor
Bin 1 media full sensor 1
J103 Not used J302 Y alignment motor
Alienation home position
sensor
Stapler-stacker door switch
J104 Not used J401 Jogger motor
Jogger home position
sensor
J105 Not used J402 Stapler-stacker feed motor
Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 243
Item Description Item Description
J201 Interlock switch J501 Bin 2 media presence
sensor
Bin 2 media full sensor
Stapler-stacker inlet sensor
Bin 2 flapper solenoid
J202 Lifter motor J502 Inlet flapper solenoid
Bin 1 upper limit sensor
Bin 1 lower limit sensor SS
inlet sensor
J203 Staple motor J503 Bin 1 media presence
sensor
Stapler-stacker exit sensor
Staple inlet sensor
Stamp solenoid
J204 Staple low sensor J505 Fan
Staple ready sensor
Staple home position
sensor
Diagrams: General timing chart
View the printer timing chart diagram.
244 Chapter 4 Solve problems
I. GENERAL TIMING CHART
Timing chart two consecutive prints on LTR paper (Full-color 1/1 speed mode on Hopper)
Print command
Operation STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
1 TOP signal
2 Developer alienation motor
3 Scanner motor
4 Pickup motor
Pickup motor
5
Figure 4-88 Timing chart
6 Tray 2 pickup clutch
7 Registration sensor
8 Fuser output sensor
9 Drum motor
10 ITB motor
11 Developer motor
12 Fuser motor
13 Primary charging bias (YMC)
14 Primary charging bias (K)
15 Developing bias (Y)
16 Developing bias (M)
17 Developing bias (C)
18 Developing bias (K)
19 T1 bias (YMC)
20 T1 bias (K)
21 T2 bias
Diagrams: General timing chart
245
A-1-1
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams
View the printer circuit diagrams.
246 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-89 General circuit diagram, base printer (1 of 7)
J336 J338
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
<5700/X557/5800/6700/6800>
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
+3.3VB2
+24VA
PGND
+24VA
PGND
J338D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J338LH
Laser scanner ass’y
12
11
10
J338L
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J336AD
12
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J954 J953
J336ADH
M M
SCN_MTR_12st SCN_MTR_34st
Rear PCA
4 3 2 1
J137 J136
J112
1 2 3 4
J140
DC controller PCA 15 17
<5700/X557/5800/6700/6800>
GND
GND
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
<5700/X5575800/X57954>
E-label E-label E-label E-label
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24V_ILK_SW 24V_ILK_SW
LIFT_MTR LIFT_SNS
<Depends on the model.
Y_1st M_2st C_3st k_4st
See Note 1 last base diagram.>
+3.3VCFU2
GND
+3.3VB2
J951 J950 J949 J952 M
2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
SOLD117
SOLD118
J955
FT10 FT9 FT7 FT8 2 1
2 1 1 2 3
J914
5
2 1
J917 2 1
2 1
FR_DOOR_SW
R_DOOR_SW
15
14
13
12
11
10
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SGND
+24VA
+24VA
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
15 17
J202
1 2
J217
4 3 2 1
J331 J332 J333 J334 Rear PCA J346
J322 J321
<Depends on the model. See Note 1 last base diagram.>
J326 J337
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
<X57945/X654X677>
<5700/X557/6700/6800>
PGND
PGND
+24VA
+24VA
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
FEED_MTR FEED_CL FSR_MTR ITB_BK_MTR 3DRM_MTR 4DEV_MTR
FSR_FAN
T1_SL
M CL M M M M M
SL
2 1
J944B J943 J944 J942 J941 J939 J940 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
+24VB_0
+24VB_0
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+24VB
+24VB
PGND
PGND
PGND
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J937 J936 J935 J934
4 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1
J209B J209 J216 J215 J214 J210 J206 J203
CST_SIZE1 CST_SIZE2 CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Drive PCA
4
J207 J207 J208
J212 J211 J205 J213
30 27 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
SGND
SGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J931D
+3.3VC
GND
3 2 1
J931DH
1 2 3
J931L
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 J932 J933
J931 J930
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CRG_FAN M
30 27 DC controller PCA
DRM_HP4_SNS DEV_HP_SNS DRM_HP123_SNS
J122 J127 DEV_MTR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 J103 J104
+3.3VC
GND
+24VB
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
RD sensor PCA Media sensor PCA
<Depends on the model. See Note 3 last base diagram.>
REFEED_CL
J372 MP_PAP_SNS
<Depends on the model. See Note 4 for details.>
<5700/X557/5800/6700/6800>
2
N.C
CST_PAP_SNS REFEED_SNS REG_SNS CL RREREG_SNS
12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 MP_SL
1
J915 J916 J235 J923 J377 J920 J919 SL J925 J924
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12
11
10
3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
M M
+5VC
GND
CST_FACE_SNS LOOP_SNS Media sensor
DUP_MTR DUP_MTR PCA
SOLD109
SOLD108
J236 J910 2 1
GND_E
12
11
10
J318L
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 2 1 3 2 1
J318DH
J318D
3 2 1 1 2
ENC_SNS
Encoder PCA 12 J375
J373
J374
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+3.3VCFU
+3.3VCFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
+5VC
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J316 J315 J314 J311 J313 J312 J317
Right PCA J301 J302
19 13
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
KB_FAN
2
<X57945/X654/X677>
DUP_FL_SNS DUP_SL POWER_SW_PCA
T1_HP_SNS TCU_FULL_SNS 4st 3st
SL 3 2 1
LED4
LED3
2 1
LED5
J927
1 2 3 J912 J918 J1 J1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
TCU_VSCW_SNS 1 2
OUT_FULL_SNS 2 1 J706L
J929L J706DH
J929DH J379P J706D
J928 J929D J911
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
PGND(BL)
+5VAFU
+5VAFU
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
J351 J352 J354 J353 J355
J262 J261
25 29 Hihg-voltage power supply PCA
J121L
<Depends on the model.
See Note 5 last base diagram.>
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13
12
11
10
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J121DH
J121D
+5VC
+3.3VCFU
GND
+24VAFU
+5VAFU
GND
+3.3VCFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
GND
1
+24VAFU3
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 29 19 13
J121
J132 J131 DC controller PCA J114 J115
C
D
A
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams 247
Chapter 4 Solve problems 248
6
1 60 1 35 50 +24VBFU3 50
59 2 34 49 N.C 49 1 28
2
3 33 48 GND 48 2 27
3 58 3 26
4 32 47 47
4 57 5 31 46 46 4 25
56 6 30 45 GND 45 5 24
5
7 29 44 44 6 23
6 55 7 22
8 28 43 GND 43
7 54 9 27 42 42 8 +3.3VL 21
53 10 26 41 GND 41 9 20
J405
J101
J461
J108
8
60
60
35
35
11 25 40 40 10 +3.3VL 19
9 52 11 18
12 24 39 39
10 51 13 23 38 38 12 17
50 14 22 37 37 13 16
11
15 21 36 36 14 15
J182
12 49
28
15 14
J183
16 20 35 35
28
13 48 17 19 34 34 16 13
47 18 18 33 33 17 12
14
19 17 32 32 18 GND 11
15 46 19 10
20 16 31 31
45 20 9
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
16 21 15 30 30
44 22 14 29 29 21 8
17
22 7
Formatter
13
DC controller PCA
43 23 28 28
18 12 GND 23 6
24 27 27
J107
J181
5
GND
50
50
19 42 25 11 26 26 24 5
41 26 10 25 25 25 4
20 GND
27 9 24 24 26 3
21 40 27 N.C 2
28 8 23 23
22 39 7 28 +24VBFU3 1
29 22 22
38 30 6 21 21
DC controller PCA
23
31 5 20 20
24 37
32 4 19 19
25 36 33 3 18 GND 18
Laser PCA
26 35 34 2 17 17
35 1 16 16
27 34
15 15
28 33 14 14
29 32 13 13
31 12 12
30
11 11
31 30 10 10
32 29 9 GND 9
28 8 8
33
7 7
34 27 6 6
26 5 5
Laser PCA
35
25 4 4
36
3 3
37 24 2 2
38 23 1 1
39 22
40 21
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
41 20
42 19
43 18
44 17
45 16
46 15
4
47 14
48 13
Formatter
49 12
50 11
51 10
9
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
52
53 8
54 7
55 6
56 5
57 4 64 +24VBFU3 64
58 3 63 N.C 63
59 2 62 GND 62
60 1 61 61
60 60 1 36
59 GND 59 2 35
58 58 3 34
4 33
57 GND 57 5 32
J192
J193
36
36
56 56 6 31
55 7 30
GND 55
8 29
54 54 9 28
53 GND 53 10 27
52 52 11 26
12 25
1 35 51 51
<6700/X654/6800/X677>
13 24
2 34 50 50 14 23
3 33 15 22
49 49
4 32 16 21
5 31 48 48 17 20
6 30 47 47 18 19
3
7 29 19 18
46 46
J102
J191
8 28 20 17
64
64
9 27 45 45 21 16
10 26 44 44 22 15
J471
35
11 25 23 14
43 43
12 24 24 13
13 23 42 42 25 +3.3VL 12
35
14 22 41 41 26 11
15 21 J472 27 +3.3VL 10
40 40
16 20 28 9
17 19 39 39 29 8
18 GND
Laser PCA
18 38 38 30 7
<5700~/X557/6700/X654>
19 17 31 6
37 37
20 16 32 GND 5
21 15 36 36 33 4
22 14 35 35 34 GND 3
23 13 35 N.C 2
34 34
24 12 36 +24VBFU3 1
25 11 33 33
26 10 32 32
27 9
31 31
Laser PCA
28 8
29 7 30 30
30 6 29 29
DC controller PCA
31 5
28 28
32 4
33 3 27 27
34 2 26 26
35 1
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
1
1
20 20
2
19 19
18 18
17 17
1
1
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
J7
1
5
7 7
2
4
J1822
6 6
3
3
5 5
4
2
4 4
5
1
3 3
2 2
1 1
Memory PCA
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 4-90 General circuit diagram, base printer (2 of 7)
Figure 4-91 General circuit diagram, base printer (3 of 7)
Fuser (ODF type) <5700/X557/5800/X57945>
H2
J153M
J153F
2 1
J152
J148
1
1
2
2
H1
1
1
2 1
J145M
J145F
6
FU1
FUT1 FUT2
2 1
TH_C TH_F ENCORDER-SNS
FSR-PRS-SNS TH_R
2 1 2 1 2 1
J146
J157 1 2 3
1 2 3
+3.3VM
+3.3VC
GNDM
GNDM
GNDM
GNDM
GND
3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
5
J278B J279B J2002 J2001B J2003 J2010
Fuser ODF PCA
J277B J274C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+3.3VC
GNDA
+24VB
GNDM
+3.3VM
ODF_CUR(GNDM)
GNDMR
+3.3VMR
PAPOUT_L_SNS
PAPOUT-M_SNS
4
3
1
J907B J908B
1 2 3 1 2 3
J906BL
6 5 4 3 2 1
4
J906BDH
MT3
1 2 3 4 5 6
J906BD
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
J905BL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
J905BLB J905BLA
J905BD
J905BDB J905BDA
<5700/X557/5800/X57945~>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
GNDMR
+3.3VMR
GNDM
+3.3VM
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
MT2B
3
Drive PCA
J204B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+3.3VC
+24VB
+24VB
+24VA
+24VA
+24VB
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J130B J125B J128
2
DC controller PCA
J109
29
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3.3VAFU
+5VAFU
+5VC
+3.3VC
GNDB(SGND)
NC
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
+3.3VMR
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GNDMR
+3.3VM
GNDM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2
29
J290B J293B J292B
1
J247B
Low-voltage power supply
C
D
A
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams 249
250
6
PIN3
PIN2
PIN6
PIN5
PIN4
Heater/thermistor
J903C J904D J904C
2 1 2 1 2 1
8 8
5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GNDM 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GNDM 8
Chapter 4 Solve problems
1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1
4 3 2 1 8 8 1 2 1
J276C J287C J283C J281D J281C J284C J286C
J272C J271C
Fuser PCA
J285C
J288C
J280C
J282C
J278C J277C J274C J279C
Fuser (A²ODF type) <5700/X557/5800/X57945>
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
4
N.C
PAPOUT_L_SNS
GNDA
GNDA
+24VB
+24VB
GNDM
2
4
+3.3VC
+3.3VM
GNDMR
+3.3VMR
PAPOUT-M_SNS
+24VBRL
3
1
J907 J908
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 2 1
J909
PIN18C
PIN19C
1 2
3
FSR_PRS_SNS TP
TH_SW
J906L TP1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J906DH
1 2 3 4 5 6
J906D
MT1C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
GND
GND
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
J905CLB J905CLA
J905CL
2
J905BDBB J905BDA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
J905BD
Figure 4-92 General circuit diagram, base printer (4 of 7)
1
<5700/X557/5800/X57945>
A
B
C
D
Figure 4-93 General circuit diagram, base printer (5 of 7)
Fuser (A²ODF type) <6700/X654/6800/X677>
6
PIN3
PIN22
PIN6
PIN5
PIN4
Heater/thermistor
J903 J904B J904
2 1 2 1 2 1
8 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GNDM 1
GNDM 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1
4 3 2 1 8 8 1 2 1
J276 J287 J283 J281B J281 J284 J286
J272 J271
Fuser PCA
5
J285
J288
J280
J282
J278 J277 J274 J279
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
GNDA
+3.3VC
GNDA
+24VB
GNDM
+3.3VM
GNDMR
+3.3VMR
N.C
+24VB
PAPOUT_L_SNS
4
PAPOUT-M_SNS
1
J907 J908
1 2 3 1 2 3
3 2 1
PIN18
PIN19
J909
1 2
FSR_PRS_SNS TP
TH_SW
J906L TP1
6 5 4 3 2 1
J906DH
1 2 3 4 5 6
J906D
MT1
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
J905L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
J905LB J905LA
J905DB J905DA
J905D
<6700/X654/6800/X677~>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Drive PCA
MT2
J204
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3
+3.3VC
+24VB
+24VB
+24VA
+24VA
+24VB
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6
J130 J125 J126
DC controller PCA
J106
J124 J150 J105
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 27
+24VA
+24VA
GND
GND
3.3VB2
GND
<5800/X57945/6800/X677>
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3.3VAFU
+5VAFU
+5VC
+3.3VC
GND
NC
5 4 3 2 1
J150D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J150LH
J124D J150L
1 2 3 4 5
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
+3.3VMR
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GNDMR
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+24_5V
+3.3VM
GNDM
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
N.C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2
27
J1 J245 J290 J293 J292
Formatter
J247
2
Low-voltage power supply
TB402
TB403
TB203
TB202
3 2 1 1 2 3
J926 J301B J250 J244 J241 J248 J246 J243
J149D
5 4 3 2 1
J149DH 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1
J149L
GNDB
PGND
PGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
N.C
GNDA
GNDB
+3.3VC
N.C
ACN
ACH
CAC_SNS 3 2 1
<X557>
<6800/X677>
SOLD119
SOLD120
1 2 3
2 1 4 3 2 1
J379
M
PS_FAN
ACN
ACH
ENV SNS
SOLD101
SOLD102
CAC_MTR
2 1
J243F2
3
2
1
IL101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J201
Drive PCA
1
C
D
A
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams 251
252
6 5 4 3 2 1
<X57945/X654/X677>
D
TRANS_SNS CST_PAP_SNS CST_FACE_SNS
DC controller PCA
J151
J986 J987 J988 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
FEED_CL
R_DOOR_SW
J991D J992D J993D J994D
CL M LIFT_SNS J991DH J992DH J993DH J994DH Rear PCA
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M
J991L J992L J993L J994L J336C
1 2 2 1
J1411L 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOLD31
SOLD30
J411DH M
J976 J411D J999 J998 J982
1 2 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J989
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Chapter 4 Solve problems
N.C
J991 J992 J993 J994
Y_1st M_2st C_3st k_4st
E-label E-label E-label E-label
C
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
+24VAFU3
+24VA
PGND
+3.3VTS
N.C
SGND
+24VA
PGND
+3.3VTS
GND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
3.3VB2
2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J412 J411 J416 J417 J435 J401 J440
Feed/toner-supply controller PCA
J421 J423 J431 J410 J499
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
N.C
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+3.3VB2
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+3.3VTS
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU
+24VAFU2
+24VAFU2
+24VAFU2
+24VAFU2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J980 J979 J978 J977 12
J499D
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J499DH
CST_SIZE1 CST_SIZE2 CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J692D J957D J693D J956D J694D J955D J695D J954D
J692LH J957LH J693LH J956LH J694LH J955LH J695LH J954LH
J692L J957L J693L J956L J694L J955L J695L J954L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
Figure 4-94 General circuit diagram, base printer (6 of 7)
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
3 2 1 J958 J959 3 2 1 J960 J961 3 2 1 J962 J963 3 2 1 J964 J965
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J382A J2A J687 1 2 1 2 J382B J2B J792 1 2 1 2 J382C J2C J795 1 2 1 2 J382D J2D J787 1 2 1 2
Toner supply Toner supply CL CL Toner supply Toner supply CL CL Toner supply Toner supply CL CL Toner supply Toner supply CL CL
sensor LED sensor PCA sensor LED sensor PCA sensor LED sensor PCA sensor LED sensor PCA
PCA CAC_SNS PCA CAC_SNS PCA CAC_SNS PCA CAC_SNS
U_CL1 T_CL1 U_CL2 T_CL2 T_CL3 U_CL3 T_CL4 U_CL4 A
6 5 4 3 2 1
D
<Note 1> <Note 2> <Note 3> <Note 4> <Note 5>
<5700/5800> <5700/5800> <5700/X557/5800/X57945> <5700/6700> <5700/X557/5800>
J138 J136A J133
J135
DC controller PCA J327A Rear PCA Right PCA Right PCA 23 DC controller PCA
13 17 1 2 18
J307 J305
1 2 3 4 5
3 2 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
SGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
SGND
SGND
+24VAFU
2 1
+3.3VB2
J938 1 2 3
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
GND
GND
+3.3VCFU2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7 +3.3VCFU2
6 GND
5
4
3
2
1
J910B
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
13
12
11
10
1 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 1
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
CST
J317D LOOP_SNS
J317DH
13 17 3 2 1 J318LA
Rear PCA J925A 1 2 23 18
J323 J321A High-voltage power supply PCA
J263 J92
MP_PAP_SNS
C
2 1
<X557/6700/6800> <X557/6700/6800> SL
MP_SL
J137A J136B
DC controller PCA Rear PCA J337A
15 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
<6700/~X654/6800/X677> <X557/5800/X57945/x654/~6800/X677> <X57945/6700/X654/6800/X677>
+3.3VCFU2
GND
+3.3VB2
J131A J132A
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Right PCA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Right PCA DC controller PCA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J937A J936A J935A J934A 29
15
14
13
12
11
10
J317 J315A
25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
15 17 CST_SIZE1 CST_SIZE2 CST_SIZE3 CST_SIZE4
Rear PCA
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
J322A J321B
+24VAFU
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
+24VBFU2
GND
+5VAFU
GND
+3.3VCFU2
2 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
<X57945/X654/X677> <X57945/X654/X677> 1 2 3 1 2 3
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J318DB
J318DHB J923B J910A
J139 J136C J318LB B
1 2 29 25
DC controller PCA J327B Rear PCA
9 17 3 2 1 REFEED_SNS LOOP_SNS
1 2 High-voltage power supply
J925B J261A J262A
Figure 4-95 General circuit diagram, base printer (7 of 7)
2 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SGND
SL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
MP_PAP_SNS MP_SL
3 2 1
2 1 J924B
+3.3VCFU2
GND
+3.3VB2
J35
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1 2
RREREG_SNS
FDOOR_SW
9 17
Rear PCA
J324 J321C
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams
253
254
6 5 4 3 2 1
J511FDH D
J511D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Chapter 4 Solve problems
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
+3.3VB2
Paper feeder controller PCA
5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J521 J522 J511F
C
J532F J544F J531F J551 J541 J512
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
N.C
OUT1
OUT2
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
SGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VAF
+24VAF
+3.3VB2
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
OPLIFT_SNS
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J532FD
J532FDH B
N.C
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 J9 J55 J57 J56 J58
SOLD5
SOLD6
J532FL
J21 J63 J64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 J512D
2 1
M SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7
SW16 M CL
SR21 J512DH
CL6 M15
M12
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J24 J41 J4
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
Figure 4-96 General circuit diagram, 550-sheet paper feeder
SR24 SR22 SR23
A
6 5 4 3 2 1
J511HDH
J511HD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
+3.3VB2
5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J521 J522 J511H
HCI controller PCA
J532H J544H J531H J554 J552 J542
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
PGND
SGND
+24VAF
+24VAF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VOPF
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 4-97 General circuit diagram, HCI
J532HD
J532HDH
N.C
2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J532HL
J82 J70 J71 J88 J89 J76 J74 J77
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 2 1 1 2
SW13 M CL
M SW9 SW8 SW10
CL2 SR6
M13 M14
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
+3.3VOPF
SGND
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J85 J83 J84
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
SR5 SR3 SR4
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams
255
Chapter 4 Solve problems 256
6
M21
SW3 PS206 M25 PS205 PS204 PS203 PS202 PS201 SL22
M SL
1 2 M 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 J7202L
J7006 J35 J34 J17 J1 J2 J44 2 1
J32
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 J7202DHB
1 2 3 4
J7202DB
SOLD6
SOLD5
J7021LB J7401L J7003LB
2 1 J7021LHB 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J7003LHB
J7401DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J7003DB
J7021DB J7401D
5
+24VAF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J302B J301B J503B
SL23 M24
M22 M27 SL
PS212 PS211 PS210 PS209 PS208 1 2
PS207 M
M M
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 J7303L
2 1
J15 J20 J21 J24 J22 J23 J18 J16
J7303DH 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
J7303D
SOLD4
SOLD3
4
J7107LB J7316L J7318L
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 J7107DHB 1 2 3 J7316DH 1 2 3 J7318DH
J7107DB J7316D J7318D
+24VAF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J402B J202B J501B J401B
5 4 3 2 1 J105 4 3 2 1 J102
GND
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
3
Staple stacker controller PCA
J205 J502B J201C J203C J204C J101B J505B
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VS
+24VA
+24VB
+3.3VB2
+24VAF
3 2 1
FT1
FT7
J7301D
J7301DH 2 1
2 1 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J27 J19 J26
FAN21
2
1 2 J7301L 1 2 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
SW4 SW21
4 3 2 1
1 2
SL M
SL21 PS213
M26
PS214
+24VA
+24VA
+3.3VB2
GND
GND
GND
GND
J124LH J9916
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J124L 6 5 4 3 2 1
PS215
Staple unit
Printer
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 4-98 General circuit diagram, 3-bin stapler-stacker
Internal test and information pages
Learn about printer test and information pages.
Configuration and Jetdirect page
Print and find printer information on configuration and HP embedded Jetdirect
information pages.
NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a
configuration page. In addition to the main configuration page, the HP
embedded Jetdirect configuration and the wireless pages print.
Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Reports button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Configuration/Status pages
3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.
Internal test and information pages 257
Figure 4-99 Configuration page
HP LaserJet M
1 4
5
6
2
Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM
Item Description Item Description
1 Device information 5 Event log
2 Installed 6 Security
personalities and
options
3 HP Web services 7 Paper trays and
options
4 Memory
Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the
email gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the printer. This information
is on the various configuration pages.
258 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-12 Important information on the configuration pages
Type of information Specific information Configuration page
Firmware Bundle Version Firmware information Main configuration page
(Device information)
Firmware Revision Firmware information Main configuration page
(Device information)
Firmware Datecode Firmware information Main configuration page
(Device information)
Accessories and internal Optional installed formatter Main configuration page
storage devices and accessories (Installed Personalities and
information Options)
All optional devices that
are installed on the printer
should be listed on the main
configuration page.
Separate pages print for
the optional paper handling
devices and the fax accessory.
These pages list more-detailed
information for those devices.
Memory Total RAM information Main configuration page
(Memory)
Tray and bin information Size and type by tray Main configuration page
(including installed optional (Paper Trays and Options)
paper feeders) information
Engine cycles, service ID, and Engine information Main configuration page
cartridge information (Device Information)
Event-log information Error information Main configuration page (Event
Log)
The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which
contains the following information:
Internal test and information pages 259
Figure 4-100 HP embedded Jetdirect page
HP LaserJet M
1 4
5
2
6
3
Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM
Item Description
1 General Information indicates the printer
status, model number, hardware firmware
version, port select, port configuration, auto
negotiation, manufacturing identification,
and manufactured date.
2 Security Settings information
3 Network Statistics indicates the total
packets received, unicast packets received,
bad packets received, framing errors
received, total packets transmitted,
unsendable packets, transmit collisions,
and transmit late collisions.
4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address
260 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Item Description
5 IPv4 information
6 IPv6 information
Reports menu
Learn about the control-panel Reports menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch the printer icon .
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
NOTE: The View option is control-panel type dependent (might not be
available).
Table 4-13 Reports menu
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Settings Menu Map Cancel Shows a map of
Pages the entire control
View panel system and the
selected values for
each setting.
Configuration/Status Current Settings Page Cancel Shows a summary of
Pages the current settings for
View the printer. This might
be helpful if you plan
to make changes and
need a record of the
present configuration.
Configuration/Status Configuration Page Cancel Shows the printer
Pages settings and installed
View accessories.
Configuration/Status How to Connect Page Cancel Shows the network
Pages information typically
View needed to connect the
printer to a network.
Reports menu 261
Table 4-13 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Supplies Status Page Cancel Shows the
Pages approximate remaining
View life for the supplies;
reports statistics on
total number of
pages and jobs
processed, serial
number, page counts,
and maintenance
information.
HP provides
approximations of
the remaining life
for the supplies
as a customer
convenience. The
actual remaining
supply levels might
be different than
the approximations
provided.
Configuration/Status Usage Page Cancel Shows a count of all
Pages paper sizes that have
View passed through the
printer; lists whether
they were simplex or
duplex, and reports the
page count.
Configuration/Status File Directory Page Cancel Shows the file name
Pages and folder name for
View files that are stored in
the printer memory.
Configuration/Status Web Services Status Cancel Shows the detected
Pages Page Web Services for the
View printer.
Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Cancel Contains a list of the
faxes that have been
Fax models only View sent from or received
by this printer.
262 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-13 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level Values Description
Fax Reports Billing Codes Report Cancel Provides a list of billing
codes that have been
Fax models only View used for outgoing
faxes. This report
shows how many sent
faxes were billed to
each code.
Fax Reports Blocked Fax List Cancel A list of phone
numbers that are
Fax models only View blocked from sending
faxes to this printer.
Fax Reports Speed Dial List Cancel Shows the speed dials
that have been set up
Fax models only View for this printer.
Print
Fax Reports Fax Call Report Cancel A detailed report of
the last fax operation,
Fax models only View either sent or received.
Other Pages PCL Font List Cancel Prints the available
PCL fonts.
Other Pages PS Font List Cancel Prints the available PS
fonts.
Settings menu
Learn about the control-panel Settings menu.
NOTE: You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use
the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced printer setup. To open the
HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in the
address bar of a Web browser.
TIP: If prompted, enter the EWS personal identification number (PIN) from a
sticker on the printer (typically located inside the front door or on a toner
cartridge tray).
Settings menu 263
General menu
Learn about the control-panel General (Settings) menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select
the General menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-14 General menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Date/Time Date/Time Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/
Settings Format Time Settings
MMM/DD/YYYY menu to
specify the
YYYY/MMM/DD
date and time
and to
configure
date/time
settings.
Date/Time Date/Time Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the
Settings Format format that
24 hours the printer
uses to show
the date and
time, for
example 12-
hour format or
24-hour
format.
Date/Time Date/Time Time Zone Select the time
Settings zone from a list.
Date/Time Date/Time Date Select the date
Settings from a pop-up
calendar.
Date/Time Date/Time Time Select the time
Settings from a pop-up
keypad.
264 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Date/Time Date/Time Adjust for Checkbox If you are in an
Settings Daylight area that uses
Savings daylight
savings time,
select the
Adjust for
Daylight
Savings box.
Energy Sleep A list of + (Add) Use to
Settings Schedule scheduled configure the
events Edit printer to
MFP displays. automatically
Delete
wake up or go
to sleep at
specific times
on specific
days. Using
this feature
saves energy.
NOTE: You
must
configure the
date and time
settings
before you can
use this
feature.
Energy Sleep A list of Event Type Wake Select
Settings Schedule scheduled whether to
events Sleep add or edit a
MFP displays. Wake event or
a Sleep event,
and then
select the time
and the days
for the wake or
sleep event.
Energy Sleep A list of Event Time
Settings Schedule scheduled
events
MFP displays.
Energy Sleep A list of Event Days Select days of
Settings Schedule scheduled the week from a
events list.
MFP displays.
General menu 265
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Energy Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/ Range: 1 to 120 Set the
Settings Settings Auto Off After minutes number of
minutes after
MFP Default = 60 which the
minutes printer enters
Sleep or Auto
Off mode. Use
the arrow
buttons on the
control panel
to increase or
decrease the
number of
minutes.
Energy Wake/Auto On All Events*
Settings to These
Events Network port
MFP
Power button
only
Energy Sleep Timer Sleep/Auto Enabled* Enable or
Settings Settings Off Timer disable the
Disabled printer sleep
SFP or auto off
function.
Energy Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/ Range: 1 to 120 Set the
Settings Settings Auto Off After minutes number of
minutes after
SFP Default = 60 which the
minutes printer enters
Sleep or Auto
Off mode. Use
the arrow
buttons on the
control panel
to increase or
decrease the
number of
minutes.
266 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Display Display A sliding bar Use to specify
Settings Brightness displays with the intensity of
the indicator the LCD
set in the control panel
middle. Use display.
the arrow
keys to select
the desired
brightness
and then
select Done.
Display System Sound On* Use to enable
Settings or disable
Off sounds on the
printer.
Display Language Language Select from a list Use to select a
Settings Settings of languages different
that the printer language for
supports. control panel
messages and
specify the
default
keyboard
layout. When
you select a
new language,
the keyboard
layout
automatically
changes to
match the
factory default
for the
selected
language.
Display Keyboard Each language Select the
Settings Layout has a default default
keyboard layout. keyboard
To change it, layout that
select from a list matches the
of layouts. language you
want to use.
General menu 267
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Display Information Show Use this menu
Settings Screen connection item to display
information* or hide
connection
Hide connection information on
information the Home
screen.
Display Inactivity Range: 10-300 Specifies the
Settings Timeout seconds amount of
time that
Default = 60 elapses
seconds between any
activity on the
control panel
and when the
printer resets
to the default
settings. When
the timeout
expires, the
control panel
display returns
to the Home
menu, and any
user signed in
to the printer
is signed out.
268 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Display Clearable Display during Use this
Settings Warnings job* feature to set
the period that
Display until a clearable
cleared warning
displays on
the control
panel. If the On
setting is
selected,
clearable
warnings
appear until
the Clearable
Warnings
button is
pressed. If the
Job setting is
selected,
clearable
warnings stay
on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning
and disappear
from the
display when
the next job
starts.
General menu 269
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Display Continuable Auto-continue Use this option
Settings Events (10 seconds)* to configure
the printer
Touch OK to behavior when
continue the printer
encounters
certain errors.
If the Auto-
continue (10
seconds)
option is
selected, the
job will
continue after
10 seconds. If
the Touch OK
to continue
option is
selected, the
job will stop
and require
the user to
touch the OK
button before
continuing.
Enable Device Enabled Enables the
USB printer to open
Disabled* a file from a
USB drive.
270 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Quiet Mode Off* Quiet Mode
slows the
On printer down
to reduce the
Automatic
noise the
transition
printer makes
Range: 10-300 when printing.
pages
Automatic
Default = 10 transition
pages allows you to
set a
predetermined
job size of 10
to 999 pages,
and print jobs
will print in
Quiet Mode
for all print
jobs up to the
predetermined
page size.
General menu 271
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Jam Recovery Automatic* This printer
provides a jam
Off recovery
feature that
On
reprints
jammed
pages. Select
one of the
following
options:
Automatic:
The printer
attempts to
reprint
jammed pages
when
sufficient
memory is
available. This
is the default
setting.
Off: The
printer does
not attempt to
reprint
jammed
pages.
Because no
memory is
used to store
the most
recent pages,
performance
is optimal.
NOTE: When
using this
option, if the
printer runs
out of paper
and the job is
being printed
on both sides,
some pages
can be lost.
On: The printer
always
reprints
jammed
pages.
272 Chapter 4 Solve problems Additional
memory is
allocated to
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Auto Enabled If Auto
Recovery Recovery is
Disabled* enabled and
an
unrecoverable
error occurs in
the device
firmware, the
device
automatically
turns off and
turns back on
to recover
from the error.
General menu 273
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Enable Auto Disabled* Browse to the
Send HP Embedded
Enabled Web Server
AutoSend
configuration
page for
advanced set
up and the HP
online Privacy
Statement
Information.
Use the
Enable Auto
Send menu to
enable or
disable the
AutoSend
feature. The
AutoSend
feature
enables your
product to
periodically
send product
configuration
information
including
serial number,
event logs,
page usage
counts and
supplies
status
information to
HP web
addresses
(URLs), or
email
addresses.
Information
sent to HP is
used to
improve
products and
services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a
relationship
with HP that
provides you
274 Chapter 4 Solve problems services such
as proactive
cartridge
Table 4-14 General menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this
Job feature if you
Disabled want to
prevent print
jobs from
starting while
a user is
initiating a
copy job from
the control
panel. Held
print jobs start
printing after
the copy job is
finished,
provided that
no other copy
job is in the
print queue.
Reset Factory Address Book Use to restore
Settings (MFP) all printer
settings to
Copy (MFP) their factory
defaults.
Digital Send
(MFP)
E-mail (MFP)
Fax (MFP)
General (MFP)
Print (MFP)
Security (MFP)
Cancel (SFP)
Reset (SFP)
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP)
Learn about the control-panel Scan/Digital Send Settings (MFP) menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select
the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 275
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Scan to Email E-mail Setup E-mail Setup Use to
Settings Wizard configure
NOTE: Email settings that
Scan to Settings only apply to
Network sending
Folder documents
Settings through email
or saving
Scan to USB
documents to
Drive Settings
a folder on the
NOTE: The network or on
same options a USB multi-
are available drive.
for each of
The E-mail
these
Setup Wizard
features,
feature
except where
configures the
noted.
printer to send
scanned
images as
attachments.
To open the
printer HP
Embedded
Web Server
and set up the
notification
server, enter
the printer IP
address into a
Web browser.
276 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Default Job Image Preview Make Defines the
Options optional* default job
options for
Require each function.
preview If you do not
specify the job
Disable
options when
preview
creating the
job, the default
options are
used. For
complete
setup, go to
the HP
Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a
Web browser.
Use the Image
Preview
feature to
scan a
document and
display a
preview before
completing
the job. Select
whether this
feature is
available on
the printer.
Make optional:
The feature is
optional,
depending on
the user who
is signed in.
Require
preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable
preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 277
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Default File [Untitled]* The printer is
Name shipped with a
factory default
file name of
[Untitled] for
any scanned
files that are
sent or saved.
Use this
feature to
specify a
different
default file
name. If you
are saving a
file to a
network folder
or USB
storage
device and a
file with the
default file
name already
exists, a
number is
appended to
the file name,
for example,
[Untitled]001.
278 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Document File Select from a PDF provides
Type list of file the best
types. overall image
and text
quality.
JPEG is a
good choice
for most
graphics. Most
computers
have a
browser that
can
view .JPEG
files. This file
type produces
one file per
page.
TIFF is a
standard file
format that
many graphics
programs
support. This
file type
produces one
file per page.
MTIFF: stands
for multi-page
TIFF. This file
type saves
multiple
scanned
pages in a
single file.
XPS (XML
Paper
Specification)
creates an
XAML file that
preserves the
original
formatting of
the document
and supports
color graphics
and
embedded
fonts.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 279
PDF/A
(Archivable):
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Optimize Text/ Mixed* Use to
Picture optimize the
Text output for a
particular type
Printed picture
of content. You
Photograph can optimize
the output for
text, printed
pictures, or a
mixture.
Mixed: Use to
optimize the
setting for text
and for
pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the
text portion of
the copy when
text and/or
pictures are
on the original.
Printed
picture: Use
for line
drawings and
preprinted
images, such
as magazine
clippings or
pages from
books.
Photograph:
Best suited for
making copies
of printed
pictures.
280 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Quality and High (large Use to select
File Size file) the quality for
the output.
Medium* Higher-quality
images
Low (small file)
require a
larger file size
than lower-
quality
images.
Larger files
take more
time to send,
and some
recipients
might have
trouble
receiving
larger files.
Original Sides 1-sided Use to
describe the
2-sided layout for
each side of
the original
document.
First select
whether the
original
document is
printed on one
side or both
sides. Then
touch the
Orientation
setting to
indicate
whether the
original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If
it is printed on
both sides,
also select the
2-sided format
that matches
the original
document.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 281
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Orientation Automatically For some
detect features to
work correctly,
Portrait* you must
specify the
Landscape
way the
content of the
original
document is
placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation
means the
short edge of
the page is
along the top.
Landscape
orientation
means the
long edge of
the page is
along the top.
In the
Orientation
area, select
whether the
original
document has
a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
282 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Resolution 600 dpi Sets the
resolution for
400 dpi sent
documents.
300 dpi
Higher
200 dpi resolution
images have
150 dpi* more dots per
inch (dpi), so
75 dpi they show
more detail.
Lower
resolution
images have
fewer dots per
inch and show
less detail, but
the file size is
smaller. Some
file types, for
example a file
that will be
processed
with OCR,
require a
specific
resolution.
When these
file types are
selected, the
Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a
valid value.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 283
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Content Orientation Auto Detect For some
Orientation features to
Portrait* work correctly,
you must
Landscape
specify the
way the
content of the
original
document is
placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation
means the
short edge of
the page is
along the top.
Landscape
orientation
means the
long edge of
the page is
along the top.
In the
Orientation
area, select
whether the
original
document has
a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
284 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Color/Black Automatically Use to enable
detect color or or disable
black* color
scanning.
Automatically
detect color or Automatically
gray detect color or
black: When
Color pages without
color are
Black
detected, the
Black/Gray printer
creates an
image of the
page in 1-bit
black if other
settings allow.
If the other
settings don't
allow (File
Type, for
example), the
image is in
grayscale.
Automatically
detect color or
gray: When
pages without
color are
detected, the
printer
creates an
image of the
page in
grayscale.
Select this
option for the
best image
quality for
non-color
pages.
Color: Scans
documents in
color.
Black/Gray:
Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
(MFP) in285
Scan/Digital Send Settings menudocuments
black and
white with a
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Original Size Select from a Use to
list of describe the
supported page size of
sizes. the original
document.
Notification Do not notify* Configure to
receive
Notify when notification
job completes about the
status of a
Notify only if
sent
job fails
document.
Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.
Notify when
job completes:
Select to
receive
notification for
this job only.
Print Notify only if
job fails:
E-mail Select to
receive
notification
only if the job
is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to
print the
notification at
this printer.
Include NOTE: When
Thumbnail sending an
analog fax,
select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail
image of the
first page of
the fax in your
notification.
286 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Notification E- E-mail: Select
mail address to receive the
notification in
an email.
Touch the text
box following
Email Address,
and then type
the email
address for
the
notification.
Image Darkness Use to
Adjustment improve the
overall quality
of the copy.
Adjust the
Darkness
setting to
increase or
decrease the
amount of
white and
black in the
colors.
Contrast Adjust the
Contrast
setting to
increase or
decrease the
difference
between the
lightest and
darkest color
on the page.
Background Adjust the
Cleanup Background
Cleanup
setting if you
are having
trouble
copying a faint
image.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 287
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Sharpness Adjust the
Sharpness
setting to
clarify or
soften the
image. For
example,
increasing the
sharpness
could make
text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it
could make
photographs
appear
smoother.
Automatic
Tone
Default Select this to
make the
selected
Image
Adjustment
setting the
default value.
Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu
Options item to
Crop to automatically
content crop the scan
for digital
Crop to paper
sending. Use
the Crop to
content option
to scan the
smallest
possible area
that has
detectable
content.
288 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Erase Edges Use Inches Use this menu
item to
Back side remove
erase blemishes,
such as dark
Front side
borders or
erase
staple marks,
by cleaning
the specified
edges of the
scanned
image. In each
of the text
boxes enter
the
measurement
s, in
millimeters or
inches, for
how much of
the top edge,
bottom edge,
left edge, and
right edge to
clean.
Multi-feed On* This setting
Detection stops the
Off scanning
process if it
detects
multiple-page
feeds through
the document
feeder.
Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent
Suppression blank pages in
Enabled the original
document
from being
included in the
output
document.
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 289
Table 4-15 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Digital Send Allow Usage Enabled* Configure how
Service Setup of Digital the printer
Sending Disabled interacts with
Software the HP Digital
(DSS) Server Sending
Software
(DSS) server.
HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as
faxing,
emailing, and
sending
scanned
documents to
a network
folder or USB
storage
device.
Use the Allow
Usage of
Digital
Sending
Software
(DSS) Server
option to
configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.
Allow Transfer Enabled* Use the Allow
to New Digital Transfer to
Sending Disabled New Digital
Software Sending
(DSS) Server Software
(DSS) Server
option to
specify
whether DSS
management
of a printer is
transferable to
a different
DSS.
290 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Fax menu (MFP)
Learn about the control-panel Fax menu (MFP).
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select
the Fax menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Internal Fax Configure
Modem Setup settings for
sending faxes
from the
printer.
Use the
Internal Fax
Modem Setup
feature to set
up options for
faxing.
NOTE: To set
up LAN fax or
Internet fax,
use the HP
Embedded
Web Server. To
open the HP
Embedded
Web Server,
type the
printer
network
address into a
Web browser.
To configure
the fax
features,
select the Fax
tab.
Fax menu (MFP) 291
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Fax Dial Off These
Settings Setup Settings Volume settings
Low* control how
the fax
High
modem dials
the outgoing
fax number
when faxes
are sent.
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Dialing Mode Tone*
Settings Setup Settings
Pulse
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Redial Interval 1 – 5 Minutes
Settings Setup Settings
Default = 5
minutes
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Fax Send Fast*
Settings Setup Settings Speed
Medium
Slow
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Dialing Prefix
Settings Setup Settings
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Detect Dial
Settings Setup Settings Tone
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Redial on Error Range: 0 – 9
Settings Setup Settings
Default = 2
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Redial on No Range: 0 – 2
Settings Setup Settings Answer
Default = 0
Fax Send Fax Send Fax Dialing Redial on Busy Range: 0 – 9
Settings Setup Settings
Default = 3
Fax Send Fax Send General Fax Fax Number Enabled If this feature
Settings Setup Send Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the
fax number
twice.
292 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Fax Send General Fax PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users
Settings Setup Send Settings who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to
send faxes
through the
printer from
their
computers.
Fax Send Fax Send General Fax JBIG Enabled* The JBIG
Settings Setup Send Settings Compression compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission
time, which
can result in
lower phone
charges.
However,
using JBIG
compression
sometimes
causes
compatibility
problems with
older fax
machines. If
this occurs,
turn off the
JBIG
compression.
Fax Send Fax Send General Fax Error Enabled* When error-
Settings Setup Send Settings Correction correction
Mode Disabled mode is
enabled and
an error
occurs during
fax
transmission,
the printer
sends or
receives the
error portion
again.
Fax menu (MFP) 293
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Fax Send General Fax Fax Header Prepend* Use to
Settings Setup Send Settings prepend or
Overlay overlay the fax
header page.
Fax Send Fax Send Billing Codes Enable Billing Off When billing
Settings Setup Codes codes are
On* enabled, a
prompt
displays that
asks the user
to enter the
billing code for
an outgoing
fax. This
prompt does
not appear if
the Allow
users to edit
billing codes
check box is
not checked.
You can also
use the billing
codes report
in the Reports
menu to view
the list of the
billing codes
that have
been used for
faxes that
have been
sent from the
printer. The list
is grouped by
billing code
and also
shows fax
details. This
feature can be
used for billing
or usage
tracking.
294 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Fax Send Billing Codes Default Billing Specify a
Settings Setup Code default billing
code for
faxing. If you
specify a
default billing
code, this
code displays
in the Billing
Code field
when the user
sends an
outgoing fax. If
this field is
blank, no
default billing
code is
provided for
the user.
Fax Send Fax Send Billing Codes Minimum Range: 1 – 16 Specify the
Settings Setup Length required
Default = 1 length of the
billing code.
Billing codes
can be
between 1 and
16 characters
long.
Fax Send Fax Send Billing Codes Allow users to Off
Settings Setup edit billing
codes On*
Fax menu (MFP) 295
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Image Preview Make Use the Image
Settings Options optional* Preview
feature to
Require scan a
preview document and
display a
Disable
preview before
preview
completing
the job. Select
whether this
feature is
available on
the printer.
Make optional:
The feature is
optional,
depending on
the user who
is signed in.
Require
preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable
preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
296 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Resolution Standard (100 Select the
Settings Options x 200dpi)* resolution for
outgoing
Fine (200 x faxes. If you
200dpi) increase the
resolution,
Superfine
faxes might be
(300 x 300dpi)
clearer but
they could
transmit more
slowly. Some
file types, for
example a file
that will be
processed
with OCR,
require a
specific
resolution.
When these
file types are
selected, the
Resolution
setting might
be
automatically
changed to a
valid value.
Fax menu (MFP) 297
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Original Sides 1-sided* Use to
Settings Options describe the
2-sided layout for
each side of
Pages flip up
the original
document.
First select
whether the
original
document is
printed on one
side or both
sides. Then
touch the
Orientation
setting to
indicate
whether the
original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If
it is printed on
both sides,
also select the
2-sided format
that matches
the original
document.
If the Pages
flip up option
is selected,
the back side
of the page is
printed
upside-down.
This option is
for print jobs
that are bound
along the top
edge.
298 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Original Sides Orientation Portrait* For some
Settings Options features to
Landscape work correctly,
you must
specify the
way the
content of the
original
document is
placed on the
page.
Portrait: This
setting means
the short edge
of the page is
along the top.
Landscape:
This setting
means the
long edge of
the page is
along the top.
Fax menu (MFP) 299
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Notification Do not notify* Use to receive
Settings Options notification
Notify when about the
job completes status of a
sent
Notify only if
document.
job fails
Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.
Notify when
job completes:
Select to
receive
notification for
this job only.
Notify only if
job fails:
Select to
receive
notification
only if the job
is not sent
successfully.
Fax Send Default Job Notification Print Print: Select to
Settings Options print the
E-mail notification at
this printer.
E-mail: Select
to receive the
notification in
an email.
Touch the text
box following
Email Address,
and then enter
the email
address for
the
notification.
300 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Notification Include When sending
Settings Options Thumbnail an analog fax,
select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail
image of the
first page of
the fax in your
notification.
Fax Send Default Job Notification Notification E- Provide the
Settings Options mail address email address
that will
receive
notifications.
Fax Send Default Job Content Orientation Portrait* For some
Settings Options Orientation features to
Landscape work correctly,
you must
specify the
way the
content of the
original
document is
placed on the
page.
Portrait: This
setting means
the short edge
of the page is
along the top.
Landscape:
This setting
means the
long edge of
the page is
along the top.
Fax Send Default Job Original Size Select from a Use to
Settings Options list of sizes describe the
that the page size of
printer the original
supports. document.
Fax menu (MFP) 301
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Image Darkness Use to
Settings Options Adjustment improve the
overall quality
of the copy.
Adjust the
Darkness
setting to
increase or
decrease the
amount of
white and
black in the
colors.
Fax Send Default Job Image Contrast Adjust the
Settings Options Adjustment Contrast
setting to
increase or
decrease the
difference
between the
lightest and
darkest color
on the page.
Fax Send Default Job Image Background Adjust the
Settings Options Adjustment Cleanup Background
Cleanup
setting if you
are having
trouble
copying a faint
image.
302 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Image Sharpness Adjust the
Settings Options Adjustment Sharpness
setting to
clarify or
soften the
image. For
example,
increasing the
sharpness
could make
text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it
could make
photographs
appear
smoother.
Fax Send Default Job Image Automatic The printer
Settings Options Adjustment Tone automatically
adjusts the
Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background
Cleanup
settings to the
most
appropriate
for the
scanned
document.
Fax menu (MFP) 303
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Optimize Text/ Manually Optimize For Optimizes the
Settings Options Picture adjust* output for a
Text particular type
of content. You
Printed picture
can optimize
Photograph the output for
text, printed
pictures, or a
mixture.
Manually
adjust: Use to
manually
optimize the
setting for text
or for pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the
text portion of
the copy
where text
and/or
pictures are
on the original.
Printed
picture: Use
for line
drawings and
preprinted
images, such
as magazine
clippings or
pages from
books.
Photograph:
Best suited for
making copies
of printed
pictures.
304 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Send Default Job Multi-feed Disabled This setting
Settings Options Detection stops the
Enabled* scanning
process if it
detects
multiple-page
feeds through
the document
feeder.
Fax Send Default Job Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank
Settings Options Suppression pages in the
Enabled original
document
from being
included in the
output
document.
Fax Receive Fax Receive Ringer Volume Off Use to
Settings Setup configure
Low* settings for
receiving
High
faxes.
Fax Receive Fax Receive Rings To Range: 1–6
Settings Setup Answer
Default = 1
Fax Receive Fax Receive Fax Send Fast*
Settings Setup Speed
Medium
Slow
Fax Receive Fax Receive Ring Interval Range: 220–
Settings Setup 600 ms
Default = 600
ms
Fax Receive Fax Receive Ring Range: 1–200
Settings Setup Frequency
Default = 68hz
Fax menu (MFP) 305
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Receive Fax Printing Always store If you have
Settings Schedule faxes concerns
about the
Always print security of
faxes* private faxes,
use this
Use schedule
feature to
store faxes
rather than
having them
automatically
print. Select
Incoming Fax
Options, and
then you can
choose to
always store
faxes, always
print them, or
you can set up
a schedule for
each day of
the week.
Fax Receive Fax Printing Schedule Add Print incoming If you are
Settings Schedule faxes using a fax
Touch this to Edit printing
set up a fax Store schedule, use
printing Delete incoming this menu to
schedule if faxes configure
you selected when to print
the Use Fax Time
faxes.
Printing
Event Days
Schedule
option.
306 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Receive Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked
Settings Numbers Block fax list can
contain up to
30 numbers.
When the
printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked
fax numbers, it
deletes the
incoming fax.
It also logs the
blocked fax in
the activity log
along with job-
accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers:
Enter a fax
number into
the Fax
Number to
Block field,
and then
touch the
arrow button
to add a new
number to the
blocked fax
list.
To remove
blocked
numbers:
Select a
number and
touch the
Delete button
to delete it
from the
blocked fax
list.
To clear all
blocked
numbers:
Touch the
Delete All
button to clear
Fax menuall(MFP)
of the
307
numbers from
the blocked
fax list.
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Receive Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure to
Settings Options receive
Notify when notification
job completes about the
status of a
Notify only if
sent
job fails
document.
Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.
Notify when
job completes:
Select to
receive
notification for
this job only.
Notify only if
job fails:
Select to
receive
notification
only if the job
is not sent
successfully.
Fax Receive Default Job Print E-mail: Select
Settings Options to receive the
E-mail* notification in
an email.
Touch the text
box following
Email Address,
and then enter
the email
address for
the
notification.
308 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Receive Default Job Include NOTE: When
Settings Options Thumbnail sending an
analog fax,
select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail
image of the
first page of
the fax in your
notification.
Fax Receive Default Job Notification E-
Settings Options mail address
Fax Receive Default Job Stamp Enabled Use this
Settings Options Received option to add
Faxes Disabled* the date, time,
sender’s
phone
number, and
page number
to each page
of the faxes
that this
printer
receives.
Fax Receive Default Job Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink
Settings Options faxes that are
Disabled larger than
Letter-size or
A4-size so
that they can
fit onto a
Letter-size or
A4-size page.
If this feature
set to
Disabled,
faxes larger
than Letter or
A4 will flow
across
multiple
pages.
Fax menu (MFP) 309
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Receive Default Job Paper Automatic*
Settings Options Selection
Select from a
list of the
trays.
Fax Receive Default Job Output sides 1-sided* Use to
Settings Options describe the
2-sided layout for
each side of
Pages flip up
the original
document.
First select
whether the
original
document is
printed on one
side or both
sides. Then
touch the
Orientation
setting to
indicate
whether the
original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If
it is printed on
both sides,
also select the
2-sided format
that matches
the original
document.
Fax Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward
Forwarding Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.
Fax Type of Fax All faxes
Forwarding Job to
Forward Sent faxes
Received
faxes
Fax Fax Enter the fax
Forwarding Forwarding forwarding
Number number.
310 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-16 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Clear Fax Cancel Clears all
Activity Log events from
Clear the Fax
Activity Log
list.
Manage Supplies menu
Learn about the control-panel Manage Supplies menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select
the Manage Supplies menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Low Warning Cyan 1-100% Set the
Thresholds Cartridge estimated
Default = 4% percentage at
Magenta which the
Cartridge printer notifies
you when a
Yellow
toner cartridge
Cartridge
is very low.
Black
Cartridge
Low Warning Document 1-100% Set the
Thresholds Feeder Kit estimated
Default = 10% percentage at
MFP which the
printer notifies
you when the
document
feeder kit is
very low.
Manage Supplies menu 311
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Low Warning Maintenance 1-100% Set the
Thresholds Kit estimated
Default = 10% percentage at
SFP which the
printer notifies
you when the
maintenance
kit is very low.
Low Warning On* Displays a
Threshold message on
Message Off the control
panel when a
cartridge is
very low.
Low Behavior Continue* Use one of
these options
Stop to specify the
action for the
device to take
when a supply
reaches a low
condition.
Stop: Stops
the current
print job.
Continue:
Completes the
current print
job.
312 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Very Low Cyan Stop Use one or
Behavior Cartridge more of these
Continue* options to
Magenta specify the
Cartridge Prompt to
action for the
continue
device to take
Yellow
when a supply
Cartridge
reaches a very
Black low condition.
Cartridge
Stop: Stops
the current
print job.
Continue:
Completes the
current print
job.
Prompt to
continue:
Allows the
user to decide
whether or not
to finish
printing.
Manage Supplies menu 313
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Very Low Document Stop Use one or
Behavior Feeder Kit more of these
Continue options to
MFP specify the
Prompt to
action for the
continue*
device to take
when a supply
reaches a very
low condition.
Stop: Stops
the current
print job.
Continue:
Completes the
current print
job.
Prompt to
continue:
Allows the
user to decide
whether or not
to finish
printing.
314 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Very Low Maintenance Stop Use one or
Behavior Kit more of these
Continue options to
SFP specify the
Prompt to
action for the
continue*
device to take
when a supply
reaches a very
low condition.
Stop: Stops
the current
print job.
Continue:
Completes the
current print
job.
Prompt to
continue:
Allows the
user to decide
whether or not
to finish
printing.
Manage Supplies menu 315
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Store Usage On supplies* Store Usage
Data Data provides
Not on a way to
supplies suppress the
toner
cartridges
from storing
most of the
information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding
the usage of
the printer.
Select the On
supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not
on supplies
setting to
suppress the
information
from being
stored on the
memory chip.
Cartridge Off* Select to
Protection permanently
Protect protect
cartridges cartridges so
that they can
be used only in
this product or
fleet of
products.
Cartridge Off* Set Authorized
Policy HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine
HP cartridges
to be used in
this printer.
316 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-17 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Reset Document Reset Select this
Supplies Feeder Kit option if you
Cancel have installed
MFP a new
document
Maintenance
feeder kit or
Kit
maintenance
SFP kit.
Networking menu
Learn about the control-panel Networking menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select
the Networking menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 4-18 Networking menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a
Report page that
No* contains the
current
security
settings on
the HP
Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page
is not printed.
Networking menu 317
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow An
buttons to edit alphanumeric
the host string, up to 32
name. characters,
used to
NPIXXXXXX* identify the
printer. This
name is listed
on the HP
Jetdirect
configuration
page. The
default host
name is
NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx
is the last six
digits of the
LAN hardware
(MAC)
address.
318 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Config Bootp Specifies the
Method method that
DHCP* TCP/IPv4
parameters
Auto IP
will be
Manual configured on
the HP
Jetdirect print
server.
Bootp
(Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration
from a BootP
server.
DHCP
(Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration
from a
DHCPv4
server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease
exists, the
DHCP Release
menu and the
DHCP Renew
menu are
available to
set DHCP
lease options.
Auto IP: Use
for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing.
An address in
the form
169.254.x.x is
assigned
automatically.
If you set this
option to the
Manual
setting, use
the Manual
menumenu319
NetworkingSettings
to configure
TCP/IPv4
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP
address to
Legacy default to
when the print
server is
unable to
obtain an IP
address from
the network
during a
forced TCP/IP
reconfiguratio
n (for example,
when
manually
configured to
use BootP or
DHCP).
NOTE: This
feature
assigns a
static IP
address that
might interfere
with a
managed
network.
Auto IP: A link-
local IP
address
169.254.x.x is
set.
Legacy: The
address
192.0.0.192 is
set, consistent
with older HP
Jetdirect
printers.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Release Yes
No*
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Renew Yes
No*
320 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address
Default = (n.n.n.n) of a
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Primary
Domain Name
System (DNS)
Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
DNS address
Default = (n.n.n.n) of a
0.0.0.0 Secondary
DNS Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item
to enable or
On* disable IPv6
operation on
the print
server.
Off: IPv6 is
disabled.
On: IPv6 is
enabled.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Address Manual Use this item
Settings to enable and
manually
Enable configure a
TCP/IPv6
Address
address.
Networking menu 321
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings DHCPV6 Router Router
Policy Specified Specified: The
stateful auto-
Router configuration
Unavailable* method to be
used by the
Always
print server is
determined by
a router. The
router
specifies
whether the
print server
obtains its
address, its
configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6
server.
Router
Unavailable: If
a router is not
available, the
print server
should
attempt to
obtain its
stateful
configuration
from a
DHCPv6
server.
Always:
Whether a
router is
available, the
print server
always
attempts to
obtain its
stateful
configuration
from a
DHCPv6
server.
322 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address
Default = (n.n.n.n) of a
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Primary
Domain Name
System (DNS)
Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
DNS address
Default = (n.n.n.n) of a
0.0.0.0 Secondary
DNS Server.
Networking menu 323
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the
provided list. proxy server
to be used by
embedded
applications in
the printer. A
proxy server is
typically used
by network
clients for
Internet
access. It
caches Web
pages, and
provides a
degree of
Internet
security for
those clients.
To specify a
proxy server,
enter its IPv4
address or
fully-qualified
domain name.
The name can
be up to 255
octets.
For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet
Service
Provider (ISP)
for the proxy
server
address.
324 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Port Range: Enter the port
1-65535 number used
by the proxy
Default = server for
00080 client support.
The port
number
identifies the
port reserved
for proxy
activity on
your network,
and can be a
value from 0
to 65535.
Ethernet TCP/IP Idle Timeout Range: 1-3600 The time
period, in
Default = 0270 seconds, after
which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed
(default is 270
seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).
Networking menu 325
Table 4-18 Networking menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 Use to set the
sec I/O timeout
period in
Default = 10 seconds. I/O
timeout refers
to the elapsed
time before a
print job fails.
If the stream
of data that
the printer
receives for a
print job gets
interrupted,
this setting
indicates how
long the
printer will
wait before it
reports that
the job has
failed.
Support Tools menu
Learn about the control-panel Support Tools menu.
NOTE: The Support Tools sub-menu contains the options for maintaining the
printer and troubleshooting printer problems.
Maintenance menu
Learn about the control-panel Maintenance menu.
Backup/Restore menu
Learn about the control-panel Backup/Restore menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the
Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/Restore menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
326 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-19 Backup/Restore menu
First level Second level Third level Values
Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time
Backups
Back up Data Enable Scheduled Days Between Enter the number of
Backups Backups days
Back up Data Back up Now
Back up Data Export Last Backup
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that
contains the backup
file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
Learn about the control-panel Calibration/Cleaning menu .
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the
Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu.
To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP)
to select the printer icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Calibration/Cleaning menu 327
Table 4-20 Calibration/Cleaning menu
First level Values Description
Cleaning Page Automatic Cleaning Use this menu to
Interval configure the settings
for the product to
Off* automatically print a
cleaning page.
1000 pages
Select Off to disable
2000 pages
automatic cleaning.
5000 pages
Select a cleaning
10000 pages interval to set the
number of pages to
20000 pages be printed before an
automatic cleaning
page is printed.
Touch Print to
manually print a
cleaning page.
NOTE: Cleaning
pages print on the
default paper size
configured for the
printer.
328 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-20 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued)
First level Values Description
Quick Calibration Start The printer
automatically
calibrates itself
at various times.
However, the user can
calibrate the printer
immediately if the
printer experiences
problems with print
quality. Use this
feature to perform a
partial calibration. Use
this calibration if color
density or tone seem
incorrect.
Before calibrating,
make sure that
the Ready indicator
displays on the control
panel display. If a
job is in progress,
the calibration occurs
when that job is
complete.
Calibration/Cleaning menu 329
Table 4-20 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued)
First level Values Description
Full Calibration Start The printer
automatically
calibrates itself
at various times.
However, the user can
calibrate the printer
immediately if the
printer experiences
problems with print
quality. Use this
feature to perform a
full calibration, which
can take up to three
minutes. Use this
calibration if the color
layers seem to be
shifted on the page.
Before calibrating,
make sure that
the Ready indicator
displays on the control
panel display. If a
job is in progress,
the calibration occurs
when that job is
complete.
Power on Calibration No delay This feature controls
the timing of
Delay 15 minutes calibration when the
printer wakes up or is
turned on.
Calibrate Scanner Done Touch Start to
calibrate the device
MFP Start scanner. Messages
on the control panel
display will lead you
through the calibration
process.
330 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-20 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued)
First level Values Description
Reset Calibration Reset Use this feature to
return the product
Cancel to the factory-set
default values for color
calibration.
Select Reset to reset
the color calibration.
The printer will restart
with the factory-set
defaults.
Select Cancel to close
the menu without
resetting the color
calibration.
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
Learn about the control-panel USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the
Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port,
and follow the on-screen instructions.
Service menu
Learn about the control-panel Service menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then
select the Service menu.
The Service menu is locked and requires a personal identification number (PIN)
for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel. See
the Service menu section of this manual.
Troubleshooting menu
Learn about the control-panel Troubleshooting menu.
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then
select the Troubleshooting menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
USB Firmware Upgrade menu 331
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Reports Configuration/ Settings Menu Select the
Status Pages Map desired report
and then
Current select the
Settings Page
print icon
Configuration to print the
Page page.
Supplies
Status Page
Usage Page
Paper Path
Page
File Directory
Page
Web Services
Status Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Event Log
Warning Log
Page
T.30 Protocol
Trace
PQ
Troubleshooti
ng Pages
Paper Path
Test
Reports Fax Reports Fax Activity Select the
Log desired report
and then
Billing Codes select the
Report
print icon
Blocked Fax to print the
List page.
Fax Call
Report
332 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Reports Other Pages PCL Font List Select the
desired report
PS Font List and then
select the
print icon
to print the
page.
Fax Tools Fax T.30 Trace Never Use to print or
Report automatically configure the
Fax models print* fax T.30 trace
only report. T.30 is
Print after the standard
every fax that specifies
handshaking,
Print only after
protocols, and
fax send jobs
error
Print only after correction
received faxes between fax
machines.
Print only after
fax send
errors
Print only after
fax receive
errors
Print after any
fax error
Fax Tools Fax V.34 Enable* Use to disable
V.34
Fax models Disable modulations if
only several fax
failures have
occurred or if
phone line
conditions
require it.
Fax Tools JBIG On
Compression
Fax models Off*
only
Troubleshooting menu 333
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax Tools Fax Speaker Normal* Used by a
Mode technician to
Fax models Diagnostic evaluate and
only diagnose fax
issues by
listening to the
sounds of fax
modulations
Fax Tools Fax Service Print The standard
Log fax log
Fax models includes basic
only information
such as the
time and
whether the
fax was
successful.
The detailed
fax log shows
the
intermediate
results of the
redial process
not shown in
the standard
fax log.
Print Quality PQ Print Use to print
Pages Troubleshooti pages that
ng Pages help you
resolve
problems with
print quality.
Event Log Prints the 50
most recent
events in the
Event Log. For
each event,
the printed log
shows the
error number,
page count,
error code,
and
description or
personality.
334 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Paper Path Print Shows how
Page many pages
were printed
from each
tray.
Diagnostic Disable Continue Use this
Tests Cartridge diagnostic
Check test to print
internal pages
or send an
external job to
the printer
when the
toner
cartridge is
removed or
exchanged.
Supply errors
are ignored
while the
printer is in
this mode.
Diagnostic Paper Path Source Tray Select from a Generates a
Tests Test list of the test page for
available testing paper
trays. handling
features. You
can define the
path that is
used for the
test in order to
test specific
paper paths
Troubleshooting menu 335
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Diagnostic Paper Path Number of Range: 1–500 Sets the
Tests Test Copies default
Default = 1 number of
copies for a
copy job. This
default applies
when the
Copy or Quick
Copy function
is initiated
from the
printer Home
screen. The
factory default
setting is 1.
Diagnostic Paper Path Test Duplex Enable Prints on both
Tests Test Path sides of the
Disable* paper.
Diagnostic Print/Stop Test Specify the
Tests length of time
in milliseconds
(0-60,000).
Diagnostic Paper Path Select from a Initiates a test
Tests Sensor Test list of the of the paper
printer path sensors.
sensors.
Diagnostic Manual Select from a Test the
Tests Sensor Test list of printer
available sensors and
NOTE: This components switches for
item appears correct
in the control- Reset operation.
panel menus. Each sensor is
However, the displayed on
function is not the control-
available for panel screen,
this printer along with its
status.
Manually trip
each sensor
and watch for
it to change on
the screen.
Press the Stop
button to
abort the test.
336 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Diagnostic Tray/Bin Select from a Test the
Tests Manual list of printer
Sensor Test available sensors and
components switches for
NOTE: This correct
item appears Reset operation.
in the control- Each sensor is
panel menus. displayed on
However, the the control-
function is not panel screen,
available for along with its
this printer status.
Manually trip
each sensor
and watch for
it to change on
the screen.
Press the Stop
button to
abort the test.
Troubleshooting menu 337
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Diagnostic Component Select from a Use to
Tests Test list of exercise
available individual
NOTE: This components. parts
item appears independently
in the control- to isolate
panel menus. noise, leaking,
However, the or other
function is not issues. To
available for start the test,
this printer select one of
the
components.
The test will
run the
number of
times
specified by
the Repeat
option. You
might be
prompted to
remove parts
from the
printer during
the test. Press
the Stop
button to
abort the test.
Diagnostic Continuous 2-sided
Tests Scan
MFP
Diagnostic Scanner Tests Sensors
Tests
MFP
Generate Start
Debug Data
338 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-21 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Retrieve Create device Create files
Diagnostic data file that contain
Data information
Create zipped about the
debug printer that
information can help
file identify the
cause of
Include crash
problems.
dump files
Clean up
debug
information
Send to E-mail
Export to USB
Retrieve Fax Create device Create files
Diagnostic data file that contain
Data information
Create zipped about the
debug printer that
information can help
file identify the
cause of
Include crash
problems.
dump files
Clean up
debug
information
Send to E-mail
Export to USB
Service menu
Learn about the printer Service menu.
Service menu access is restricted by using a personal identification number
(PIN). Only authorized service people should access the Service menu. When
selecting Service from the list of menus, the printer prompts the user to enter
an eight-digit PIN.
NOTE: The printer automatically exits the Service menu after about one
minute if no items are selected or changed.
Service menu 339
Open the Service menu from a SFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to
navigate to Support Tools, and then press the OK button.
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Service, and then press the OK button.
3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected for the Access Type item.
NOTE: Use the arrow buttons to select and change the Access Type item
if necessary.
4. Enter the following service access PIN for the printer:
● 10570022 (SFP)
● 10580022 (MFP)
Open the Service menu from an MFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Service
3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected for the Access Type item.
4. Enter the following service access PIN for the printer:
● 10570022 (SFP)
● 10580022 (MFP)
Service menu table
The following menu items appear in the Service menu.
Table 4-22 Service menu
First level Second level Value Description
Event Log Print Print or view the
event log.
Clear Event Log Clear Use this item to clear
the printer event log.
340 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-22 Service menu (continued)
First level Second level Value Description
Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Set the page count
that was stored
in NVRAM prior
to installing a new
formatter.
Cycle Counts Refurbish Cycle Use this item
Count to record the
page count when
the printer was
refurbished.
Cycle Counts Document Feeder Total number of
pages since the
MFP document feeder kit
was replaced.
Cycle Counts Document Feeder Use this item to
Kit Interval set the interval
that causes the
MFP printer to prompt the
customer to replace
document feeder
maintenance kit.
Cycle Counts Clean Rollers Count Total number of
pages since the
MFP document feeder
rollers were cleaned.
Cycle Counts Clean Rollers Use this item to
Interval set the interval
that causes the
MFP printer to prompt
the customer to
clean the document
feeder rollers and
separation pad.
Cycle Counts ADF Count Set the total pages
fed through the
MFP document feeder.
Cycle Counts Flatbed Count Set the total pages
scanned from the
MFP flatbed.
Cycle Counts ADF Simplex Count Set the total
single-sided pages
MFP fed through the
document feeder.
Service menu 341
Table 4-22 Service menu (continued)
First level Second level Value Description
Cycle Counts ADF Duplex Count Set the total
two-sided pages
MFP fed through the
document feeder.
Cycle Counts Copy Scan Count Set the total copy
pages that have
MFP been scanned.
Cycle Counts Send Scan Count Set the number of
scanned pages sent
MFP to email.
Cycle Counts Fax Scan Count Set the number of
scanned pages that
Fax models only have been faxed.
Cycle Counts Copy Pages Count Set the number of
scanned pages that
MFP have been printed.
Scanner Settings ADF Settings Leading edge Set the calibration
front values.
MFP
Leading edge WARNING! Do not
back change these values
unless instructed to
Trailing edge do so.
front
Trailing edge
back
Left side front
Left side back
Scanner Settings Glass Settings Leading edge
glass
MFP
Left Side
Glass
Serial Number Set the serial
number.
342 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-22 Service menu (continued)
First level Second level Value Description
Service ID Use this item to
show the date that
the printer was
first used on the
control panel. This
eliminates the need
for users to keep
paper receipts for
proof of warranty.
Cold Reset Paper When you perform
a cold reset, the
paper size that is
stored in NVRAM is
reset to the default
factory setting. If you
replace a formatter
board in a country/
region that uses
A4 as the standard
paper size, use this
menu to reset the
default paper size
to A4. LETTER and
A4 are the only
available values.
Low Alerts Enable Turn on (or off) low
alerts (for supplies).
Disable
Reset Low Alerts ● Reset to level 1
● Reset to level 2
● Reset to level 3
● Set to non-HP
managed mode
PTT Test Mode Test the internal
modem for
Fax models only the analog fax
accessory.
PTT Test Mode Hook Operations Off Hook
Fax models only On Hook
PTT Test Mode Generate Random Select a value
Data from the list.
Fax models only
Service menu 343
Table 4-22 Service menu (continued)
First level Second level Value Description
PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Tone Select a value
Burst from the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Select a value
Continuous Tone from the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Select a value
Burst from the list.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Tone Dial Enter dial
Number number.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Dial Enter dial
Number number.
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Generate Single Range: 1100–
Modem Tone 2100 Hz
Fax models only
Default = 2100
Hz
PTT Test Mode Line Measurements
Fax models only
PTT Test Mode Fax Transmit Signal
Loss
Fax models only
Test Support Continuous Scan 2-sided
MFP Save to Disk
Test Support Continuous Copy 2-sided
MFP Save to Disk
Test Support Raw Scan 2-sided
MFP Mechanical
Calibration
Test Support Continuous Print
from USB
Test Support Automatic Disabled
Calibrations
Enabled*
MFP
344 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-22 Service menu (continued)
First level Second level Value Description
Test Support Runtime Standard
Configuration
StandardEIC
MFP
Workflow
WorkflowEIC
Reconfigure
Printer resets
Learn about the printer resets.
Restore factory-set defaults from a non-touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to
navigate to Settings, and then press the OK button.
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Restore Factory Settings, and then press
the OK button.
4. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might
result in loss of data. Select the Reset button to complete the process.
Restore factory-set defaults from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Settings button.
2. Open the following menus:
● General Settings
● Reset Factory Settings
3. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might
result in loss of data. Touch the Reset button to complete the process.
Restore the Service ID
When replacing the formatter, the Service ID date is lost. Use this menu item
to reset the date to the original date that the printer was first used. The date
format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the Service ID.
Printer resets 345
Calculate the service ID
For the calculation below, the placed-in-service date is 17OCT2002.
1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. If the printer was first
used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 19. YY = 12.
2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
● Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 and add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD =
287.
3. In this example the Service ID is 12287.
Convert the Service ID to an actual date
Use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under
warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the actual
date the printer was placed-in-service. For the example below, use the Service
ID previously calculated (12287).
1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.
2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
a. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
b. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder,
add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October.
c. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. The complete date is
17-October-2002.
NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a non-touchscreen
control panel
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to
factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost).
1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the
OK button.
346 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press
the OK button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK
button.
5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the
1:Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control
panel
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to
factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo
Figure 4-101 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)
1 2
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the
OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press
the OK button.
4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK
button.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the
1:Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions
Learn about the printer Format Disk and Partial Clean functions.
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 347
Active and repository firmware locations
The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the
Windows CE Operating System and the printer/peripheral firmware files.
There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware
components are stored:
● The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are
executing.
● The Repository, the recovery location.
If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the
printer automatically copies over the OS and firmware files from the Repository
location and the printer recovers.
If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was
performed, then both locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67
displays on the control-panel display. The user must upload the firmware to the
printer in order for it to function again.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire
disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other
files) are completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.
Partial Clean
The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except
for the firmware repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored.
This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to download a
firmware upgrade file to return the printer to a bootable state.
Characteristics of a Partial Clean
● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the
operating system are deleted.
● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository
location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings.
348 Chapter 4 Solve problems
● For previous HP printers, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the
Partial Clean function for this printer.
CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before
executing a Partial Clean to retain customer-defined settings (if needed). See
the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Partial Clean
● The printer continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.
● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.
● Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk
problems.
● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
● The printer default settings are not properly working.
Execute a Partial Clean from a non-touchscreen control panel
This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).
1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the
OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK
button.
4. Press the OK button again.
5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the
Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.
Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel
This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 349
Figure 4-102 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)
1 2
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the
OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK
button.
4. Press the OK button again.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the
Continue item, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.
Format Disk
The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.
CAUTION: After executing a Format Disk option, the printer is not bootable.
Characteristics of a Format Disk
● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the
operating system are deleted.
NOTE: Rebooting the printer does not restore the firmware files
● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository
location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings.
● After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays
on the control panel.
350 Chapter 4 Solve problems
● After executing the Format Disk function, the printer firmware must be
reloaded.
CAUTION: HP recommends not using the Format Disk option unless an error
occurs and the solution in the printer service manual recommends this
solution. After executing the Format Disk function, the printer is unusable.
HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a
Format Disk to retain customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/
Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Format Disk
● The printer continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.
● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.
● Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk
problems.
● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
Execute a Format Disk from a non-touchscreen control panel
This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).
1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the
OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK
button.
4. Press the OK button again.
NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer
firmware.
Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel
This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 351
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo
Figure 4-103 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)
1 2
2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the
OK button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK
button.
4. Press the OK button again.
NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer
firmware.
352 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Power on troubleshooting
Learn about power on troubleshooting.
Power-on checks
Learn about power-on checks.
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into
an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the
printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the
problem.
If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks
remain on the control panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause
of the problem.
Power on troubleshooting overview
Learn about general power on troubleshooting.
During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer
power is turned on. Place a hand over the fan intake vents located on the
right-side cover. When the fan is correctly operating, air passing into the printer
is felt. Lean close to the printer to hear the fan operating. If the fan is operating,
the dc side of the power supply is functioning.
After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open,
a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). Visually and
audibly determine that the main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting
step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform
an engine test. If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine
test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter, and
then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the
problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable
that connects them.
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems
If the printer is not powering on correctly, use the following steps to begin
troubleshooting the problem.
1. Verify that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a
surge protector or uninterruptible power supply (UPS), remove it. Plug the
Power on troubleshooting 353
printer directly into a known operating wall receptacle (make sure that the
wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the printer).
NOTE: Unplug any other devices on the same circuit that the printer is
using.
2. Try another known operating wall receptacle and a different power cord.
3. To eliminate a thermal switch issue, unplug the power cord and leave it
unplugged for over 20 minutes. Re-attach the power cord, and then turn the
power on again.
4. During normal operation, a cooling fan or fans begin to spin briefly after the
printer power is turned on. Place a hand over the cover vent or vents to feel
air passing out of the printer. Lean close to the printer to hear the fan or
fans operating. Look for illuminated lights on the control panel and formatter
LEDs.
NOTE: Operational fans, motors, and control-panel lights indicate the
following:
● AC power is present at the printer.
● The power supply is providing either or both 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc voltages.
● The DC controller microprocessor is functioning.
5. If the printer powers on, but the control panel is blank, make sure that the
control-panel display wire harness or harnesses and flat flexible cable or
cables (FFCs) are connected.
NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in
Sleep mode or Sleep delay. Opening a door or pressing a control-panel
button should cause the printer to wake up from Sleep mode or Sleep delay.
● The control panel home button LED is illuminated
● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds
If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the
following:
a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
354 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning by printing a test page.
Does the test page print correctly?
Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?
c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning. If it is not, turn the
printer off and reseat the control-panel assembly cable connections at
the control-panel assembly and the formatter.
d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the
problem, and the printer still freezes while in Sleep mode or Sleep delay,
elevate the case.
e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-
panel assembly.
6. If normal start-up noises are not heard, turn the printer off, and then remove
any installed accessories (for example, envelope feeders, paper feeders, or
output accessories).
7. Turn the printer on, and then listen for start-up noises. If normal start-up
noises are heard, the problem might be with an accessory.
8. Perform an engine test. The engine test procedure varies by printer, so refer
to the printer Service Manual to get instructions.
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems 355
9. If the engine test page prints, the print engine is operating normally. Replace
the formatter.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different
printer be installed during the repair or troubleshooting processes. The
formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is installed
in and is not designed to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a
used formatter to HP.
Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:
● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and
supported cartridges information change and might make a product
unusable
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must
cover the costs of the repair in the form of a product replacement. There
is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is
installed.
For more information, see the following topic (c06360930):
● HP internal link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number
changes after replacing the formatter
● HP external partner link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product
number changes after replacing the formatter
To access the HP partner link, you must first log in to the HP Partner First
Portal and then connect to WISE.
NOTE: If the engine test page does not print, turn the printer off, reconnect
the formatter power connector, remove the embedded MultiMedia Card
(eMMC), and then try the engine test again. If the page prints, the problem
might be the eMMC.
10. If after replacing the formatter or eMMC normal start-up noises are still not
heard, replace the DC controller.
11. If the print engine appears to be correctly operating (the engine test page
successfully printed) and the control panel is still blank, replace the power
supply.
356 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Engine diagnostics
Learn about internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print
quality, paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.
Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.
When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is
functioning correctly.
NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a
duplex engine test page, or both simplex and duplex engine test pages might
be available.
Use a small pointed object to depress and hold the engine test button (location
varies depending on the printer model). An engine test page prints. The test
page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded
in Tray 2.
Possible engine test pages (printer dependent)
● A series of lines parallel to the short end of the page.
● A series of lines parallel to the long end of the page.
Figure 4-104 Engine test button
Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly
or noise isolation, run the diagnostic test when the front, right or toner supply
(model specific) door is open.
Engine diagnostics 357
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation.
Defeat the front door interlock
1. Open the front door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card,
into a strip, and insert the strip into the slot for the door interlock logic
switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door
interlock.
Figure 4-105 Defeat the front door interlock
Defeat the right door interlock
1. Open the right door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card,
into a strip, and insert the strip into the slot for the door interlock logic
switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door
interlock.
358 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-106 Defeat the right door interlock
Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X57945 models)
1. Open the toner supply door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card,
into a strip, and insert the strip into the slot for the door interlock logic
switch.
It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the door
interlock.
Figure 4-107 Defeat the toner supply door interlock (X57945 models)
Defeating interlocks 359
Disable cartridge check
Learn about the disable cartridge check troubleshooting diagnostic.
CAUTION: Do not perform a disable cartridge check on color printers that
use a two-part cartridge design. Doing so might result in toner cross
contamination in the supply lines.
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the
printer when a toner cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are
ignored while the printer is in this mode.
When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print
internal pages (the print quality pages will be the most useful). This test can be
used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate print-quality problems
that are related to a toner cartridge.
NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning
the disable cartridge check diagnostic.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Diagnostic Tests
● Disable Cartridge Check
LED diagnostics (formatter)
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using formatter LEDs.
Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.
360 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-108 LEDs (formatter)
Table 4-23 LEDs (formatter)
Item Description
Heartbeat LED Indicates that the formatter is functioning.
LED diagnostics (formatter) 361
Table 4-23 LEDs (formatter) (continued)
Item Description
HP Jetdirect LEDs (2 LEDs) Indicates network activity and link status.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different
printer be installed during the repair or troubleshooting processes. The
formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is installed in
and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.
Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:
● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported
cartridges information change and might make a product unusable.
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover
the costs of the repair in the form of a product replacement. There is no
method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is installed.
This part contains components that are electrostatic discharge (ESD)
sensitive. To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, always touch the sheet-
metal chassis to ground yourself before touching an ESD sensitive part.
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While
the printer is initializing after it is turned on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns
off. When the printer has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED
pulses on and off.
The following list describes the heartbeat LED operation while the printer is
executing the firmware boot process.
NOTE: If after initialization, the heartbeat LED is not solid green, see Table
4-24 Heartbeat LED, printer operational.
Heartbeat LED, printer firmware boot
● Green
– Blinking: The printer is correctly functioning.
362 Chapter 4 Solve problems
– Solid: The FW has not yet booted.
● Yellow (Amber)
– Blinking: The control panel is not detected.
– Solid: The FFC between the formatter and DC controller is not connected
or is damaged.
● Red
– Solid: Valid SPI code; there is a problem releasing ASIC and running the
BIOS.
Solid: BIOS initiates PROSAC to change the LED from red to green.
Solid: PROSAC is not running (No ROM or SPI code).
– Blinking: Valid SPI code not found.
● Off: No 5V or 3.3V PROSAC power.
The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation when the printer
completes the firmware boot process and is in the Ready state.
Table 4-24 Heartbeat LED, printer operational
Green ● Normal operation
– Formatter is operating normally
– Firmware is operating normally
– Control panel is connected
Yellow ● Formatter cannot connect to the control panel
– Check control panel connections
– Verify control panel functionality
Red ● Formatter error or failure
– Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error
– Power on self test (formatter) failed
– Diagnostic (formatter) failed
LED diagnostics (formatter) 363
Table 4-24 Heartbeat LED, printer operational (continued)
Off TIP: The heartbeat LED is off if the power cable is disconnected, the product
power switch is in the off position, or the product is in Sleep Mode.
● Firmware or system freeze
– Check control panel for an error message
– Control panel failure
NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power
off, and then on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. When the printer is
connected to a properly working network through a network cable, the yellow
LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status.
Figure 4-109 Yellow and green LEDs on the network port
A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed. For link failures, check all of the network cable connections.
364 Chapter 4 Solve problems
In addition, try to manually configure the network card link speed setting by
using the printer control panel. To change the link speed, complete the following
steps.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Settings button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Touch the desired link speed setting, and then touch the Done button.
Use the solve problems checklist
Learn about using the solve problems checklist.
If the printer is not correctly functioning, complete the steps (in the order
given) in the following checklist. If the printer fails a checklist step, follow the
corresponding troubleshooting suggestions for that step. If a checklist step
resolves the problem, skip the remaining checklist items.
1. If the control panel is blank or black, check the following before proceeding:
● Check to make sure that the printer is not in Sleep mode (press a button
on the control panel).
● Check the power cable.
● Check that the power is turned on.
● Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the printer power
configuration. (See the label that is on the back of the printer for voltage
requirements.) If a power strip is in use, and its voltage is not within
specifications, connect the printer directly into the electrical outlet. If it is
already connected into the outlet, try a different outlet.
NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in
Sleep mode. Opening a door or pressing a control-panel button causes the
printer to wake up from Sleep mode.
● The control panel home button LED is illuminated
● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds
Use the solve problems checklist 365
If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the
following:
a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning.
TIP: The LED on the formatter will blink if the control panel is not
detected or the cables are not properly seated.
● Try printing from a host computer. Does the printer print a test page?
● Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?
c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning.
i. Turn the power off.
ii. Reseat the cable connections on the bottom of the control-panel
assembly and the control-panel connectors at the formatter.
iii. Turn the printer power on, and then check for functionality of the
control-panel by pressing a button on the control panel.
d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the
problem, and the printer still freezes while in Sleep mode, elevate the
case.
e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-
panel assembly.
2. The control panel should indicate a Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on status.
If an error message displays, resolve the error.
● Try using the Power-on checks section in this manual to solve the
problem.
3. For network connection errors, verify that the network port is active and that
the cables are securely seated.
a. Check the network cable connections between the printer and the
computer or network port. Make sure that the connections are secure.
NOTE: The network LEDs should be illuminated and flashing.
366 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables, if
possible.
c. Check the network connection. Verify that the port is active.
4. Print a configuration page. If the printer is connected to a network, an
HP Jetdirect page also prints.
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch
the Reports button. Open the following menus:
i. Configuration/Status Pages
ii. Configuration Page
b. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
c. Touch the Print button to print the pages.
● If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.
TIP: Make sure that the selected paper size and type meet HP
specifications. Also open the Trays menu on the printer control panel
and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and
size.
● If the page jams in the printer, follow the instructions on the control panel
to clear the jam.
● If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the printer
hardware.
● If the page prints correctly, the printer hardware is working. The problem
is with the host computer, with the print driver, or with the program.
Use the solve problems checklist 367
5. Print a supplies status page and then check that the maintenance items
below are not at their end-of-life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumables and maintenance kit life specifications
are estimations. Actual individual life/yield during normal use varies
depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated life is
not an implied guarantee or warrantable.
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch
the Reports button. Open the following menus:
i. Configuration/Status Pages
ii. Supplies Status Page
b. Touch Supplies Status Page to select it.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
c. Touch the Print button to print the pages.
If a maintenance item needs to be replaced, order the replacement part.
6. Verify that the correct print driver for this printer is installed. Check
the program to make sure that the print driver for this printer is used.
The print driver is on the CD that came with the printer, or can be
downloaded from this Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP.
7. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past.
If this solution works, the problem is with the program. If this solution does
not work (the document does not print), complete these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the printer software
installed.
b. If the printer is connected to the network, connect the printer directly
to a host computer with a USB cable. Redirect the printer to the correct
port, or reinstall the software (make sure to select the new connection
type).
368 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Control panel troubleshooting
If the control panel is not responding normally or has display issues, use the
following procedures to troubleshoot the issues.
Control panel system diagnostics
Learn about printer firmware control panel troubleshooting.
Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control panel hardware and
display using the printer firmware system diagnostics.
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests
Learn about accessing the control panel system diagnostics tests from a
touchscreen control panel.
Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests.
1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo.
Figure 4-110 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
Control panel troubleshooting 369
3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the
tests.
Figure 4-111 Pre-boot menu
Table 4-25 Pre-boot menu button descriptions
Button Description
Use this button to see more information
about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu
items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu
item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu
items.
Use this button to go back to the previous
menu.
Not used.
370 Chapter 4 Solve problems
4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press
the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-112 Access the administration menu
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press
the OK button to select it.
NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.
Figure 4-113 Access the diagnostics menu
Screen test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic screen test.
Screen test 371
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-114 Open the screen test
The blue horizontal gradient screen appears.
Figure 4-115 Blue horizontal gradient screen
3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test
screens.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.
372 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-26 Touchscreen test screens
Screen Description
Green horizontal gradient
Red horizontal gradient
Blue vertical gradient
Green vertical gradient
Red vertical gradient
Blue with horizontal interlaced
Green with horizontal interlaced
Screen test 373
Table 4-26 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
Red with horizontal interlaced
Blue with vertical interlaced
Green with vertical interlaced
Red with vertical interlaced
Black with white center
White with black center
374 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-26 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
Checkerboard
Multicolor stripes
Blue green grid meshing
Touch test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic touch test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK
button to select it.
Figure 4-116 Open the touch test
Touch test 375
3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.
Figure 4-117 Touch the white grid
A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.
Figure 4-118 Verify the mark
SoftKey test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic SoftKey test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
376 Chapter 4 Solve problems
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the
OK button to select it.
Figure 4-119 Open the softkey test
3. When prompted, touch the Home button.
Figure 4-120 Touch the Home button
If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.
NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.
SoftKey test 377
Figure 4-121 Successful test
Backlight test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic backlight test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the
OK button to select it.
After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then
returns to full brightness.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
378 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-122 Open the backlight test
Sound test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic sound test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK
button to select it.
After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
Figure 4-123 Open the sound test
Sound test 379
Version
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic version information.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK
button to select it.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
Select 7 Version to view the following types of information:
NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not
the printer.
● Panel ID
● Hardware (version)
● Firmware (version)
● KB Hw (version)
● KB Firm (version)
● LCD Vendor
● Touch Controller Version
Figure 4-124 Open the version information
380 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Control panel messages document (CPMD)
Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).
NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual. Click on the
links below to access a CPMD on the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine
(WISE) site.
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700, MFP 5800, HP Color LaserJet Managed
X557 - Control Panel Message Document (CPMD)
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X57945, X58045 - Control Panel Message
Document (CPMD)
Print the supplies status page
The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Reports menu icon.
2. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Touch Supplies Status Page, and then touch the Print icon to print the
page.
Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire
disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other
files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action unless it is
specified as a solution in the CPMD.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu is also remotely accessible by using a telnet network
protocol (Remote Admin) to establish an administration connection to the
printer.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Use the following procedure to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen
control panel.
1. Turn the printer on.
Control panel messages document (CPMD) 381
2. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo.
Figure 4-125 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the
tests.
Figure 4-126 Pre-boot menu
Button Description
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
382 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Button Description
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
5. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu
from a touchscreen control panel.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to
factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the
logo.
Figure 4-127 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then
touch the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and
then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 383
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight
the 1:Continue item, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
Remote Admin
Learn about the printer Remote Admin function.
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu
(BIOS environment). The printer functions as a telnet server which uses the
telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer (with telnet
installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the
Pre-boot menu, for security reasons the Remote Admin connection must be
initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.
Required software and network connection
Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network
protocol is installed and enabled on the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for
computers using a Windows® operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows-based system;
however, there are other operating systems that support the telnet network
protocol. For information about enabling and configuring the telnet network
protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.
Enable the Windows telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client
installed, however, the telnet client function might not be enabled by default.
NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 10®
operating system. Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other
operating systems.
384 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Use the Start menu to open the Windows Settings dialog box, and
then search for Turn Windows features on or off. Click the Turn
Windows features on or off item.
Figure 4-128 Open Windows Settings
2. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check
box is not checked, click the box to select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is
already enabled. Click the Cancel button.
Enable the Windows telnet client 385
Figure 4-129 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the
printer for the Remote Admin function to operate. This means that the telnet
client computer must be on the same network as the printer.
The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or
other remote access network security programs.
If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a
virtual private network (VPN) connection to the network.
Connect a remote connection
Use the following procedures to connect a remote connection.
Start the telnet server function at the printer
For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person
that is physically present at the printer. The following steps must be performed
by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service
password depending on how the printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
386 Chapter 4 Solve problems
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a 1/8 with an
underscore displays, touch the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot
menu.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the
+3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-130 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the
+A:Remote Admin item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-131 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the
1:Start Telnet item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 4-132 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to 7.
Figure 4-133 Telnet connecting message
Start the telnet server function at the printer 387
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.
Figure 4-134 Telnet error message
a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
– The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is
configured to use DHCP instead.
– The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP
address is incorrect.
c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server
is not turned on or is malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen
appears. Use the information on this screen to connect the remote telnet
client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 4-135 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote
computer to the printer.
388 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. From the Start menu open the Command Prompt desktop application.
TIP: Type cmd in the application search dialogue box to find the
application.
2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press
the Enter key.
Figure 4-136 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter
key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was
displayed in step 7 of the "Start the telnet server function at the printer"
topic.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is
probably behind a firewall or on a different network that the remote telnet
client computer.
Figure 4-137 Establish a telnet connection
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 389
4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 of then "Start the telnet server
function at the printer" topic at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN
entries, the printer terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote
Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See the "Start the telnet
server function at the printer" topic.
Figure 4-138 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered. and the
Remote Admin connection is successful. For information about the Pre-boot
menu and options, see "Pre-boot menu options" in the printer Service
Manual.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecured telnet
network protocol connection, the following Pre-boot menu items are
disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
390 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-139 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection
The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel
or the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin
connection from the remote telnet client computer.
1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to
scroll down to the +3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 4-140 Access the administrator menu
Disconnect a remote connection 391
2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote
Admin item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 4-141 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet
item, and then press the Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between
the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person
that is physically present at the printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight
the 1:Continue item, and then touch the OK button. The printer will
continue to initialize.
Figure 4-142 Terminate the telnet connection
Print the event log
Learn how to print the event log.
Print the 50 most recent events in the Event Log. For each event, the printed log
shows the error number, page count, error code, and description or personality.
392 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Troubleshooting menu icon.
2. Touch Event Log.
3. Touch the Print icon to print the page.
How to search for printer documentation
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is
available on the HP portals.
For HP internal access to WISE, go to WISE.
For HP channel partners access WISE, see Accessing WISE for HP channel
partners (HP Partner Portal) or Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP).
WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and HP internal users. The
level of detail available depends on your access credentials. To learn how to find
support content in WISE, watch the video here.
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation
These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians,
and other internal users.
To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error
Code and Control Panel Message Document in WISE.
TIP: The Product Detail Page (PDP) is available from the WISE home page.
Enter, and then select a product name or number in the Go to a Product Detail
Page area (callout 1), or select the …or select your product from a list item
(callout 2) on the WISE home page.
How to search for printer documentation 393
Many types of printer documentation and information are available on WISE.
This section details methods for finding error code descriptions and solutions.
TIP: To view a list of control panel message documents (CPMD) per printer,
search for the following topic in WISE: HP LaserJet, OfficeJet, PageWide,
ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message document (CPMD) list or click the
link below.
● HP LaserJet, HP OfficeJet, HP PageWide, HP ScanJet - Control panel
messages document (CPMD), Service manual, and Service cost data list
Use one of the following methods to search for CPMD error code information.
● Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
● Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
● Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Method 1: Use the WISE home page Error Code Lookup tool
Use the WISE Error Code Lookup tool to find error code troubleshooting
procedures using the following steps.
1. On the WISE home page, click the Error Code Lookup tool icon.
Figure 4-143 WISE Error Code Lookup tool icon
2. Enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in the Error Code Lookup
dialog box.
394 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-144 WISE Error Code Lookup tool dialog box
3. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example,
HP LaserJet Enterprise M606 series) in the list.
NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended
for the most accurate search return.
Figure 4-145 WISE Error Code Lookup tool drop-down list
M606
4. Type the error code (for example, 13.b2.d2) in the Error Code Lookup keyword
field, and then select the search icon.
Figure 4-146 WISE Error Code Lookup tool search
5. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results
area.
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 395
Figure 4-147 WISE Search results
Method 2: Search for error codes using the WISE search function
Use the WISE search function to find error code troubleshooting procedures
using the following steps.
1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in
the Search dialog box.
Figure 4-148 WISE Search dialog box
2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example,
HP LaserJet Enterprise M606 series) in the list.
NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended
for the most accurate search return.
396 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-149 WISE Search drop-down list
3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Search keyword field, and
then select the search icon.
Figure 4-150 WISE Search
1 2
4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results
area.
Figure 4-151 WISE Search results
Method 3: Search for error codes using the Product Detail Page
Use the WISE Product Detail Page (PDP) to find error code troubleshooting
procedures using the following steps.
How to search WISE for printer information and documentation 397
1. On the WISE home page, enter a printer model number (for example, M606) in
the Go to a Product Detail page dialog box.
TIP: To find a PDP from a list of products by product type, select the …or
select your product from a list item just below the dialog box.
Figure 4-152 WISE PDP dialog box
2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example,
HP LaserJet Enterprise M606 series) in the list.
NOTE: Selecting the series item from the drop-down list is recommended
for the most accurate search return.
Figure 4-153 WISE PDP drop-down list
3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the Error Code Lookup field, and
then select the search icon.
398 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-154 WISE PDP search
1 2
4. The error code troubleshooting content displays in the All Search Results
area.
Figure 4-155 WISE PDP search results
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Channel Services Delivery
Platform (CSDP) if you are an HP Channel Partner.
IMPORTANT: A Partner Admin must requested access, via the CSDP portal,
to create a new user before you can sign into the CDSP portal.
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (CSDP) 399
1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).
Figure 4-156 CSDP sign-in page
2. On the CSDP home page, click the Knowledge and Training item.
TIP: Use the Knowledge and Training item at the top of the CSDP home
page (callout 1), or the Knowledge and Training action icon (callout 2).
Figure 4-157 CSDP portal home page
1
3. Select HP Technical Documentation on the Knowledge and Training page to
open the WISE portal home page.
Figure 4-158 CSDP portal HP Knowledge and Training page
400 Chapter 4 Solve problems
4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Figure 4-159 WISE portal home page
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal)
Learn how to access WISE by accessing the HP Partner Portal if you are an HP
Channel Partner.
NOTE: If this is your first visit to the HP Partner Portal, you will be asked to
create an account. Follow the setup directions using your HP Partner
credentials.
View a video of how to access WISE for HP channel partners
1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the
sign-in page).
Figure 4-160 HP Partner Portal sign-in page
Accessing WISE for HP channel partners (HP Partner Portal) 401
2. On the HP Partner Portal home page, click the Services & Support item.
Figure 4-161 HP Partner Portal home page
3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.
Figure 4-162 HP Partner Portal Service & Support page
402 Chapter 4 Solve problems
4. Select the Technical Documentation item.
Figure 4-163 HP Partner Portal Technical Support (WISE)page
5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.
Figure 4-164 WISE portal home page
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting
overview
This section provides information on error codes and searching for information.
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview 403
Error codes (types and structure)
Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel
to indicate the current printer status or situations that might require action.
Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set structure with six
characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).
● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component
that is causing the error. For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 =
Supplies for HP LaserJets.
● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.
HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the
control panel message document (CPMD) for each printer.
The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and
troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the error, and other helpful information
such as service mode pins and part numbers.
The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for
the following error codes.
Table 4-27 ERROR CODES: The first two characters
Error code System Component System Error Description
10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.
11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the
formatter.
13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.
15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.
17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.
20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering
error.
21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a
decompression error when trying to
process job.
30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring
inside the unit.
31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam
error.
32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification
or error.
404 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-27 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
Error code System Component System Error Description
33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware
integrity (SureStart), or Trusted
Platform Module (TPM) notification or
error.
40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or
USB accessory error.
41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general
and misprint or mismatch errors
typically involving (but not limited to)
the fuser, the laser scanner, or the
paper path.
42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event
Log, Shell, System Manager, or other
component.
44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital
sending component.
45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving
the OXPd Web Kit (communications
log).
46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.
47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.
48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management,
or job pipeline error.
49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.
50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.
51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.
52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.
54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).
55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.
56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory
error.
57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.
58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.
59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.
60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.
Error codes (types and structure) 405
Table 4-27 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
Error code System Component System Error Description
61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data
package.
62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.
Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.
63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical,
communication, etc.).
65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.
66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.
67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error
69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.
70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.
76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes
formatter and DC controller
communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.
80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.
81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO
error.
82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.
90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB,
display) or interconnection error.
98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.
99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU),
firmware install (engine or accessory),
or disk error.
406 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Solve paper handling problems
Review the following information to solve paper handling problems.
Clear paper jams (SFP models)
Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper
path.
Paper jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations.
7
1
2
6
3
5
Item Description
1 Right door and fuser area
2 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
3 Tray jam access doors
4 Optional Tray 4
5 Optional Tray 3
6 Tray 2
7 Output bin
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.
The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step
instructions on the control panel.
Solve paper handling problems 407
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step
until you have completed all steps in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces
the number of paper jams
1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper
from a different package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper
from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the
tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size
of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without
bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual
feed feature and feed sheets one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is
configured correctly for the paper type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray).
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1
408 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. If you can see the jammed sheet in Tray 1, remove the jammed sheet by
gently pulling it straight out.
2. Open the right door and remove paper from the area shown.
3. Close the right to allow the printer to clear the message.
4. Make sure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 409
5. Make sure the Tray 1 guides are set to the correct paper size and that the
paper tray is not overfilled (paper is below the 3 triangles on the right guide).
6. Load the paper back into the tray and restart the print job.
7. If the same jam appears remove and clean the tray 1 pick, feed and
separation rollers.
a. Locate and release the pickup roller assembly release tab.
Figure 4-165 Locate the pickup roller assembly tab
410 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the
printer.
Figure 4-166 Remove the pickup roller assembly
c. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then
lift the assembly up.
Figure 4-167 Lift the separation roller assembly
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 411
d. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
Figure 4-168 Remove the separation roller assembly
e. Clean the roller with a dampened lint free cloth.
f. Install the rollers back into tray one and test the tray by printing from tray
1.
8. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to Tray 2. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation
that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 2
412 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 413
4. Open Tray 2.
5. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
414 Chapter 4 Solve problems
6. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper
size for the paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over
filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
7. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
8. If the error persists, clean the Tray 2 pick, feed, separation rollers.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 415
a. Open the right door to access the rollers.
b. Locate and remove the Tray 2 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
416 Chapter 4 Solve problems
c. Remove the Tray 2 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on the side of the assembly
and slide out as shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils
or debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 2.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 417
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to Tray 3. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation
that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to the 550-sheet trays. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A3.A3 Jam in tray 3
● 13.A3.D3 Jam in tray 3
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays
1. Open the Tray 3 right side access door.
418 Chapter 4 Solve problems
2. Remove any jammed paper found in access area.
3. Open the right door.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 419
4. Gently remove any jammed paper.
5. Open Tray 3.
420 Chapter 4 Solve problems
6. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
7. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper
size for the paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over
filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 421
8. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
9. If the error persists, clean the Tray 3 pick, feed, separation rollers.
a. Open the Tray 3 right door to access the rollers.
422 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Locate and remove the Tray 3 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 3 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on the side of the assembly
and slide out as shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils
or debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 423
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 3.
10. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to the 550 sheet Tray 4. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A4.A4 Paper jam in tray 4
● 13.A4.D4 Paper jam in tray 4
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 4
424 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 425
3. Open the Tray 4 right access door.
4. Gently remove any jammed paper.
426 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Open the Tray 3 access door and gently remove any jammed paper.
6. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
7. Open Tray 4.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 427
8. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
9. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper
size for the paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over
filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
428 Chapter 4 Solve problems
10. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
11. If the error persists, clean the Tray 4 pick, feed, separation rollers.
a. Open the Tray 4 door to access the rollers.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 429
b. Locate and remove the Tray 4 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 4 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on to the side of the rollers as
shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils
or debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
430 Chapter 4 Solve problems
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 4.
12. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to the HCI Tray 4. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A4.A4 Paper jam in tray 4
● 13.A4.D4 Paper jam in tray 4
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 431
1. Open the printer right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
432 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Open the Tray 4 right access door.
4. Gently remove any jammed paper.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 433
5. Open the Tray 3 access door and gently remove any jammed paper.
6. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
7. Open Tray 4.
434 Chapter 4 Solve problems
8. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
9. Make sure that the tray width guide is set to the correct paper size for the
paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over filled above
the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 435
10. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
11. If the error persists, clean the Tray 4 pick, feed, and separation rollers.
a. Open the Tray 4 door to access the rollers.
436 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Locate and remove the Tray 4 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 4 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on to the side of the rollers as
shown.
NOTE: Do not touch the rubber part of the rollers with hands. Oils or
debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 437
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 4.
12. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2 jam error in right door
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser
area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.Az Stay jam in right door
● 13.B2.Dz Delay jam in right door
● 13.B2.5z Inappropriate page to the Delivery Path jam
● 13.B2.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex jobs
Or
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
438 Chapter 4 Solve problems
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the
fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
13.B2 jam error in right door 439
3. Gently remove any jammed paper from the duplexer paper path.
440 Chapter 4 Solve problems
IMPORTANT: Make sure the paper being used is not too short for the
printers duplexer requirements.
4. Close the right door.
5. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
6. Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct size for the paper
loaded.
7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser
area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B4.Cz Jam in right door
● 13.B4.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door 441
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the
fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
442 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Close the right door.
4. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
5. Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct size for the paper
loaded.
6. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser
area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B9.yz Jam in right door
y = jam type (A or D)
z = Paper tray. This can be 0-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
Or
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser 443
● 13.B9.Cz Jam in right door (Fuser wrap jam)
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
● 13.B9.FF Residual paper jam in right door
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before clearing jams.
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper from the fuser input.
444 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Remove the fuser and remove any jammed paper found.
a. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle call-outs) and then
remove the fuser.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser 445
b. Remove any paper from the exit of the fuser.
c. Open the fuser access and check for a z-fold paper jam.
446 Chapter 4 Solve problems
d. Remove jammed paper from fuser.
e. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used
meets the HP specifications for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the duplexer area. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the
jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.D3.Dz Duplex delivery delay jam
● 13.D3.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the duplexer area
NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before clearing jams.
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer 447
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper from the duplexer paper path.
448 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Close the right door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used
meets the HP specifications for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.E1 jam error in the output bin
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in
the output bin. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.E1.Dz Jam in output bin
● 13.E1.FF Residual paper jam in output bin
z = paper type that is being printed on. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin
13.E1 jam error in the output bin 449
1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
2. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
3. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
Clear paper jams (MFP models)
Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper
path.
Paper jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations.
450 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1
2
3
8
4
7
6
5
Item Description
1 Document feeder
2 Right door and fuser area
3 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
4 Tray jam access doors
5 Optional Tray 5
6 Optional Tray 4
7 Optional Tray 3
8 Tray 2
9 Output bin
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.
The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step
instructions on the control panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step
until you have completed all steps in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams 451
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces
the number of paper jams
1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper
from a different package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper
from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the
tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size
of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without
bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual
feed feature and feed sheets one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is
configured correctly for the paper type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder
The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document
feeder. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists
in clearing the jam.
In addition to the instructions provided below
NOTE: The printer model referenced in this video might be different from
your printer model, but the steps to clear the jam are the same.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 31.13.01 Jam in document feeder
● 31.13.02 Jam in document feeder
● 31.13.13 Jam in document feeder
452 Chapter 4 Solve problems
View a video of how to clear a jam in the document feeder
1. Remove paper from the exit assembly of the document feeder.
2. Open the document-feeder cover.
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder 453
3. Remove any jammed paper from the document feeder input area.
4. Lift the document feeder and check the lower side of the feed path.
454 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted to the
correct size for the document before loading paper.
NOTE: To avoid document feeder jams, to copy narrow documents, use the
flatbed scanner. Remove all staples and paper clips from original
documents. Do not feed damaged or wrinkled paper.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam
more frequently than originals that are printed on plain paper.
IMPORTANT: Warning: Do not run labels through the automatic document
feeder (ADF).
6. If the paper continues to jam, remove and clean the document feeder rollers.
a. Open the document-feeder jam access door.
Figure 4-169 Open the document-feeder jam access door
31.13.yz jam error in the document feeder 455
b. Release the blue locking arm to drop the assembly down. Slide the
pickup and feed roller assembly to the left, and then pull it away from the
document feeder to remove it.
Figure 4-170 Release the blue locking arm
c. Lift the roller cover up and then slide the roller toward the front of the
printer to remove it.
Figure 4-171 Release the separation roller cover
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the rollers in the document feeder and perform a copy job to
test.
7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray).
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
456 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 1
1. If you can see the jammed sheet in Tray 1, remove the jammed sheet by
gently pulling it straight out.
2. Open the right door and remove paper from the area shown.
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 457
3. Close the right to allow the printer to clear the message.
4. Make sure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
5. Make sure the Tray 1 guides are set to the correct paper size and that the
paper tray is not overfilled (paper is below the 3 triangles on the right guide).
6. Load the paper back into the tray and restart the print job.
7. If the same jam appears remove and clean the tray 1 pick, feed and
separation rollers.
458 Chapter 4 Solve problems
a. Locate and release the pickup roller assembly release tab.
Figure 4-172 Locate the pickup roller assembly tab
b. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the
printer.
Figure 4-173 Remove the pickup roller assembly
13.B2.D1 jam error in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 459
c. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then
lift the assembly up.
Figure 4-174 Lift the separation roller assembly
d. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
Figure 4-175 Remove the separation roller assembly
e. Clean the roller with a dampened lint free cloth.
f. Install the rollers back into tray one and test the tray by printing from tray
1.
8. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to Tray 2. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation
that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
460 Chapter 4 Solve problems
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 2
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 461
4. Open Tray 2.
5. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
462 Chapter 4 Solve problems
6. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper
size for the paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over
filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
7. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
8. If the error persists, clean the Tray 2 pick, feed, separation rollers.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 463
a. Open the right door to access the rollers.
b. Locate and remove the Tray 2 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
464 Chapter 4 Solve problems
c. Remove the Tray 2 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on the side of the assembly
and slide out as shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils
or debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 2.
13.B2.D2 jam error in Tray 2 465
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to Tray 3. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation
that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to the 550-sheet trays. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A3.A3 Jam in tray 3
● 13.A3.D3 Jam in tray 3
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 3, and the optional trays
1. Open the Tray 3 right side access door.
466 Chapter 4 Solve problems
2. Remove any jammed paper found in access area.
3. Open the right door.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 467
4. Gently remove any jammed paper.
5. Open Tray 3.
468 Chapter 4 Solve problems
6. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
7. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper
size for the paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over
filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 469
8. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
9. If the error persists, clean the Tray 3 pick, feed, separation rollers.
a. Open the Tray 3 right door to access the rollers.
470 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Locate and remove the Tray 3 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 3 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on the side of the assembly
and slide out as shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils
or debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
13.A3 jam error in Tray 3 471
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 3.
10. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to the 550 sheet Tray 4. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A4.A4 Paper jam in tray 4
● 13.A4.D4 Paper jam in tray 4
View a video of how to clear a jam in Tray 4
472 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 473
3. Open the Tray 4 right access door.
4. Gently remove any jammed paper.
474 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Open the Tray 3 access door and gently remove any jammed paper.
6. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
7. Open Tray 4.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 475
8. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
9. Make sure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper
size for the paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over
filled above the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
476 Chapter 4 Solve problems
10. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
11. If the error persists, clean the Tray 4 pick, feed, separation rollers.
a. Open the Tray 4 door to access the rollers.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 477
b. Locate and remove the Tray 4 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide blue locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 4 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on to the side of the rollers as
shown.
NOTE: Make sure your hands are clean before touching the rollers. Oils
or debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
478 Chapter 4 Solve problems
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 4.
12. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
related to the HCI Tray 4. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A4.A4 Paper jam in tray 4
● 13.A4.D4 Paper jam in tray 4
View a video of how to clear a jam in the high-capacity input Tray 4
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 479
1. Open the printer right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
480 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Open the Tray 4 right access door.
4. Gently remove any jammed paper.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 481
5. Open the Tray 3 access door and gently remove any jammed paper.
6. Close the right door to clear the control panel message.
7. Open Tray 4.
482 Chapter 4 Solve problems
8. Remove the paper from the tray and discard any bent, curled, or damaged
sheets.
9. Make sure that the tray width guide is set to the correct paper size for the
paper being installed into the tray and that the tray is not over filled above
the fill mark (line below 3 triangles on rear guide).
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 483
10. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
11. If the error persists, clean the Tray 4 pick, feed, and separation rollers.
a. Open the Tray 4 door to access the rollers.
484 Chapter 4 Solve problems
b. Locate and remove the Tray 4 separation roller.
Call-out 1- slide locking lever
Call-out 2- Remove the roller assembly.
c. Remove the Tray 4 pick and feed rollers.
To remove the roller assembly, gently pull on to the side of the rollers as
shown.
NOTE: Do not touch the rubber part of the rollers with hands. Oils or
debris from hands can cause paper pickup issues.
13.A4 jam error in Tray 4 (2,100 sheet feeder HCI) 485
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint free cloth.
e. Reinstall the roller assemblies and close the right door.
f. Run a print job from Tray 4.
12. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2 jam error in right door
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser
area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.Az Stay jam in right door
● 13.B2.Dz Delay jam in right door
● 13.B2.5z Inappropriate page to the Delivery Path jam
● 13.B2.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex jobs
Or
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
486 Chapter 4 Solve problems
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the
fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
13.B2 jam error in right door 487
3. Gently remove any jammed paper from the duplexer paper path.
488 Chapter 4 Solve problems
IMPORTANT: Make sure the paper being used is not too short for the
printers duplexer requirements.
4. Close the right door.
5. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
6. Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct size for the paper
loaded.
7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser
area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B4.Cz Jam in right door
● 13.B4.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = paper tray. This can be trays 1-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
13.B4 jam errors in the right door 489
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the
fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
490 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Close the right door.
4. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
5. Ensure the paper tray guides are set to the correct size for the paper
loaded.
6. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the right door and fuser
area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B9.yz Jam in right door
y = jam type (A or D)
z = Paper tray. This can be 0-5 or "D" for duplex print jobs.
Or
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser 491
● 13.B9.Cz Jam in right door (Fuser wrap jam)
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
● 13.B9.FF Residual paper jam in right door
View a video of how to clear a jam in the right door and fuser area
NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before clearing jams.
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper from the fuser input.
492 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Remove the fuser and remove any jammed paper found.
a. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle call-outs) and then
remove the fuser.
13.B9 jam errors in the fuser 493
b. Remove any paper from the exit of the fuser.
c. Open the fuser access and check for a z-fold paper jam.
494 Chapter 4 Solve problems
d. Remove jammed paper from fuser.
e. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used
meets the HP specifications for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer
Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the duplexer area. When a
jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the
jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.D3.Dz Duplex delivery delay jam
● 13.D3.FF Residual paper jam in right door
z = Fuser mode. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the duplexer area
NOTE: The fuser is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before clearing jams.
13.D3 jam errors in the duplexer 495
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper from the duplexer paper path.
496 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Close the right door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used
meets the HP specifications for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.E1 jam error in the output bin
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in
the output bin. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.E1.Dz Jam in output bin
● 13.E1.FF Residual paper jam in output bin
z = paper type that is being printed on. This can be 0-9 or A-F.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin
13.E1 jam error in the output bin 497
1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
2. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
3. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.E2 jam error in top cover
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in
the top cover area. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation
that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.E2.yz Jam in Top cover
y = "A" (stay jam) or "D" (delay jam)
z = 1-4 (output bin page is going to)
These jams can only be present if the floor standing finisher is installed
View a video of how to clear a jam in the top cover.
498 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Open the printer top access cover.
2. Remove all paper from inside the top cover.
13.E2 jam error in top cover 499
3. Make sure that the floor standing finisher is correctly secured to the printer.
4. Make sure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.60 jam errors in the fuser exit area when printing to a stapler/stacker or
floor-standing finisher
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in
the fuser exit area when printing to a finisher. When a jam occurs, the control
panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.60.51, 13.60.52 Paper too short jam
● 13.60.61, 13.60.62, 13.60.63, 13.60.64 Inter-Page Gap Jam
NOTE: The images provide do not show any accessories or copy module
attached to the printer.
View a video of how to clear a jam in the fuser exit area on finisher.
500 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the fuser and remove any jammed paper found.
a. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle call-outs) and then
remove the fuser.
13.60 jam errors in the fuser exit area when printing to a stapler/stacker or floor-standing
finisher 501
b. Remove any paper jammed in the fuser exit area.
c. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
3. Close right door to allow the printer to clear jam message.
4. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations
in the 3-bin stapler/stacker. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an
animation that assists in clearing the jam.
Recommended action for customers
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that
assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.80.yz Jam in 3 Bin stapler/stacker
● 13.83.yz Jam in 3 Bin stapler/stacker
● 13.84.yz Jam in 3 Bin stapler/stacker
y = "A" (stay jam), "B" (delay jam) "F" (residual jam)
z = Output destination tray 0-4
502 Chapter 4 Solve problems
View a video of how to clear a jam in the 3-bin stapler/stacker area.
1. Remove any paper from the output bins.
2. Clear all paper from upper right door.
a. Open the upper right door.
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker 503
b. Remove paper from input area inside the door.
c. Remove paper from upper output area inside the door.
504 Chapter 4 Solve problems
d. Remove paper from upper standard exit area.
e. Close the upper right door.
3. Open the right door.
4. Remove the fuser and remove any jammed paper found.
13.80, 13.83, or 13.84 jam errors in the 3 Bin Stapler/Stacker 505
a. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle call-outs) and then
remove the fuser.
b. Remove any paper jammed in the fuser exit area.
c. Reinstall the fuser and close the right door.
5. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.
6. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider,
or contact customer support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
506 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Printer feeds incorrect page size
Review the following information when the printer feeds an incorrect page size.
Table 4-28 Printer feeds incorrect page size
Cause Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray. Load the correct size paper in the tray.
The correct size paper is not selected in the Confirm that the settings in the software
software program or printer driver. program and printer driver are correct, because
the software program settings override the
printer driver and control panel settings, and the
printer driver settings override the control panel
settings.
The correct size paper for the tray is not From the control panel, select the correct size
selected in the printer control panel. paper for the tray.
The paper size is not configured correctly for Print a configuration page to determine the
the tray. paper size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the
paper.
Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Review the following information when the printer pulls from an incorrect tray.
Table 4-29 Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Cause Solution
A driver for a different printer is in use. Use a driver for this printer.
The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray.
The paper size is not configured correctly for Print a configuration page or use the control
the input tray. panel to determine the paper size for which the
tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)
Review the following information when the printer will not duplex or duplexes
incorrectly.
Printer feeds incorrect page size 507
Table 4-30 Printer will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly
Cause Solution
The duplex job is trying to use unsupported Verify that the paper is supported for duplex
paper. printing.
The printer driver is not set up for duplex Set up the printer driver to enable duplex
printing. printing.
The first page is printing on the back of Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1
preprinted forms or letterhead. with the letterhead or printed side down, with
the top of the page leading into the printer. For
Tray 2-X, load the paper printed side up with the
top of the page toward the right of the printer.
The printer model does not support automatic The printer model does not support automatic
2-sided printing. 2-sided printing.
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X
Review the following information when the paper does not feed from Tray 2-X.
Table 4-31 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X
Cause Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.
The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not From the printer control panel, select the
selected in the printer control panel. correct paper type for the input tray. Trays
configured for a paper type with a specific
weight range will not match a print job that
specifies an exact weight, even if the specified
weight is within the weight range.
Paper from a previous jam has not been Open the printer and remove any paper in the
completely removed. paper path. Closely inspect the fuser area for
jams.
None of the optional trays appear as input tray The optional trays only display as available if
options. they are installed. Verify that any optional trays
are correctly installed. Verify that the printer
driver has been configured to recognize the
optional trays.
An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the
optional tray is installed. If not, verify that the
tray is correctly attached to the printer.
508 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-31 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X (continued)
Cause Solution
The paper size is not configured correctly for Print a configuration page or use the control
the input tray. panel to determine the paper size for which the
tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Output is curled or wrinkled
Review the following information when the output is curled or wrinkled.
Table 4-32 Output is curled or wrinkled
Cause Solution
Paper does not meet the specifications for this Use only paper that meets the HP paper
printer. specifications for this printer. Non-recycled, 75
g/m2 (20 lb) paper is optimal for office use.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not From the printer control panel, select the
selected in the printer control panel. correct paper type for the input tray. Trays
configured for a paper type with a specific
weight range will not match a print job that
specifies an exact weight, even if the specified
weight is within the weight range.
Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load
paper that is in good condition.
The printer is operating in an excessively humid Verify that the printing environment is within
environment. humidity specifications.
The print job consist of large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive
curl. Try using a different pattern.
Paper used was not stored correctly and might Remove paper and replace it with paper from
have absorbed moisture. a fresh, unopened package. Store paper in a
plastic bag to protect it from humidity.
Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or
turn it over, and then reload it into the input
tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem persists,
replace the paper.
The specific paper type was not configured for Configure the software for the paper (see the
the tray or selected in the software. software documentation). Configure the tray for
the paper.
The paper has previously been used for a print Do not re-use paper.
job.
Output is curled or wrinkled 509
The printer does not pick up paper
If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special
paper or media other than 20lb plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer
increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which increases the
reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the
possibility of a mispick jam.
HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or
reoccurring jams from trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that
require media other than 20lb plain paper.
1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control
panel.
4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of
paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.
5. Check the printer control panel to see if the printer is waiting for an
acknowledgment to the feed the paper manually prompt. Load paper, and
continue.
6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a
lint-free cloth dampened with warm water.
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees,
and flip it over. Do not fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.
3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper
from a different package.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper
from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the
tray.
510 Chapter 4 Solve problems
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of
paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.
6. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
7. The tray pick and/or feed rollers might be contaminated. Clean the rollers
with a lint-free cloth dampened with warm water.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets
of paper (MFP)
Learn about MFP document feeder paper handling problems.
Review the following information when the document feeder jams, skews, or
picks up multiple sheets of paper.
● Check to see if there are areas on the page that might have had staples
removed. This can cause jams and/or mispicks.
● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive
notes that must be removed.
● Check that all rollers are in place and correctly installed.
● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.
● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust
the paper guides to center the stack.
● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work
correctly. Make sure that the paper stack is straight, and the guides are
against the paper stack.
● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the
maximum number of pages. Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides
in the input tray and remove pages from the output bin.
● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris
in the paper path.
● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed
air or a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still
occur, replace the rollers.
● Use the control panel menus to check the status of the document-feeder kit
and replace it if necessary.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP) 511
Paper does not feed automatically
Review the following information when the paper does not feed automatically.
Table 4-33 Paper does not feed automatically
Cause Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded,
program. press the OK button.
The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.
The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray.
Paper from a previous jam has not been Open the printer and remove any paper in the
completely removed. paper path.
The paper size is not configured correctly for Print a configuration page or use the control
the input tray. panel to determine the paper size for which the
tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are
touching the paper.
512 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Image-quality troubleshooting
Learn about image-quality troubleshooting.
Use the information in this topic to troubleshoot and resolve image-quality (what
you see on the final printed page) problems including copy-quality, print-quality,
and color problems (color printers only).
Various printer hardware problems can cause image-quality defects. This topic
is a guide to the steps used to isolate the specific areas of the printer that are
causing image-quality defects on the printed page, and to provide solutions to
resolve those image-quality defects.
Image-quality problems are defined as:
● Print-quality (PQ) problems: PQ problems are associated with the print engine
(printer base) of an MFP printer (single function non MFP image-quality
problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects appear on pages that are
printed by the print engine and not fed through an integrated scanner
assembly (ISA).
● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: CQ problems are associated with the
integrated-scanner assembly (ISA) portion of an MFP printer. CQ defects
appear on pages that are copied using the document feeder or flatbed
glass.
If the print defect is already known to be a PQ or CQ problem, skip to the
appropriate troubleshooting topic listed below. Otherwise, follow the steps in the
next section below to get started troubleshooting image-quality problems.
● Print-quality (PQ) problems: See Print-quality troubleshooting.
● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: See Copy-quality troubleshooting.
Get started troubleshooting image-quality problems
Print a demonstration page to identify the defect as a PQ (print engine ) or CQ
(ISA) problem.
NOTE: If the image defect appears on the printed demonstration page, the
issue is a print-quality (PQ) problem (associated with the print engine and not
the document feeder or flatbed glass) and not a CQ problem.
Make sure that the demonstration page is printed on plain paper.
Enterprise printers
Image-quality troubleshooting 513
1. Select Reports > Other pages.
2. Select Demonstration Page.
Pro printers
1. At the printer, scroll to or select Setup.
2. Go to Reports, and then select Demonstration Page.
Does the demonstration page show any image-quality defects?
● Yes: If defects appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is PQ
related. See Print-quality troubleshooting.
● No: If defects does not appear on the printed demonstration page the issue
is CQ related. See Copy-quality troubleshooting.
Print-quality troubleshooting
Learn about the print-quality troubleshooting.
NOTE: Print-quality (PQ) problems are associated with the print engine
(printer base) of an MFP printer (single function non MFP image-quality
problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects appear on pages that are printed
by the print engine and not feed through an integrated scanner assembly (ISA).
Repetitive image defect ruler
Review the following information about a repetitive image defect ruler.
When troubleshooting the source of some print image defects, one solution
is to identify if it is a repetitive defect (does the print quality defect appear
multiple times on the printed page?). If this is the case, use a ruler to measure
occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems.
For more information, see Using a ruler to measure between repetitive defects.
Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve
image-quality problems. Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect
514 Chapter 4 Solve problems
on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use the table
below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller
with a lint-free cloth. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with a lint-free
cloth that has been dampened with water.
NOTE: The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developer roller
cannot be cleaned because they are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge
or imaging drum. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace the
toner cartridge. The primary fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller cannot be
cleaned because they are internal assemblies in the fuser. If one of these
assemblies is causing the defect, replace the fuse.
TIP: To make a printer specific repetitive defect ruler, use a metric ruler to
transfer the measurements in the table below to a transparency or the edge of
a piece of paper—clearly label each ruler mark with the associated defective
assembly.
Table 4-34 Repetitive defects
Component Distance between Notes
defects
Primary charging 27 mm (1 in) Appears as dropouts.
roller
Appears only in one color.
Photosensitive drum 77 mm (3 in) Appears as dirt or dropouts.
Appears only in one color.
Developer roller 43 mm (1.7 in) Appears as dropouts.
Appears only in one color.
RS Roller 38 mm (1.5 in) Appears only in one color.
Secondary transfer 50 mm (1.97 in) Appears as dropouts or dirt on the back of
roller the page.
Appears on all color planes on front or back
of page.
ITB drive roller 47 mm (1.85 in) Appears on all color planes.
Fuser film 76 mm (3 in) Appears as dirt, dropouts, or loose toner.
Appears on all color planes.
Repetitive image defect ruler 515
Table 4-34 Repetitive defects (continued)
Component Distance between Notes
defects
Fuser Pressure roller 79 mm (3.1 in) Appears as dirt, loose toner, or dirt on the
back of the page.
Appears on all color planes.
Registration roller 44 mm (1.7 in) Appears as dirt or dirt on the back of the
page.
Appears on all color planes.
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects
The figures in this section show color repetitive defect pages. However, the
process for measuring repetitive defects is valid for mono pages.
1. Identify a repetitive defect on the page.
TIP: Print a cleaning page to see if that resolves the defect.
NOTE: Some printers allow loading Letter and A4 media in short-edge-first
or long-edge-first orientation in the paper trays. When measuring repetitive
defects, make sure to place the ruler at the leading edge of the page. This is
the edge of the page that feeds into the printer first.
The example pages below show the following types of repetitive defects.
● Lines (callout 1)
● Smudges (callout 2)
● Dots or spots (callout 3)
516 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-176 Examples of repetitive defects
1 2
NOTE: These are examples only, other types of repetitive defects might
appear on a page.
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects 517
2. Position a metric ruler on the page with the “zero” ruler mark at one
occurrence of the defect (callout 1).
Figure 4-177 Place the ruler on the page
3. Locate the next occurrence of the defect (callout 1).
Figure 4-178 Locate the next repetitive defect
518 Chapter 4 Solve problems
4. Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the two occurrences (callout
1), and then use the Repetitive defects table to determine the defective
assembly.
TIP: Always measure from and to the same point on the defects. For
example, if the ruler is “zeroed” at the top edge of a defect, measure to the
top edge of the next occurrence of that defect.
Figure 4-179 Determine the defective assembly
Print from a different software program
Try printing from a different software program.
If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which
you were printing.
Check the paper-type setting for the print job
Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the
printed pages have smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of
toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner.
Check the paper type setting on the control panel
Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the
setting as needed.
1. Open and close the paper tray.
Print from a different software program 519
2. Follow the control panel prompts to confirm or modify the paper type and
size settings for the tray.
3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specifications.
4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the
environment.
a. Open the following menus:
i. Settings
ii. Copy/Print
iii. Print quality
iv. Adjust paper type
b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.
c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance
setting.
5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)
Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK
button.
8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print
dialog box, click the OK button to print the job.
520 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages.
4. Open the menus drop-down list, and then click the Paper/Quality menu.
5. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
6. Click the Print button.
Check toner-cartridge status
Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges
and if applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page
The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports
menu.
2. Select the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.
Step two: Check supplies status
Check the supplies status report as follows.
1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining
for the toner cartridges and, if applicable, the status of other replaceable
maintenance parts.
Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its
estimated end of life. The supplies status page indicates when a supply level
is very low. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, HP’s
premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print
quality is no longer acceptable. Consider having a replacement available to
install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
Check the paper type setting (macOS) 521
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other
replaceable maintenance parts, the supplies status page lists the genuine
HP part numbers.
2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.
A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on
it. For more information on identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/
learnaboutsupplies.
Print a cleaning page
Learn how to print a cleaning page.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the
Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Maintenance
● Calibration/Cleaning
3. Touch Cleaning Page, and then touch the Print button to print the cleaning
page.
NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do
not turn the printer off until the cleaning process has finished. When it is
finished, discard the printed page.
TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.
Check paper and the printing environment
Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing
environment.
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications
Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP
specifications.
● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.
● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose
particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.
● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
522 Chapter 4 Solve problems
● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.
● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is
designed only for use in Inkjet printers.
● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in
better print quality.
Step two: Check the environment
The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause of
print-quality or paper-feeding issues. Try the following solutions:
● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors,
or air-conditioning vents.
● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of
printer specifications.
● Do not place the printer in a confined space, such as a cabinet.
● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.
● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer
requires good air flow on all sides, including the top.
● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other
elements that can leave residue inside the printer.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on
the printed page when printing from specific trays.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings
menu.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Print Quality
c. Image Registration
3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.
4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Step two: Check the environment 523
5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further
adjustments if necessary.
6. Select Done to save the new settings.
Try a different print driver
Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the
printed pages have unexpected lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics,
incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
Download a different print driver from the
HP support Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP.
Troubleshoot image defects
Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.
Table 4-35 Image defects table quick reference
Defect Defect Defect
Table 4-43 Light print Table 4-41 Gray background or Table 4-38 Blank page - No print
dark print
524 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-35 Image defects table quick reference (continued)
Defect Defect Defect
Table 4-37 Black page Table 4-36 Banding defects Table 4-45 Streak defects
Table 4-40 Fixing/fuser defects Table 4-42 Image placement Table 4-39 Color plane
defects registrations defects (color
models only)
Table 4-44 Output defects
Troubleshoot image defects 525
Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same
steps. Use the following steps as a starting point for solving image defect
issues.
1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or
can go away completely with continued printing.
2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very
Low state (it has passed the rated life), replace the cartridge.
3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that
is loaded in the tray. Try using a different ream of media or a different tray.
Try using a different print mode.
4. Make sure the printer is within the supported operating temperature/
humidity range.
5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer.
See the printer support page at support.hp.com for a list of the supported
paper sizes and types for the printer.
NOTE: The term "fusing" refers to the part of the printing process where
toner is affixed to paper.
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the
printer with the short edge first.
526 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-36 Banding defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark or light lines which repeat 1. Reprint the document.
down the length of the page,
and are wide-pitch and/or 2. Try printing from another
impulse bands. They might be tray.
sharp or soft in nature. The
3. Replace the cartridge.
defect displays only in areas of
fill, not in text or sections with 4. Use a different paper type.
no printed content.
5. Enterprise models only:
From the Home screen on
the printer control panel,
go to the Adjust Paper
Types menu, and then
choose a print mode that
is designed for a slightly
heavier media than what
you are using. This slows
the print speed and might
improve the print quality.
6. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 4-37 Black page
Sample Description Possible solutions
The entire printed page is 1. Visually inspect the
black. cartridge to check for
damage.
2. Make sure that the
cartridge is installed
correctly.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects 527
Table 4-38 Blank page - No print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The page is completely blank 1. Make sure that the
and contains no printed cartridges are genuine HP
content. cartridges.
2. Make sure that the
cartridge is installed
correctly.
3. Print with a different
cartridge.
4. Check the paper type in
the paper tray and adjust
the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select
a lighter paper type.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 4-39 Color plane registrations defects (color models only)
Sample Description Possible solutions
One or more color plane(s) is 1. Reprint the document.
not aligned with the other color
planes. This registration error 2. From the printer control
will typically occur with yellow. panel, calibrate the printer.
3. If a cartridge has reached
a Very Low state, or
the printed output is
severely faded, replace the
cartridge.
4. From the printer control
panel use the Restore
Calibration feature to reset
the printer's calibration
settings to the factory
defaults.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
528 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-40 Fixing/fuser defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Slight shadows or offsets 1. Reprint the document.
of the image are repeated
down the page. The repeated 2. Check the paper type in
image might fade with each the paper tray and adjust
recurrence. the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select
a lighter paper type.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Toner rubs off along either 1. Reprint the document.
edge of the page. This defect
is more common at the edges 2. Check the paper type in
of high-coverage jobs, and on the paper tray and adjust
light media types, but can the printer settings to
occur anywhere on the page. match. If necessary, select
a heavier paper type.
3. Enterprise models only:
From the printer control
panel, go to the Edge-
to-Edge menu and then
select Normal. Reprint the
document.
4. Enterprise models only:
From the printer control
panel, select Auto Include
Margins and then reprint
the document.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects 529
Table 4-41 Gray background or dark print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image or text is darker 1. Make sure that the paper
than expected and/or the in the trays has not already
background is gray. been run through the
printer.
2. Use a different paper type.
3. Reprint the document.
4. Mono models only: From
the Home screen on the
printer control panel, go to
the Adjust Toner Density
menu, and then adjust the
toner density to a lower
level.
5. Make sure that the printer
is within the supported
operating temperature and
humidity range.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
530 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-42 Image placement defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image is not centered, or 1. Reprint the document.
is skewed on the page. The
defect occurs when the paper 2. Remove the paper and
is not positioned properly as then reload the tray. Make
it is pulled from the tray and sure that all the paper
moves through the paper path. edges are even on all sides.
3. Make sure that the top of
the paper stack is below
the tray-full indicator. Do
not overfill the tray.
4. Make sure that the paper
guides are adjusted to the
correct size for the paper.
Do not adjust the paper
guides tightly against the
paper stack. Adjust them
to the indentations or
markings in the tray.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects 531
Table 4-43 Light print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The printed content is light or 1. Reprint the document.
faded on the entire page.
2. Remove the cartridge, and
then shake it to redistribute
the toner. Reinsert the
toner cartridges into the
printer and close the
cover. For a graphical
representation of this
procedure, see Replace the
toner cartridges.
3. Mono models only: Make
sure that the EconoMode
setting is disabled, both at
the printer control panel
and in the print driver.
4. Make sure that the
cartridge is installed
correctly.
5. Print a Supplies Status
Page and check the life and
usage of the cartridge.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
532 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Table 4-44 Output defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Printed pages have curled 1. Reprint the document.
edges. The curled edge can be
along the short or long side of 2. Positive curl: From the
the paper. Two types of curl are printer control panel, select
possible: a heavier paper type. The
heavier paper type creates
● Positive curl: The paper a higher temperature for
curls toward the printed printing.
side. The defect occurs in
dry environments or when Negative curl: From the
printing high-coverage printer control panel, select
pages. a lighter paper type. The
lighter paper type creates
● Negative curl: The paper a lower temperature for
curls away from the printing. Try storing the
printed side. The defect paper in a dry environment
occurs in high-humidity prior to use, or use freshly
environments or when opened paper.
printing low-coverage
pages. 3. Print in duplex mode.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
The paper does not stack well 1. Reprint the document.
in the output tray. The stack
might be uneven, skewed, or 2. Extend the output bin
the pages might be pushed out extension.
of the tray and onto the floor.
3. If the defect is caused by
Any of the following conditions
extreme paper curl, refer to
can cause this defect:
the troubleshooting steps
● Extreme paper curl for "Output curl."
● The paper in the tray is 4. Use a different paper type.
wrinkled or deformed
5. Use freshly opened paper.
● The paper is a non-
6. Remove the paper from the
standard paper type, such
output tray before the tray
as envelopes
gets too full.
● The output tray is too full
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects 533
Table 4-45 Streak defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Light vertical streaks that 1. Reprint the document.
usually span the length of the
page. The defect displays only 2. Remove the cartridge, and
in areas of fill, not in text then shake it to redistribute
or sections with no printed the toner. Reinsert the
content. toner cartridges into the
printer and close the
cover. For a graphical
representation of this
procedure, see Replace the
toner cartridges.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
NOTE: Both light and dark
vertical streaks can occur
when the printing environment
is outside the specified range
for temperature or humidity.
Refer to your printer's
environmental specifications
for allowable temperature and
humidity levels.
Dark vertical lines which 1. Reprint the document.
occur down the length of the
page. The defect might occur 2. Remove the cartridge, and
anywhere on the page, in then shake it to redistribute
areas of fill or in sections with the toner. Reinsert the
no printed content. On color toner cartridges into the
models, these lines or streaks printer and close the
will also be visible on the ITB cover. For a graphical
cleaning page. representation of this
procedure, see Replace the
toner cartridges.
3. Print a cleaning page.
4. Check the toner level in the
cartridge.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
534 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Copy-quality troubleshooting
Learn about copy-quality troubleshooting.
NOTE: Copy-quality (CQ) problems are associated with the integrated-
scanner assembly (ISA) portion of an MFP printer. CQ defects appear on
pages that are copied using the document feeder or flatbed glass.
Identify the location and type of the CQ problem
Resolving CQ problems involves isolating the defect to the document feeder or
flatbed glass. Comparing printed output between the document feeder and the
flatbed glass might determine the ISA location that is causing the CQ defect.
NOTE: If a CQ defect appears on printed output from both the document
feeder and the flatbed glass, carefully inspect the original source for a print-
quality (PQ) problem.
Document feeder isolation test
1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document
used in this isolation procedure.
2. Place the source page in the document feeder, and then make a copy.
3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the
document feeder.
4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied
page are caused by a problem in the document feeder.
Flatbed isolation test
1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document
used in this isolation procedure.
2. Place the source page on the flatbed glass, and then make a copy.
3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the flatbed.
4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied
page are caused by a problem in the flatbed.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Copy-quality troubleshooting 535
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document
feeder white plastic backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following
procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted
lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the
power cable from the electrical outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
536 Chapter 4 Solve problems
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout
2, callout 3) with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl
alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can
damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They
might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using
the document feeder, be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left
side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge
to prevent spotting.
5. Close the scanner lid.
Figure 4-180 Close the scanner lid
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges 537
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to
turn the printer on.
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks
Learn about vertical lines, bands, or streaks copy-quality problems.
Vertical lines or streaks appear on copies and/or scans in the same direction
that the paper feeds when copying and/or scanning from the document feeder.
Lines or streaks might be visible on the front and/or the back side of the page.
Copies and/or scans from the flatbed glass look normal. Printouts also look
normal.
The line or streak might be black or in color, and can also be present on fax
or digital send output (for example, when using Scan to folder or Scan to email
features.
NOTE: HP has determined that 99% of all lines and streaks on copies made
by feeding the original documents through the document feeder are caused
by debris on the document feeder glass strip. Even small specks can cause the
light reflected off the original to be distorted, resulting in a line, streak, or
smudge on copies or scans made from the document feeder.
Even if the document feeder glass strip and/or flatbed glass has been wiped
clean, the defect might persist. Persistent vertical lines, bands, or streaks when
copying from the document feeder might mean that the debris causing the print
quality are not readily visible and cannot be removed with a quick cleaning.
Use the procedures below to resolve persistent lines, bands, or streak copy-
quality (CQ) problems.
Locate debris and thoroughly clean the document feeder glass
1. Place a blank sheet of paper in the document feeder and mark an X in the
lower right corner as shown.
538 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-181 Load the document feeder
2. Press the Start button to make a copy of the blank page.
3. Place the copied paper face-up on the flatbed glass with the X located as
shown.
NOTE: Make sure the upper left corner of the copy is aligned with the
upper left corner of the flatbed glass.
Figure 4-182 Place the copy on the flatbed
4. Follow the line or streak on the paper to the area on the document feeder
glass that is causing the CQ problem.
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 539
Figure 4-183 Identify the CQ defect location
5. Use a fingernail to loosen any stubborn debris.
WARNING! Use only a fingernail. Other objects can scratch the document
feeder glass.
Clean this specific area again (with a lint-free cloth dampened with water),
and then dry the glass with a soft, lint-free cloth.
Figure 4-184 Clean the glass
6. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.
Clean the duplexer scanner glass (model specific)
NOTE: Not all MFP printers use a background selector for duplex printing.
If a Side 2 Background Selector cannot be located for the printer (it might not
include one) skip this procedure.
1. Release the latch and open the document feeder jam-access door.
540 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Figure 4-185 Open the jam-access door
2. Unlock the Side 2 Background Selector by pressing and holding both green
tabs inward towards each other.
Figure 4-186 Release the Side 2 Background Selector
3. While holding the green tabs, pull out and remove the Side 2 Background
Selector.
Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 541
Figure 4-187 Remove the Side 2 Background Selector
4. Rotate the top to reveal the white and black backside reflector (circled in
blue).
NOTE: If the white and black areas do not come clean, wipe the surface
thoroughly with a damp cloth again. Dry the area with a soft, dry cloth to
prevent spotting.
Figure 4-188 Locate the backside reflector
5. With the background selector removed from the document feeder, clean the
inside of the scan module.
6. In the back area from where the background selector was removed, locate
the Side 2 Scan Module glass found under the top area.
NOTE: The glass surface of the Side 2 Scan module sits horizontally flat
and might not be easily viewable.
542 Chapter 4 Solve problems
7. Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with water and apply pressure upwards
behind the rollers to clean the Side 2 Scan Module Glass, making sure to that
the entire width of the glass is cleaned from left to right.
NOTE: If needed, lens cleaner or non-abrasive glass cleaner can be
applied to the cloth before cleaning the glass. Spray only onto the cloth and
not directly onto the glass or device. Do not spray water or glass cleaner on
the glass as it can seep under it and possibly damage the printer. Do not
use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on
the glass; these can damage it and/or leave residue on the glass resulting in
degraded copy/scan quality.
8. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the Side 2 Background Selector.
9. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality
Learn about printer settings to improve scan or copy quality.
Optimize printer settings to potentially improve scan or copy quality.
IMPORTANT: The printer settings described in this section are firmware
dependent and might not be available for a specific printer (for example, color
adjustment settings do not apply to mono printers).
Image Adjustment settings
NOTE: Settings > Print (SFP) or Copy/Print (MFP) > Image Adjustment >
Background Cleanup.
Use the sliders to perform a Background Cleanup, adjust the image Darkness
as well as changing the Sharpness and Contrast.
Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy (for example, adjusting
the Darkness and Sharpness. Use the Background Cleanup setting to remove
faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
● Darkness: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the amount of white
and black in the colors.
● Contrast: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the difference between
the lightest and darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Adjust this setting if copying a faint image is a problem.
Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality 543
● Sharpness: Adjust this setting to clarify or soften the image. Increasing the
sharpness might make text appear crisper, but decreasing it would make
photographs appear smoother.
Optimize Text/Picture settings
NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Optimize Text/Picture.
Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the
output for text, printed pictures, or a mixture.
Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content.
● Mixed: Use to optimize the setting for text and for pictures.
● Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and/or pictures
are on the original.
● Printed picture: Use to optimize line drawing and preprinted images such
as magazine clippings or pages from a book. If you see bands of irregular
intensity on copies, try selecting Printed picture to improve quality.
● Photographs: Use to optimize photographic prints.
Color/Black settings
NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Color/Black.
Use to enable or disable color scanning.(some highlighters will not auto detect
as color).
● Automatically detect color or black: When pages without color are detected,
the printer creates an image of the page in 1-bit black if other settings
allow. If the other settings don't allow (File Type, for example), the image is in
grayscale.
● Automatically detect color or gray: When pages without color are detected,
the printer creates an image of the page in grayscale. Select this option for
the best image quality for non-color pages.
● Color: Scans the documents in color.
● Black: Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size.
● Black/Gray: Scans or prints documents in grayscale.
544 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Light or faint copies (color models)
Learn how to resolve light or faint copy-quality problems.
Are you attempting to copy or scan highlighted text?
NOTE: When digitally sending or copying highlighted images or text objects,
the image might appear lighter than expected or does not show up at all with
certain brands/types of highlighter pens.
Highlighters come in bright, often fluorescent colors. Fluorescent highlighter
inks tend to reflect more light than that which is absorbed by the paper source.
This reflection might cause the image to not show up as well as non-fluorescent
colors depending upon the scanner/MFP being used.
The most common color for highlighters is yellow, but many other colors are
also found such as pink, blue, green, orange, and purples. Yellow is often the
preferred color to use when making a photocopy as it tends to not produce as
much of a shadow on copies or scans.
There are different color and ink properties depending upon the brand of
highlighters used. Due to these differences, scanning of the images might vary
greatly from not being seen at all to changing colors (for example, orange
highlighter might appear brown in the copy or scan or yellow highlighter might
appear green).
Automatic color detect
HP has a feature in all FutureSmart (LaserJet Enterprise Series only) printers
which automatically detects color on each page. Depending upon the amount of
color information on a page, the scanner might determine the page to be black
and white due to a very, very small amount of color which might be considered
background artifacts. This helps to reduce the file size of sent files as well as
toner usage on a copied page. You might see small highlighted marks on pages
print out in black and white or even disappear.
The black and white effect is due to the printer not seeing enough color on the
page, in which case the whole image is rendered as a black and white page. The
highlighted mark disappearing might be due to the marker characteristics not
being detected by the scanner.
Does the printer have the latest firmware version installed?
No or I don't know.
Light or faint copies (color models) 545
A Firmware enhancement has been introduced for certain LaserJets to help
with the reproduction of highlighted images.
NOTE: Some Multifunction Printers (MFPs) using FutureSmart firmware
v3.5.3 or later have improved color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters
when scanning or copying.
Use the following steps to identify the installed firmware version, and then
upgrade the firmware if needed.
1. Print a configuration page (from the printer control panel).
2. On the printed configuration page look in the section marked Device
Information, and then identify the Firmware Datecode and Firmware
Revision.
This is the current version of firmware installed on this printer.
3. In the US, go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP.
a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the
appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to
select the correct model so that the upgraded firmware supports all of
the printer functions.
b. Select the driver language and operating system.
c. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than
the one shown on the printed configuration page, select Download.
4. Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.
a. Select your country/region.
b. Select Drivers & Downloads.
c. Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then
select Go.
TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a
short video on identifying the printer name and number.
546 Chapter 4 Solve problems
d. Select the appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to
select the correct model so that the upgraded firmware supports all of
the printer functions.
e. Select the driver language and operating system.
f. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than
the one shown on the printed configuration page, select Download.
5. Perform a firmware upgrade. See the Firmware upgrades topic in the
product service manual.
6. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify
that the upgrade firmware version was installed.
Yes
These procedures help provide settings which affect the way highlighters are
scanned or copied. A firmware enhancement is available for certain printers
that helps with the reproduction of highlighted images.
● Enable Firmware Enhancement
1. From the Home screen, select the desired scanning application (for
example, Copy, E-Mail, Save to Network Folder).
2. Select More Options > Optimize Text/Picture > Text button (not slider). This
enables the improved color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters.
TIP: Administrators can set Text as the default setting on the device.
● Alternative Settings
See Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality for more
information.
Light or faint copies (color models) 547
Performance and connectivity troubleshooting
Learn about performance and connectivity troubleshooting.
Solve fax or email problems
Learn about solving fax and email problems.
Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual.
The most current information is available in WISE. Search using model number
then use "fax troubleshooting" as the search term.
For HP Channel partners, open the HP Partner First Portal located at
https://partner.hp.com, and then do the following:
1. Select the Services & Support tab, and then select Technical Support.
2. Select Technical Documentation.
3. You will be taken to the WISE portal.
For HP service personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive
Search Engines (WISE) sites:
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
548 Chapter 4 Solve problems
● WISE - English
Solve performance problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve performance
problems.
NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special
paper or media other than 75-80gsm (20lb) plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2
the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which
increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and
decreases the possibility of a mis-pick jam.
HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or
reoccurring jams from trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that
require media other than 75-80gsm (20lb) plain paper.
Factors affecting print performance
Review the following information about factors affecting print performance.
Table 4-46 Solve performance problems
Problem Cause Solution
Pages print but are totally The document might contain Check the original document to
blank. blank pages. see if content is present on all
of the pages.
Pages print but are totally The printer might be To check the printer, print a
blank. malfunctioning. Configuration page.
Pages print but are totally Make sure that the printer Make sure that the paper
blank. is not feeding multiple pages meets HP specifications for
(especially if very thin paper is this printer.
used).
For a complete list of
specific HP-brand paper
that this printer supports,
go to http://www.hp.com/
support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljX557
or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorlj5800MFP
or http://www.hp.com/support/
colorljX57945MFP.
Solve performance problems 549
Table 4-46 Solve performance problems (continued)
Problem Cause Solution
Pages print very slowly. Heavier paper types can slow Print on a different type of
the print job. paper.
NOTE: Some software
programs process print jobs
slowly.
Pages print very slowly. Complex pages can print Proper fusing might require a
slowly. slower print speed to ensure
NOTE: Some software the best print quality.
programs process print jobs
slowly.
Pages print very slowly. Large batches, narrow paper, Print in smaller batches, on a
and special paper such as different type of paper, or on a
NOTE: Some software gloss, transparency, cardstock, different size of paper.
programs process print jobs and HP Tough Paper can slow
slowly. the print job.
Pages did not print. The printer might not be pulling Make sure paper is loaded in
paper correctly. the tray correctly.
Pages did not print. The paper is jamming in the Clear the jam.
printer.
Pages did not print. The USB cable might ● Disconnect the USB
be defective or incorrectly cable at both ends and
connected. reconnect it.
● Try printing a job that has
printed in the past.
● Try using a different USB
cable.
Pages did not print. Other devices are running on The printer might not share a
the host computer. USB port. If an external hard
drive or network switchbox is
connected to the same port
as the printer, the other device
might be interfering with the
printer. To connect and use the
printer, disconnect the other
device or use two USB ports on
the host computer.
Pages did not print. The print job might not have Check the printer status queue.
arrived at the printer. Also, the Printing message
should appear on the control
panel display.
550 Chapter 4 Solve problems
Print speeds
Print speed is the number of pages that print in one minute. Print speed
depends on different engine-process speeds or operational pauses between
printed pages during normal printer operation. Factors that determine the print
speed of the printer include the following:
● Page formatting time
The printer must pause for each page to be formatted before it prints.
Complex pages take more time to format, resulting in reduced print speed.
However, most jobs print at full engine speed.
● Media size
Legal-size media reduces print speed because it is longer than the standard
Letter- or A4–size media. A reduce print speed is used when printing on
narrow media to prevent the edges of the fuser from overheating.
● Media mode
Some media types require a reduced print speed to achieve maximum print
quality on that media. For example, glossy, heavy, and specialty media (for
example, envelopes or photos) require a reduced print speed. To maximize
the print speed for special media types, make sure that the correct media
type in the print driver is selected.
● Printer temperature
To prevent printer damage, print speed is reduced if the printer reaches a
specific internal temperature (thermal slow down). The starting temperature
of the printer, ambient environment temperature, and the print job size effect
the number of pages that can be printed before the printer reduces the print
speed. Thermal slow down reduces print speed by printing four pages and
then pausing for an amount of time before printing continues.
● Other print speed reduction factors
Other factors (especially during large print jobs) that can cause reduced
print speeds include:
– Density control sequence; occurs every 150 pages and takes about 120
seconds
The printer does not print
If the printer does not print at all, try the following solutions.
Print speeds 551
1. Make sure the printer is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is
ready.
● If the control panel does not indicate the printer is ready, turn the printer
off and then on again.
● If the control panel indicates the printer is ready, try sending the job
again.
2. If the control panel indicates the printer has an error, resolve the error and
then try sending the job again.
3. Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the printer is connected
to a network, check the following items:
● Check the bottom LED next to the network connection on the printer. If
the network is active, the light is green.
● Make sure that a network cable and not a phone cord is used to connect
to the network.
● Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is
working correctly.
4. Install the HP software for the printer. Using generic printer drivers can
cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue.
5. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this
product, click Properties, and open the Ports tab.
● If a network cable is used to connect to the network, make sure the
printer name listed on the Ports tab matches the one on the printer
configuration page.
● If a USB cable is used, and the printer is connected to a wireless network,
make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.
6. If a personal firewall system on the computer is used, it might be blocking
communication with the printer. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see
if it is the source of the problem.
7. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low
signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.
The printer prints slowly
If the printer prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.
552 Chapter 4 Solve problems
1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications
for this printer. For a list of specifications, go
to this Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5700
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX557 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorlj5800MFP or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljX57945MFP.
2. When the printer is configured to print on some paper types, such as heavy
paper, the printer prints more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the
paper. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of paper you are
using, change the setting to the correct paper type.
3. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low
signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.
Solve connectivity problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve connectivity
problems.
Solve USB connection problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product.
Replace the cable if necessary.
Solve wired network problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve wired network
problems.
Introduction
Learn about solving wired network problems.
Certain types of problems can indicate there is a network communication
problem. These problems include the following issues:
● The periodic loss of ability to communicate with the printer
● The printer cannot be found during driver installation
● A periodic failure to print
Solve connectivity problems 553
Check the items in this topic to verify that the printer is communicating with the
network. Before beginning, print a configuration page from the printer control
panel and locate the printer IP address that is listed on this page.
Poor physical connection
Use the following procedure when the printer has a poor physical connection.
1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable
of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify
that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit.
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer
Use the following procedure when the computer is using the incorrect IP
address for the printer.
1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current
IP address for the printer is selected. The printer IP address is listed on the
printer configuration page.
2. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box
labeled Always print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.
3. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the
hostname instead of the IP address.
4. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
Use the following procedure when the computer is unable to communicate with
the printer.
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.
554 Chapter 4 Solve problems
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then
verify that the network settings, the printer, and the computer are all
configured for the same network.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting).
If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use
the correct print driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
Use the following procedure when the computer or workstation might be set up
incorrectly.
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection
settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Use the following procedure when the printer is disabled, or other network
settings are incorrect.
1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol.
Enable it if necessary.
2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network 555
5 Removal and replacement
When servicing the printer, several items must be considered to ensure a
successful repair and to avoid damage to the printer or personal injury. Learn
about these considerations and find detailed instructions for removing and
replacing printer parts.
556 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and
accessories
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts are parts that a customer replaces without
assistance from a field technician. These parts can be replaced without the use
of any tools.
Customer-replaceable units
Learn about customer-replaceable parts removal and replacement.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (5700/X557/5800 models)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner
cartridges.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges.
Before performing service
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover the imaging drum if the toner cartridge must
be removed from the printer for an extended period of time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash
in cold water. Hot water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to
remove.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-1 Part information
Product Number Service Part Part description
Number
W2130A 6QN29-67013 HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
W2130X 6QN29-67014 HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge
6QN29-67016
W2130Y HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories 557
Table 5-1 Part information (continued)
Product Number Service Part Part description
Number
W2131A 6QN29-67017 HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge
W2131X 6QN29-67018 HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge
W2131X 6QN29-67019 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge
W2132A 6QN29-67021 HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner
W2132X 6QN29-67022 HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge
W2132Y 6QN29-67023 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge
W2133A 6QN29-67025 HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
W2133X 6QN29-67026 HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge
W2133Y 6QN29-67027 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner
Cartridge
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Make sure that the cartridge door is fully closed after replacing a toner
cartridge.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner cartridges (5700/X557/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove a toner cartridge.
1. . Open the front door.
558 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. . Grasp the end of the toner cartridge
and pull it straight out of the printer.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the toner cartridges (5700/X557/5800 models)
Follow these steps to install a toner cartridge.
1. . Remove the new toner cartridge
from its package. Save all packaging
for recycling the used toner
cartridge.
Unpack the replacement assembly 559
2. . Hold both ends of the toner
cartridge and rock it back and forth
end to end to evenly distribute the
toner that is inside.
3. . Align the toner cartridge with its slot
and insert it into the printer.
4. . Close the front door.
5. . Pack the used toner cartridge
into the box that the new toner
cartridge came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about
recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid
shipping label is included in the
box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-
paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label
to the box, and return the used
cartridge to HP for recycling.
560 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (X57945 models)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner
cartridges.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges.
Before performing service
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover the imaging drum if the toner cartridge must
be removed from the printer for an extended period of time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash
in cold water. Hot water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to
remove.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-2 Part information
Product Number Service Part Part description
Number
W9240MC 6QN29-67029 HP W9240MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (SFP)
W9241MC 6QN29-67030 HP W9241MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (SFP)
W9242MC 6QN29-67031 HP W9242MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (SFP)
W9243MC 6QN29-67032 HP W9243MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (SFP)
W9250MC 6QN29-67033 HP W9250MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
W9251MC 6QN29-67034 HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
W9252MC 6QN29-67035 HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
W9253MC 6QN29-67036 HP W9253MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (X57945 models) 561
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Make sure that the cartridge door is fully closed after replacing a toner
cartridge.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Eject the toner cartridges (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to eject a toner cartridge.
NOTE: Two methods are available to eject a toner cartridge using the control
panel.
● Eject a toner cartridge with the printer in the Ready state.
See Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (Ready state).
● Eject a toner cartridge with the printer in a cartridge low or very low error
state.
See Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (error condition).
Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (Ready state)
Use the following steps to eject a toner cartridge when the printer is in the
Ready state.
1. From the control panel Home screen, scroll to and select the Supplies button.
2. Select the Eject button (located below the Cartridge Levels indicators.
562 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-1 Eject the toner cartridge (Ready state)
Touch the eject button to prepare the cartridge for
removal.
3. A prompt appears on the control-panel display to open the toner cartridge
door.
Eject a toner cartridge using the control panel (error condition)
Use the following steps to eject a toner cartridge when the printer is in a
cartridge low or very low error state.
1. On the control panel Home screen, Touch the error icon at the top of the
display.
Eject the toner cartridges (X57945 models) 563
Figure 5-2 Eject the toner cartridge (error state) (1 of 2)
2. Touch the Eject button at the bottom of the display.
Figure 5-3 Eject the toner cartridge (error state) (2 of 2)
3. A prompt appears on the control-panel display to open the toner cartridge
door.
2. Remove the toner cartridges (X579 models)
Follow these steps to remove a toner cartridge.
NOTE: The toner cartridges must be released before removing them. See
Eject the toner cartridges (X57945 models).
564 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. . Open the toner cartridge door on the
front of the printer.
2. . Grasp the end of the toner cartridge
and pull it straight out of the printer.
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the toner cartridges (X579 models)
Follow these steps to install a toner cartridge.
Unpack the replacement assembly 565
1. . Remove the new toner cartridge
from its package. Save all packaging
for recycling the used toner
cartridge.
2. . Hold both ends of the toner
cartridge and rock it to evenly
distribute the toner that is inside.
3. . Align the toner cartridge with its slot
and insert it into the printer.
4. . Close the toner cartridge door.
566 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. . Pack the used toner cartridge
into the box that the new toner
cartridge came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about
recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid
shipping label is included in the
box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-
paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label
to the box, and return the used
cartridge to HP for recycling.
Removal and replacement: Imaging drums (X57945 models)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the imaging
drums.
View a video of removing and replacing the image drums.
Before performing service
CAUTION: To prevent damage to an imaging drum, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if it must be removed
from the printer for an extended period of time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash
in cold water. Hot water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to
remove.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-3 Part information
Product Number Service Part Part description
Number
W9280MC 6QN35-67027 HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum
W9281MC 6QN35-67028 HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum
W9282MC 6QN35-67029 HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum
W9283MC 6QN35-67030 HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Removal and replacement: Imaging drums (X57945 models) 567
After performing service
○ Make sure that the front door is fully closed after replacing an image drum.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the imaging drums (X579 models)
Follow these steps to remove an imaging drum.
1. . Open the front door.
NOTE: If necessary, remove two screws
holding the imaging drum access cover
in place, and then lower the cover to
access the imaging drums. See the
figure below.
Figure 5-4 Remove two screws, open the
cover
568 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. . Grasp the end of the imaging drum
cartridge and pull it straight out of
the printer.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the imaging drums (X579 models)
Follow these steps to install an imaging drum.
1. . Remove the new imaging drum
cartridge from its package. Save
all packaging for recycling the used
imaging drum.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to
the imaging drum, do not expose it to
light for more than a few minutes.
Cover the blue imaging drum if the
imaging drum cartridge must be
removed from the printer for an
extended period of time. Do not
touch the blue imaging drum.
Unpack the replacement assembly 569
2. . Hold both ends of the imaging drum
cartridge and rock it back and forth
end to end to evenly distribute the
toner that is inside.
3. . Align the imaging drum cartridge
with its slot and insert it into the
printer.
NOTE: If necessary, close the imaging
drum access cover, and then install the
two screws to secure the cover. See the
figure below.
Figure 5-5 Close the cover, install two
screws
570 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. . Close the front door.
NOTE: If necessary, close the access
cover and replace the two screws before
closing the front door.
5. . Pack the used imaging drum into the
box that the new imaging drum came
in. See the enclosed recycling guide
for information about recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid
shipping label is included in the
box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-
paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to
the box, and return the used imaging
drum to HP for recycling.
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner collection unit (TCU).
View a video of removing and replacing the TCU.
Before performing service
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-4 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527F9A 6QN29-67007 HP LaserJet Toner collection unit (TCU)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) 571
After performing service
Make sure that the front door is fully closed after replacing the TCU.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Open the front door.
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-6 Remove the TCU cover
572 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the TCU
Follow these steps to install the toner collection unit (TCU).
Unpack the replacement assembly 573
1. Remove the new TCU from its package. Save all packaging for recycling the
used TCU.
2. Install the new TCU by inserting it into the printer, and then lifting slightly to
make sure it pushes all the way in.
3. Replace the TCU cover.
4. Close the front door.
574 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. Pack the used TCU into the box that the new TCU came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid shipping label is included in the box.
In other countries/regions, go to www.hp.com/recycle to print a pre-paid
shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to the box, and return the used TCU to HP
for recycling.
Removal and replacement: 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the 3-bin stapler/stacker staple cartridge.
View a video of removing and replacing the staple cartridge.
Before performing service
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-5 Part information
Part number Part description
J8J96A HP Staple Cartridge Refill for the floor-standing finisher
or 3-bin stapler-stacker
Removal and replacement: 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)
575
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Post service test
Use the stapler to staple two pages together.
1. Remove the staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Follow these steps to remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge.
1. Open the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple door.
2. Pull down the colored handle on the staple carriage, and then pull the staple
carriage straight out.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
576 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Follow these steps to install the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cartridge.
NOTE: Do not dispose of the staple carriage. The carriage is not an orderable
or replaceable part. If the carriage is disposed of, the entire staple cartridge
assembly will need to be replaced.
1. Remove the staple cartridge from the carrier/sled and replace it with the
new staple cartridge.
NOTE: Do not dispose of the staple carrier/sled. The sled is not an
orderable or replaceable part.
1 2 3
2. Reinstall the staple carriage into the stapler by pressing the colored handle
inward until it snaps into place.
Install the staple cartridge (3-bin stapler-stacker) 577
3. Close the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple door.
Removal and replacement: Convenience staple cartridge (convenience stapler models)
Learn about removing and replacing the convenience stapler staple cartridge.
View a video of removing and replacing the staple cartridge.
Before performing service
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-6 Part information
Part number Part description
Q7432A HP Staple Cartridge Pack for the convenience stapler
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Post service test
Use the stapler to staple two pages together.
1. Remove the staple cartridge (convenience stapler)
Follow these steps to remove the convenience stapler staple cartridge.
578 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Open the stapler door.
2. Pull the staple carriage straight out.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
Unpack the replacement assembly 579
3. Install the staple cartridge (convenience stapler)
Follow these steps to install the convenience stapler staple cartridge.
1. Insert the new staple carriage into the stapler.
2. Close the stapler door.
Removal and replacement: Fuser
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser.
View a video to remove and replace the fuser
Mean time to repair: 5 minutes
Service level: Basic
580 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Before performing service
WARNING! The fuser is hot. Wait at least 30 minutes after turning the printer
power off before removing the fuser.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order
the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Table 5-7 Part information
Product Number Service Part Part description
Number
527G0A 6QN29-67008 HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit
527G1A 6QN29-67009 HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Kit
527G6A 6QN28-67002 HP LaserJet 110V Enhanced Fuser Kit
527G7A 6QN28-67003 HP LaserJet 220V Enhanced Fuser Kit
Required tools
No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the fuser.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Remove the fuser 581
Figure 5-7 Open the right door
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-8 Remove the fuser
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
582 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Install the fuser
Follow these steps to install the fuser.
1. Align the fuser with the opening in the printer.
Figure 5-9 Align the fuser with the opening
2. Slide the fuser into the printer, push in to install it, and then make sure that it
is fully seated.
TIP: When the fuser is fully seated, the release levers on the handles make
an audible click.
Figure 5-10 Install the fuser
3. Close the right door.
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB)
This document provides instructions about removing and replacing the image
transfer belt (ITB) assembly.
Install the fuser 583
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the image
transfer belt.
Mean time to repair: 5 minutes
Service level: Basic
Before performing service
To order a replacement assembly, use the table below to identify the correct
part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts
Table 5-8 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527G8A 6QN29-67010 HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt
Required tools
No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the ITB.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the ITB
Follow these steps to remove the ITB.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-11 Open the right door
584 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Hold the two side levers and pull out the ITB assembly.
CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on
the belt can cause print-quality problems.
Figure 5-12 Release the ITB
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the ITB
Follow these steps to install the ITB.
1. Hold the ITB by the edges (do not touch the gray plastic belt).
2. Align the ITB with the slots in the printer, and then carefully push it into the
printer.
3. Continue to carefully push the ITB into the printer until it is fully installed.
Unpack the replacement assembly 585
4. Close the right door.
TIP: The right door should close easily if the ITB assembly is correctly
installed.
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer roller
Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer roller.
View a video of removing and replacing the T2 roller.
Before performing service
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-9 Part information
Part number Part description
527H1MC HP LaserJet Managed Trans Roller Kit
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Make sure that the right door is fully closed after replacing the roller.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the secondary transfer roller
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer roller.
586 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-13 Open the right door
2. Push the blue left end (callout 1) of the roller assembly to the right, and then
lift that end of the secondary transfer roller (callout 2).
Figure 5-14 Release the left end of the secondary transfer roller
2
1
Remove the secondary transfer roller 587
3. With the left end of the roller lifted up, pull the roller to the left and out of the
printer. Take care in removing the right end of the roller from its holder.
Figure 5-15 Remove the secondary transfer roller
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the secondary transfer roller
Follow these steps to install the secondary transfer roller.
1. Carefully align and insert the right end of the replacement roller into the
holder
IMPORTANT: Make sure that right end of the roller assembly is fully seated
in the holder.
588 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-16 Install right end of the secondary transfer roller
2. Push down on the blue left end until the roller snaps into place.
Figure 5-17 Secure the secondary transfer roller
3. Close the right door.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the document feeder rollers.
Before performing service
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-10 Part information
Part number Part description
6H121-67001 ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (5xxx Series)
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rollers (MFP models) 589
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Post service test
Use the document feeder to copy a page, and then verify that the document
correctly copies, scans, or prints.
1. Remove the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly.
1. Open the document-feeder jam access door.
Figure 5-18 Open the document-feeder jam access door
2. Release the blue locking arm to drop the assembly down. Slide the pickup
and feed roller assembly to the left, and then pull it away from the document
feeder to remove it.
Figure 5-19 Release the blue locking arm
590 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the ADF separation roller
Follow these steps to remove the ADF separation roller.
■ Lift the roller cover up and then slide the roller toward the front of the printer
to remove it.
Figure 5-20 Release the separation roller cover
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the ADF separation roller
Follow these steps to install the ADF separation roller.
Remove the ADF separation roller 591
■ Lower the separation roller into the document feeder, slide it to the right to
install it, and then bring the cover down over the roller and snap it into place.
Figure 5-21 Install the ADF separation roller
5. Install the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to install the pickup and feed roller assembly.
■ Position the pickup and feed roller assembly in the document feeder, slide the
assembly to the right to seat it in the ADF, and then push the lever up to lock
the roller assembly in place.
Figure 5-22 Install the ADF pickup and feed roller assembly
Installation: Keyboard overlay (MFP models)
Learn about installing a keyboard overlay.
Introduction
View a video of how to install the keyboard overlay.
592 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-11 Part information
Part number Part description
A7W12A Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese
A7W13A Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN)
A7W14A HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard
Required tools
● No special tools are required to install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Install the keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models)
Follow these steps to install the keyboard overlay.
1. Carefully peel the backing from the control panel overlay.
CAUTION: Do not touch the adhesive squares and be careful so that the
adhesive squares do not come off with the backing.
Install the keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models) 593
Figure 5-23 Remove the backing
2. Position the keyboard overlay on the keyboard by aligning the upper edge of
the overlay with the top edge of the keyboard.
Figure 5-24 Position the keyboard overlay top edge
3. With the top edge positioned, align the side edges of the overlay with the
keyboard edges.
Figure 5-25 Position the keyboard overlay side edges
594 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Place one hand under the keyboard and press upward (callout 1). Place the
other hand on top of the keyboard overlay and press downward (callout 2).
Continue to press while sliding both hands to the right (callout 3) to adhere
the overlay to the keyboard.
Figure 5-26 Apply the keyboard overlay
2
5. Carefully remove the protective top sheet from the keyboard overlay.
Figure 5-27 Apply the keyboard overlay
CAUTION: Make sure that the adhesive squares do not come off of the
keyboard with the protective sheet.
Install the keyboard overlay (Flow MFP models) 595
Figure 5-28 Ensure that the squares do not stick to the top sheet
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup and separation roller assemblies
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 1 rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 1 rollers.
Before performing service
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-12 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527H3A 6QN29-67012 HP LaserJet MP Tray Roller Kit
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller
Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup roller.
596 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. On the right side of the printer, release the lower of the two latches to open
Tray 1.
Figure 5-29 Open Tray 1
2. Locate and release the blue pickup roller assembly release tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-30 Locate the pickup roller assembly tab
Remove the Tray 1 pickup roller 597
3. Push the pickup roller assembly to the right and then away from the printer.
Figure 5-31 Remove the pickup roller assembly
2. Remove the Tray 1 separation roller
Follow these steps to remove and replace the Tray 1 separation roller.
NOTE: Even if you want to replace only the separation roller, you must first
remove the pickup roller assembly.
1. Grasp the left- and right-side of the separation roller assembly, and then lift
the assembly up.
Figure 5-32 Lift the separation roller assembly
598 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Pull the separation roller assembly straight out to remove it.
Figure 5-33 Remove the separation roller assembly
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the Tray 1 separation roller
Follow these steps to install the Tray 1 separation roller.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller
can cause paper-handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands before handling the
assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 599
1. Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer.
Figure 5-34 Insert the separation roller assembly
2. Push down on the Tray 1 separation roller until it snaps into place.
Figure 5-35 Secure the separation roller assembly
5. Install the Tray 1 pickup roller
Follow these steps to install the Tray 1 pickup roller.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller
can cause paper-handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands before handling the
assembly.
600 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Insert the keyed right end of the pickup roller assembly into the provided slot,
and then rotate the left end into place to install it.
Figure 5-36 Install the pickup roller assembly
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup and separation roller assemblies
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the Tray 2 rollers.
Before performing service
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-13 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527H2A 6QN29-67011 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the Tray 2 separation roller assembly
Learn about removing the Tray 2 separation roller assembly.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 pickup and separation roller assemblies 601
1. Depending on the printer model, perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the right door.
● X57945 models: Open the lower right door.
2. Slide the blue lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the separation
roller assembly (callout 2) by pulling it out from the printer.
Figure 5-37 Remove the separation roller assembly
2. Remove the Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly
Learn about removing the Tray 2 pickup rollers.
NOTE: Even if you want to replace only the pickup roller assembly, you must
first remove the separation roller assembly.
602 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Locate the pickup roller assembly, and then pull it away from the printer to
remove it.
Figure 5-38 Remove the pickup roller assembly
NOTE: As the roller assembly can be hard to grip, you might need to reach
under and behind the rollers to securely grip it.
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly
Learn about installing the Tray 2 pickup roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller
can cause paper-handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands before handling the
assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 603
■ Position the pickup roller assembly in the printer in the correct orientation,
and then press the assembly into place.
Figure 5-39 Install the pickup roller assembly
5. Install the Tray 2 separation roller assembly
Learn about installing the Tray 2 separation roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller
can cause paper-handling and print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves or thoroughly washing your hands before handling the
assembly.
■ Insert the separation roller assembly into the printer to install it.
Figure 5-40 Install the separation roller assembly
604 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and
accessories
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts are parts that a customer replaces without
assistance from a field technician. These parts might require the use of tools.
Customer-replaceable units
Learn about customer-replaceable parts removal and replacement.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Keyboard (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the keyboard.
Introduction
View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-14 Part information
Part number Part description
1M0Q2A HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard
Required tools
● Use the reversible screwdriver, the bracket, and the two screws included in
the kit.
Customer self-repair (CSR) B parts and accessories 605
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the control panel (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel.
■ Pull the control panel out and tilt it up, and then remove the two thumbscrews
on the control panel arm. Remove the control panel by pulling it away from the
printer.
Figure 5-41 Remove two thumbscrews
2. Remove the keyboard (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the keyboard.
606 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. On the back off the control panel, remove two screws, and then remove the
bracket from the assembly.
Figure 5-42 Remove the bracket
2. Remove the flat flexible cable (FFC) connector cover.
Figure 5-43 Remove the FFC connector cover
Remove the keyboard (MFP models) 607
3. Use the pull tab to disconnect the FFC from the connector in the control
panel.
Figure 5-44 Disconnect the keyboard FFC
4. Pull the keyboard away from the control panel.
Figure 5-45 Remove the keyboard
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
608 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Install the keyboard (MFP models)
Follow these steps to install the keyboard.
1. Align the back of the keyboard with the back of the control panel and then
join them by connecting the hinges.
Figure 5-46 Connect the keyboard to the control panel
2. Connect the keyboard flat flexible cable (FFC) with the connector in the
control panel.
Figure 5-47 Connect the keyboard FFC
Install the keyboard (MFP models) 609
3. Install the FFC cover. Make sure that the FFC pull tab does not stick out after
the cover is installed.
Figure 5-48 Install the FFC cover
4. Use the reversible screwdriver to install the two bracket screws to attach
the bracket to the control panel.
Figure 5-49 Install the bracket
5. Install the control panel (MFP models)
Follow these steps to install the control panel.
610 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Slide the control panel into the control panel arm, and then install the two
thumbscrews on the control panel arm.
Figure 5-50 Install the control panel
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the hard-disk
drive (HDD).
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the hard-disk
drive.
Mean time to repair: 10 minutes
Service level: Basic
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or
hard-disk drive simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might
cause the printer to become unstable or inoperable.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order
the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Removal and replacement: Hard-disk drive (HDD) 611
Table 5-15 Part information
Part number Part description
L41606-011 HDD, 500GB 5400RPM SED
L42243-021 HDD, 500GB 5400RPM FIPS/CCC OPAL2 7MM
6HN31A HP 500GB CCC FIPS TAA Hard Disk Drive
9EQ11A HP 500GB CCC FIPS Hard Disk Drive
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the screw is
fastened.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
612 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-51 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Release two pins from the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-52 Release two pins
Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 613
2. On the left side of the HDD, release the connector from the formatter, and
then pull the HDD away from the formatter.
Figure 5-53 Release the HDD
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to install the hard-disk drive (HDD).
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
614 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Align the connectors on the left side of the HDD with the connector on the
formatter.
Figure 5-54 Align the connectors
2. Press the connectors together to seat the HDD on the formatter.
Figure 5-55 Install the HDD
3. Install the two pins through the formatter plate to secure the HDD.
Figure 5-56 Install two pins
Install the hard-disk drive (HDD) 615
5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-57 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: Dual in-line memory module (DIMM) (SFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the dual in-line memory module (DIMM).
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the DIMM.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-16 Part information
Part number Part description
6QY68A HP 2GB DDR3Lx32 120-pin 933MHz DIMM
616 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-58 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
Follow these steps to remove the DIMM.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
Remove the formatter cover 617
1. Pull the bottom edge of the DIMM away from the formatter to loosen the
connector at the top of the DIMM.
Figure 5-59 Pull the bottom edge of the DIMM
2. Pull down on the DIMM to remove it from the formatter.
Figure 5-60 Remove the DIMM
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
618 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Install the DIMM
Follow these steps to install the DIMM.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Align the connector edge on the DIMM with the slot on the formatter.
Figure 5-61 Align the DIMM
2. Gently insert the top edge of the DIMM up into the formatter slot.
Figure 5-62 Insert the top edge into the formatter
Install the DIMM 619
3. Press the bottom edge of the DIMM against the formatter to seat it firmly in
the formatter slot.
Figure 5-63 Install the DIMM
5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-64 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: Fax PCA (fax models)
Learn about removing and replacing the fax PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fax PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
620 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-17 Part information
Part number Part description
1M0Q0A HP MFP Analog Fax 702 Accessory
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
If possible, send and receive a fax from the printer.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 621
Figure 5-65 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the fax PCA (fax MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
■ Rotate end left end of the fax PCA away from the formatter (callout 1) to
disconnect the connector, and then slide the card away from the formatter
faceplate (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-66 Remove the fax PCA
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
622 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the fax PCA (fax MFP models)
Follow these steps to install the fax PCA.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Align the fax port with the cut-out in the formatter faceplate, and then align
the connector on the back of the card with the formatter connector. Press
the connectors together to seat the card on the formatter.
Figure 5-67 Align the fax PCA
Install the fax PCA (fax MFP models) 623
2. When installed, the port on the card should sit securely in the faceplate
cut-out.
Figure 5-68 Check the fax PCA port
5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-69 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: Workflow accelerator
Learn about removing and replacing the workflow accelerator card.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the workflow
accelerator.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
624 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-18 Part information
Part number Part description
1M0Q5A HP LaserJet Workflow Accelerator Card
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 625
Figure 5-70 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the workflow accelerator
Follow these steps to remove the workflow accelerator.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Pull the card away from the formatter to disconnect the connector and
remove the card.
Figure 5-71 Remove the card
626 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the bracket from the workflow accelerator card.
Figure 5-72 Remove the bracket
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the workflow accelerator
Follow these steps to install the workflow accelerator.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
Unpack the replacement assembly 627
1. Slide the bracket onto the accelerator card.
Figure 5-73 Attach the bracket
2. Push the right edge of the card into the faceplate slots, and then align the
connector on the back of the card with the formatter connector.
Figure 5-74 Align the connectors
3. Press the connectors together to seat the card on the formatter.
Figure 5-75 Connect the connectors
628 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-76 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: USB expansion kit
Learn about removing and replacing the USB expansion kit.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the USB
expansion kit.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-19 Part information
Part number Part description
4XN67A HP Internal USB Expansion Kit
Install the formatter cover 629
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-77 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the internal USB ports
Learn how to remove the internal USB ports.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
630 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Pull the card away from the formatter to disconnect the connector.
Figure 5-78 Remove the USB ports card
2. Pull the free end of the card away from the bracket, and then pull the captive
end of the card out of the bracket.
Figure 5-79 Remove the bracket
2
1
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
Unpack the replacement assembly 631
4. Install the internal USB ports
Learn how to install the internal USB ports.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Push the short edge of the card into the bracket, and then press the card
into the bracket until it is firmly seated.
Figure 5-80 Attach the bracket
1
2
2. Align the connector on the card with the formatter connector, and then
press the connectors together to seat the card on the formatter.
Figure 5-81 Install the card on the formatter
3. Install the formatter cover.
5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
632 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-82 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: Solid state drive (SSD)
Learn about removing and replacing the solid state drive.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the SSD.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-20 Part information
Part number Part description
1M0Q4A HP LaserJet Secure Solid State Drive
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
Removal and replacement: Solid state drive (SSD) 633
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-83 Remove the formatter cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
634 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
3. Install the SSD card only
Learn how to install the SSD card.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Place one end of the riser PCA into the cradle, and then press the other end
of the card into the cradle.
Figure 5-84 Install PCA in cradle
1
2
2. Verify that the PCA is properly installed by listening for a click when it is
pressed into place. Also verify that the PCA is underneath the two indicated
tabs at the end.
Figure 5-85 Verify PCA installation
Install the SSD card only 635
3. Position the PCA cradle on the bracket.
Figure 5-86 Position the PCA cradle
4. Close two clips at the end of the bracket to secure the PCA cradle.
Figure 5-87 Close the clips
636 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. Install the support cross member onto the bracket.
Figure 5-88 Install the cross member
6. Align the SSD card with the connector on the PCA. Note how the end of the
SSD is keyed so that it can be installed one way only.
Figure 5-89 Align the SSD card
Install the SSD card only 637
7. Seat the SSD in the PCA connector, and then snap the other end of the SSD
on the cross member.
Figure 5-90 Secure the SSD on the cross member
8. Align the bracket assembly with the formatter connector.
Figure 5-91 Align the bracket assembly
638 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
9. Press the bracket assembly to firmly seat it in the formatter connector.
Figure 5-92 Install the bracket assembly
10. Install two pins to secure the bracket assembly to the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-93 Install two pins
4. Install the SSD card with the HDD
Learn how to install the SSD card with an HDD.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
Install the SSD card with the HDD 639
1. Release two pins from the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-94 Release two pins
2. Remove the HDD assembly
Figure 5-95 Remove the HDD
640 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Open two clips on the HDD bracket.
Figure 5-96 Open two clips
4. Remove the PCA cradle from the HDD bracket.
Figure 5-97 Remove the PCA cradle
Install the SSD card with the HDD 641
5. Release one tab (callout 1), raise the end of the PCA up and off the cradle
(callout 2), and then remove the PCA from the cradle (callout 3).
Figure 5-98 Remove the PCA from the holder
6. Place one end of the new PCA on the cradle (callout 1), and then rotate the
other end down onto the cradle (callout 2). Make sure to orientate the PCA
on the cradle as shown. Push down on the PCA to install it on the cradle (an
audible click is heard when it snaps into place).
NOTE: Make sure that the PCA is firmly seated under the clips on the
cradle.
Figure 5-99 Install the PCA in the cradle
2 1
642 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
7. Align the PCA cradle with the bracket.
Figure 5-100 Align the PCA cradle
8. Close two clips to secure the PCA cradle to the bracket.
Figure 5-101 Close two clips
9. Install the support cross member onto the bracket.
Figure 5-102 Install the support cross member
Install the SSD card with the HDD 643
10. Align the SSD card with the PCA connector. Note how the end of the SSD is
keyed so that it can be installed one way only.
Figure 5-103 Align the SSD card
644 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
11. Seat the SSD in the PCA connector, and then snap the other end of the SSD
on the cross member.
Figure 5-104 Secure the SSD on the cross member
12. Align the bracket assembly with the formatter connector.
Figure 5-105 Align the bracket assembly
Install the SSD card with the HDD 645
13. Press the bracket assembly to firmly seat it in the formatter connector.
Figure 5-106 Install the bracket assembly
14. Install two pins to secure the bracket assembly to the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-107 Install two pins
5. Install the SSD card with USB
Learn how to install the SSD card with a USB card.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
646 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove the USB PCA from the formatter connector.
Figure 5-108 Remove the USB PCA
2. Install the SSD card on the board.
Figure 5-109 Install the SSD card
Install the SSD card with USB 647
3. Position the PCA cradle on the bracket.
Figure 5-110 Position the PCA cradle
4. Close two clips to secure the PCA cradle to the bracket.
Figure 5-111 Close two clips
648 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. Insert the board into the PCA connector.
Figure 5-112 Insert the board
6. Secure the board to the bracket (an audible click is heard when it snaps into
place).
Figure 5-113 Secure the board to the bracket
Install the SSD card with USB 649
7. Align the bracket assembly with the formatter connector, and then press the
bracket assembly to firmly seat it in the formatter connector.
Figure 5-114 Install the bracket assembly
8. Install two pins to secure the bracket assembly to the formatter faceplate.
Figure 5-115 Install two pins
6. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
650 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-116 Install the cover
Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the NFC PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the NFC PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-21 Part information
Part number Part description
1M0Q3A HP JetDirect 3200w BLE/Wireless accessory
3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
Removal and replacement: Near field communication (NFC) PCA (MFP models) 651
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the HIP cover
Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.
1. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.
Figure 5-117 Release the cover
2. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-118 Remove the cover
652 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Install the wireless print server with NFC
Learn how to install the wireless print server with NFC.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Connect the USB cable to the print server.
Figure 5-119 Connect the USB cable to the print server
2. Connect the USB cable to the HIP port.
Figure 5-120 Connect the USB cable to the HIP port
Install the wireless print server with NFC 653
3. Install the printer server in the HIP cavity.
Figure 5-121 Install the printer server
Removal and replacement: embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)
Learn about removing and replacing the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC).
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the eMMC.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge
must be removed from the printer for an extended period of time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash
in cold water. Hot water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to
remove.
654 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-22 Part information
Part number Part description
B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB
B5L32-67004 eMMC 32GB
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-122 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 655
2. Remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)
Follow these steps to remove the eMMC.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
■ Locate the eMMC component on the formatter, and then pull it straight off of
the formatter to remove it.
Figure 5-123 Remove the eMMC (SFP/MFP)
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
4. Install the eMMC
Follow these steps to install the eMMC.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
1. Align the connector on the replacement eMMC (callout 1) with the connector
on the formatter (callout 2), and then push the eMMC onto the formatter to
install it.
NOTE: The eMMC can only be installed in one direction on the formatter
656 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-124 Install the eMMC
2. Push in on the eMMC to install it in the connector.
Figure 5-125 Install the eMMC (SFP/MFP)
3. Verify that the eMMC is fully seated in the connector.
Figure 5-126 Verify the installation
5. Install the formatter cover
Follow these steps to install the formatter cover.
Install the formatter cover 657
■ Slide the cover (callout 1) onto the printer, and then install one screw (callout
2) to secure it.
Figure 5-127 Install the cover
658 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Document feeder / scanner
Learn about document feeder and scanner parts removal and replacement.
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)
Learn about FRU parts removal and replacement.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Scanner control board (SCB) (MFP models)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the scanner
control board (SCB).
Mean time to repair: 10 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order
the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Table 5-23 Part information
Part number Part description
5851-8962 Scanner control interconnect board (SCIB) (58xx Series)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
Document feeder / scanner 659
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-128 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
660 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-129 Remove two screws
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-130 Remove the rear cover
3. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
NOTE: The task below shows the rear upper cover on a 6800zfsw model. The
cover on your model might look different, but the process is the same.
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models) 661
■ Remove two screws, pry the right side away from printer, and then pull the
cover in the direction indicated.
Figure 5-131 Remove the cover
4. Remove the document feeder
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
TIP: These are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the
screw counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then
carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent
stripping the threads inside the screw hole.
Figure 5-132 Remove two screws
662 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to
release the grounding cable, and then disconnect the indicated connectors
(callout 3) on the scanner control board.
Figure 5-133 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors
1 2 3
3. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops, and then lift it off of the scanner
until it stops.
4. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
release two tabs on the document feeder hinges.
Figure 5-134 Release two tabs
5. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the cables
through the cable channel in the scanner bed.
5. Remove the flatbed scanner assembly
Follow these steps to remove the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
Remove the flatbed scanner assembly 663
1. On the SCB, disconnect the cables indicated below.
Figure 5-135 Disconnect SCB connectors
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 5-136 Remove four screws
3. Pull the scan unit up to remove it from the printer.
NOTE: Carefully ensure that the cables do not catch on the cable guides
as you lift the assembly.
6. Remove the scanner control board (SCB)
Follow these steps to remove the scanner control board (SCB).
664 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ On the SCB, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove one
screw (callout 2). Slide the SCB to the right, and then remove it from the
integrated scanner assembly.
Figure 5-137 Disconnect connectors
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 665
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: White backing (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the document feeder white backing.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
666 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-24 Part information
Part number Part description
5851-8850 ADF white backing kit (5800/X57945 models)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 667
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Whole-unit replacement (WUR)
Learn about WUR parts removal and replacement.
Automatic document feeder (WUR)
Learn about automatic document feeder whole-unit replacement.
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (MFP models)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the document
feeder (MFP).
Mean time to repair: 20 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
668 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order
the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Table 5-25 Part information
Part number Part description
C0M44-67002 ADF WUR (5xxx Series Non-Workflow)
C0M44-67003 ADF WUR (5xxx Series Workflow)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip.
● Small flat-blade screwdriver.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Use the document feeder to make a copy to make sure that it is properly
functioning.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 669
Figure 5-138 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-139 Remove two screws
670 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-140 Remove the rear cover
3. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
NOTE: The task below shows the rear upper cover on a 6800zfsw model. The
cover on your model might look different, but the process is the same.
■ Remove two screws, pry the right side away from printer, and then pull the
cover in the direction indicated.
Figure 5-141 Remove the cover
4. Remove the document feeder
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder.
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models) 671
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
TIP: These are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the
screw counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then
carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent
stripping the threads inside the screw hole.
Figure 5-142 Remove two screws
2. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to
release the grounding cable, and then disconnect the indicated connectors
(callout 3) on the scanner control board.
Figure 5-143 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors
1 2 3
3. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops, and then lift it off of the scanner
until it stops.
672 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
release two tabs on the document feeder hinges.
Figure 5-144 Release two tabs
5. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the cables
through the cable channel in the scanner bed.
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 673
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Integrated scanner assembly (WUR)
Learn about integrated scanner assembly (ISA) whole-unit replacement.
Removal and replacement: Flatbed scanner assembly (MFP models)
Learn how to remove and replace the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
Mean time to repair: 22 minutes
Service level: Medium
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
674 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order
the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
NOTE: The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner
assembly (SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).
Table 5-26 Part information
Part number Part description
6QN29-67005 Flatbed scanner (5xxx Series)
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 675
Figure 5-145 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-146 Remove two screws
676 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-147 Remove the rear cover
3. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
NOTE: The task below shows the rear upper cover on a 6800zfsw model. The
cover on your model might look different, but the process is the same.
■ Remove two screws, pry the right side away from printer, and then pull the
cover in the direction indicated.
Figure 5-148 Remove the cover
4. Remove the document feeder
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder.
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models) 677
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
TIP: These are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the
screw counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then
carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent
stripping the threads inside the screw hole.
Figure 5-149 Remove two screws
2. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to
release the grounding cable, and then disconnect the indicated connectors
(callout 3) on the scanner control board.
Figure 5-150 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors
1 2 3
3. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops, and then lift it off of the scanner
until it stops.
678 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
release two tabs on the document feeder hinges.
Figure 5-151 Release two tabs
5. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the cables
through the cable channel in the scanner bed.
5. Remove the flatbed scanner assembly
Follow these steps to remove the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
1. On the SCB, disconnect the cables indicated below.
Figure 5-152 Disconnect SCB connectors
Remove the flatbed scanner assembly 679
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 5-153 Remove four screws
3. Pull the scan unit up to remove it from the printer.
NOTE: Carefully ensure that the cables do not catch on the cable guides
as you lift the assembly.
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
680 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Unpack the replacement assembly 681
Removal and replacement: Internal parts and
assemblies (base printer)
Learn how to remove and replace the base printer internal parts and
assemblies.
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)
Learn about FRU parts removal and replacement.
Covers, panels, and doors
Learn about covers, panels, and doors removal and replacement.
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover
Learn about removing and replacing the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
5800dn, 5800f, 5800zf, X57945dn, X58045dn, X57945z, X58045z, 6800dn,
6800zf, 6800zfw+, 6801zfw+, X677dn, X677z+, X67755dn, X67765dn, X67755z+,
and X67765z+
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-27 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly(all models)
RM2-4530-000CN Formatter cover assembly(Sub-cover MFP models only)
682 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-154 Remove the formatter cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Remove the formatter cover 683
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter cover
Learn about removing and replacing the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
684 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-28 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly(all models)
RM2-4530-000CN Formatter cover assembly(Sub-cover MFP models only)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 685
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-155 Remove the screw
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
686 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front door
Learn about removing and replacing the front door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Front door 687
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-29 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4473-000CN Front door assembly (5700/5800/X58045dn models)
RM2-4479-000CN Front door assembly (X57945/X654/X677 models)
RM2-4533-000CN Front door assembly (X557/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs/6700/6800 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Make sure that the front door correctly opens and closes.
1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.
688 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Pull the tray out until it stops.
Figure 5-156 Pull the tray out
2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-157 Remove the tray
2. Remove the front door
Follow these steps to remove the front door.
1. Open the front door.
Remove the front door 689
2. At the left side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip
(callout 2) on the front-door assembly.
Figure 5-158 Release the left link arm
3. At the right side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip
(callout 2) on the front-door assembly.
Figure 5-159 Release the right link arm
2 1
690 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release the link lever (callout 2) from the front
door assembly (callout 3), and then remove the front door.
Figure 5-160 Remove the door
2
1 1
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 691
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridge access door (X557/X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner cartridge access door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
692 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge
must be removed from the printer for an extended period of time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash
in cold water. Hot water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to
remove.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-30 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3678-000CN Toner supply door assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Make sure that the toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.
1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.
Remove Tray 2 693
1. Pull the tray out until it stops.
Figure 5-161 Pull the tray out
2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-162 Remove the tray
2. Remove the cartridge access door (X557/X57945/X58045 models)
Follow these steps to remove the cartridge access door.
1. Open the cartridge door.
694 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the right- and left-side of the door, remove two screws, and then remove
the door.
Figure 5-163 Remove the door
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 695
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover
Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
696 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-31 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear (all models)
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower (X57945/X654/X677 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-164 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 697
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-165 Remove the screw
698 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-166 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 699
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-167 Remove the rear cover
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
700 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the rear upper cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Rear upper cover (MFP models) 701
Table 5-32 Part information
Part number Part description
RC6-1305-000CN Cover, rear upper
RC6-0223-000CN Cover, rear upper X58045z, X58045zs models
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-168 Remove the formatter cover
702 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-169 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 703
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models 6800dn, 6800zf, 6800zfw+, 6801zfw+,
X677dn, X677z+, X67755dn, X67765dn, X67755z+, and X67765z+)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
704 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove the 2 indicated screws the slide the cover slightly to the right and pull
the cover away from the engine to remove.
Figure 5-170 Remove the cover
4. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw,
X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs, and X67765zs)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
1. Remove the 2 highlighted screws.
Figure 5-171 Remove 2 screws
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw,
X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs, and X67765zs) 705
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, disengage three snap-fit leavers then pull the
cover away from the printer.
Figure 5-172 Remove the cover
5. Remove the rear upper left cover (MFP models 5800dn, 5800f, 5800zf, X57945dn,
X58045dn, X57945z, and X58045z)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout) and slide the panel to the right to remove it
Figure 5-173 Remove the cover
706 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the left upper cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
Unpack the replacement assembly 707
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-33 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
708 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-174 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-175 Release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 709
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-176 Remove the left upper cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
710 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left cover
Learn about removing and replacing the left cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-34 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
Removal and replacement: Left cover 711
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-177 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-178 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
712 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-179 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-180 Remove the left upper cover
3. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
Remove the left cover 713
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-181 Remove the left cover
1 2
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
714 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left handle
Learn about removing and replacing the left handle.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Left handle 715
Table 5-35 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-182 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
716 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-183 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-184 Release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 717
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-185 Remove the left upper cover
3. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-186 Remove the left cover
1 2
4. Remove the left handle
Follow these steps to remove the left handle.
718 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ At the left side of the printer, release one tab, and then slide the handle as
indicated to release it.
Figure 5-187 Remove the handle
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 719
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front left cover
Learn about removing and replacing the front left cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
720 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-36 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front left cover
Follow these steps to remove the front left cover.
1. Perform one of the following steps.
● 6700/6800 models: Open the front door.
● X654/X677 models: Open the toner cartridge access door.
Remove the front left cover 721
2. Pull the top part of the front left cover (callout 1) in the direction indicated,
release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the cover upward to release it.
Figure 5-188 Remove the cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
722 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front right cover
Learn about removing and replacing the front right cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Front right cover 723
Table 5-37 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the front door.
● X57945 models: Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the right door.
● X57945 models: Open the right lower door.
724 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-189 Remove the front right cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
Unpack the replacement assembly 725
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right door
Learn about removing and replacing the right door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-38 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3570-000CN Right door (5700/X557/5800/X57945/X58045dn)
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
726 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-190 Open the right door
2. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/X557/5800 models: Open the right door.
● X579 models: Open the right lower door.
3. 5700/X557/5800 models: Remove the front right cover.
4. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-191 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
Remove the right door 727
5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable clamp (callout 3).
Figure 5-192 Disconnect one connector
2
3
6. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the link arm (callout 2) in the direction
indicated, and then remove it.
Figure 5-193 Remove the link arm
728 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
7. Close the front door a little, and then disconnect the joint that connects the
two link arms.
Figure 5-194 Disconnect the link arms
8. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the link arm (callout 2).
Figure 5-195 Remove the link arm
Remove the right door 729
9. Close the front door a little, and then remove the spring (callout 1) from the
link arm (callout 2) and from the shaft (callout 3).
Figure 5-196 Remove the spring
10. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the cable holder (callout 2) in the direction
indicate, and then remove it.
Figure 5-197 Remove the cable holder
730 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
11. Remove the right door (callout 1) from the shaft (callout 2), and then unhook
one spring (callout 3) from the frame (callout 4).
Figure 5-198 Remove the door from the shaft
2 4
12. Slide the right door (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-199 Remove the door
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 731
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right lower door (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the right lower door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
732 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-39 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-200 Remove the front right cover
Remove the front right cover 733
2. Remove the right lower door (X579 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-201 Remove the base frame
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-202 Remove the rear inner cover
734 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-203 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 735
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the rear lower cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
736 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-40 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-204 Remove the front right cover
Remove the front right cover 737
2. Remove the right lower door (X579 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-205 Remove the base frame
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-206 Remove the rear inner cover
738 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-207 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X654/X677 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-208 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Remove the rear lower cover (X654/X677 models) 739
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left lower cover (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the left lower cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
740 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-41 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9408-000CN Left lower cover
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-209 Remove the front right cover
Remove the front right cover 741
2. Remove the right lower door (X579 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-210 Remove the base frame
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-211 Remove the rear inner cover
742 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-212 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X654/X677 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-213 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the left lower cover (X579 models)
Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover.
Remove the rear lower cover (X654/X677 models) 743
■ Slide the left lower cover in the direction indicated, and then remove it.
Figure 5-214 Remove the left lower cover
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
744 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Output bin
Learn about removing and replacing the output bin.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-42 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4469-000CN Face down tray assembly
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
Removal and replacement: Output bin 745
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Open the front door.
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-215 Remove the TCU cover
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
746 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-216 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-217 Release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 747
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-218 Remove the left upper cover
3. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-219 Remove the output bin
2
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
748 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right handle
Learn about removing and replacing the right handle.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Right handle 749
Table 5-43 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-220 Open the right door
2. Perform one of the following steps.
● 6700/6800 models: Open the right door.
750 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● X654/X677 models: Open the right lower door.
3. 6700/6800 models: Remove the front right cover.
4. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-221 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable clamp (callout 3).
Figure 5-222 Disconnect one connector
2
3
Remove the right door 751
6. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the link arm (callout 2) in the direction
indicated, and then remove it.
Figure 5-223 Remove the link arm
7. Close the front door a little, and then disconnect the joint that connects the
two link arms.
Figure 5-224 Disconnect the link arms
752 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
8. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the link arm (callout 2).
Figure 5-225 Remove the link arm
9. Close the front door a little, and then remove the spring (callout 1) from the
link arm (callout 2) and from the shaft (callout 3).
Figure 5-226 Remove the spring
Remove the right door 753
10. Release one tab (callout 1), slide the cable holder (callout 2) in the direction
indicate, and then remove it.
Figure 5-227 Remove the cable holder
11. Remove the right door (callout 1) from the shaft (callout 2), and then unhook
one spring (callout 3) from the frame (callout 4).
Figure 5-228 Remove the door from the shaft
2 4
754 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
12. Slide the right door (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-229 Remove the door
2. Remove the right handle
Follow these steps to remove the right handle.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1)., release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
right handle (callout 3) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-230 Remove the handle
3 2
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Remove the right handle 755
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the top cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
756 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-44 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4517-000CN Top cover assembly
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-231 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 757
2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Open the front door.
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-232 Remove the TCU cover
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
758 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-233 Remove the output bin
2
4. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-234 Remove the left cover
1 2
Remove the output bin 759
5. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-235 Remove two screws
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-236 Remove the rear cover
6. Remove the top cover (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
760 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-237 Disconnect the connector
2
2. Remove two screws.
Figure 5-238 Remove two screws
Remove the top cover (SFP models) 761
3. Release one tab (callout 1), release two USB cables (callout 2) and another
cable (callout 3) from the cable clamp (callout 4).
Figure 5-239 Release one tab
1
3
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the top cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-240 Remove the cover
1 3
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
762 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the top cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP models) 763
Table 5-45 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9172-000CN Cover, top assembly
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
764 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-241 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-242 Release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 765
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-243 Remove the left upper cover
2. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-244 Remove the output bin
2
3. Remove the top cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
766 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the top cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-245 Remove the top cover
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
Unpack the replacement assembly 767
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top front cover (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the top front cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-46 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4518-000CN Top front cover assembly
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
768 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-246 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
Remove the formatter cover 769
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-247 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-248 Release the tab
770 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-249 Remove the left upper cover
3. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-250 Remove the output bin
2
4. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
Remove the output bin 771
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-251 Remove the left cover
1 2
5. Remove the top cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the top cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-252 Remove the top cover
6. Remove the top front cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top front cover.
772 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-253 Disconnect one connector and release the cable
2
2. Remove two screws.
Figure 5-254 Remove two screws
Remove the top front cover (MFP models) 773
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold up the top front cover (callout 2), and then
remove it.
Figure 5-255 Remove the top front cover
2
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
774 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover
Learn about removing and replacing the Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP)
cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) cover 775
Table 5-47 Part information
Part number Part description
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP)
Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the HIP cover
Follow these steps to remove the HIP cover.
1. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs on the HIP cover.
Figure 5-256 Release the cover
776 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Rotate the cover up and off of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-257 Remove the cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
Unpack the replacement assembly 777
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Control panel (SFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-48 Part information
Part number Part description
6QN28-60102 Control panel 10.9 cm (4.3 in)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the control panel (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel.
778 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Tilt the control panel up.
Figure 5-258 Remove one screw
2. Pull up the control panel cover. A small flat blade screwdriver might be
helpful with this.
Figure 5-259 Remove the control panel cover
3. Remove one screw.
Figure 5-260 Remove one screw
Remove the control panel (SFP) 779
4. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to pry and hold one tab (callout 1), push
the assembly (callout 2) to the rear of the printer to release another tab
(callout 3), and then lift the control panel up (callout 4), slightly and gently.
CAUTION: The control panel is still attached to the printer. Do not attempt
to completely remove the control panel.
Figure 5-261 Release the tabs
4
2
1
5. Disconnect one FFC, and then remove the control panel.
Figure 5-262 Remove the control panel
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
780 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Control panel (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the control panel.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the control panel.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Control panel (MFP models) 781
Table 5-49 Part information
Part number Part description
6QN37-60102 Control panel 23.3 cm (8 in)
6QN35-60129 Control panel 25.6 cm (10.1 in)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the control panel (MFP)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel.
■ Pull the control panel out and tilt it up, and then remove the two thumbscrews
on the control panel arm. Remove the control panel by pulling it away from the
printer.
Figure 5-263 Remove two thumbscrews
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
782 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Internal parts and assemblies 783
Removal and replacement: Toner cartridges (manual unlock) (X57945 models)
Learn how to manually unlock the toner cartridges so that they can be removed
to service other assemblies.
NOTE: This procedure describes manually unlocking the cartridges when the
printer is not functioning.
To remove the cartridges by using the control-panel ejection method when the
printer is operational, see the CSR instructions.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner cartridges (manual
unlock)
Before performing service
CAUTION: To prevent damage to a toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover the imaging drum if the toner cartridge must
be removed from the printer for an extended period of time.
If toner gets on the skin or clothing, wipe it off with dry tissue paper and wash
in cold water. Hot water sets toner and it might be difficult, or impossible, to
remove.
Required tools
● Tool with a ≤ 3mm point and < 120mm length
After performing service
○ No post service test is available for this assembly.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.
784 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Pull the tray out until it stops.
Figure 5-264 Pull the tray out
2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-265 Remove the tray
2. Manually unlock the toner cartridges (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to manually unlock the toner cartridges.
Manually unlock the toner cartridges (X57945 models) 785
1. Locate the four toner cartridge drive units inside the Tray 2 cavity.
Figure 5-266 Locate the drive units
1 2 3 4
2. Locate the cartridge lock mechanism on one of the drive units.
Figure 5-267 Cartridge lock mechanism
3. Open the cartridge door. Use a tool with a less-than 3mm tip (and less than
120mm in length) to release the lock mechanism.
a. Place the tip of the tool in the opening and under the lock mechanism
(callout 1)
786 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
b. Rotate the tool to release the lock mechanism (callout 2).
NOTE: When the lock mechanism is released, the corresponding toner
cartridge extends out of the printer.
c. Repeat these steps for each drive unit.
Figure 5-268 Release the lock mechanism
3. Remove the toner cartridges (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove a toner cartridges.
1. . If the toner cartridge door is not
open, open it now.
2. . Grasp the end of the toner cartridge
and pull it straight out of the printer.
Remove the toner cartridges (X57945 models) 787
Removal and replacement: Convenience stapler
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace of the
convenience stapler.
Mean time to repair 27 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order
the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Table 5-50
Part number Part Description
6QN30-60103 Assembly-Stapler (Convenience stapler)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● Torx 10 screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
● Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
● Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
788 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-269 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-270 Remove two screws
Remove the formatter cover 789
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-271 Remove the rear cover
Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
NOTE: The task below shows the rear upper cover on a 6800zfsw model. The
cover on your model might look different, but the process is the same.
■ Remove two screws, pry the right side away from printer, and then pull the
cover in the direction indicated.
Figure 5-272 Remove the cover
Remove the document feeder
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder.
790 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
TIP: These are self-tapping screws for plastic. When reinstalling, rotate the
screw counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then
carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. This will prevent
stripping the threads inside the screw hole.
Figure 5-273 Remove two screws
2. Disconnect one flat cable (callout 1), remove one ground screw (callout 2) to
release the grounding cable, and then disconnect the indicated connectors
(callout 3) on the scanner control board.
Figure 5-274 Disconnect the flat cable, ground cable, and connectors
1 2 3
3. Tilt the document feeder back until it stops, and then lift it off of the scanner
until it stops.
Remove the document feeder 791
4. Support the document feeder, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
release two tabs on the document feeder hinges.
Figure 5-275 Release two tabs
5. Lift the document feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: While removing the document feeder, carefully pass the cables
through the cable channel in the scanner bed.
Remove the flatbed scanner assembly
Follow these steps to remove the sub-scanner assembly (SSA).
1. On the SCB, disconnect the cables indicated below.
Figure 5-276 Disconnect SCB connectors
792 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 5-277 Remove four screws
3. Pull the scan unit up to remove it from the printer.
NOTE: Carefully ensure that the cables do not catch on the cable guides
as you lift the assembly.
Remove the convenience stapler assembly
Follow these steps to remove and replace the convenience stapler.
1. Remove the stapler cover.
a. Open the stapler cover from the end closest to the front on the engine.
Remove the convenience stapler assembly 793
b. Gently lift the cover up and twist the top of the cover out\, let off the
pressure and remove the cover.
2. Remove the stapler housing.
a. Remove the blue stable cartridge from the stapler.
794 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
b. Remove the 2 screws and twist the bottom of the housing out then pull
away from the printer.
3. Disconnect the rainbow cable from the upper right corner of the Stapler
4. Remove the stapler assembly.
Remove the convenience stapler assembly 795
a. Remove 1 screw.
b. Push the stapler assembly to the right to unseat it then twist the stapler
out of the printer.
5. Remove the stapler cable
If the stapler’s cable is damaged, remove the cable from the engine.
Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
796 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Install the convenient stapler
Use the following to install then new convenient stapler.
Install the convenient stapler 797
1. If installing a convenient stapler on a printer that has not previously had one
installed, remove the cover plate.
2. To install a new stapler assembly, go to the ‘Remove the convenience stapler
assembly’ section and reverse the removal steps.
Removal and replacement: Secondary transfer assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the secondary transfer assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-51 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3586-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (5700/X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs/6700)
RM2-3628-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (5800//X557/X57945/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs)
798 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-51 Part information (continued)
Part number Part description
RM2-3629-000CN Secondary transfer assembly (X654/X677)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-278 Open the right door
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 799
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-279 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, make sure the cable is correctly routed
through the cable guide.
Figure 5-280 Release the cable
4. Perform one of the following steps.
● X557/5800/X57945 models: Disconnect the J315 formatter connector.
● 5700 models: Disconnect the J305 formatter connector.
800 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-281 Disconnect a formatter connector
X557/MFP 5800/MFP X579 5700
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up the registration assembly (callout
2) off the secondary transfer assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-282 Release the tab
1
2
6. Close the secondary transfer assembly until it is only slightly open. Slide the
assembly (callout 1) in the direction indicated below, and then dislodge the
hinge pin (callout 2) from the holder to remove the assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the
assembly hinge pins fit into the holes provided in the printer.
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 801
Figure 5-283 Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Reinstallation tip: On the assembly right side, make sure that the wire is
nested in the plastic sleeve. Slide the wire sleeve into its place, depressing
the spring, and then twist the left side of the assembly into place and allow
the spring pressure to nest the hinge pin in its hole.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
802 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Registration density sensor assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the registration density sensor assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Registration density sensor assembly 803
Table 5-52 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4492-000CN Density detect assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the ITB
Follow these steps to remove the ITB.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-284 Open the right door
2. Hold the two side levers and pull out the ITB assembly.
CAUTION: Do not touch the gray plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on
the belt can cause print-quality problems.
804 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-285 Release the ITB
2. Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-286 Open the right door
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 805
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-287 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, make sure the cable is correctly routed
through the cable guide.
Figure 5-288 Release the cable
4. Perform one of the following steps.
● X557/5800/X57945 models: Disconnect the J315 formatter connector.
● 5700 models: Disconnect the J305 formatter connector.
806 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-289 Disconnect a formatter connector
X557/MFP 5800/MFP X579 5700
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up the registration assembly (callout
2) off the secondary transfer assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-290 Release the tab
1
2
6. Close the secondary transfer assembly until it is only slightly open. Slide the
assembly (callout 1) in the direction indicated below, and then dislodge the
hinge pin (callout 2) from the holder to remove the assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the
assembly hinge pins fit into the holes provided in the printer.
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 807
Figure 5-291 Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Reinstallation tip: On the assembly right side, make sure that the wire is
nested in the plastic sleeve. Slide the wire sleeve into its place, depressing
the spring, and then twist the left side of the assembly into place and allow
the spring pressure to nest the hinge pin in its hole.
3. Remove the registration density sensor
Follow these steps to remove the registration density sensor.
1. Disconnect one connector (J314; callout 1), and then release the cable
(callout 2) from the cable guides (callout 3).
Figure 5-292 Disconnect one connector
3
2. Remove two screws (callout 1). Pull out the registration density sensor
assembly (callout 2) slightly towards you, and then move the registration
808 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
density sensor assembly in the direction indicated below. Carefully pull out
the right side first to remove the registration density sensor assembly.
NOTE: The shaft on the left side of the assembly is long and can break.
Make sure to pivot the right side of the assembly out first to ensure that the
shaft does not break. When installing a registration density sensor
assembly, insert the shaft on the left side first, and then pivot the right side
into the printer.
Figure 5-293 Release the assembly
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 809
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the registration assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
810 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-53 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4458-000CN Registration assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-294 Open the right door
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 811
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-295 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, make sure the cable is correctly routed
through the cable guide.
Figure 5-296 Release the cable
4. Perform one of the following steps.
● X557/5800/X57945 models: Disconnect the J315 formatter connector.
● 5700 models: Disconnect the J305 formatter connector.
812 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-297 Disconnect a formatter connector
X557/MFP 5800/MFP X579 5700
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up the registration assembly (callout
2) off the secondary transfer assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-298 Release the tab
1
2
6. Close the secondary transfer assembly until it is only slightly open. Slide the
assembly (callout 1) in the direction indicated below, and then dislodge the
hinge pin (callout 2) from the holder to remove the assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the
assembly hinge pins fit into the holes provided in the printer.
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 813
Figure 5-299 Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Reinstallation tip: On the assembly right side, make sure that the wire is
nested in the plastic sleeve. Slide the wire sleeve into its place, depressing
the spring, and then twist the left side of the assembly into place and allow
the spring pressure to nest the hinge pin in its hole.
2. Remove the registration assembly
Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.
1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1). and then release the cable (callout
2) from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-300 Release the connectors
1
2
814 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then release the link arm (callout 2) from
the door.
Figure 5-301 Release the link arm
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the registration assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-302 Remove the registration assembly
2
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 815
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (5700/X557/5800/X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs models)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the paper pickup
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
816 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-54 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3508-000CN Paper pickup assembly (5700/5800/X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-303 Open the right door
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 817
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-304 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, make sure the cable is correctly routed
through the cable guide.
Figure 5-305 Release the cable
4. Perform one of the following steps.
● X557/5800/X57945 models: Disconnect the J315 formatter connector.
● 5700 models: Disconnect the J305 formatter connector.
818 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-306 Disconnect a formatter connector
X557/MFP 5800/MFP X579 5700
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up the registration assembly (callout
2) off the secondary transfer assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-307 Release the tab
1
2
6. Close the secondary transfer assembly until it is only slightly open. Slide the
assembly (callout 1) in the direction indicated below, and then dislodge the
hinge pin (callout 2) from the holder to remove the assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the
assembly hinge pins fit into the holes provided in the printer.
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 819
Figure 5-308 Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Reinstallation tip: On the assembly right side, make sure that the wire is
nested in the plastic sleeve. Slide the wire sleeve into its place, depressing
the spring, and then twist the left side of the assembly into place and allow
the spring pressure to nest the hinge pin in its hole.
2. Remove the registration density sensor
Follow these steps to remove the registration density sensor.
1. Disconnect one connector (J314; callout 1), and then release the cable
(callout 2) from the cable guides (callout 3).
Figure 5-309 Disconnect one connector
3
2. Remove two screws (callout 1). Pull out the registration density sensor
assembly (callout 2) slightly towards you, and then move the registration
820 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
density sensor assembly in the direction indicated below. Carefully pull out
the right side first to remove the registration density sensor assembly.
NOTE: The shaft on the left side of the assembly is long and can break.
Make sure to pivot the right side of the assembly out first to ensure that the
shaft does not break. When installing a registration density sensor
assembly, insert the shaft on the left side first, and then pivot the right side
into the printer.
Figure 5-310 Release the assembly
3. Remove the paper pickup assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup assembly.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the
cable guide (callout 3), remove one screw (callout 4), and then remove the
pickup assembly (callout 5).
Figure 5-311 Remove the pickup assembly
4
3 1
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, there are two holes. The screw goes in
the upper hole where it comes into contact with the grounding wire.
Remove the paper pickup assembly (5700/5800 models) 821
2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-312 Remove the gear
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
822 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper pickup assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-55 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly (X57945 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assembly (X57945 models) 823
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-313 Remove the front right cover
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-314 Remove the base frame
824 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-315 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-316 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the paper pickup assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup assembly.
Remove the paper pickup assembly (X57945 models) 825
1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the pickup assembly (callout
2).
Figure 5-317 Remove the pickup assembly
1 2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, there are two holes. The screw goes in
the upper hole where it comes into contact with the grounding wire.
2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the pickup assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-318 Remove the gear
2 1
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
826 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the delivery assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Delivery assembly 827
Table 5-56 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3548-000CN Paper delivery assembly (5700/X557/X58045z/
X58045zs)
RM2-3554-000CN Paper delivery assembly (5800/X57945/ X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs )
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Figure 5-319 Open the right door
828 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-320 Remove the fuser
2. Remove the delivery assembly
Follow these steps to remove the delivery assembly.
1. Pull the lever (callout 1) at the back of the cable cover (callout 2) to release
one tab (callout 3), and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 5-321 Remove the cable cover
2 3
Remove the delivery assembly 829
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-322 Disconnect one connector
830 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove three screws (callout 1), remove one binding screw (callout 2), and
then pull out the delivery assembly (callout 3) away from the printer.
Figure 5-323 Remove the delivery assembly
1
2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, lift the flag (callout 1) to prevent the
flag from entering the duct (callout 2)
Figure 5-324 Lift the flag
1 2
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 831
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the laser
scanner assembly.
Mean time to repair: 25 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
832 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-57 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3822-000CN Laser scanner assembly (5700, 55745, 5800, 57945,
X58045dn, X58045z, X58045zs )
RM2-3787-000CN Laser scanner assembly (6700, 654, 6800, 677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Make sure that all of the connectors on the HVPS are fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the LVPS are fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 833
Figure 5-325 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-326 Remove the screw
834 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 835
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-327 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-328 Release the tab
836 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-329 Remove the left upper cover
4. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-330 Remove the left cover
1 2
5. Remove the laser scanner assembly
Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.
Remove the left cover 837
1. Unhook the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), release
the cable (callout 3) from the laser scanner assembly (callout 4), and then
pull out the laser scanner assembly slightly.
Figure 5-331 Unhook the spring
3
2
1 4
2. Disconnect the FFC (callout 1), and then pull the laser scanner assembly
(callout 2) out of the printer.
Figure 5-332 Remove the assembly
1 2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
838 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the DC
controller (DCC).
Mean time to repair: 30 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
Removal and replacement: DC controller (DCC) 839
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and eMMC PCA or
hard-disk drive simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might
cause the printer to become unstable or inoperable.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-58 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7751-010CN DC controller PCA (5700)
RM3-7752-010CN DC controller PCA (5800)
RM3-7755-010CN DC controller PCA (X55745)
RM3-7756-010CN DC controller PCA (X57945)
RM3-7759-010CN DC Controller PCA (X58045)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Make sure that all of the connectors on the DC controller are fully seated.
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated, and that the thumbscrews
are finger tight after replacing it.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
840 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-333 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 841
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-334 Remove the screw
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
842 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-335 Remove two screws
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-336 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the DC controller
Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.
Remove the rear cover 843
■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller, remove four screws
(callout 1), and then remove the DC controller (callout 2).
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Figure 5-337 Remove the DC controller
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
844 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.
Mean time to repair: 10 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
Removal and replacement: Formatter 845
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different
printer be installed during the repair or troubleshooting processes. The
formatter stores important data specific to the model of printer it is installed in
and is not deigned to be swapped or re-purposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.
Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:
● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported
cartridges information change and might make a product unusable.
● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors.
If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover
the costs of the repair in the form of a product replacement. There is no
method in the field to recover a printer where a used formatter is installed.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter, DC controller, and hard-disk drive
simultaneously during a single printer servicing. Doing so might cause the
printer to become unstable or inoperable.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-59 Part information
Part number Part description
6QN27-67002 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx)
6QN27-67004 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/India)
6QN29-67002 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx)
6QN29-67004 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/India)
6QN32-67002 Formatter (67xx / X65xxx)
6QN32-67004 Formatter (67xx / X65xxx) (China/India)
6QN35-67002 Formatter (68xx / X67xxx)
6QN35-67005 Formatter (68xx / X67xxx) (China/India)
846 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-338 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 847
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-339 Remove the screw
848 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the formatter 849
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-340 Remove the formatter
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
850 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter cage assembly (SFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the formatter cage assembly for SFP
models.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Formatter cage assembly (SFP models) 851
Table 5-60 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4520-000CN Formatter cage assembly (SFP)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-341 Remove the formatter cover
852 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-342 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 853
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
854 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-343 Remove the formatter
4. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-344 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 855
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-345 Remove the rear cover
5. Remove the formatter cage (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power
supply assembly below the DC controller.
Figure 5-346 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
856 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
clamp (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the
formatter cage (callout 5).
Figure 5-347 Remove the formatter cage
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Figure 5-348 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 857
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Formatter cage assembly (MFP models)
Learn about removing and replacing the formatter cage assembly for MFP
models.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
858 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-61 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4521-000CN Formatter cage assembly (MFP)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-349 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 859
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-350 Remove the screw
860 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the formatter 861
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-351 Remove the formatter
4. Remove the rear upper cover (MFP models X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw,
X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs, and X67765zs)
Follow these steps to remove the rear upper cover.
1. Remove the 2 highlighted screws.
Figure 5-352 Remove 2 screws
862 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, disengage three snap-fit leavers then pull the
cover away from the printer.
Figure 5-353 Remove the cover
5. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-354 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 863
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-355 Remove the rear cover
6. Remove the formatter cage (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
864 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then
remove the formatter cage (callout 3).
Figure 5-356 Remove the formatter cage
2
2
2. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Remove the formatter cage (MFP models) 865
Figure 5-357 Remove the memory PCA
3 1
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
866 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the feed drive assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-62 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3702-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X57945)
RM2-3683-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X654/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly (X57945 models) 867
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-358 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
868 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-359 Remove the screw
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 869
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-360 Remove two screws
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-361 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
870 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-362 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Figure 5-363 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 871
Figure 5-364 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-365 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the feed drive assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the feed drive assembly.
872 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout
2).
Figure 5-366 Disconnect connector, remove 3 screws
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the feed drive assembly (callout
2).
Figure 5-367 Remove the feed drive assembly
2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 873
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs models)
Learn about removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
874 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-63 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3681-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs)
RM2-3682-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X58045z/X58045zs/
6700/6800)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-368 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 875
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-369 Remove the screw
876 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-370 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 877
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-371 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-372 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
878 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-373 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 879
Figure 5-374 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-375 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the pickup drive assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly.
880 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).
Figure 5-376 Disconnect two connectors, remove three screws
1
2
2
Remove the pickup drive assembly (5700/5800 models) 881
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the pickup drive assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-377 Remove the pickup drive assembly
Reinstallation tip: The indicated gears (callout 1), clutch (callout 2), shaft
(callout 3), and bushing (callout 4) are not fixed to the assembly plate. Ensure
that these components do not fall apart when installing or removing the
paper pickup drive assembly.
Figure 5-378 Do not lose unfastened components
1
2
882 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the pickup drive assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
Unpack the replacement assembly 883
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-64 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3683-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X654/X677)
RM2-3702-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (X57945)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
884 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-379 Remove the front right cover
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-380 Remove the base frame
Remove the right lower door (X57945 models) 885
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-381 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-382 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
886 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-383 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly.
1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-384 Disconnect three connectors
Remove the pickup drive assembly (X57945 models) 887
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2) and the
lifter drive assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-385 Release the cable
3 2
3. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove three screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-386 Remove the cable clamp
1
3
3
888 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the pickup drive assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-387 Remove the pickup drive assembly
2 1
Reinstallation tip: The indicated gears (callout 1), clutch (callout 2), shaft
(callout 3), and bushing (callout 4) are not fixed to the assembly plate. Ensure
that these components do not fall apart when installing or removing the
paper pickup drive assembly.
Figure 5-388 Do not lose unfastened components
1
2
Remove the pickup drive assembly (X57945 models) 889
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply motor assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply motor assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
890 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-65 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3612-000CN Toner supply drive motor assembly (X57945 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
Remove the front right cover 891
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-389 Remove the front right cover
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-390 Remove the base frame
892 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-391 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-392 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models) 893
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-393 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the toner supply motor assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the toner supply motor assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and
then remove the toner supply motor assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-394 Remove the assembly
2
1
3
2
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
894 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs models)
Learn about removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs models) 895
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-66 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3493-000CN Lifter drive assembly (5700/5800)
RM2-3500-000CN Lifter drive assembly (X557/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs/6700/6800)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
896 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-395 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-396 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 897
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-397 Remove two screws
898 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-398 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-399 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 899
Figure 5-400 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
900 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-401 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-402 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the lifter drive assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the lifter drive assembly.
Remove the lifter drive assembly (5700/5800 models) 901
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2),
remove two screws (callout 3), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 4).
Figure 5-403 Remove the assembly
4
3 1 2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
902 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the lifter drive assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (X57945 models) 903
Table 5-67 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly (X57945/X654/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-404 Remove the front right cover
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
904 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-405 Remove the base frame
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-406 Remove the rear inner cover
Remove the right lower door (X57945 models) 905
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-407 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-408 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the lifter drive assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the lifter drive assembly.
906 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-409 Disconnect four connectors
1
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2) and
from the lifter drive assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-410 Release the cable
33 21
12
Remove the lifter drive assembly (X57945 models) 907
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the lifter drive assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-411 Remove the assembly
1
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
908 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (5700/X557/5800 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the auto close assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (5700/X557/5800 models) 909
Table 5-68 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-412 Remove the formatter cover
910 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-413 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 911
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-414 Remove two screws
912 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-415 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-416 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 913
Figure 5-417 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
914 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-418 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-419 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the auto close assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2),
release the cables (callout 3) from the auto close assembly (callout 4), remove
Remove the auto close assembly (5700/5800 models) 915
two screws (callout 5), remove the auto close assembly, and then remove the
drawer connector (callout 6) from the auto close assembly.
Figure 5-420 Remove the auto close assembly
2 1
5 5
3 4 6
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
916 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the auto close assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (X57945 models) 917
Table 5-69 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-421 Remove the front right cover
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
918 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-422 Remove the base frame
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-423 Remove the rear inner cover
Remove the right lower door (X57945 models) 919
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-424 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-425 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the auto close assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
920 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-426 Disconnect six connectors
1
2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-427 Release the cable
Remove the auto close assembly (X57945 models) 921
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the auto close assembly (callout
2), and then remove the drawer connector (callout 3) from the auto close
assembly.
Figure 5-428 Remove the auto close assembly
2 3
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
922 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X557 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X557 models) 923
Table 5-70 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3585-000CN Size detect assembly (X58045z/X58045zs6700/6800)
RM2-3634-000CN Size detect assembly (5700/X557/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs)
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (5800)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-429 Remove the formatter cover
924 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-430 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 925
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-431 Remove two screws
926 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-432 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-433 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 927
Figure 5-434 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
928 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-435 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-436 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the auto close assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2),
release the cables (callout 3) from the auto close assembly (callout 4), remove
Remove the auto close assembly (5700/5800 models) 929
two screws (callout 5), remove the auto close assembly, and then remove the
drawer connector (callout 6) from the auto close assembly.
Figure 5-437 Remove the auto close assembly
2 1
5 5
3 4 6
6. Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
■ Pull out the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (callout 1) toward you.
Figure 5-438 Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly
7. Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X557 models)
Follow these steps to remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
930 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Pull out the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (callout 1) toward you.
Figure 5-439 Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly
8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
Unpack the replacement assembly 931
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-71 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (X57945 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
932 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-440 Remove the front right cover
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-441 Remove the base frame
Remove the front right cover 933
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-442 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-443 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
934 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-444 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the auto close assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
1. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-445 Disconnect six connectors
1
Remove the auto close assembly (X57945 models) 935
2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-446 Release the cable
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the auto close assembly (callout
2), and then remove the drawer connector (callout 3) from the auto close
assembly.
Figure 5-447 Remove the auto close assembly
2 3
5. Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly.
936 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull out the Tray 2 media size detect
assembly (callout 2) toward you.
Figure 5-448 Remove the Tray 2 media size detect assembly
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 937
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the fuser drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser drive
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
938 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-72 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4485-000CN Fixing drive assembly (5700/X557/5800/X57945/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs)
RM2-4487-000CN Fixing drive assembly (6700/X654/6800/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Remove the fuser 939
Figure 5-449 Open the right door
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-450 Remove the fuser
2. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
940 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-451 Remove the formatter cover
3. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-452 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 941
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
4. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-453 Remove two screws
942 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-454 Remove the rear cover
5. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-455 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 943
Figure 5-456 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
944 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-457 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-458 Reinstalling the LVPS
6. Remove the fuser drive assembly
Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly.
Remove the fuser drive assembly 945
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-459 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Pull the lever (callout 1) of the cable cover (callout 2), release one tab (callout
3), and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 5-460 Remove the cable cover
946 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-461 Disconnect one connector
1
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), release
the cable (callout 3) from the cable guide (callout 4), release one tab (callout
5), and then slide the connector cover (callout 6) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-462 Remove the connector cover
5
6
2
4 1
Remove the fuser drive assembly 947
5. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and
then remove the fuser drive assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-463 Remove the assembly
1
2 3
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
948 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the main drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the main drive
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Main-drive assembly 949
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-73 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3506-000CN Main drive assembly (5700/5800/X58045dn)
RM2-3504-000CN Main drive assembly (X557/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs/6700/6800)
RM2-3497-000CN Main drive assembly (X57945/X654/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
950 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-464 Open the right door
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-465 Remove the fuser
2. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 951
Figure 5-466 Remove the formatter cover
3. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-467 Remove the screw
952 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
4. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the formatter 953
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-468 Remove the formatter
5. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-469 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
954 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-470 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-471 Remove the left upper cover
6. Close the front door
After removing the left upper cover (MFP models), close the front door.
Close the front door.
CAUTION: If the left cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the main
drive properly aligned.
Close the front door 955
7. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-472 Remove two screws
956 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-473 Remove the rear cover
8. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-474 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 957
Figure 5-475 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
958 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-476 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-477 Reinstalling the LVPS
9. Remove the DC controller
Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.
■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller, remove four screws
(callout 1), and then remove the DC controller (callout 2).
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the DC controller 959
Figure 5-478 Remove the DC controller
10. Remove the formatter cage (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power
supply assembly below the DC controller.
Figure 5-479 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
960 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
clamp (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the
formatter cage (callout 5).
Figure 5-480 Remove the formatter cage
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Figure 5-481 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4
11. Remove the formatter cage (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
Remove the formatter cage (MFP models) 961
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then
remove the formatter cage (callout 3).
Figure 5-482 Remove the formatter cage
2
2
2. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
962 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-483 Remove the memory PCA
3 1
12. Remove the drive PCA
Follow these steps to remove the drive PCA.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-484 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect all the connectors on the drive PCA, remove one screw (callout
1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the drive PCA (callout 3).
IMPORTANT: Some of these wires are very tightly connected. Take care
when disconnecting them.
Remove the drive PCA 963
Figure 5-485 Remove the drive PCA
33
22
11
13. Remove the main-drive assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main-drive assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that the front door is closed when performing this
procedure.
1. Pull the lever (callout 1) of the cable cover (callout 2), release one tab (callout
3), and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 5-486 Remove the cable cover
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, align the pegs in the holes, and then
set the cover against the frame and rotate it up and into position.
964 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-487 Disconnect one connector
1
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
guide (callout 3), release one tab (callout 4), and then slide the connector
cover (callout 5) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-488 Remove the connector cover
4
5
1
3
2
Remove the main-drive assembly 965
4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the link cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-489 Remove the link cover
5. Close the right door a little, and then release the link arm (callout 1) from the
coupling (callout 2).
NOTE: This is a keyed connection. When disconnecting, make sure to line
up the peg with the socket so that you do not strip the peg.
Reinstallation tip: If the black link arm disconnects from the white link arm
below it, it might be helpful for reinstallation purposes to reattach the two
link arms.
Figure 5-490 Release the link arm
966 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the
fan cover (callout 3), release four tabs (callout 4), and then remove the fan
cover.
Figure 5-491 Remove the fan cover
1 2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling this cover, seat the right side pegs into
the chassis slots first.
7. Release the cables (callout 1) and the remove FFC (callout 2) from the cable
guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-492 Release the cables
3
8. Remove seven screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then
remove the main drive assembly (callout 3).
NOTE: All seven screws are on sheet metal tabs on the assembly.
NOTE: Ensure that the screws do not fall into the assembly.
Remove the main-drive assembly 967
Figure 5-493 Remove the main drive assembly
1
9. Special installation instructions for a main drive assembly (replacement unit
and serviced unit)
● Replacement unit: A replacement unit is a new assembly that installs in
place of a discarded in-service unit.
● In-service unit: An in-service unit is a existing assembly that has been
removed for repair or to gain access to other assemblies.
CAUTION: When the main drive assembly is installed (replacement units
and service units), the front door must be closed.
IMPORTANT: If you are installing a new main drive assembly (replacement
unit), you do not need to perform the alignment steps below. New
assemblies are already aligned.
a. Replacement unit and in-service unit: On the printer engine, be careful to
not depress the levers located behind the main drive assembly (when it
is installed).
● Callout 1: Levers in the correct raised position.
968 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● Callout 2: Lever in the incorrect depressed position.
Figure 5-494 Correct and incorrect lever positions
2
1 1
NOTE: For a replacement unit install, skip the remaining alignment
steps which are for in-service units only.
b. In-service unit: There are four gears on the main drive assembly that
need to be lined up correctly in order to successfully reinstall the main
drive. For each gear, the triangle (callout 1) on the inside of the gear
should line up with the triangle (callout 2) stamped on the sheet metal
chassis. Also, the hole (callout 3) in the gear should line up with a hole in
the chassis.
Figure 5-495 Correct gear alignment
1
Remove the main-drive assembly 969
c. In-service unit: In order to realign the four gears, you must remove
the motor that locks the gear auger above the four gears. To do this,
disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and
then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-496 Remove the motor
1
d. In-service unit: To realign the four gears, turn the gear (callout 1) in the
direction indicated. By turning that gear, the four gears (callout 2) that
need to be in phase turn in tandem. Turn the four gears to the correct
phase position.
970 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-497 Align the gears
14. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 971
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Interlock assembly
Learn about removing and replacing the interlock assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
972 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-74 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3675-000CN Interlock assembly (5700/X557/5800/X57945/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs)
RM2-3676-000CN Interlock assembly (6700/X654/6800/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Figure 5-498 Open the right door
Remove the fuser 973
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-499 Remove the fuser
2. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-500 Remove the formatter cover
974 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-501 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 975
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
4. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
976 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-502 Remove the formatter
5. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-503 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 977
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-504 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-505 Remove the left upper cover
6. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
978 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-506 Remove the left cover
1 2
7. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-507 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 979
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-508 Remove the rear cover
8. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-509 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
980 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-510 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 981
Figure 5-511 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-512 Reinstalling the LVPS
9. Remove the DC controller
Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.
■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller, remove four screws
(callout 1), and then remove the DC controller (callout 2).
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
982 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-513 Remove the DC controller
10. Remove the formatter cage (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power
supply assembly below the DC controller.
Figure 5-514 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
Remove the formatter cage (SFP models) 983
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
clamp (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the
formatter cage (callout 5).
Figure 5-515 Remove the formatter cage
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Figure 5-516 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4
11. Remove the formatter cage (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
984 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then
remove the formatter cage (callout 3).
Figure 5-517 Remove the formatter cage
2
2
2. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Remove the formatter cage (MFP models) 985
Figure 5-518 Remove the memory PCA
3 1
12. Remove the drive PCA
Follow these steps to remove the drive PCA.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-519 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect all the connectors on the drive PCA, remove one screw (callout
1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the drive PCA (callout 3).
IMPORTANT: Some of these wires are very tightly connected. Take care
when disconnecting them.
986 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-520 Remove the drive PCA
33
22
11
13. Remove the main-drive assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main-drive assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that the front door is closed when performing this
procedure.
1. Pull the lever (callout 1) of the cable cover (callout 2), release one tab (callout
3), and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 5-521 Remove the cable cover
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, align the pegs in the holes, and then
set the cover against the frame and rotate it up and into position.
Remove the main-drive assembly 987
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-522 Disconnect one connector
1
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
guide (callout 3), release one tab (callout 4), and then slide the connector
cover (callout 5) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-523 Remove the connector cover
4
5
1
3
2
988 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the link cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-524 Remove the link cover
5. Close the right door a little, and then release the link arm (callout 1) from the
coupling (callout 2).
NOTE: This is a keyed connection. When disconnecting, make sure to line
up the peg with the socket so that you do not strip the peg.
Reinstallation tip: If the black link arm disconnects from the white link arm
below it, it might be helpful for reinstallation purposes to reattach the two
link arms.
Figure 5-525 Release the link arm
Remove the main-drive assembly 989
6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the
fan cover (callout 3), release four tabs (callout 4), and then remove the fan
cover.
Figure 5-526 Remove the fan cover
1 2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling this cover, seat the right side pegs into
the chassis slots first.
7. Release the cables (callout 1) and the remove FFC (callout 2) from the cable
guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-527 Release the cables
3
8. Remove seven screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then
remove the main drive assembly (callout 3).
NOTE: All seven screws are on sheet metal tabs on the assembly.
NOTE: Ensure that the screws do not fall into the assembly.
990 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-528 Remove the main drive assembly
1
9. Special installation instructions for a main drive assembly (replacement unit
and serviced unit)
● Replacement unit: A replacement unit is a new assembly that installs in
place of a discarded in-service unit.
● In-service unit: An in-service unit is a existing assembly that has been
removed for repair or to gain access to other assemblies.
CAUTION: When the main drive assembly is installed (replacement units
and service units), the front door must be closed.
IMPORTANT: If you are installing a new main drive assembly (replacement
unit), you do not need to perform the alignment steps below. New
assemblies are already aligned.
a. Replacement unit and in-service unit: On the printer engine, be careful to
not depress the levers located behind the main drive assembly (when it
is installed).
● Callout 1: Levers in the correct raised position.
Remove the main-drive assembly 991
● Callout 2: Lever in the incorrect depressed position.
Figure 5-529 Correct and incorrect lever positions
2
1 1
NOTE: For a replacement unit install, skip the remaining alignment
steps which are for in-service units only.
b. In-service unit: There are four gears on the main drive assembly that
need to be lined up correctly in order to successfully reinstall the main
drive. For each gear, the triangle (callout 1) on the inside of the gear
should line up with the triangle (callout 2) stamped on the sheet metal
chassis. Also, the hole (callout 3) in the gear should line up with a hole in
the chassis.
Figure 5-530 Correct gear alignment
1
992 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
c. In-service unit: In order to realign the four gears, you must remove
the motor that locks the gear auger above the four gears. To do this,
disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and
then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-531 Remove the motor
1
d. In-service unit: To realign the four gears, turn the gear (callout 1) in the
direction indicated. By turning that gear, the four gears (callout 2) that
need to be in phase turn in tandem. Turn the four gears to the correct
phase position.
Remove the main-drive assembly 993
Figure 5-532 Align the gears
14. Remove the interlock assembly
Follow these steps to remove the interlock assembly.
994 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ At the right side of the printer, release one boss (callout 1), and then slide the
interlock assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-533 Remove the interlock assembly
1
15. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 995
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Waste toner carry assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the waste toner carry assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
996 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-75 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3601-000CN Waste toner carry assembly (X57945 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Figure 5-534 Open the right door
Remove the fuser 997
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-535 Remove the fuser
2. Unseat the ITB
Follow these steps to unseat the ITB.
1. Open the right door (if it is not already open).
2. Grasp the two levers on the ITB, and then slightly pull it out of the printer to
unseat and disengage it.
Reinstallation tip: During Reinstallation of the target part, do not reseat the
ITB to early in the process. The ITB must remain disengaged to make sure
that the gear is correctly aligned.
A 46.00.0x error occurs if the ITB if the procedure is completed with the
ITB seated.
998 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-536 Disengage the ITB
3. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-537 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 999
4. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-538 Remove the screw
1000 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
5. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the formatter 1001
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-539 Remove the formatter
6. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-540 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
1002 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-541 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-542 Remove the left upper cover
7. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
Remove the left cover 1003
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-543 Remove the left cover
1 2
8. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-544 Remove two screws
1004 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-545 Remove the rear cover
9. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-546 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1005
Figure 5-547 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1006 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-548 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-549 Reinstalling the LVPS
10. Remove the DC controller
Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.
■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller, remove four screws
(callout 1), and then remove the DC controller (callout 2).
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the DC controller 1007
Figure 5-550 Remove the DC controller
11. Remove the formatter cage (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power
supply assembly below the DC controller.
Figure 5-551 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
1008 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
clamp (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the
formatter cage (callout 5).
Figure 5-552 Remove the formatter cage
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Figure 5-553 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4
12. Remove the formatter cage (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
Remove the formatter cage (MFP models) 1009
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then
remove the formatter cage (callout 3).
Figure 5-554 Remove the formatter cage
2
2
2. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
1010 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-555 Remove the memory PCA
3 1
13. Remove the drive PCA
Follow these steps to remove the drive PCA.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-556 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect all the connectors on the drive PCA, remove one screw (callout
1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the drive PCA (callout 3).
IMPORTANT: Some of these wires are very tightly connected. Take care
when disconnecting them.
Remove the drive PCA 1011
Figure 5-557 Remove the drive PCA
33
22
11
14. Remove the main-drive assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main-drive assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that the front door is closed when performing this
procedure.
1. Pull the lever (callout 1) of the cable cover (callout 2), release one tab (callout
3), and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 5-558 Remove the cable cover
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling, align the pegs in the holes, and then
set the cover against the frame and rotate it up and into position.
1012 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-559 Disconnect one connector
1
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
guide (callout 3), release one tab (callout 4), and then slide the connector
cover (callout 5) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-560 Remove the connector cover
4
5
1
3
2
Remove the main-drive assembly 1013
4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the link cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-561 Remove the link cover
5. Close the right door a little, and then release the link arm (callout 1) from the
coupling (callout 2).
NOTE: This is a keyed connection. When disconnecting, make sure to line
up the peg with the socket so that you do not strip the peg.
Reinstallation tip: If the black link arm disconnects from the white link arm
below it, it might be helpful for reinstallation purposes to reattach the two
link arms.
Figure 5-562 Release the link arm
1014 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the
fan cover (callout 3), release four tabs (callout 4), and then remove the fan
cover.
Figure 5-563 Remove the fan cover
1 2
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling this cover, seat the right side pegs into
the chassis slots first.
7. Release the cables (callout 1) and the remove FFC (callout 2) from the cable
guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-564 Release the cables
3
8. Remove seven screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then
remove the main drive assembly (callout 3).
NOTE: All seven screws are on sheet metal tabs on the assembly.
NOTE: Ensure that the screws do not fall into the assembly.
Remove the main-drive assembly 1015
Figure 5-565 Remove the main drive assembly
1
9. Special installation instructions for a main drive assembly (replacement unit
and serviced unit)
● Replacement unit: A replacement unit is a new assembly that installs in
place of a discarded in-service unit.
● In-service unit: An in-service unit is a existing assembly that has been
removed for repair or to gain access to other assemblies.
CAUTION: When the main drive assembly is installed (replacement units
and service units), the front door must be closed.
IMPORTANT: If you are installing a new main drive assembly (replacement
unit), you do not need to perform the alignment steps below. New
assemblies are already aligned.
a. Replacement unit and in-service unit: On the printer engine, be careful to
not depress the levers located behind the main drive assembly (when it
is installed).
● Callout 1: Levers in the correct raised position.
1016 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● Callout 2: Lever in the incorrect depressed position.
Figure 5-566 Correct and incorrect lever positions
2
1 1
NOTE: For a replacement unit install, skip the remaining alignment
steps which are for in-service units only.
b. In-service unit: There are four gears on the main drive assembly that
need to be lined up correctly in order to successfully reinstall the main
drive. For each gear, the triangle (callout 1) on the inside of the gear
should line up with the triangle (callout 2) stamped on the sheet metal
chassis. Also, the hole (callout 3) in the gear should line up with a hole in
the chassis.
Figure 5-567 Correct gear alignment
1
Remove the main-drive assembly 1017
c. In-service unit: In order to realign the four gears, you must remove
the motor that locks the gear auger above the four gears. To do this,
disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and
then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-568 Remove the motor
1
d. In-service unit: To realign the four gears, turn the gear (callout 1) in the
direction indicated. By turning that gear, the four gears (callout 2) that
need to be in phase turn in tandem. Turn the four gears to the correct
phase position.
1018 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-569 Align the gears
15. Remove the waste toner carry assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the waste toner carry assembly.
■ Release one tab (callout 1), slide the waste toner carry assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated, and then pull the waste toner carry assembly away
from the printer.
Figure 5-570 Remove the waste toner carry assembly
Remove the waste toner carry assembly (X57945 models) 1019
16. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Waste toner duct assembly (5700/X557/X579/5800 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the waste toner duct assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
1020 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-76 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3517-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (5700/5800)
RM2-3518-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (X557/X55745/X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs/6700/6800)
RM2-3590-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (X57945/X65455/X65465/
X677/X67755/X67765)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1021
1. Open the front door.
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-571 Remove the TCU cover
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
2. Unseat the ITB
Follow these steps to unseat the ITB.
1. Open the right door (if it is not already open).
1022 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Grasp the two levers on the ITB, and then slightly pull it out of the printer to
unseat and disengage it.
Reinstallation tip: During Reinstallation of the target part, do not reseat the
ITB to early in the process. The ITB must remain disengaged to make sure
that the gear is correctly aligned.
A 46.00.0x error occurs if the ITB if the procedure is completed with the
ITB seated.
Figure 5-572 Disengage the ITB
3. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover 1023
Figure 5-573 Remove the formatter cover
4. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-574 Remove the screw
1024 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
5. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 1025
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-575 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-576 Release the tab
1026 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-577 Remove the left upper cover
6. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-578 Remove the output bin
2
7. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
Remove the output bin 1027
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-579 Remove the left cover
1 2
8. Remove the waste toner duct assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the waste toner duct assembly.
1. Release one tab (callout 1), pull the upper part of the contact holder (callout
2) forward, slide the contact holder in the direction indicated, and then rotate
the contact holder.
Figure 5-580 Slide the contact holder
2
1
1028 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the contact holder (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-581 Remove the contact holder
1
3. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then slide the support plate (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-582 Remove the support plate
1
Remove the waste toner duct assembly (5700/5800 models) 1029
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-583 Disconnect one connector
2 1
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the waste toner duct assembly
(callout 2) upward to remove it.
Figure 5-584 Remove the waste toner duct assembly
2 1
9. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1030 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (5700/X557/5800/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs models)
Learn about removing and replacing the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (5700/X557/5800/
X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs models) 1031
Table 5-77 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3565-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder (5700/X557/5800/X58045dn/
X58045z/X58045zs)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Open the front door.
1032 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-585 Remove the TCU cover
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
2. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Remove the fuser 1033
Figure 5-586 Open the right door
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-587 Remove the fuser
3. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1034 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-588 Remove the formatter cover
4. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-589 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1035
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
5. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the front door.
● X57945 models: Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the right door.
● X57945 models: Open the right lower door.
1036 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-590 Remove the front right cover
6. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-591 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 1037
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-592 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-593 Remove the left upper cover
7. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
1038 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-594 Remove the left cover
1 2
8. Remove the front door
Follow these steps to remove the front door.
1. Open the front door.
2. At the left side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip
(callout 2) on the front-door assembly.
Figure 5-595 Release the left link arm
3. At the right side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip
(callout 2) on the front-door assembly.
Remove the front door 1039
Figure 5-596 Release the right link arm
2 1
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release the link lever (callout 2) from the front
door assembly (callout 3), and then remove the front door.
Figure 5-597 Remove the door
2
1 1
9. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
1040 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-598 Remove the output bin
2
10. Remove the top cover (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-599 Disconnect the connector
2
Remove the top cover (SFP models) 1041
2. Remove two screws.
Figure 5-600 Remove two screws
3. Release one tab (callout 1), release two USB cables (callout 2) and another
cable (callout 3) from the cable clamp (callout 4).
Figure 5-601 Release one tab
1
3
1042 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the top cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-602 Remove the cover
1 3
11. Remove the top cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the top cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-603 Remove the top cover
12. Remove the top front cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top front cover.
Remove the top cover (MFP models) 1043
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-604 Disconnect one connector and release the cable
2
2. Remove two screws.
Figure 5-605 Remove two screws
1044 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold up the top front cover (callout 2), and then
remove it.
Figure 5-606 Remove the top front cover
2
13. Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (5700/5800 models)
Follow these steps to remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
1. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-607 Remove three screws
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (5700/5800 models) 1045
2. Release eight tabs (callout 1).
Figure 5-608 Release eight tabs
3. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the front inner cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-609 Remove the front inner cover
2
1046 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Release three tabs (callout 1), hold up the high-voltage PCA cover (callout 2),
and then disconnect one connector (callout 3).
Figure 5-610 Release three tabs
2
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the pre-exposure PCA holder
assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-611 Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (5700/5800 models) 1047
6. Remove the link lever (callout 1) from the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-612 Remove the link lever
14. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1048 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X57945 models) 1049
Table 5-78 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3673-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder (X57945 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Open the front door.
1050 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-613 Remove the TCU cover
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
2. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the
printer power off before removing the fuser.
Remove the fuser 1051
Figure 5-614 Open the right door
2. Squeeze the release levers on the handles (circle callouts), and then remove
the fuser.
Figure 5-615 Remove the fuser
3. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1052 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-616 Remove the formatter cover
4. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-617 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1053
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
5. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the front door.
● X57945 models: Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Perform one of the following steps.
● 5700/5800 models: Open the right door.
● X57945 models: Open the right lower door.
1054 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-618 Remove the front right cover
6. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-619 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 1055
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-620 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-621 Remove the left upper cover
7. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
1056 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-622 Remove the left cover
1 2
8. Remove the front door
Follow these steps to remove the front door.
1. Open the front door.
2. At the left side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip
(callout 2) on the front-door assembly.
Figure 5-623 Release the left link arm
3. At the right side of the door, release the link arm (callout 1) from the clip
(callout 2) on the front-door assembly.
Remove the front door 1057
Figure 5-624 Release the right link arm
2 1
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release the link lever (callout 2) from the front
door assembly (callout 3), and then remove the front door.
Figure 5-625 Remove the door
2
1 1
9. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
1058 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-626 Remove the output bin
2
10. Remove the top cover (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-627 Disconnect the connector
2
Remove the top cover (SFP models) 1059
2. Remove two screws.
Figure 5-628 Remove two screws
3. Release one tab (callout 1), release two USB cables (callout 2) and another
cable (callout 3) from the cable clamp (callout 4).
Figure 5-629 Release one tab
1
3
1060 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the top cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-630 Remove the cover
1 3
11. Remove the top cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the top cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-631 Remove the top cover
12. Remove the top front cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the top front cover.
Remove the top cover (MFP models) 1061
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-632 Disconnect one connector and release the cable
2
2. Remove two screws.
Figure 5-633 Remove two screws
1062 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold up the top front cover (callout 2), and then
remove it.
Figure 5-634 Remove the top front cover
2
13. Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly.
1. Open the toner supply door.
Figure 5-635 Open the toner supply door
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X57945 models) 1063
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-636 Remove three screws
3. Release eight tabs (callout 1).
Figure 5-637 Release eight tabs
4. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the front inner cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-638 Remove the front inner cover
2
1064 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. Release three tabs (callout 1), hold up the high-voltage PCA cover (callout 2),
and then disconnect two connectors (callout 3).
Figure 5-639 Release three tabs
2
6. Release four tabs (callout 1), and then slide the pre-exposure PCA holder
assembly (callout 2) upward.
Figure 5-640 Release four tabs
1 1
Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly (X57945 models) 1065
7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the pre-exposure PCA holder
assembly (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-641 Remove the pre-exposure PCA holder assembly
8. Remove the link arm (callout 1) and two link levers (callout 2) from the pre-
exposure PCA holder assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-642 Remove the link arm and two link levers
14. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1066 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply drive assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models) 1067
Table 5-79 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3607-000CN Toner supply drive assembly - Yellow
RM2-3608-000CN Toner supply drive assembly - Cyan
RM2-3609-000CN Toner supply drive assembly - Magenta and Black
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive assembly.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply drive
assemblies are similar, the disassembly procedure of the 1st toner supply drive
assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Figure 5-643 Toner supply drive assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply drive assembly (callout 1)
1068 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● Second toner supply drive assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply drive assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply drive assembly (callout 4)
1. Open the toner supply door and remove the toner cartridges.
NOTE: You can remove toner cartridges using the Service menu or
Supplies menu on the printer control panel, or manually.
Figure 5-644 Open the toner supply door
2. Remove the front left cover using a screwdriver.
a. Place a screwdriver behind the upper-right corner of the cover.
b. Pull the cover 3 millimeters forward to clear the tab on the back of the
cover, and then slide the cover upward while the toner supply door is
open.
Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models) 1069
Figure 5-645 Remove the front left cover
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-646 Remove the base frame
1070 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cassette rail assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-647 Remove the cassette rail assembly
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the toner cartridge rail assembly
(callout 2) towards the front to remove it.
Figure 5-648 Remove the toner cartridge rail assembly
1
Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models) 1071
6. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), slide the
toner supply drive assembly (callout 3) towards the front, and then slide the
toner supply drive assembly downward to remove it.
Figure 5-649 Remove the toner supply drive assembly
3
7. For reinstallation of the toner supply drive assembly, keep the following tips
in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: Since a toner supply drive assembly can be installed
in another station, be careful not to mix. The exception is assemblies 2
and 4, which are the same.
● Reinstallation tip: On the first toner supply drive assembly, there are no
gears (callout 1) and no coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-650 First toner supply drive assembly
1
1072 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● Reinstallation tip: On the second and fourth toner supply drive
assemblies, there are 3 gears (callout 1) and no coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-651 Second and fourth toner supply drive assemblies
● Reinstallation tip: On the third toner supply drive assembly, there are
three gears (callout 1) and a coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-652 Third toner supply drive assembly
1
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1073
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1074 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-80 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0846-000CN HP Toner supply service kit
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner supply assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the toner supply assembly.
NOTE: When replacing the toner supply assembly, always replace the toner
supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe at the same time.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply assemblies
are similar, the disassembly procedure of the first toner supply assembly
(callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Figure 5-653 Toner supply assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply assembly (callout 1)
Remove the toner supply assembly (X57945 models) 1075
● Second toner supply assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply assembly (callout 4)
1. Open the front door.
Figure 5-654 Open the front door
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold the handle (callout 2), and then release
one tab (callout 3). Rotate the toner supply assembly (callout 4) in the
direction indicated, and then slide the assembly upward to remove it.
Figure 5-655 Remove the assembly
3
1 2
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1076 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe (X57945
models)
Learn about removing and replacing the toner supply buffer assembly/
intermediate pipe.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe (X57945
models) 1077
Table 5-81 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0846-000CN HP Toner supply service kit
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner supply assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the toner supply assembly.
NOTE: When replacing the toner supply assembly, always replace the toner
supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe at the same time.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply assemblies
are similar, the disassembly procedure of the first toner supply assembly
(callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Figure 5-656 Toner supply assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply assembly (callout 1)
1078 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● Second toner supply assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply assembly (callout 4)
1. Open the front door.
Figure 5-657 Open the front door
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), hold the handle (callout 2), and then release
one tab (callout 3). Rotate the toner supply assembly (callout 4) in the
direction indicated, and then slide the assembly upward to remove it.
Figure 5-658 Remove the assembly
3
1 2
2. Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive assembly.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply drive
assemblies are similar, the disassembly procedure of the 1st toner supply drive
assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.
Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models) 1079
Figure 5-659 Toner supply drive assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply drive assembly (callout 1)
● Second toner supply drive assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply drive assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply drive assembly (callout 4)
1. Open the toner supply door and remove the toner cartridges.
NOTE: You can remove toner cartridges using the Service menu or
Supplies menu on the printer control panel, or manually.
Figure 5-660 Open the toner supply door
2. Remove the front left cover using a screwdriver.
1080 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
a. Place a screwdriver behind the upper-right corner of the cover.
b. Pull the cover 3 millimeters forward to clear the tab on the back of the
cover, and then slide the cover upward while the toner supply door is
open.
Figure 5-661 Remove the front left cover
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-662 Remove the base frame
Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models) 1081
4. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cassette rail assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-663 Remove the cassette rail assembly
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the toner cartridge rail assembly
(callout 2) towards the front to remove it.
Figure 5-664 Remove the toner cartridge rail assembly
1
1082 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
6. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), slide the
toner supply drive assembly (callout 3) towards the front, and then slide the
toner supply drive assembly downward to remove it.
Figure 5-665 Remove the toner supply drive assembly
3
7. For reinstallation of the toner supply drive assembly, keep the following tips
in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: Since a toner supply drive assembly can be installed
in another station, be careful not to mix. The exception is assemblies 2
and 4, which are the same.
● Reinstallation tip: On the first toner supply drive assembly, there are no
gears (callout 1) and no coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-666 First toner supply drive assembly
1
Remove the toner supply drive assembly (X57945 models) 1083
● Reinstallation tip: On the second and fourth toner supply drive
assemblies, there are 3 gears (callout 1) and no coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-667 Second and fourth toner supply drive assemblies
● Reinstallation tip: On the third toner supply drive assembly, there are
three gears (callout 1) and a coupling (callout 2).
Figure 5-668 Third toner supply drive assembly
1
3. Remove the toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate
pipe.
NOTE: When replacing toner supply buffer assembly/intermediate pipe,
always replace the toner supply assembly at the same time.
Since the disassembly procedures of the following four toner supply buffer
assemblies are similar, the disassembly procedure of the first toner supply
buffer assembly (callout 1) is shown below as an example.
1084 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-669 Toner supply buffer assemblies
1 2 3 4
● First toner supply buffer assembly (callout 1)
● Second toner supply buffer assembly (callout 2)
● Third toner supply buffer assembly (callout 3)
● Fourth toner supply buffer assembly (callout 4)
■ Slide the toner supply buffer assembly (callout 1) frontward, and then slide the
toner supply buffer assembly (callout 1) and the intermediate pipe (callout 2)
downward to remove them together.
Figure 5-670 Remove the assembly
2
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1085
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Feed assembly (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the feed assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1086 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-82 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3479-000CN Paper feed assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Follow these steps to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-671 Open the right door
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 1087
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-672 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable guide (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, make sure the cable is correctly routed
through the cable guide.
Figure 5-673 Release the cable
4. Perform one of the following steps.
● X557/5800/X57945 models: Disconnect the J315 formatter connector.
● 5700 models: Disconnect the J305 formatter connector.
1088 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-674 Disconnect a formatter connector
X557/MFP 5800/MFP X579 5700
J311 J311
J312 J312
J313 J313
J301 J301
J314 J314
J315 J305
J316 J316
J302 J302
J317 J317
5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then lift up the registration assembly (callout
2) off the secondary transfer assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-675 Release the tab
1
2
6. Close the secondary transfer assembly until it is only slightly open. Slide the
assembly (callout 1) in the direction indicated below, and then dislodge the
hinge pin (callout 2) from the holder to remove the assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Before removing the assembly, take note of where the
assembly hinge pins fit into the holes provided in the printer.
Remove the secondary transfer assembly 1089
Figure 5-676 Remove the secondary transfer assembly
Reinstallation tip: On the assembly right side, make sure that the wire is
nested in the plastic sleeve. Slide the wire sleeve into its place, depressing
the spring, and then twist the left side of the assembly into place and allow
the spring pressure to nest the hinge pin in its hole.
2. Remove the registration assembly
Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.
1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1). and then release the cable (callout
2) from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 5-677 Release the connectors
1
2
1090 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release two bosses (callout 1), and then release the link arm (callout 2) from
the door.
Figure 5-678 Release the link arm
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the registration assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-679 Remove the registration assembly
2
3. Remove the feed assembly (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the feed assembly.
Remove the feed assembly (X57945 models) 1091
1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the feed assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-680 Remove the feed assembly
2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the feed assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-681 Remove the gear
1 2
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1092 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low-voltage
power supply (LVPS).
Mean time to repair: 25 minutes
Service level: Intermediate
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1093
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-83 LVPS part numbers
Part number Part description
RM3-7724-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (5700/X557/X58045z/X58045zs)
RM3-7725-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (5700/X557/X58045z/X58045zs)
RM3-7726-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (6700/X654)
RM3-7727-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (6700/X654)
RM3-7728-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (6800/X677)
RM3-7729-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (6800/X677)
RM3-9012-000CN LVPS (110-127V) (5800/X57945/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs)
RM3-9013-000CN LVPS (220-240V) (5800/X57945/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Make sure that all of the connectors on the LVPS are fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are fully seated.
Make sure that the formatter cover is fully seated.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
1094 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-682 Remove the formatter cover
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1095
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-683 Remove the screw
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
1096 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-684 Remove two screws
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-685 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
Remove the rear cover 1097
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-686 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Figure 5-687 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1098 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-688 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-689 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1099
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS)
Learn about removing and replacing the high-voltage power supply PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the HVPS.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1100 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-84 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7640-000CN HV power supply PCA (5700, X557, MFP 5800, X58045)
RM3-7786-000CN HV power supply PCA (X57945)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
1. Open the front door.
Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 1101
2. Rotate and then pull the TCU cover to remove it.
Figure 5-690 Remove the TCU cover
3. Lift the TCU slightly and then pull it out of the printer.
NOTE: Maintain the position of the TCU as you pull it out from the printer.
This will ensure that you do not spill any waste toner in the printer. Place the
unit into the clear plastic bag the new TCU was packaged in.
2. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1102 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-691 Remove the formatter cover
3. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-692 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1103
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
4. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
1104 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-693 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-694 Release the tab
Remove the left upper cover (MFP models) 1105
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-695 Remove the left upper cover
5. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-696 Remove the left cover
1 2
6. Remove the output bin
Follow these steps to remove the output bin.
1106 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the output tray (callout 2)
towards the front (SFP models) or left (MFP models) to remove it.
Figure 5-697 Remove the output bin
2
7. Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).
1. Remove two FFCs (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Remove the FFC (callout 1) and cable (callout 4) from the high-voltage PCA
Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) 1107
cover (callout 3), release three tabs (callout 5), and then remove the high-
voltage PCA cover.
Figure 5-698 Remove the high-voltage PCA cover
4 5 3
5 4 1 2 5
Reinstallation tip: The FFC (callout 2) is attached to the high-voltage PCA
cover (callout 1) by double sided tape. When removing the FFC from the high-
voltage PCA cover, take care not to damage the FFC.
Figure 5-699 Use caution with the taped FFC
1
2. Disconnect two connector (callout 1/2). Disconnect one connector (callout
3) (X654/X677 models only). Remove one screw (callout 4), release two tabs
1108 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
(callout 5), and then remove the high-voltage power supply assembly (callout
6).
Figure 5-700 Remove the HVPS
6 5
1
4
2 3
Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) 1109
3. For reinstallation of the HVPS, keep the following tips in mind.
● Reinstallation tip: When installing the high-voltage power supply PCA
(callout 1), confirm that the contact springs (callout 2) are in the correct
position (so that the PCA engages with the spring).
Figure 5-701 Verify that the contact springs are in the correct position
2
2
11
22
1110 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
● Reinstallation tip: When installing the high-voltage PCA cover, confirm
that the contact spring (callout 1) is in the contact holder (callout 2).
Figure 5-702 Verify that the contact spring is in the holder
8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1111
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drive PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the drive PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the drive PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1112 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-85 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7722-000CN Driver PCA (6700/V654/6800/X677)
RM3-7723-000CN Driver PCA (5700/X557/5800/X57945/X58045z/
X58045zs/X58045dn)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-703 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 1113
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-704 Remove the screw
1114 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-705 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 1115
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-706 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-707 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
1116 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-708 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1117
Figure 5-709 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-710 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the drive PCA
Follow these steps to remove the drive PCA.
1118 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-711 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect all the connectors on the drive PCA, remove one screw (callout
1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the drive PCA (callout 3).
IMPORTANT: Some of these wires are very tightly connected. Take care
when disconnecting them.
Figure 5-712 Remove the drive PCA
33
22
11
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1119
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Feed/toner supply controller PCA (X57945 models)
Learn about removing and replacing the feed/toner supply controller PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1120 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-86 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7771-000CN Toner supply PCA (X57945 models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover
Follow these steps to remove the front right cover.
1. Open the toner cartridge access door.
2. Open the right lower door.
3. Release one tab, and then slide the front right cover upward to remove it.
Figure 5-713 Remove the front right cover
Remove the front right cover 1121
2. Remove the right lower door (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the right lower door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-714 Remove the base frame
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-715 Remove the rear inner cover
1122 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower door assembly
(callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-716 Remove the right lower door assembly
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the rear lower cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), slide the rear lower cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated below, and then remove it.
Figure 5-717 Remove the rear lower cover
4. Remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA (X57945 models)
Follow these steps to remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA.
Remove the rear lower cover (X57945 models) 1123
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the feed/toner supply controller PCA.
Remove two screws (callout 1), remove two PCA spacers (callout 2), and then
remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-718 Remove the feed/toner supply controller PCA
2 1
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1124 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the right PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Right PCA 1125
Table 5-87 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7740-000CN Right PCA (5700/X58045z/X58045zs )
RM3-7790-000CN Right PCA (X557/5800/X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs)
RM3-7791-000CN Right PCA (X57945)
RM3-7792-000CN Right PCA (6700/X58045z/X58045zs )
RM3-7793-000CN Right PCA (6800/X58045z/X58045zs )
RM3-7794-000CN Right PCA (X654/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the right PCA
Follow these steps to remove the right PCA.
1126 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Open the right door.
Figure 5-719 Open the right door
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-720 Remove the PCA cover
2
1
Remove the right PCA 1127
3. Disconnect all the connectors on the right PCA, release two tabs (callout 1),
and then remove the right PCA (callout 2).
Figure 5-721 Remove the right PCA
2
CAUTION: The FFCs are tightly packed and can be difficult to remove. A
solution is to remove the FFCs from the rear of the unit, remove the PCA, and
then remove the FFCs to reinstall them on the back. This option should be
used only if needed and to ensure that the FFCs are not damaged.
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1128 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the rear PCA.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the rear PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Rear PCA 1129
Table 5-88 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-9044-000CN Rear PCA (5700/5800/X58045z/X58045zs )
RM3-9045-000CN Rear PCA (X557/X58045z/X58045zs /6700/6800)
RM3-9046-000CN Rear PCA (X57945/X654/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-722 Remove the formatter cover
1130 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-723 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1131
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-724 Remove two screws
1132 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-725 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-726 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1133
Figure 5-727 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1134 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-728 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-729 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the rear PCA
Follow these steps to remove the rear PCA.
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the rear PCA, remove one screw (callout 1),
release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the rear PCA (callout 3).
NOTE: Grounding wires are mounted on the top of this PCA. Use care when
removing it. Pull the bottom part out first, and then slide the assembly down to
cleanly release from the spring wires at the top.
Remove the rear PCA 1135
Figure 5-730 Remove the rear PCA
3
Reinstallation tip: When installing the rear PCA, confirm that each contact
spring (callout 1) is in the correct position (so that the PCA engages with the
springs).
Figure 5-731 Correct spring position
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1136 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the environmental sensor PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Environmental sensor PCA 1137
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-89 Part information
Part number Part description
WP2-5473-000CN Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-732 Remove the formatter cover
1138 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-733 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1139
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-734 Remove two screws
1140 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-735 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the environmental sensor PCA
Follow these steps to remove the environmental sensor PCA.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), release one
boss (callout 3), and then remove the environmental sensor PCA (callout 4).
Figure 5-736 Remove the environmental sensor PCA
3
4 2
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Remove the environmental sensor PCA 1141
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drum home position PCA
Learn about removing and replacing the drum home position sensor PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1142 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-90 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7647-000CN Drum position sensor PCA
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-737 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 1143
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-738 Remove the screw
1144 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-739 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 1145
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-740 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-741 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
1146 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-742 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1147
Figure 5-743 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-744 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the drum home position sensor PCA
Follow these steps to remove the drum home position sensor PCA.
1148 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the PCA holder (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-745 Remove the PCA holder
2
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the drum home position sensor PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-746 Remove the drum home position sensor PCA
1 3
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1149
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Drum motor
Learn about removing and replacing the drum motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1150 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-91 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7788-000CN Drum motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-747 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 1151
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-748 Remove the screw
1152 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-749 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 1153
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-750 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-751 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
1154 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-752 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1155
Figure 5-753 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-754 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the drum motor
Follow these steps to remove the drum motor.
1156 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
remove the drum motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-755 Remove the motor
3
2
2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1157
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Developer motor
Learn about removing and replacing the developer motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1158 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-92 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3625-000CN Developing motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-756 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 1159
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-757 Remove the screw
1160 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-758 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 1161
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-759 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-760 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
1162 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-761 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1163
Figure 5-762 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-763 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the developer motor
Follow these steps to remove the developer motor.
1164 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-764 Remove the motor
3
2
2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1165
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) motor
Learn about removing and replacing the ITB motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1166 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-93 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7797-000CN ITB motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-765 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 1167
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-766 Remove the screw
1168 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-767 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 1169
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-768 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-769 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
1170 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-770 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1171
Figure 5-771 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-772 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the image transfer belt (ITB) motor
Follow these steps to remove the image transfer belt (ITB) motor.
1172 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-773 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and
then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-774 Remove the motor
2 2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1173
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Developer alienation motor
Learn about removing and replacing developer alienation motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1174 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-94 Part information
Part number Part description
RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping (Developer alienation motor)
RK2-7751-000CN Motor, stepping (Developer alienation motor X58045dn,
X58045z, X58045zs )
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-775 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the formatter cover 1175
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-776 Remove the screw
1176 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
Remove the formatter 1177
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-777 Remove the formatter
4. Remove the left upper cover (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover.
1. Open the front door.
CAUTION: If the cover is being removed to gain access to the main drive
assembly, make sure that the front door remains closed. This keeps the
main drive properly aligned.
2. At the left side of the printer, insert the small flat-blade screwdriver into the
slot to release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-778 Use a screwdriver to release the tab
1178 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Toward the front of the printer, release another tab.
Figure 5-779 Release the tab
4. Rotate the cover up to remove it.
Figure 5-780 Remove the left upper cover
5. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
Remove the left cover 1179
■ At the left side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab
(callout 2), and then slide the cover (callout 3) toward the rear of the printer to
release it.
Figure 5-781 Remove the left cover
1 2
6. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-782 Remove two screws
1180 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-783 Remove the rear cover
7. Remove the formatter cage (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power
supply assembly below the DC controller.
Figure 5-784 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
Remove the formatter cage (SFP models) 1181
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
clamp (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the
formatter cage (callout 5).
Figure 5-785 Remove the formatter cage
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Figure 5-786 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4
8. Remove the formatter cage (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1182 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then
remove the formatter cage (callout 3).
Figure 5-787 Remove the formatter cage
2
2
2. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Remove the formatter cage (MFP models) 1183
Figure 5-788 Remove the memory PCA
3 1
9. Remove the developer alienation motor
Follow these steps to remove the developer alienation motor.
■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then
remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-789 Remove the motor
10. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1184 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor
Learn about removing and replacing the fuser motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Fuser motor 1185
Table 5-95 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4488-000CN Fixing motor assembly (Fuser motor)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-790 Remove the formatter cover
1186 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-791 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1187
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-792 Remove two screws
1188 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-793 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-794 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1189
Figure 5-795 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1190 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-796 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-797 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the fuser motor
Follow these steps to remove the fuser motor.
Remove the fuser motor 1191
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-798 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and
then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-799 Remove the motor
3
2 2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1192 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Duplex motor
Learn about removing and replacing the duplex motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Duplex motor 1193
Table 5-96 Part information
Part number Part description
RK2-7751-000CN Motor, stepping (Duplex motor; 5700/X557/5800/
X57945)
RM2-4489-000CN Motor assembly (Duplex motor; 6700/X654/6800/X677)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-800 Remove the formatter cover
1194 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-801 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1195
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-802 Remove two screws
1196 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-803 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-804 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1197
Figure 5-805 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1198 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-806 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-807 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the duplex motor
Follow these steps to remove the duplex motor.
Remove the duplex motor 1199
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA, remove the cable
clamp (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then slide the DC
controller stay (callout 3) upward to release and to remove it.
Figure 5-808 Remove the DC controller stay
2
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and
then remove the motor (callout 3).
Figure 5-809 Remove the motor
11
22
33
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1200 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan
Learn about removing and replacing power supply fan.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Power-supply fan 1201
Table 5-97 Part information
Part number Part description
RK3-2277-000CN Fan (Power supply fan)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-810 Remove the formatter cover
1202 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-811 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1203
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-812 Remove two screws
1204 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-813 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-814 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1205
Figure 5-815 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1206 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-816 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-817 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the power supply fan
Follow these steps to remove the power supply fan.
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the fan holder (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
NOTE: Take care not to pull any cables as you remove this assembly.
Remove the power supply fan 1207
Figure 5-818 Remove the fan holder
1
2. Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the power supply fan (callout
2).
Figure 5-819 Release the fan
2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1208 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Cartridge fan
Learn about removing and replacing the cartridge fan.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Cartridge fan 1209
Table 5-98 Part information
Part number Part description
RK3-0762-000CN Fan (Cartridge fan; X57945/X58045dn/X58045z/
X58045zs )
RK3-1637-000CN Fan (Cartridge fan; 5700/X557/5800)
RK3-2277-000CN Fan (Cartridge fan; X58045dn/X58045z/X58045zs)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-820 Remove the formatter cover
1210 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-821 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1211
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-822 Remove two screws
1212 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-823 Remove the rear cover
4. Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Follow these steps to remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout
2).
NOTE: Unhook the spring from the formatter cage, not the low-voltage
power supply. The spring should remain attached to the LVPS.
Figure 5-824 Unhook the spring and disconnect two connectors
1
2. Remove the FFC (callout 1), and then disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
NOTE: MFP only: Disconnect one additional connector (callout 3).
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) 1213
Figure 5-825 Disconnect the LVPS connectors
2 1
3. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the low-voltage power
supply assembly (callout 2).
NOTE: The black ducting in the lower right corner can stick during the
removal process.
Replacement LVPS only: Remove the spring (callout 3), and then install it on
the replacement LVPS.
1214 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-826 Remove the LVPS
2 3
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the LVPS, make sure that the spring
(callout 1) is attached to both the formatter cage (callout 2) and the LVPS
(callout 3).
Figure 5-827 Reinstalling the LVPS
5. Remove the cartridge fan
Follow these steps to remove the cartridge fan.
Remove the cartridge fan 1215
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the
fan cover (callout 3), release four tabs (callout 4), and then remove the fan
cover.
Figure 5-828 Remove the fan cover
1 2
2. Pull out the cartridge fan (callout 1) toward you, and then remove the sponge
(callout 2) from the cartridge fan.
Figure 5-829 Remove the fan sponge
2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1216 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan
Learn about removing and replacing the fuser fan.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the fuser fan.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Removal and replacement: Fuser fan 1217
Table 5-99 Part information
Part number Part description
RK3-0762-000CN Fan (Fuser fan)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the formatter cover (callout 2)
away from the printer to remove it.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-830 Remove the formatter cover
1218 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
NOTE: This procedure is for the following printers:
X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6081zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-831 Remove the screw
Remove the formatter cover for printer with the 3 bin stapler/stacker 1219
2. Slide the formatter cover away from the printer to remove it.
3. Remove the formatter
Follow these steps to remove the formatter.
1. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
1220 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the fax PCA (callout 1) and the hard disk drive (HDD) (callout 2), and
then remove seven screws (callout 3) to remove the formatter.
Figure 5-832 Remove the formatter
4. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
NOTE: The figures below show some assemblies (for example the top cover
and formatter) removed that might still be installed on the printer. However, the
steps to remove the cover are correct.
1. Open the right door, and remove two screws.
Figure 5-833 Remove two screws
Remove the rear cover 1221
2. At the back of the printer, remove two screws, and then slide the rear cover
as indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-834 Remove the rear cover
5. Remove the formatter cage (SFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
IMPORTANT: Some of the flat flexible cable (FFC) connectors use hinged
retainers to secure them to the DC controller. The hinged retainers must be
opened to release the FFCs.
2. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then
slide the DC controller stay (callout 3) out to remove it.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop any of the screws into the low-voltage power
supply assembly below the DC controller.
Figure 5-835 Remove the DC controller stay
3
1
1222 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Unhook one spring (callout 1), release the cable (callout 2) from the cable
clamp (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the
formatter cage (callout 5).
Figure 5-836 Remove the formatter cage
2
4
3 5
4. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
Figure 5-837 Remove the memory PCA
1
3
2
4
6. Remove the formatter cage (MFP models)
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
Remove the formatter cage (MFP models) 1223
1. Unhook one spring (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then
remove the formatter cage (callout 3).
Figure 5-838 Remove the formatter cage
2
2
2. For a replacement formatter cage only: Release the cable (callout 1) from
the cable guide (callout 2), release one tab (callout 3), and then remove the
memory PCA (callout 4) from the formatter cage (callout 5).
NOTE: Install the PCA on the replacement formatter cage.
1224 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-839 Remove the memory PCA
3 1
7. Remove the fuser fan
Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), slide the
fan holder (callout 3) in the direction indicated, and then pull the fan holder
(callout 3) out of the printer.
Figure 5-840 Remove the fan holder
2
Remove the fuser fan 1225
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the fuser fan (callout 2).
Figure 5-841 Remove the fan from the holder
2
8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
1226 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1227
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder
Learn how to remove and replace the 550-sheet paper feeder parts and
assemblies.
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)
Learn about FRU parts removal and replacement.
Covers, panels, and doors
Learn about covers, panels, and doors removal and replacement.
Removal and replacement: Front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder left cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-100 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9200-000CN Cover, front left (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
1228 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front left cover.
■ Flex the upper part of the front left cover (callout 1) in the direction indicated,
release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the front left cover upward to
remove it.
Figure 5-842 Remove the front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Remove the front left cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1229
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder front right cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1230 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-101 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9201-000CN Cover, front right (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-843 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1231
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper right door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1232 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-102 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0004-000CN Right door assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-844 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1233
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-845 Remove the base frame
1
2
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-846 Remove the rear inner cover
1234 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-847 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1235
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder rear cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1236 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-103 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-848 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1237
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-849 Remove the base frame
1
2
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-850 Remove the rear inner cover
1238 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-851 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-852 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1239
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder left cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1240 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-104 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9408-000CN Cover, left (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-853 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1241
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-854 Remove the base frame
1
2
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-855 Remove the rear inner cover
1242 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-856 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-857 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Remove the left cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray left cover.
Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1243
■ Slide the left cover (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-858 Remove the left cover
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
1244 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder pickup assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-105 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper
feeder)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Internal parts and assemblies 1245
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-859 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
2. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
1246 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-860 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the paper pickup assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup assembly.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the pickup assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-861 Remove the assembly
2 1
Remove the paper pickup assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1247
2. Remove the gear (callout 1) from the pickup assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-862 Disconnect one connector
1 2
3. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-863 Remove three screws
1248 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Release one alignment pins (callout 1), and then lower the left end of the
assembly (callout 2)—the end near the tray cavity.
Figure 5-864 Lower the end of the assembly
5. Slide the paper pickup assembly to the left to release it from the drive gear
on the lifter drive assembly.
Figure 5-865 Release the assembly from the drive gear
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1249
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder lifter drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lifter drive
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
1250 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-106 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1251
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-866 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-867 Remove the base frame
1
2
1252 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-868 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-869 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1253
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-870 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Remove the lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the lifter drive assembly.
1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-871 Disconnect four connectors
1
1254 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).and the
lifter drive assembly (callout 3). Remove two screws (callout 4), and then
remove the lifter drive assembly.
Figure 5-872 Remove the lifter drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
3 2
4 1
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1255
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder pickup drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1256 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-107 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (1x550-sheet paper
feeder)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-873 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1257
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-874 Remove the base frame
1
2
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-875 Remove the rear inner cover
1258 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-876 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-877 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive assembly.
Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder) 1259
1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-878 Disconnect four connectors
1
2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2) and
the lifter drive assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-879 Release the cables
3 2
1260 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove three screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-880 Remove the cable clamp
1 2
3
3
Remove the pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1261
4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the pickup drive assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-881 Remove the pickup drive assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
2
1
Reinstallation tip: The indicated gears (callout 1), clutch (callout 2), shaft
(callout 3), and bushing (callout 4) are not fixed to the assembly plate. Ensure
that these components do not fall apart when installing or removing the
paper pickup drive assembly.
Figure 5-882 Do not lose unfastened components
1
2
1262 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder auto close assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the auto close
assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1263
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-108 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
1264 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-883 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-884 Remove the base frame
1
2
Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder) 1265
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-885 Remove the rear inner cover
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-886 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
1266 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-887 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
1. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-888 Disconnect six connectors
1
Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1267
2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-889 Release the cables
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the auto close assembly (callout
2), and then remove the drawer connector (callout 3) from the auto close
assembly.
Figure 5-890 Remove the assembly
2 3
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1268 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder media size detection
assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the media size
detection assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
1269
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-109 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-891 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
1270 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-892 Remove the base frame
1
2
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-893 Remove the rear inner cover
Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder) 1271
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-894 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-895 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the auto close assembly.
1272 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-896 Disconnect six connectors
1
2. Release the cables (callout 1) from the auto close assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-897 Release the cables
Remove the auto close assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1273
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), remove the auto close assembly (callout
2), and then remove the drawer connector (callout 3) from the auto close
assembly.
Figure 5-898 Remove the assembly
2 3
5. Remove the media size detection assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the media size detection assembly.
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the media size detect assembly
(callout 2) toward you to remove it.
Figure 5-899 Release one tab
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1274 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper-feeder controller PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder) 1275
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-110 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-8051-000CN Paper feeder controller PCA (1x550-sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray front right cover.
1. Open the paper feeder right door.
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the front right cover (callout 2)
upward to remove it.
Figure 5-900 Remove the front right cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
1276 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray right door.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the base frame (callout 2).
Figure 5-901 Remove the base frame
1
2
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
rear inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-902 Remove the rear inner cover
Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder) 1277
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right door assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-903 Remove the right door (550-sheet paper feeder)
3. Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the 550-sheet tray rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-904 Remove the rear cover (550-sheet paper feeder)
4. Remove the controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder)
Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.
1278 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the paper feeder controller PCA, remove
two screws (callout 1), remove two PCA spacers (callout 2), and then remove
the paper feeder controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-905 Remove the controller PCA (550-sheet paper feeder)
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1279
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder separation roller
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1280 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-111 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527H2A 6QN29-67011 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit (1x550-
sheet paper feeder)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing the 550-sheet paper feeder separation roller assembly.
1. Open the right door.
2. Slide the lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the roller assembly
(callout 2) by pulling it out from the printer.
Figure 5-906 Remove the roller assembly
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1281
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing and replacing the paper feeder pickup roller assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1282 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-112 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527H2A 6QN29-67011 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing the 550-sheet paper feeder separation roller assembly.
1. Open the right door.
2. Slide the lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the roller assembly
(callout 2) by pulling it out from the printer.
Figure 5-907 Remove the roller assembly
Remove the separation roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder) 1283
2. Remove the paper pickup roller assembly (550-sheet paper feeder)
Learn about removing the 550-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers.
NOTE: Even if you want to replace only the pickup roller assembly, you must
first remove the separation roller assembly.
■ Locate the pickup roller assembly (callout 1) and then pull it away from the
printer to remove it.
Figure 5-908 Remove the pickup roller assembly
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1284 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1285
Removal and replacement: 2,100-sheet paper
deck
Learn how to remove and replace the 2,100-sheet paper deck parts and
assemblies.
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)
Learn about FRU parts removal and replacement.
Covers, panels, and doors
Learn about covers, panels, and doors removal and replacement.
Removal and replacement: Right door (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI right door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-113 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0035-000CN Right door assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
1286 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-909 Remove the right door (HCI)
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Remove the right door (HCI) 1287
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front left cover/left cover (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI front left cover/left cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1288 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-114 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9696-000CN Cover, front left (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
RC5-9692-000CN Cover, left (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-910 Remove the right door (HCI)
Remove the right door (HCI) 1289
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-911 Remove the rear cover (HCI)
1
3. Remove the front left cover/left cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI front left cover/left cover.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-912 Remove two screws
1290 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the left cover (callout 1) together with the front left cover (callout
2). Release one tab (callout 3), and then slide the front left cover upward to
remove it from the left cover.
Figure 5-913 Remove the front left cover from the left cover (HCI)
1
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1291
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI rear cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1292 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-115 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9693-000CN Cover, rear (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-914 Remove the right door (HCI)
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
Remove the right door (HCI) 1293
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-915 Remove the rear cover (HCI)
1
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1294 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI rear lower cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Rear lower cover (HCI) 1295
Table 5-116 Part information
Part number Part description
RC5-9695-000CN Cover, rear lower (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-916 Remove the right door (HCI)
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
1296 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-917 Remove the rear cover (HCI)
1
3. Remove the rear lower cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear lower cover.
Remove the rear lower cover (HCI) 1297
■ Bend the left edge of the rear lower cover (callout 1), release one tab (callout
2), and then pull the rear lower cover toward you from the left end of it to
remove it.
Figure 5-918 Remove the rear lower cover (HCI)
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1298 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Cassette assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI cassette.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Internal parts and assemblies 1299
Table 5-117 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0023-000CN Tray assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the cassette (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI cassette.
1. Open the HCI cassette assembly.
Figure 5-919 Open the HCI cassette
1300 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Press the left and right release levers (callout 1).
Figure 5-920 Press the release levers
3. Pull the HCI cassette assembly (callout 1) out of the HCI chassis.
Figure 5-921 Remove the tray cassette (HCI)
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1301
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI paper pickup assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1302 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-118 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-922 Remove the right door (HCI)
Remove the right door (HCI) 1303
2. Remove the paper pickup assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI paper pickup assembly.
1. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the
inner cover (callout 3) downward to remove it.
Figure 5-923 Remove the inner cover
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the pickup assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-924 Remove the pickup assembly (HCI)
2 3
1304 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Remove the gear (callout 2) from the pickup assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-925 Remove the gear
1
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1305
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Auto close assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI auto close assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-119 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-0918-000CN Auto close assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the cassette (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI cassette.
1306 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Open the HCI cassette assembly.
Figure 5-926 Open the HCI cassette
2. Press the left and right release levers (callout 1).
Figure 5-927 Press the release levers
Remove the cassette (HCI) 1307
3. Pull the HCI cassette assembly (callout 1) out of the HCI chassis.
Figure 5-928 Remove the tray cassette (HCI)
2. Remove the auto close assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI auto close assembly.
■ Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the auto close assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-929 Remove the auto close assembly (HCI)
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1308 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI lifter drive assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Lifter drive assembly (HCI) 1309
Table 5-120 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0021-000CN Lifter drive assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-930 Remove the right door (HCI)
1310 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-931 Remove the rear cover (HCI)
1
3. Remove the lifter drive assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI lifter drive assembly.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1)., release the cable (callout 2) from the
cable clamps (callout 3).
Figure 5-932 Disconnect one connector
3
Remove the rear cover (HCI) 1311
2. Remove three screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the lifter drive assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-933 Remove the lifter drive assembly (HCI)
2 1
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1312 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI pickup alienation assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Pickup alienation assembly (HCI) 1313
Table 5-121 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0022-000CN Pick estrangement assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck
HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-934 Remove the right door (HCI)
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
1314 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-935 Remove the rear cover (HCI)
1
3. Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI pickup alienation assembly.
1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable clamps (callout 3).
Figure 5-936 Disconnect four connectors
3 1
2 1
Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI) 1315
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the pickup alienation assembly (callout
2), remove two screws (callout 3), and then remove the pickup alienation
assembly.
Figure 5-937 Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
2
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the pickup alienation assembly, line
up the hole (callout 1) in the gear overlaps the position of the hole (callout 2)
in the pickup alienation assembly.
Figure 5-938 Align hole in gear with hole in chassis
11
22
1316 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI pickup drive assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the pickup drive
assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1317
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-122 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (2,100-sheet paper deck
HCI)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the right door (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI right door.
1. Open the HCI tray, and then open the right door.
1318 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then slide the right door (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-939 Remove the right door (HCI)
2. Remove the rear cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI rear cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the rear cover (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-940 Remove the rear cover (HCI)
1
3. Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI pickup alienation assembly.
Remove the rear cover (HCI) 1319
1. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable clamps (callout 3).
Figure 5-941 Disconnect four connectors
3 1
2 1
1320 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from the pickup alienation assembly (callout
2), remove two screws (callout 3), and then remove the pickup alienation
assembly.
Figure 5-942 Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI)
2
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the pickup alienation assembly, line
up the hole (callout 1) in the gear overlaps the position of the hole (callout 2)
in the pickup alienation assembly.
Figure 5-943 Align hole in gear with hole in chassis
11
22
Remove the pickup alienation assembly (HCI) 1321
4. Remove the pickup drive assembly (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI pickup drive assembly.
1. Remove the cable clamp (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove three screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-944 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
1 2
3
3
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the pickup drive assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-945 Remove the pickup drive assembly (HCI)
5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1322 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI controller PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (HCI) 1323
Table 5-123 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-8071-000CN HCI controller PCA (2,100-sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the cassette (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI cassette.
1. Open the HCI cassette assembly.
Figure 5-946 Open the HCI cassette
1324 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Press the left and right release levers (callout 1).
Figure 5-947 Press the release levers
3. Pull the HCI cassette assembly (callout 1) out of the HCI chassis.
Figure 5-948 Remove the tray cassette (HCI)
2. Remove the front left cover/left cover (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI front left cover/left cover.
Remove the front left cover/left cover (HCI) 1325
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-949 Remove two screws
2. Remove the left cover (callout 1) together with the front left cover (callout
2). Release one tab (callout 3), and then slide the front left cover upward to
remove it from the left cover.
Figure 5-950 Remove the front left cover from the left cover (HCI)
1
3. Remove the controller PCA (HCI)
Follow these steps to remove the HCI controller PCA.
1326 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Disconnect all the connectors on the HCI controller PCA. Remove two screws
(callout 1), remove two PCA spacers (callout 2), and then remove the HCI
controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-951 Remove the controller PCA (HCI)
3
2 1
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1327
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Separation roller assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI separation roller assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
1328 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-124 Part information
Product Number Service Part Number Part description
527H2A 6QN29-67011 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit (2,100-
sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing the HCI separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The 550-sheet paper feeder is shown in the graphics below. The steps
for the HCI rollers are the same.
1. Open the right door.
2. Slide the lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the roller assembly
(callout 2) by pulling it out from the printer.
Figure 5-952 Remove the roller assembly
Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI) 1329
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Pickup roller assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing and replacing the HCI pickup roller assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
1330 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the
correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/
parts.
Table 5-125 Part information
Product Nnumber Service Part Number Part description
527H2A 6QN29-67011 HP LaserJet Tray 2-x Roller Kit (2,100-
sheet paper deck HCI)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing the HCI separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The 550-sheet paper feeder is shown in the graphics below. The steps
for the HCI rollers are the same.
1. Open the right door.
Remove the separation roller assembly (HCI) 1331
2. Slide the lever (callout 1) to the right, and then remove the roller assembly
(callout 2) by pulling it out from the printer.
Figure 5-953 Remove the roller assembly
2. Remove the paper pickup roller assembly (HCI)
Learn about removing the HCI pickup rollers.
NOTE: Even if you want to replace only the pickup roller assembly, you must
first remove the separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The 550-sheet paper feeder is shown in the graphics below. The steps
for the HCI rollers are the same.
■ Locate the pickup roller assembly (callout 1) and then pull it away from the
printer to remove it.
Figure 5-954 Remove the pickup roller assembly
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1332 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1333
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker multi-bin
mailbox
Learn how to remove and replace the 3-bin staple stacker multi-bin mailbox
parts and assemblies.
Field-replaceable units (FRUs)
Learn about FRU parts removal and replacement.
Covers, panels, and doors
Learn about covers, panels, and doors removal and replacement.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the rear cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-126 Part information
Part number Part description
RC6-1305-000CN Cover, rear (3-bin SS)
RC5-0223-000CN Cover, rear (3-Bin SS, X58045z, X58045zs models)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
1334 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-955 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-956 Remove the rear cover
3 1
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1335
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the staple cover and door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
1336 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-127 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0483-000CN Staple cover assembly (3-bin SS)
RM3-0484-000CN Staple door assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1337
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-957 Remove one screw
1
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-958 Release one tab
1338 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-959 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1339
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the right upper cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1340 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-128 Part information
Part number Part description
RC6-1308-000CN Cover, right upper (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-960 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1341
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the right corner cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1342 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-129 Part information
Part number Part description
RC6-1307-000CN RC6-1307-000CN (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-961 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1343
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-962 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-963 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
3. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
1344 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the right corner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-964 Remove the right corner cover
2
3
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1345
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the right lower cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1346 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-130 Part information
Part number Part description
RC6-1309-000CN Cover, right lower (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-965 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1347
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-966 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-967 Remove one screw
1
1348 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-968 Release one tab
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-969 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1349
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-970 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
4. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the right corner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-971 Remove the right corner cover
2
3
5. Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right lower cover.
1350 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower cover (callout 2) in
the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-972 Remove the right lower cover
1 2
6. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1351
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear inner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the rear inner cover.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1352 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-131 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0485-000CN Rear inner cover assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-973 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1353
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-974 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the rear inner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear inner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1) release three tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the rear inner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-975 Remove the rear inner cover
2 3
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1354 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the stapler-stacker door.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1355
Table 5-132 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4167-000CN Right door assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-976 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
1356 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-977 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-978 Remove one screw
1
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1357
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-979 Release one tab
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-980 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
1358 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-981 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
4. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the right corner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-982 Remove the right corner cover
2
3
5. Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right lower cover.
Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1359
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower cover (callout 2) in
the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-983 Remove the right lower cover
1 2
6. Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker door assembly.
1. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then open the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-984 Remove two shafts
1
1360 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the left bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-985 Remove the left bushing
1
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-986 Remove the right bushing
1
Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1361
4. Remove right and left shafts (callout 1), and then remove the stapler-stacker
door assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-987 Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly
1 1
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1362 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the stacking wall.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1363
Table 5-133 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0480-000CN Stacking wall assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-988 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
1364 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-989 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-990 Remove one screw
1
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1365
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-991 Release one tab
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-992 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
1366 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-993 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
4. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the right corner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-994 Remove the right corner cover
2
3
5. Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right lower cover.
Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1367
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower cover (callout 2) in
the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-995 Remove the right lower cover
1 2
6. Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker door assembly.
1. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then open the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-996 Remove two shafts
1
1368 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the left bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-997 Remove the left bushing
1
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-998 Remove the right bushing
1
Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1369
4. Remove right and left shafts (callout 1), and then remove the stapler-stacker
door assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-999 Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly
1 1
7. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker output bin 1 assembly.
1370 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Release one boss (callout 1), rotate the pin (callout 2) in the direction
indicated, and then remove the pin.
Figure 5-1000 Remove the pin
3
2 2
1 1
2. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1001 Remove the output bin
1
8. Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1371
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2),
and then remove the stapler assembly (callout 3) and the plate (callout 4)
together.
Figure 5-1002 Remove the stapler assembly and the plate
2
1
3 4
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the plate (callout 2) from the
stapler assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-1003 Remove the plate from the stapler assembly
3
9. Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.
1372 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the fan holder (callout 3) together with the fan (callout 4).
Figure 5-1004 Remove the fan holder and fan
3 2
4 1
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), remove the duct 1 (callout 2) and the duct 2
(callout 3), and then remove the MBM fan (callout 4) from the holder.
Figure 5-1005 Remove the fan from the holder
1
10. Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker upper feed assembly.
Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1373
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable guide (callout 2), release one tab
(callout 3), and then remove the inner cover (callout 4).
Figure 5-1006 Remove the inner cover
3
2
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable clamps (callout 2), and then
disconnect three connectors (callout 3).
Figure 5-1007 Release the cable
2 1 3
1374 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-1008 Remove the guide
1
4. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the upper feed assembly
(callout 2).
CAUTION: Be sure that the paper guides extend into the tray area when
reinstalling the upper feed assembly. The guides can be damaged if they are
trapped behind the in-cave frame when the assembly is seated in the frame.
Figure 5-1009 Remove the upper feed assembly
1
11. Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stacking wall assembly.
Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1375
1. Release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-1010 Release one tab
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stacking wall assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-1011 Remove the stacking wall assembly
2 1
12. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1376 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Internal parts and assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the printer internal parts and assemblies.
Removal and replacement: Stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the stapler assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
Internal parts and assemblies 1377
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-134 Part information
Part number Part description
RK2-8148-000CN Stapler assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
1378 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-1012 Remove one screw
1
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-1013 Release one tab
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1379
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1014 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
2. Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2),
and then remove the stapler assembly (callout 3) and the plate (callout 4)
together.
Figure 5-1015 Remove the stapler assembly and the plate
2
1
3 4
1380 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the plate (callout 2) from the
stapler assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-1016 Remove the plate from the stapler assembly
3
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1381
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the jogger assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1382 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-135 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-0481-000CN Jog assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1017 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1383
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1018 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-1019 Remove one screw
1
1384 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-1020 Release one tab
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1021 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker jogger assembly.
Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1385
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), and then
disconnect one connector (callout 3).
Figure 5-1022 Release the cable
2 1 3
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the jogger assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1023 Remove the jogger assembly
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1386 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing output bin 1.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Output bin 1 (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1387
Table 5-136 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4173-000CN Tray assembly (3-bin SS)
RM2-3837-000CN Tray assembly (3-bin SS; X58045z, X58045zs models)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker output bin 1 assembly.
1388 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Release one boss (callout 1), rotate the pin (callout 2) in the direction
indicated, and then remove the pin.
Figure 5-1024 Remove the pin
3
2 2
1 1
2. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1025 Remove the output bin
1
2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Unpack the replacement assembly 1389
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the upper feed assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the upper feed
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
1390 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-137 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4169-000CN Upper paper feed assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1391
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1026 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1027 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
1392 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-1028 Remove one screw
1
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-1029 Release one tab
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1393
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1030 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1031 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
4. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
1394 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the right corner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1032 Remove the right corner cover
2
3
5. Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right lower cover.
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower cover (callout 2) in
the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1033 Remove the right lower cover
1 2
6. Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker door assembly.
Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1395
1. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then open the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-1034 Remove two shafts
1
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the left bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1035 Remove the left bushing
1
1396 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1036 Remove the right bushing
1
4. Remove right and left shafts (callout 1), and then remove the stapler-stacker
door assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1037 Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly
1 1
7. Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1397
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2),
and then remove the stapler assembly (callout 3) and the plate (callout 4)
together.
Figure 5-1038 Remove the stapler assembly and the plate
2
1
3 4
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the plate (callout 2) from the
stapler assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-1039 Remove the plate from the stapler assembly
3
8. Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker upper feed assembly.
1398 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable guide (callout 2), release one tab
(callout 3), and then remove the inner cover (callout 4).
Figure 5-1040 Remove the inner cover
3
2
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable clamps (callout 2), and then
disconnect three connectors (callout 3).
Figure 5-1041 Release the cable
2 1 3
Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1399
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-1042 Remove the guide
1
4. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the upper feed assembly
(callout 2).
CAUTION: Be sure that the paper guides extend into the tray area when
reinstalling the upper feed assembly. The guides can be damaged if they are
trapped behind the in-cave frame when the assembly is seated in the frame.
Figure 5-1043 Remove the upper feed assembly
1
9. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
1400 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the lower feed assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the lower feed
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Removal and replacement: Lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1401
Table 5-138 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-4168-000CN Lower paper feed assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1044 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
1402 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1045 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-1046 Remove one screw
1
Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1403
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-1047 Release one tab
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1048 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the right upper cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly.
1404 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove
the right upper cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1049 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker right upper cover
3 2
4. Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right corner cover.
■ Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the right corner cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1050 Remove the right corner cover
2
3
5. Remove the right lower cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker right lower cover.
Remove the right corner cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1405
■ Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right lower cover (callout 2) in
the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1051 Remove the right lower cover
1 2
6. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker output bin 1 assembly.
1. Release one boss (callout 1), rotate the pin (callout 2) in the direction
indicated, and then remove the pin.
Figure 5-1052 Remove the pin
3
2 2
1 1
1406 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1053 Remove the output bin
1
7. Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker door assembly.
1. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then open the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-1054 Remove two shafts
1
Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1407
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the left bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1055 Remove the left bushing
1
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the right bushing (callout 2) in the
direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1056 Remove the right bushing
1
1408 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
4. Remove right and left shafts (callout 1), and then remove the stapler-stacker
door assembly (callout 2).
Figure 5-1057 Remove the stapler-stacker door assembly
1 1
8. Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stapler assembly.
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2),
and then remove the stapler assembly (callout 3) and the plate (callout 4)
together.
Figure 5-1058 Remove the stapler assembly and the plate
2
1
3 4
Remove the stapler assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1409
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the plate (callout 2) from the
stapler assembly (callout 3).
Figure 5-1059 Remove the plate from the stapler assembly
3
9. Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the fan holder (callout 3) together with the fan (callout 4).
Figure 5-1060 Remove the fan holder and fan
3 2
4 1
1410 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), remove the duct 1 (callout 2) and the duct 2
(callout 3), and then remove the MBM fan (callout 4) from the holder.
Figure 5-1061 Remove the fan from the holder
1
10. Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker upper feed assembly.
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable guide (callout 2), release one tab
(callout 3), and then remove the inner cover (callout 4).
Figure 5-1062 Remove the inner cover
3
2
Remove the upper feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1411
2. Release the cable (callout 1) from cable clamps (callout 2), and then
disconnect three connectors (callout 3).
Figure 5-1063 Release the cable
2 1 3
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 5-1064 Remove the guide
1
4. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the upper feed assembly
(callout 2).
CAUTION: Be sure that the paper guides extend into the tray area when
reinstalling the upper feed assembly. The guides can be damaged if they are
trapped behind the in-cave frame when the assembly is seated in the frame.
1412 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Figure 5-1065 Remove the upper feed assembly
1
11. Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker stacking wall assembly.
1. Release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 5-1066 Release one tab
Remove the stacking wall assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1413
2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stacking wall assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-1067 Remove the stacking wall assembly
2 1
12. Remove the lower feed assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker lower feed assembly.
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout
2).
Figure 5-1068 Disconnect two connectors
1
1414 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove the cable (callout 1) by pulling it through the chassis.
Figure 5-1069 Remove the cable
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove the cover (callout 2), remove three
screws (callout 3), and then remove the lower feed assembly (callout 4).
Figure 5-1070 Remove the lower feed assembly
3
1 2 4
13. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1415
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the solenoid assembly.
View a video demonstration of removing and replacing the solenoid
assembly.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1416 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-139 Part information
Part number Part description
RM2-1040-010CN Solenoid assembly (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1071 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1417
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1072 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the staple cover and staple door (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker staple cover and staple door.
1. Open the stapler-stacker door assembly and the stapler door.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).
Figure 5-1073 Remove one screw
1
1418 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the staple cover (callout 2) and
the staple door (callout 3) together.
Figure 5-1074 Release one tab
4. Remove two shafts (callout 1), and then remove the staple door (callout 2)
from the staple cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1075 Remove the staple door from the staple cover
3. Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker jogger assembly.
Remove the jogger assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1419
1. Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), and then
disconnect one connector (callout 3).
Figure 5-1076 Release the cable
2 1 3
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the jogger assembly (callout 2)
in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1077 Remove the jogger assembly
4. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker output bin 1 assembly.
1420 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Release one boss (callout 1), rotate the pin (callout 2) in the direction
indicated, and then remove the pin.
Figure 5-1078 Remove the pin
3
2 2
1 1
2. Remove the output bin 1 assembly (callout 1).
Figure 5-1079 Remove the output bin
1
5. Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.
Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1421
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the fan holder (callout 3) together with the fan (callout 4).
Figure 5-1080 Remove the fan holder and fan
3 2
4 1
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), remove the duct 1 (callout 2) and the duct 2
(callout 3), and then remove the MBM fan (callout 4) from the holder.
Figure 5-1081 Remove the fan from the holder
1
6. Remove the solenoid assembly (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker solenoid assembly.
1422 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable (callout 2)
from the cable stoppers (callout 3).
Figure 5-1082 Release the cable
1
2 3
2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the solenoid assembly
(callout 2).
Figure 5-1083 Remove the solenoid assembly
1
7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1423
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-
maker fan.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1424 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-140 Part information
Part number Part description
RK2-8153-000CN Fan (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1084 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1425
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1085 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the fan holder (callout 3) together with the fan (callout 4).
Figure 5-1086 Remove the fan holder and fan
3 2
4 1
1426 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), remove the duct 1 (callout 2) and the duct 2
(callout 3), and then remove the MBM fan (callout 4) from the holder.
Figure 5-1087 Remove the fan from the holder
1
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1427
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stapler-stacker feed motor (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the feed motor.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
1428 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Table 5-141 Part information
Part number Part description
RK2-8149-000CN Motor, stepping DC (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1088 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1429
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1089 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the MBM fan (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker mailbox/booklet-maker fan.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then
remove the fan holder (callout 3) together with the fan (callout 4).
Figure 5-1090 Remove the fan holder and fan
3 2
4 1
1430 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Release two tabs (callout 1), remove the duct 1 (callout 2) and the duct 2
(callout 3), and then remove the MBM fan (callout 4) from the holder.
Figure 5-1091 Remove the fan from the holder
1
3. Remove the feed motor (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker feed motor.
■ Release the cable (callout 1) from the cable clamp (callout 2), disconnect one
connector (callout 3), remove two screws (callout 4), and then remove the
stapler-stacker feed motor (callout 5).
Figure 5-1092 Remove the feed motor
1 2 3
4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
Remove the feed motor (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1431
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
Removal and replacement: Controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing and replacing the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30
seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the
printer.
1432 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer, and then
go to https://parts.hp.com/hpparts to order the part.
Table 5-142 Part information
Part number Part description
RM3-7950-000CN Staple stacker PCA (3-bin SS)
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.
1. Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker rear cover.
1. Remove the printer formatter cover by removing one screw (callout 1)
and then sliding the cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated. Slide the
Remove the rear cover (3-bin stapler-stacker) 1433
3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover assembly (callout 3) in the direction
indicated to remove it.
Figure 5-1093 Remove the 3-bin stapler-stacker formatter cover
1
3
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then
remove the rear cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-1094 Remove the rear cover
3 1
2. Remove the controller PCA (3-bin stapler-stacker)
Learn about removing the 3-bin stapler-stacker controller PCA.
1. Disconnect all the connectors on the controller PCA.
1434 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove
the controller PCA (callout 3).
Figure 5-1095 Remove the controller PCA
2
1 3
3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-
recycling.html
Unpack the replacement assembly 1435
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example
shipping tape) are removed from the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy
part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-
quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when handling
rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for
an assembly at the end of the removal procedure. Always completely read
the removal instructions and follow all special installation instructions.
1436 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement
6 Parts and diagrams
Printer parts information including exploded assembly diagrams and part
number lists.
Parts and diagrams 1437
Document feeder / scanner
Learn about the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) parts and assemblies.
NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.
Integrated scanner assembly
Parts diagram and part list for the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).
Figure 6-1 Integrated scanner assembly
2
4
1438 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-1 Integrated scanner assembly
Ref Part number Description Qty
No
1 C0M44-67002 ADF WUR (5xxx Series Non- 1
Workflow)
1 C0M44-67003 ADF WUR (5xxx Series Workflow) 1
2 6QN29-67005 Flatbed scanner 1
3 1M0Q2A HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard 1
4 5851-8688 Handle (Lunar Grey Dark/ Cement 1
Dark)
4 5851-8689 Handle (Lunar Comet Red Dark) 1
4 5851-8690 Handle (Lunar Cosmic Green Dark) 1
4 5851-8691 Handle (Lunar Constellation Yellow) 1
4 5851-8692 Handle (Lunar Aurora Purple Dark) 1
4 5851-8693 Handle (OOV white) 1
Not 5851-8849 ADF damper 1
shown
Not 5851-8841 ADF hinge kit (5xxx Series) 1
shown
Not 5851-8850 ADF white backing kit 1
shown
Not 6H121-67001 ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (5xxx 1
shown Series)
Not 5851-8843 ADF roller cover (5xxx Series) 1
shown
Not A7W12A Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese 1
shown
Not A7W13A Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR- 1
shown Swiss/GN)
Not A7W14A HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay 1
shown Keyboard
Not Scanner control interconnect 5851-8962 1
shown board (SCIB) (58xx Series)
Integrated scanner assembly 1439
Base printer
Learn about the printer engine parts and assemblies.
Control panels
Parts diagrams and part lists for the control panels.
Control panels
Parts diagrams and parts lists for the printer control panels.
Figure 6-2 Control panels
1
2
Table 6-2 Control panels
Ref Part number Description Qty
No
1 6QN28-60102 Control panel 10.9 cm (4.3 in) 1
2 6QN35-60129 Control panel 25.6 cm (10.1 in) 1
2 6QN37-60102 Control panel 23.3 cm (8 in)
Not 6QN29-67006 Slide Assembly: (5800dn, 5800f,
shown 5800zf, X57945dn, X58045dn,
X57945z, and X58045z)
Not 6QN35-67007 Slide Assembly: (6800dn, 6800zf,
shown 6800zfw+, 6801zfw+, X677dn,
X677z+, X67755dn, X67765dn,
X67755z+, and X67765z+)
Not 6QN35-67008 Slide Assembly: (X57945zs,
shown X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6801zfsw,
X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs,
and X67765zs)
1440 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Control panels 1441
Covers, panels, and doors
Parts diagrams and part lists for the covers, panels, and doors.
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5700/X557 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the SFP printer covers.
Figure 6-3 Covers 5700/X557 models
SFP 5700/X557
A07
A07 2
A07
A07 3
12
A01 A07
11
A02
8
9
A06
A03
A04 6 A07 LLC
7
10 A05 LLC
1442 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-3 Covers 5700/X557 models
Key Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4469-000CN 1 Face down tray assembly
2 RM2-4517-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
3 RM2-4480-000CN 1 Formatter cover assembly
4 RC5-9168-000CN 1 Cover, rear lower
5 RM2-3570-000CN 1 Right lower door assembly
6 RC5-8516-000CN 1 Handle, right door lower
7 RC5-9199-000CN 1 Cover, front right (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
8 RC5-9165-000CN 1 Handle, left
9 RC5-9198-000CN 1 Cover, front left (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
10 RM2-4473-000CN 1 Front door assembly(5700)
10 RM2-4533-000CN 1 Front door assembly(X557)
11 RM2-4535-000CN 1 Left cover assembly
12 RC5-9204-000CN 1 Cover, left upper (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
Not RC4-0213-000CN 1 Cover, Hardware integration pocket
shown (HIP)
Not 6QN30-60103 1 Convenience Stapler Assembly
shown
Not 6QN28-40006 1 Cover-Convenience Stapler Cover
shown
Not 6QN35-60120 1 Assy-Cable Convenience Stapler
shown
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5700/X557 models 1443
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.
Figure 6-4 Covers 5800 models
MFP 5800
A07
1
A07
A07
3
A07
5
4
14
A01 A07
13
A02
10
11
A06
A03
A04 8 A07
LLC
9
12 A05 LLC
Table 6-4 Covers 5800 models
Key Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4469-000CN 1 Face down tray assembly
1444 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-4 Covers 5800 models (continued)
Key Part number Qty Description
No
2 RC5-9172-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
3 RM2-4518-000CN 1 Top front cover assembly
4 RM2-4480-000CN 1 Formatter cover assembly
5 RM2-4530-000CN 1 Formatter cover assembly
6 RC5-9168-000CN 1 Cover, rear lower
7 RM2-3570-000CN 1 Right lower door assembly
8 RC5-8516-000CN 1 Handle, right door lower
9 RC5-9199-000CN 1 Cover, front right (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn models)
10 RC5-9165-000CN 1 Handle, left
11 RC5-9198-000CN 1 Cover, front left (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn models)
12 RM2-4473-000CN 1 Front door assembly
13 RM2-4535-000CN 1 Left cover assembly
14 RC5-9204-000CN 1 Cover, left upper (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn models)
Not RC4-0213-000CN 1 Cover, Hardware integration pocket
shown (HIP)
Parts and diagrams: Covers 5800 models 1445
Parts and diagrams: Covers X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.
Figure 6-5 Covers X57945 models
MFP X57945
A07
1
A07
A07
18
A07 3
5
4
A01 6
17
A07
16
7
15 A07
12
A07
A02
A06
A03
A04 10
A05
13
9
11
14
8
LLC
LLC
1446 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-5 Covers X57945 models
Key Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4469-000CN 1 Face down tray assembly
2 RC5-9172-000CN 1 Cover, top assembly
3 RM2-4518-000CN 1 Top front cover assembly
4 RM2-4480-000CN 1 Formatter cover assembly
5 RM2-4530-000CN 1 Formatter cover assembly
6 RC5-9168-000CN 1 Cover, rear lower
7 RC5-9409-000CN 1 Cover, rear lower
8 RM2-3570-000CN 1 Right lower door assembly
9 RM3-0004-000CN 1 Right lower door assembly
10 RC5-8516-000CN 1 Handle, right door lower
11 RC5-9199-000CN 1 Cover, front right (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn models)
12 RC5-9165-000CN 1 Handle, left
13 RM2-4479-000CN 1 Front door assembly
14 RM2-3678-000CN 1 Toner supply door assembly
15 RC5-9198-000CN 1 Cover, front left (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn models)
16 RC5-9408-000CN 1 Left lower cover
17 RM2-4535-000CN 1 Left cover assembly
18 RC5-9204-000CN 1 Cover, left upper (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn models)
Not RC4-0213-000CN 1 Cover, Hardware integration pocket
shown (HIP)
Parts and diagrams: Covers X57945 models 1447
Internal parts and assemblies
Parts diagrams and part lists for the internal parts and assemblies.
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-6 Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models
A32
3 A01 A30
A29
2
6
A30
5
1 4
MFP X57945 A31
11 7
A30
A28 B
A27
(J338)
(J338D)
A02
10
A25 A03
A26 A21
A32 A04
A24 A22 A05
A A06
A23
8
A07
A18
A19 A32
A20 A32 LLC
A16
A15
A
A10 (J326)
A17
(J942)
(J203) A08
(J216)
(J209B)
A14
9
A09
A13 B A32
(J944B)
A12
A11
1448 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-6 Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3497-000CN Main drive assembly
2 RM2-3625-000CN 1 Developing motor assembly
3 RM3-7647-000CN 1 Drum position sensor PCA
4 RM3-7788-000CN 1 Drum motor assembly
5 RM2-7360-000CN 1 T1 solenoid assembly (and
X58045z, X58045zs, X58045dn
models)
6 RK2-6027-000CN 1 Motor, stepping
7 RM3-7797-000CN 1 ITB motor assembly
8 RM3-7791-000CN 1 Right PCA
9 RM3-7723-000CN 1 Driver PCA
10 RM2-3822-000CN 1 Laser scanner assembly
11 RK3-0835-000CN 1 Cable, flat SCN (X57945)
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 9) X57945 models 1449
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-7 Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models
1
MFP X57945
(J351) A02
A21 (J124D)
LLC
A01 A21 (J124)
A03
A19
A21
A20
A18
MFP X57945
A17 LLC
A16
A15 (J315)
A21
A04
A10
A11
A21 A14 (J314)
A13 (J311)
(J313)
A21 4
A21 (J312)
A12
A21
(J355) 3 A21
(J353)
A21
A08
A09
A05
5
A21
A06
A07
Table 6-7 Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3590-000CN 1 Waste toner duct assembly
2 RM2-3628-000CN 1 Secondary transfer assembly
(X57945dn, X57945z, X57945zs,
5800, X58045z, X58045zs)
3 RM2-4458-000CN 1 Registration assembly
1450 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-7 Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
4 RM2-4492-000CN 1 Density detect assembly (and
X58045z, X58045zs, X58045dn)
5 RM2-3673-000CN 1 Pre-exposure PCA holder
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 9) X57945 models 1451
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-8 Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models
MFP X57945
A19
3 A01
MFP X57945
8 A19
A06 A07 A19
A16
A04
4
5
A05 A03
(J931)
A08
7
8 A
(J206)
A09
A19
10
A16 A18
A19
A15
A10
A18 A11
A13
(J130)
A14 (J125)
A15
A (J204)
(J121)
A19 (J905D)
A12 (J290)
(J292)
(J293)
A17
Table 6-8 Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4521-000CN 1 Formatter cage assembly
2 RM2-7138-000CN 1 Memory PC board assembly (and
X58045z, X58045zs, X58045dn)
1452 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-8 Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
3 RK3-0845-000CN 1 Cable, flat FMTR
4 RM2-4488-000CN 1 Fixing motor assembly
5 RK2-7751-000CN 1 Motor, stepping
7 RM2-4485-000CN 1 Fixing drive assembly
8 RK3-0762-000CN 2 Fan
9 RM2-3702-000CN 1 Paper pickup drive assembly
10 RM2-3554-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 9) X57945 models 1453
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/X58045
models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-9 Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/X58045 models
2
(J132) (J131)
(J261)
MFP X57945 (J262)
(J136C)
A01 (J139)
(J104)
(J324) 5
A10 A10 6
(J321C)
A11 (J208)
9 4 (J103)
3
7
(J207)
A09
(J115)
(J114)
A08 8
A05 (J301)
(J302)
A11
A07
A06
Table 6-9 Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/X58045 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
2 RK3-1508-000CN Cable, flat HVT (For X557, X58045z)
3 RM3-9046-000CN 1 Rear PCA
3 RM3-9045-000CN 1 Rear PCA (X557)
4 RM3-7756-010CN 1 DC controller PCA (X57945)
4 RM3-7755-010CN 1 DC controller PCA (X55745)
4 RM3-7759-010CN 1 DC Controller PCA (X58045 EMEA
Only)
5 RK3-1693-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear (X58045z)
1454 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-9 Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/X58045 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
6 RK3-0821-000CN 1 Cable, flat drive (X58045z,
X58045zs)
6 RK3-1205-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear (X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
7 RK3-0819-000CN 1 Cable, flat drive (X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
7 RK3-1206-000CN Cable, flat right (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
8 RK3-1694-000CN 1 Cable, flat right
9 RM3-7640-000CN 1 HV power supply PCA (5700, X557,
MFP 5800, X58045)
9 RM3-7786-000CN 1 HV power supply PCA (X57945)
Not 6QN27-67002 1 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx)
shown
Not 6QN27-67004 1 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/
shown India)
Not 6QN29-67002 1 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx)
shown
Not 6QN29-67004 1 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/
shown India)
Not B5L32-60002 1 eMMC 16GB
shown
Not B5L32-67004 1 eMMC 32GB
shown
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 9) X557/X57945/X58045 models 1455
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-10 Internal assemblies (5 of 9) X57945 models
MFP X57945 4
(J106)
(J217) (J112) A01 (J247)
1 2 (J248) 3 A03
(J246)
A02
(J1)
(J379)
(J105)
A12
A11
A05
A06
A07
A08
A10
A09
LLC
Table 6-10 Internal assemblies (5 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3675-000CN 1 Interlock assembly
2 RK3-2277-000CN 1 Fan
3 WP2-5473-000CN 1 Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A
4 RK3-2104-000CN 1 Cable, flat LVPS (and X58045z,
X58045zs)
5 RM3-9012-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V)
5 RM3-9013-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V)
LLC 6QN29-67010 1 HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt
1456 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-11 Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models
A02
(J151)
(J431) (J423)
(J421) (J336C)
(J692D) (J693D)
(J957D) (J956D) (J991D)
(J694D)
(J955D) (J401) A03
(J695D) (J992D)
(J954D)
(J993D)
(J994D)
(J411)
(J412)
A22
(J416)
(J998)
(J999)
(J976)
1
(J989) A05 (J411D)
A01 A22
(J435)
A04
2 A22
(J417)
(J499)
3
(J499D)
(J410)
4
5
A21 A22
A22
A 7
B C A06 A07
D (J976)
A22
A18
A15 8
A19
A22
(J411DH)
LLC
A20
9
A22
LLC
A16
A22 A14
A12 A22
A22
A17
A22 A08
A13
A09
A11
A
10 B
C A10
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models 1457
Table 6-11 Internal assemblies (6 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM3-7771-000CN 1 Toner supply PCA
2 RM2-3559-000CN 1 Auto close assembly
3 RM3-8038-000CN 1 Drawer cable assembly
4 RM2-3614-000CN 1 Size detect assembly
5 RM2-3501-000CN 1 Lifter drive assembly
6 RM2-3612-000CN 1 Toner supply drive motor assembly
7 RM2-3617-000CN 1 Paper pickup drive assembly
8 5851-7005 1 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB
335mm
9 RM2-3509-000CN 1 Paper pickup assembly
10 RM2-3616-000CN 1 Cassette assembly (X557, X57945,
X58045)
1458 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-12 Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models
1
(J327B) A03
A16
A07
(J35)
A01 A02
A16
2
A16 A04
A05
A05
A16
A06
A07
A16
3
A10
A04
A14
A15
A16
A13
A12
A08
A16
A11
A15
A09
A10 A16
A04
Table 6-12 Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3601-000CN 1 Waste toner carry assembly (and
X58045dn, X58045z, X58045zs)
2 5851-7005 1 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB
335mm
3 RM2-3479-000CN 1 Paper feed assembly
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 9) X57945 models 1459
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-13 Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models
A
A10
4
B
A09
A A10
B
3
A10
A10
A10 A08
1
A10
A09
A01
A07
A06 A02
A03
A04
A05
Table 6-13 Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3609-000CN 2 Toner supply drive assembly Black/
Magenta
2 RM2-3608-000CN 1 Toner supply drive assembly Cyan
1460 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-13 Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
3 RM2-3607-000CN 1 Toner supply drive assembly Yellow
4 RM3-0846-000CN 4 HP Toner supply service kit
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (8 of 9) X57945 models 1461
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (9 of 9)X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-14 Internal assemblies (9 of 9) X57945 models
2
1
Table 6-14 Internal assemblies (9 of 9) X57945 models
Ref Product Number Service Part Number Qty Description
No
1 W9250MC 6QN29-67033 1 HP W9250MC Black
Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
1 W9251MC 6QN29-67034 1 HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
(MFP)
1 W9252MC 6QN29-67035 1 HP W9252MC Yellow
Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
1 W9253MC 6QN29-67036 1 HP W9253MC Magenta
Mngd LaserJet Toner
Cartridge (MFP)
2 W9280MC 6QN35-67027 1 HP W9280MC Black
Mngd Imaging Drum
2 W9281MC 6QN35-67028 1 HP W9281MC Cyan
Mngd Imaging Drum
2 W9282MC 6QN35-67029 1 HP W9282MC Yellow
Mngd Imaging Drum
2 W9283MC 6QN35-67030 1 HP W9283MC Magenta
Mngd Imaging Drum
1462 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models 1463
Figure 6-15 Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models
A30
3 A01 A28
A27
2
6
A30
5
1 4
A29
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800 7
11 (J107A) A28
A26
(J181A)
B
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800
A25 A02
(J338)
(J338D)
10
A23 A03
A24 A19
A30 A04
A22 A20 A05
A A06
A21
8
A07
A16
A17 A30
A18 A30 LLC
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800
A15 A
A10 (J326)
(J942)
(J203) A08
(J216)
A14
(J209A)
9
A09
A13
(J943A) (J944A)
B A30
A12
A11
1464 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-15 Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3506-000CN 1 Main drive assembly (5700, MFP
5800)
1 RM2-3504-000CN 1 Main drive assembly (X557)
2 RM2-3625-000CN 1 Developing motor assembly
3 RM3-7647-000CN 1 Drum position sensor PCA
4 RM3-7788-000CN 1 Drum motor assembly
5 RM2-7360-000CN 1 T1 solenoid assembly (and
X58045dn, X58045z, X58045zs)
6 RK2-6027-000CN 1 Motor, stepping
7 RM3-7797-000CN 1 ITB motor assembly
8 RM3-7740-000CN 1 Right PCA (5700)
8 RM3-7790-000CN 1 Right PCA (X557, MFP 5800)
9 RM3-7723-000CN 1 Driver PCA
10 RM2-3822-000CN 1 Laser scanner assembly
11 RK3-1213-000CN Cable, flat SCN (5700, X557, MFP
5800, X58045)
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 7) 5700/5800 models 1465
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 7)5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-16 Internal assemblies (2 of 7) 5700/5800 models
SFP 5700/MFP 5800 SFP X557
1 1
SFP 5700/MFP 5800
LLC
(J351) (J351)
MFP 5800
A02
SFP X557 A20 (J124D)
LLC A01 A20 (J124)
A03
A20
A18 A19
A17
A16
LLC
A15
A14 (J305/J315)
A20 A05
2
A20 A13 (J314)
A12 A10 (J311)
A20 (J313)
4 (J312)
A20
(J353) 3 A20
A06
A09 5
A08
A20
A07
Table 6-16 Internal assemblies (2 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3517-000CN 1 Waste toner duct assembly (5700,
MFP 5800)
1466 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-16 Internal assemblies (2 of 7) 5700/5800 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3518-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (X557)
2 RM2-3586-000CN 1 Secondary transfer assembly
(5700)
2 RM2-3628-000CN 1 Secondary transfer assembly
(X557)
3 RM2-4458-000CN 1 Registration assembly
4 RM2-4492-000CN 1 Density detect assembly
5 RM2-3565-000CN 1 Pre-exposure PCA holder
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 7)5700/5800 models 1467
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 7)5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-17 Internal assemblies (3 of 7) 5700/5800 models
MFP 5800 SFP 5700/X557
A18 A18
A02
1
2
2
A01 3 A01
3 1
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800
8 A18
A06 A07 A18
A15
A04 4
5
A05 A03
(J931)
A08 7
9 A
(J206)
A09
10
A17
A15
A18
A14
A10
A17 A11
(J130)
A14 A13 (J125)
A (J204)
(J121)
A18 (J905D)
A12 (J290)
(J292)
(J293)
A16
Table 6-17 Internal assemblies (3 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4520-000CN 1 Formatter cage assembly (5700,
X557)
1 RM2-4521-000CN 1 Formatter cage assembly (MFP
5800)
1468 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-17 Internal assemblies (3 of 7) 5700/5800 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
2 RM2-7138-000CN 1 Memory PC board assembly/IOD
3 RK3-0847-000CN 1 Cable, flat FMTR (5700, X55745)
3 RK3-0845-000CN 1 Cable, flat FMTR (MFP 5800,
X58045)
4 RM2-4488-000CN 1 Fixing motor assembly
5 RK2-7751-000CN 1 Motor, stepping
7 RM2-4485-000CN 1 Fixing drive assembly
8 RK3-1637-000CN 1 Fan
9 RK3-0762-000CN 1 Fan
10 RM2-3548-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (5700,
X557)
10 RM2-3554-000CN 1 Paper delivery assembly (MFP
5800)
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 7)5700/5800 models 1469
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-18 Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models
2
(J132) (J131)
(J261)
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800 (J262)
(J121D)
A06
(J136A/J136B)
A01 (J138/
(J121)
J137A)
(J104)
(J323/J322A)
A19 5 6
A19 (J321A/J321B)
(J208)
A20
9 4 (J103)
3
7
(J207)
A17
(J115)
(J114)
A16 8
A07 (J301)
(J302)
A20
SFP X557
A15 (J150D)
A08
(J150)
A
A14
A13
SFP X557
A20
A18
A11
A12
A10
A
A09
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800
1470 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-18 Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
2 RK3-1508-000CN 1 Cable, flat HVT(For X557, X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
3 RM3-9044-000CN 1 Rear PCA (5700, MFP 5800)
4 RM3-7751-010CN 1 DC controller PCA (5700)
4 RM3-7752-010CN 1 DC controller PCA (MFP 5800)
5 RK3-1691-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear (5700, MFP 5800,
X58045z, X58045zs)
5 RK3-1692-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear (X557, X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
6 RK3-0821-000CN 1 Cable, flat drive(and X58045z,
X58045zs)
6 RK3-1205-000CN 1 Cable, flat rear(X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
7 RK3-0819-000CN 1 Cable, flat drive
8 RK3-1206-000CN 1 Cable, flat right (X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
8 RK3-1694-000CN 1 Cable, flat right (and X58045z,
X58045zs, X58045dn)
9 RM3-7640-000CN 1 HV power supply PCA
Not 6QN27-67002 1 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx)
shown
Not 6QN27-67004 1 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/
shown India)
Not 6QN29-67002 1 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx)
shown
Not 6QN29-67004 1 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/
shown India)
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (4 of 7) 5700/5800 models 1471
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (5 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-19 Internal assemblies (5 of 7) 5700/5800 models
4
SFP 5700/X557/MFP 5800
(J106)
(J217) (J112) A01 (J247)
1 2 (J248) 3 A03
(J246)
A02
(J1)
(J379)
(J105)
A12
A11
A05
A06
A07
A08
A10
A09
LLC
Table 6-19 Internal assemblies (5 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3675-000CN 1 Interlock assembly
2 RK3-2277-000CN 1 Fan
3 WP2-5473-000CN 1 Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A
4 RK3-2104-000CN 1 Cable, flat LVPS( and X58045z,
X58045zs)
5 RM3-7724-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V) (5700, X557)
5 RM3-7725-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V) (5700, X557))
5 RM3-9012-000CN 1 LVPS (110-127V) (MFP 5800)
5 RM3-9013-000CN 1 LVPS (220-240V) (MFP 5800)
1472 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-20 Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models
A11
(J336)
2
(J336D)
SFP 5700/ A11
MFP 5800
(J327A) 4
(J346)
SFP X557
(J337A) 3
SFP X557
(J346)
A10 4
A11
A11 5
A01
A11 A09
A07 A06
(J316A)
A11
LLC
A08 6
A11
LLC
A05 A11 A04 A02 A11
A11 A11
A03
Table 6-20 Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-3559-000CN 1 Auto close assembly
2 RM3-8001-000CN 1 Drawer cable assembly
3 RM2-3634-000CN 1 Size detect assembly (5700, X557)
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models 1473
Table 6-20 Internal assemblies (6 of 7) 5700/5800 models (continued)
Ref Part number Qty Description
No
3 RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly (5800)
4 RM2-3493-000CN 1 Lifter drive assembly (5700, MFP
5800)
4 RM2-3500-000CN 1 Lifter drive assembly (X557)
5 RM2-3681-000CN 1 Paper pickup drive assembly
6 RM2-3508-000CN 1 Paper pickup assembly
7 RM2-3615-000CN 1 Cassette assembly (5700, MFP
5800)
1474 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 7)5700/5800 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.
Figure 6-21 Internal assemblies (7 of 7) 5700/5800 models
1
Table 6-21 Internal assemblies (7 of 7) 5700/5800 models
Ref Product Number Service Part Number Qty Description
No
1 W2130A 6QN29-67013 1 HP 213A Black Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
1 W2130X 6QN29-67014 1 HP 2130X High Yield
Black Toner Cartridge
1 W2130Y 6QN29-67015 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield
Black Toner Cartridge
1 W2130YC 6QN29-67016 1 HP W2130YC Black
Contract Toner Cartridge
1 W2131A 6QN29-67017 1 HP 213A Cyan Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
1 W2131X 6QN29-67018 1 HP 2131X High Yield Cyan
Toner Cartridge
1 W2131Y 6QN29-67019 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield
Cyan Toner Cartridge
1 W2131YC 6QN29-67020 1 HP W2131YC Cyan
Contract Toner Cartridge
1 W2132A 6QN29-67021 1 HP 213A Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner
1 W2132X 6QN29-67022 1 HP 2132X High Yield
Yellow Toner Cartridge
1 W2132Y 6QN29-67023 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield
Yellow Toner Cartridge
1 W2132YC 6QN29-67024 1 HP W2132YC Yellow
Contract Toner Cartridge
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (7 of 7)5700/5800 models 1475
Table 6-21 Internal assemblies (7 of 7) 5700/5800 models (continued)
Ref Product Number Service Part Number Qty Description
No
1 W2133A 6QN29-67025 1 HP 213A Magenta
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
1 W2133X 6QN29-67026 1 HP 2133X High Yield
Magenta Toner Cartridge
1 W2133Y 6QN29-67027 1 HP 213Y Extra High Yield
Magenta Toner Cartridge
1 W2133YC 6QN29-67028 1 HP W2133YC Magenta
Contract Toner Cartridge
1476 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Input devices
Learn about the input devices.
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder
Learn about the 550-sheet paper feeder parts and assemblies.
Covers, panels, and doors
Parts diagrams and part lists for the covers, panels, and doors.
Covers, panels, and doors (550-sheet paper feeder)
Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and
doors.
Figure 6-22 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and doors
6
1
A01
3 2
Table 6-22 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and doors
Ref Part number Description Qty
No
1 RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower 1
2 RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly 1
Input devices 1477
Table 6-22 550-sheet paper feeder covers, panels, and doors (continued)
Ref Part number Description Qty
No
3 RC5-9201-000CN Cover, front right 1
4 RM2-3640-000CN Cassette assembly 1
5 RC5-9200-000CN Cover, front left 1
6 RC5-9408-000CN Cover, left 1
Internal parts and assemblies
Parts diagrams and part lists for the internal parts and assemblies.
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder)
Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder main body.
Figure 6-23 550-sheet paper feeder internal parts and assemblies
(J531F) A02
A17 (J544F)
(J532F)
(J63)
1 (J64)
(J21) A17
(J532FD)
(J511D)
A01 2
(J511F)
4 A17
(J551)
A17
3 (J512)
5
(J512D)
(J541)
6 7
A15 A16
A17
8
A17
A03
(SW16)
(J21) A17
A13 A12
9
A10 A04
A05 (J532)
A14 LLC
A11
A17 A05
A17
LLC
A09
A17 A08 10
A06
A17
A17
A17
A07
1478 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-23 550-sheet paper feeder internal parts and assemblies
Ref Part number Description Qty
No
1 RM3-8051-000CN Paper feeder controller PCA 1
2 RM3-8058-000CN Drawer upper cable assembly 1
3 RC5-9398-000CN Holder, drawer connector upper 1
4 RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly 2
5 RM3-8059-000CN Drawer lower cable assembly 1
6 RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly 1
7 RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly 1
8 RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly 1
9 5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 1
335mm
9 RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly 1
Not 6QN57A 550-sheet paper feeder (tray) 1
shown as
Ref No
Internal parts and assemblies (550-sheet paper feeder) 1479
Output devices
Learn about the output devices.
Output device - 3-bin staple stacker
Learn about the 3-bin staple stacker output device.
Covers, panels, and doors
Parts diagrams and part lists for the covers, panels, and doors.
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.
Figure 6-24 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945 models
A03
1
A02
A03
10
9
A01
A03 3
7 4
5
8
6
A03
Table 6-24 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945 models
Key Part number Qty Description
No
1 RC6-1305-000CN 1 Cover, rear (X58045z, X58045zs )
1 RC6-0223-000CN 1 Cover, rear upper
2 RC6-1307-000CN 1 Cover, corner right
1480 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-24 3 bin staple stacker covers 5800/X57945 models (continued)
Key Part number Qty Description
No
3 RC6-1308-000CN 1 Cover, right upper
4 RM2-4167-000CN 1 Right door assembly
5 RC6-1309-000CN 1 Cover, right lower
6 RC6-1310-000CN 1 Cover, stapler rear
7 RM3-0483-000CN 1 Staple cover assembly
8 RM3-0484-000CN 1 Staple door assembly
9 RM3-0485-000CN 1 Rear inner cover assembly
10 RC6-2356-000CN 1 Cover, left front
Internal parts and assemblies
Parts diagrams and part lists for the internal parts and assemblies.
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945 models
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.
Internal parts and assemblies 1481
Figure 6-25 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945 models
4
3
(J401B)
(J101B) A05
2
A25 5
2 (J9916)
A04 (J1240)
1 (J503B) A25
(J402B)
(J301B) A06
A25
A07 6
A01 (J15)
A02
(FAN21)
A24 (J505B)
A03
A09
A25 A10 A08
13
(M22)
(J15)
A25
A11 A23
7
A13
A22 (SW21)
A14
A10
12 A12
A25 A14
(J301B)
A21 A25 10 (J302B)
A17
A18
A19 9 (J204C)
(J205) (J203C)
(J201C)
A20 (J502B)
(SW4)
(J7301D) 8
(J27)
(J19)
(J26) A15
A25
11 A25
A16
A25
Table 6-25 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945 models
Key Part number Qty Description
No
1 RM2-4168-000CN 1 Lower paper feed assembly
2 RC5-0353-000CN 1 Pin, tray fixed (and X58045zs)
3 RM2-4173-000CN 1 Tray assembly
3 RM2-3837-000CN 1 Tray assembly(X58045z, X58045zs)
4 RM3-0481-000CN 1 Jog assembly
5 RM3-7950-000CN 1 Staple stacker PCA
6 RK2-8153-000CN 1 Fan
7 RK2-8149-000CN 1 Motor, stepping DC
8 RM2-4169-000CN 1 Upper paper feed assembly
1482 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-25 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945 models (continued)
Key Part number Qty Description
No
9 RK2-8148-000CN 1 Stapler assembly
10 RM2-1040-010CN 1 Solenoid assembly
11 5851-7005 1 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB
335mm
12 WC4-5136-000CN 1 Microswitch
13 RM3-0480-000CN 1 Stacking wall assembly
Parts and diagrams: 3 bin staple stacker main body 5800/X57945 models 1483
Alphabetical parts list
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list
Description Part number Table and page
550-sheet paper feeder (tray) 6QN57A 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (5xxx Series) 6H121-67001 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
ADF WUR (5xxx Series Non-Workflow) C0M44-67002 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
ADF WUR (5xxx Series Workflow) C0M44-67003 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
ADF damper 5851-8849 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
ADF hinge kit (5xxx Series) 5851-8841 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
ADF roller cover (5xxx Series) 5851-8843 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
ADF white backing kit 5851-8850 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Assy-Cable Convenience Stapler 6QN35-60120 Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 Internal assemblies (7
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1459
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 5851-7005 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Auto close assembly RM2-3559-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
1484 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Auto close assembly RM2-3559-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Auto close assembly RM2-3559-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Cable, flat FMTR RK3-0845-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Cable, flat FMTR RK3-0845-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Cable, flat FMTR RK3-0847-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Cable, flat HVT RK3-1508-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Cable, flat HVT RK3-1508-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat LVPS RK3-2104-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
Cable, flat LVPS RK3-2104-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
Cable, flat SCN RK3-0835-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Cable, flat SCN RK3-1213-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Cable, flat drive RK3-0819-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Alphabetical parts list 1485
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Cable, flat drive RK3-0819-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat drive RK3-0821-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Cable, flat drive RK3-0821-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat rear RK3-1205-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Cable, flat rear RK3-1205-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat rear RK3-1691-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat rear RK3-1692-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat rear RK3-1693-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Cable, flat right RK3-1206-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Cable, flat right RK3-1206-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Cable, flat right RK3-1694-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Cable, flat right RK3-1694-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
1486 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Cassette assembly RM2-3615-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Cassette assembly RM2-3616-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Cassette assembly RM2-3640-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
Control panel 10.9 cm 4.3 in 6QN28-60102 Control panels on page
1440
Control panel 23.3 cm 8 in 6QN37-60102 Control panels on page
1440
Control panel 25.6 cm 10.1 in 6QN35-60129 Control panels on page
1440
Convenience Stapler Assembly 6QN30-60103 Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) RC4-0213-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, corner right RC6-1307-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Cover, front left RC5-9198-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, front left RC5-9200-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Alphabetical parts list 1487
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Cover, front right RC5-9199-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, front right RC5-9201-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
Cover, left RC5-9408-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
Cover, left front RC6-2356-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Cover, left upper RC5-9204-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, rear RC6-1305-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Cover, rear lower RC5-9168-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Cover, rear lower RC5-9168-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Cover, rear lower RC5-9168-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, rear lower RC5-9409-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, rear lower RC5-9409-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
Cover, rear upper RC6-0223-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
1488 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Cover, right lower RC6-1309-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Cover, right upper RC6-1308-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Cover, stapler rear RC6-1310-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Cover, top assembly RC5-9172-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Cover, top assembly RC5-9172-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Cover, top assembly RM2-4517-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Cover-Convenience Stapler Cover 6QN28-40006 Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
DC Controller PCA RM3-7759-010CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
DC controller PCA RM3-7751-010CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
DC controller PCA RM3-7752-010CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
DC controller PCA RM3-7755-010CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
DC controller PCA RM3-7756-010CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Density detect assembly RM2-4492-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
Alphabetical parts list 1489
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Density detect assembly RM2-4492-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Developing motor assembly RM2-3625-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Developing motor assembly RM2-3625-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Drawer cable assembly RM3-8001-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Drawer cable assembly RM3-8038-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Drawer lower cable assembly RM3-8059-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Drawer upper cable assembly RM3-8058-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Driver PCA RM3-7723-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Driver PCA RM3-7723-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Drum motor assembly RM3-7788-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Drum motor assembly RM3-7788-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Drum position sensor PCA RM3-7647-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
1490 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Drum position sensor PCA RM3-7647-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Face down tray assembly RM2-4469-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Face down tray assembly RM2-4469-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Face down tray assembly RM2-4469-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Fan RK2-8153-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Fan RK3-0762-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Fan RK3-0762-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Fan RK3-1637-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Fan RK3-2277-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
Fan RK3-2277-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
Fixing drive assembly RM2-4485-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Fixing drive assembly RM2-4485-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Fixing motor assembly RM2-4488-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Fixing motor assembly RM2-4488-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Alphabetical parts list 1491
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Flatbed scanner 6QN29-67005 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) 6QN27-67002 Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) 6QN27-67002 Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/India) 6QN27-67004 Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/India) 6QN27-67004 Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx) 6QN29-67002 Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx) 6QN29-67002 Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/India) 6QN29-67004 Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/India) 6QN29-67004 Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Formatter cage assembly RM2-4520-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Formatter cage assembly RM2-4521-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Formatter cage assembly RM2-4521-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
1492 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4480-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4480-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4480-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4530-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Formatter cover assembly RM2-4530-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Front door assembly RM2-4473-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Front door assembly RM2-4473-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Front door assembly RM2-4479-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Front door assembly RM2-4533-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge W2130X6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
14 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge W2131X6QN29-6701 Internal assemblies (7
8 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge W2132X6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
22 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge W2133X6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
26 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge W2130A6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
13 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge W2131A6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
17 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
Alphabetical parts list 1493
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge W2133A6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
25 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner W2132A6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
21 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge W2130Y6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
15 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge W2131Y6QN29-6701 Internal assemblies (7
9 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge W2133Y6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
27 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge W2132Y6QN29-670 Internal assemblies (7
23 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt 6QN29-67010 Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard A7W14A Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard 1M0Q2A Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
HP Toner supply service kit RM3-0846-000CN Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
HP W2130YC Black Contract Toner Cartridge W2130YC6QN29-67 Internal assemblies (7
016 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP W2131YC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge W2131YC6QN29-67 Internal assemblies (7
020 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP W2132YC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge W2132YC6QN29-67 Internal assemblies (7
024 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
HP W2133YC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge W2133YC6QN29-67 Internal assemblies (7
028 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
1494 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
HP W9250MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner W9250MC6QN29-6 Internal assemblies (9
Cartridge (MFP) 7033 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner W9251MC6QN29-6 Internal assemblies (9
Cartridge (MFP) 7034 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner W9252MC6QN29-6 Internal assemblies (9
Cartridge (MFP) 7035 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9253MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner W9253MC6QN29-6 Internal assemblies (9
Cartridge (MFP) 7036 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum W9280MC6QN35-6 Internal assemblies (9
7027 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum W9281MC6QN35-6 Internal assemblies (9
7028 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum W9282MC6QN35-6 Internal assemblies (9
7029 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum W9283MC6QN35-6 Internal assemblies (9
7030 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
HV power supply PCA RM3-7640-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
HV power supply PCA RM3-7640-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
HV power supply PCA RM3-7786-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Handle (Lunar Aurora Purple Dark) 5851-8692 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Handle (Lunar Comet Red Dark) 5851-8689 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Alphabetical parts list 1495
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Handle (Lunar Constellation Yellow) 5851-8691 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Handle (Lunar Cosmic Green Dark) 5851-8690 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Handle (Lunar Grey Dark/ Cement Dark) 5851-8688 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Handle (OOV white) 5851-8693 Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Handle, left RC5-9165-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Handle, right door lower RC5-8516-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Holder, drawer connector upper RC5-9398-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
ITB motor assembly RM3-7797-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
ITB motor assembly RM3-7797-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Interlock assembly RM2-3675-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
Interlock assembly RM2-3675-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
1496 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Jog assembly RM3-0481-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN) A7W13A Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese A7W12A Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
LVPS (110-127V) RM3-7724-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
LVPS (110-127V) RM3-9012-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
LVPS (110-127V) RM3-9012-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
LVPS (220-240V) RM3-7725-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
LVPS (220-240V) RM3-9013-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
LVPS (220-240V) RM3-9013-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
Laser scanner assembly RM2-3822-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Laser scanner assembly RM2-3822-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Left cover assembly RM2-4535-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Alphabetical parts list 1497
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Left lower cover RC5-9408-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3493-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3500-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3501-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Lifter drive assembly RM2-3501-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Lower paper feed assembly RM2-4168-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Main drive assembly RM2-3497-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Main drive assembly RM2-3504-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Main drive assembly RM2-3506-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Memory PC board assembly RM2-7138-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Memory PC board assembly RM2-7138-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Microswitch WC4-5136-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
1498 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Motor, stepping RK2-6027-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Motor, stepping RK2-6027-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Motor, stepping RK2-7751-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Motor, stepping RK2-7751-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Motor, stepping DC RK2-8149-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Paper delivery assembly RM2-3548-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Paper delivery assembly RM2-3554-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Paper delivery assembly RM2-3554-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
Paper feed assembly RM2-3479-000CN Internal assemblies (7
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1459
Paper feeder controller PCA RM3-8051-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3508-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3509-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Alphabetical parts list 1499
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Paper pickup assembly RM2-3509-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3617-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3617-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3681-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Paper pickup drive assembly RM2-3702-000CN Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
Pin, tray fixed RC5-0353-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Pre-exposure PCA holder RM2-3565-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Pre-exposure PCA holder RM2-3673-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
Rear PCA RM3-9044-000CN Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
Rear PCA RM3-9045-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Rear PCA RM3-9046-000CN Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Rear inner cover assembly RM3-0485-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
1500 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Registration assembly RM2-4458-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
Registration assembly RM2-4458-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Right PCA RM3-7740-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Right PCA RM3-7790-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Right PCA RM3-7791-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
Right door assembly RM2-4167-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Right lower door assembly RM2-3570-000CN Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
Right lower door assembly RM2-3570-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Right lower door assembly RM2-3570-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Right lower door assembly RM3-0004-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Right lower door assembly RM3-0004-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
Scanner control interconnect board (SCIB) (58xx 5851-8962 Integrated scanner
Series) assembly on page 1439
Secondary transfer assembly RM2-3586-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Secondary transfer assembly RM2-3628-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
Alphabetical parts list 1501
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Secondary transfer assembly RM2-3628-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A WP2-5473-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A WP2-5473-000CN Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
Size detect assembly RM2-3614-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Size detect assembly RM2-3614-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Size detect assembly RM2-3614-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Size detect assembly RM2-3634-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
Slide Assembly: (5800dn, 5800f, 5800zf, 6QN29-67006 Control panels on page
X57945dn, X58045dn, X57945z, and X58045z) 1440
Slide Assembly: (6800dn, 6800zf, 6800zfw+, 6QN35-67007 Control panels on page
6801zfw+, X677dn, X677z+, X67755dn, X67765dn, 1440
X67755z+, and X67765z+)
Slide Assembly: (X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, 6QN35-67008 Control panels on page
6801zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs, and 1440
X67765zs)
Solenoid assembly RM2-1040-010CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Stacking wall assembly RM3-0480-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
1502 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Staple cover assembly RM3-0483-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Staple door assembly RM3-0484-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Staple stacker PCA RM3-7950-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Stapler assembly RK2-8148-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
T1 solenoid assembly RM2-7360-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
T1 solenoid assembly RM2-7360-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Toner supply PCA RM3-7771-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Toner supply door assembly RM2-3678-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Toner supply drive assembly RM2-3607-000CN Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
Toner supply drive assembly RM2-3608-000CN Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
Toner supply drive assembly RM2-3609-000CN Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
Toner supply drive motor assembly RM2-3612-000CN Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
Top front cover assembly RM2-4518-000CN Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
Alphabetical parts list 1503
Table 6-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number Table and page
Top front cover assembly RM2-4518-000CN Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
Tray assembly RM2-3837-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Tray assembly RM2-4173-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Upper paper feed assembly RM2-4169-000CN 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
Waste toner carry assembly RM2-3601-000CN Internal assemblies (7
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1459
Waste toner duct assembly RM2-3517-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Waste toner duct assembly RM2-3518-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Waste toner duct assembly RM2-3590-000CN Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
eMMC 16GB B5L32-60002 Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
eMMC 32GB B5L32-67004 Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
1504 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Numerical parts list
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list
Part number Description Table and page
1M0Q2A HP LaserJet Workflow Keyboard Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm Internal assemblies (7
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1459
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
5851-7005 Assy-USB A F Panel Mount To WTB 335mm 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
5851-8688 Handle (Lunar Grey Dark/ Cement Dark) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8689 Handle (Lunar Comet Red Dark) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8690 Handle (Lunar Cosmic Green Dark) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8691 Handle (Lunar Constellation Yellow) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8692 Handle (Lunar Aurora Purple Dark) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8693 Handle (OOV white) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8841 ADF hinge kit (5xxx Series) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8843 ADF roller cover (5xxx Series) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8849 ADF damper Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
5851-8850 ADF white backing kit Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Numerical parts list 1505
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
5851-8962 Scanner control interconnect board (SCIB) (58xx Integrated scanner
Series) assembly on page 1439
6H121-67001 ADF Pick/Sep Roller Kit (5xxx Series) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
6QN27-67002 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
6QN27-67002 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
6QN27-67004 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/India) Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
6QN27-67004 Formatter (57xx / X55xxx) (China/India) Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
6QN28-40006 Cover-Convenience Stapler Cover Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
6QN28-60102 Control panel 10.9 cm 4.3 in Control panels on page
1440
6QN29-67002 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx) Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
6QN29-67002 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx / X58xxx) Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
6QN29-67004 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/India) Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
6QN29-67004 Formatter (58xx / X57xxx) (China/India) Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
6QN29-67005 Flatbed scanner Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
6QN29-67006 Slide Assembly: (5800dn, 5800f, 5800zf, Control panels on page
X57945dn, X58045dn, X57945z, and X58045z) 1440
1506 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
6QN29-67010 HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
6QN30-60103 Convenience Stapler Assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
6QN35-60120 Assy-Cable Convenience Stapler Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
6QN35-60129 Control panel 25.6 cm 10.1 in Control panels on page
1440
6QN35-67007 Slide Assembly: (6800dn, 6800zf, 6800zfw+, Control panels on page
6801zfw+, X677dn, X677z+, X67755dn, X67765dn, 1440
X67755z+, and X67765z+)
6QN35-67008 Slide Assembly: (X57945zs, X58045zs, 6800zfsw, Control panels on page
6801zfsw, X677zs, X677s, X677z, X67755zs, and 1440
X67765zs)
6QN37-60102 Control panel 23.3 cm 8 in Control panels on page
1440
6QN57A 550-sheet paper feeder (tray) 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
A7W12A Keyboard Overlay Kit - Chinese Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
A7W13A Keyboard Overlay Kit - (DN/FR-Swiss/GN) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
A7W14A HP LaserJet Swedish Overlay Keyboard Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
B5L32-67004 eMMC 32GB Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
C0M44-67002 ADF WUR (5xxx Series Non-Workflow) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
C0M44-67003 ADF WUR (5xxx Series Workflow) Integrated scanner
assembly on page 1439
Numerical parts list 1507
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC4-0213-000CN Cover, Hardware integration pocket (HIP) Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-0353-000CN Pin, tray fixed 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC5-8516-000CN Handle, right door lower Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC5-9165-000CN Handle, left Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC5-9168-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9172-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC5-9172-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
1508 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RC5-9198-000CN Cover, front left Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC5-9199-000CN Cover, front right Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9200-000CN Cover, front left 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
RC5-9201-000CN Cover, front right 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RC5-9204-000CN Cover, left upper Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9398-000CN Holder, drawer connector upper 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
RC5-9408-000CN Cover, left 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
RC5-9408-000CN Left lower cover Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RC5-9409-000CN Cover, rear lower 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
RC6-0223-000CN Cover, rear upper 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
Numerical parts list 1509
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RC6-1305-000CN Cover, rear 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RC6-1307-000CN Cover, corner right 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RC6-1308-000CN Cover, right upper 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RC6-1309-000CN Cover, right lower 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RC6-1310-000CN Cover, stapler rear 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RC6-2356-000CN Cover, left front 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RK2-6027-000CN Motor, stepping Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RK2-7751-000CN Motor, stepping Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RK2-7751-000CN Motor, stepping Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RK2-8148-000CN Stapler assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RK2-8149-000CN Motor, stepping DC 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
1510 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RK2-8153-000CN Fan 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RK3-0762-000CN Fan Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RK3-0762-000CN Fan Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RK3-0819-000CN Cable, flat drive Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RK3-0819-000CN Cable, flat drive Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-0821-000CN Cable, flat drive Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RK3-0821-000CN Cable, flat drive Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-0835-000CN Cable, flat SCN Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RK3-0845-000CN Cable, flat FMTR Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RK3-0845-000CN Cable, flat FMTR Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RK3-0847-000CN Cable, flat FMTR Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RK3-1205-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Numerical parts list 1511
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RK3-1205-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-1206-000CN Cable, flat right Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RK3-1206-000CN Cable, flat right Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-1213-000CN Cable, flat SCN Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RK3-1508-000CN Cable, flat HVT Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RK3-1508-000CN Cable, flat HVT Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-1637-000CN Fan Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RK3-1691-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-1692-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RK3-1693-000CN Cable, flat rear Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RK3-1694-000CN Cable, flat right Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RK3-1694-000CN Cable, flat right Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
1512 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RK3-2104-000CN Cable, flat LVPS Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
RK3-2104-000CN Cable, flat LVPS Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
RK3-2277-000CN Fan Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
RK3-2277-000CN Fan Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
RM2-1040-010CN Solenoid assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM2-3479-000CN Paper feed assembly Internal assemblies (7
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1459
RM2-3493-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3497-000CN Main drive assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM2-3500-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3501-000CN Lifter drive assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
RM2-3504-000CN Main drive assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Numerical parts list 1513
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM2-3506-000CN Main drive assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM2-3508-000CN Paper pickup assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3509-000CN Paper pickup assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
RM2-3517-000CN Waste toner duct assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
RM2-3518-000CN Waste toner duct assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
RM2-3548-000CN Paper delivery assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-3554-000CN Paper delivery assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RM2-3554-000CN Paper delivery assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3559-000CN Auto close assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
1514 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM2-3565-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
RM2-3570-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RM2-3570-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-3570-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-3586-000CN Secondary transfer assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
RM2-3590-000CN Waste toner duct assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
RM2-3601-000CN Waste toner carry assembly Internal assemblies (7
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1459
RM2-3607-000CN Toner supply drive assembly Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
RM2-3608-000CN Toner supply drive assembly Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
RM2-3609-000CN Toner supply drive assembly Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
RM2-3612-000CN Toner supply drive motor assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3614-000CN Size detect assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
Numerical parts list 1515
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM2-3615-000CN Cassette assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3616-000CN Cassette assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM2-3617-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
RM2-3625-000CN Developing motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM2-3625-000CN Developing motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM2-3628-000CN Secondary transfer assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
RM2-3628-000CN Secondary transfer assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
RM2-3634-000CN Size detect assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3640-000CN Cassette assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
RM2-3673-000CN Pre-exposure PCA holder Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
RM2-3675-000CN Interlock assembly Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
RM2-3675-000CN Interlock assembly Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
1516 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM2-3678-000CN Toner supply door assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-3681-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM2-3702-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RM2-3822-000CN Laser scanner assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM2-3822-000CN Laser scanner assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM2-3837-000CN Tray assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM2-4167-000CN Right door assembly 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RM2-4168-000CN Lower paper feed assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM2-4169-000CN Upper paper feed assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM2-4173-000CN Tray assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM2-4458-000CN Registration assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
RM2-4458-000CN Registration assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
Numerical parts list 1517
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM2-4469-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RM2-4469-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-4469-000CN Face down tray assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-4473-000CN Front door assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RM2-4473-000CN Front door assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-4479-000CN Front door assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-4480-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-4485-000CN Fixing drive assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RM2-4485-000CN Fixing drive assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-4488-000CN Fixing motor assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RM2-4488-000CN Fixing motor assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-4492-000CN Density detect assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1450
RM2-4492-000CN Density detect assembly Internal assemblies (2
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1466
RM2-4517-000CN Cover, top assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
1518 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM2-4518-000CN Top front cover assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-4518-000CN Top front cover assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-4520-000CN Formatter cage assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-4521-000CN Formatter cage assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RM2-4521-000CN Formatter cage assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-4530-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-4530-000CN Formatter cover assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-4533-000CN Front door assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers 5700/X557
models on page 1443
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers 5800 models on
page 1444
RM2-4535-000CN Left cover assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM2-7138-000CN Memory PC board assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1452
RM2-7138-000CN Memory PC board assembly Internal assemblies (3
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1468
RM2-7360-000CN T1 solenoid assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM2-7360-000CN T1 solenoid assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
Numerical parts list 1519
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly Covers X57945 models
on page 1447
RM3-0004-000CN Right lower door assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
covers, panels, and
doors on page 1477
RM3-0480-000CN Stacking wall assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM3-0481-000CN Jog assembly 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM3-0483-000CN Staple cover assembly 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RM3-0484-000CN Staple door assembly 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RM3-0485-000CN Rear inner cover assembly 3 bin staple stacker
covers 5800/X57945
models on page 1480
RM3-0846-000CN HP Toner supply service kit Internal assemblies (8
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1460
RM3-7640-000CN HV power supply PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RM3-7640-000CN HV power supply PCA Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RM3-7647-000CN Drum position sensor PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM3-7647-000CN Drum position sensor PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
1520 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM3-7723-000CN Driver PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM3-7723-000CN Driver PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM3-7724-000CN LVPS (110-127V) Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
RM3-7725-000CN LVPS (220-240V) Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
RM3-7740-000CN Right PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM3-7751-010CN DC controller PCA Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RM3-7752-010CN DC controller PCA Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RM3-7755-010CN DC controller PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RM3-7756-010CN DC controller PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RM3-7759-010CN DC Controller PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RM3-7771-000CN Toner supply PCA Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM3-7786-000CN HV power supply PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
Numerical parts list 1521
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM3-7788-000CN Drum motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM3-7788-000CN Drum motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM3-7790-000CN Right PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM3-7791-000CN Right PCA Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM3-7797-000CN ITB motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
9) X57945 models on
page 1449
RM3-7797-000CN ITB motor assembly Internal assemblies (1 of
7) 5700/5800 models on
page 1465
RM3-7950-000CN Staple stacker PCA 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
RM3-8001-000CN Drawer cable assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1473
RM3-8038-000CN Drawer cable assembly Internal assemblies (6
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1458
RM3-8051-000CN Paper feeder controller PCA 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
RM3-8058-000CN Drawer upper cable assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
RM3-8059-000CN Drawer lower cable assembly 550-sheet paper feeder
internal parts and
assemblies on page
1479
1522 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
RM3-9012-000CN LVPS (110-127V) Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
RM3-9012-000CN LVPS (110-127V) Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
RM3-9013-000CN LVPS (220-240V) Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
RM3-9013-000CN LVPS (220-240V) Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
RM3-9044-000CN Rear PCA Internal assemblies (4
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1471
RM3-9045-000CN Rear PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
RM3-9046-000CN Rear PCA Internal assemblies
(4 of 9) X557/X57945/
X58045 models on
page 1454
W2130A6QN29-670 HP 213A Black Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
13 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2130X6QN29-670 HP 2130X High Yield Black Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
14 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2130Y6QN29-670 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Black Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
15 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2130YC6QN29-67 HP W2130YC Black Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
016 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2131A6QN29-670 HP 213A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
17 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
Numerical parts list 1523
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
W2131X6QN29-6701 HP 2131X High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
8 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2131Y6QN29-6701 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Cyan Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
9 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2131YC6QN29-67 HP W2131YC Cyan Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
020 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2132A6QN29-670 HP 213A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner Internal assemblies (7
21 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2132X6QN29-670 HP 2132X High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
22 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2132Y6QN29-670 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Yellow Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
23 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2132YC6QN29-67 HP W2132YC Yellow Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
024 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2133A6QN29-670 HP 213A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
25 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2133X6QN29-670 HP 2133X High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
26 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2133Y6QN29-670 HP 213Y Extra High Yield Magenta Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
27 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W2133YC6QN29-67 HP W2133YC Magenta Contract Toner Cartridge Internal assemblies (7
028 of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1475
W9250MC6QN29-6 HP W9250MC Black Mngd LaserJet Toner Internal assemblies (9
7033 Cartridge (MFP) of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
W9251MC6QN29-6 HP W9251MC Cyan Mngd LaserJet Toner Internal assemblies (9
7034 Cartridge (MFP) of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
1524 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams
Table 6-27 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description Table and page
W9252MC6QN29-6 HP W9252MC Yellow Mngd LaserJet Toner Internal assemblies (9
7035 Cartridge (MFP) of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
W9253MC6QN29-6 HP W9253MC Magenta Mngd LaserJet Toner Internal assemblies (9
7036 Cartridge (MFP) of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
W9280MC6QN35-6 HP W9280MC Black Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9
7027 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
W9281MC6QN35-6 HP W9281MC Cyan Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9
7028 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
W9282MC6QN35-6 HP W9282MC Yellow Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9
7029 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
W9283MC6QN35-6 HP W9283MC Magenta Mngd Imaging Drum Internal assemblies (9
7030 of 9) X57945 models on
page 1462
WC4-5136-000CN Microswitch 3 bin staple stacker
main body 5800/
X57945 models on page
1482
WP2-5473-000CN Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A Internal assemblies (5
of 9) X57945 models on
page 1456
WP2-5473-000CN Sensor, humidity HSU-08FDB2A Internal assemblies (5
of 7) 5700/5800 models
on page 1472
Numerical parts list 1525
A Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.
Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.
1526 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility
Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility SFP (1 of 3)
Certificate of Volatility 1527
Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility SFP (2 of 3)
1528 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility
Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility SFP (3 of 3)
Certificate of Volatility 1529
Figure A-4 Certificate of Volatility MFP (1 of 3)
1530 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility
Figure A-5 Certificate of Volatility MFP (2 of 3)
Certificate of Volatility 1531
Figure A-6 Certificate of Volatility MFP (3 of 3)
1532 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700, 6700, X557,
X55745, X654, X65455, X65465, MFP 5800, 6800,
X57945, X58045, X677, X67755, X67765 WIFI -
Supplemental Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.
Figure A-7 Supplemental Certificate of Volatility
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700, 6700, X557, X55745, X654, X65455, X65465, MFP 5800,
6800, X57945, X58045, X677, X67755, X67765 WIFI - Supplemental Certificate of Volatility
1533
Glossary of terms
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps.
802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer interferences from microwave
ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular
intervals. For example, the 110V line current found in a typical US electrical wall
receptacle.
AC Control Module (PageWide)
The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly.
Functions include voltage monitoring (ensuring correct operation in a low-
quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater control signals are
isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is
switched on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration (heating
element configuration is changed between series and parallel for temperature
predictability).
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds
an original sheet (or multiple sheets) of paper into the image scanner. The
document feeder is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and
image scanner).
1534 Glossary of terms
Airflow System (PageWide)
The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the
ink on the page. The airflow system functionally consists of a fan and heating
elements. The pressurized air is blown on the page through the nozzles that are
placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and eject zone.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain
its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assigns
an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan
job. A CCD locking mechanism is used to hold the CCD module to prevent any
damage when the printer is moved.
CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's
optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of
the document (often called a raster line), and the optical system captures each
color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover the
entire page width.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can
control and/or monitor the printer. The control panel is found on the front of the
printer.
Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image
or text on it. If the paper or original has complicated images or a large amount of
text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as
much as the coverage.
Glossary of terms 1535
DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically, a low voltage load
current supplied to an electrical assembly.
DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and
electrical components. the DCC sends out various signals to operate motors,
solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and
image data that the host computer sends the formatter.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or
initialized.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the
DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host
to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
Digital Send Software
Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send
information quickly and securely to email, network folders, other printers, and
fax services.
DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory.
The DIMM stores all data within the printer, such as printing data and received
fax data.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution (more visible detail in
the image and a larger file size).
Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer
can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex
unit can print on both sides of the paper during one print cycle.
1536 Glossary of terms
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for
a month. Generally, the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per
year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month the
printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/month).
Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating
genuine HP supplies. HP printers use toner cartridges that have security chips
or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip, or modified chip, or
non-HP circuitry might not work (now or in the future).
e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules
to scan the front-side and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single
pass through the document feeder.
EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared
operating environment while, at the same time, not affecting the ability of other
equipment within the same environment to operate as intended.
EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic
device. Electronic devices (like printers) are a source of EMI. Because it is rare
for electronics to operate in isolation, products are generally engineered to
function in the presence of some amount of EMI.
eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of
NAND flash memory and a simple storage controller.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system,
so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on
exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering
its internal state.
Glossary of terms 1537
EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for
storing font and vector graphic image information.
ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two
electrically charged objects caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric
breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet has become
the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.
Ferrite
A ferrite is used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference)
in a wire or cable. A ferrite enables proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory
purposes.
FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to
PCA connections (for example, connecting a fax PCA to the formatter).
FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction
printers (MFPs) to use third-party devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.
Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process
is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware.
Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the
power is turned off.
Flow integrated scanner assembly
A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.
1538 Glossary of terms
Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data,
developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller
PCA, storing font and customer configuration information, communicating with
the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer
status information through the control panel.
FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring
files over the Internet. Files stored on an FTP server can be accessed using an
FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software program, or a command line
interface.
Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed
page. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to make sure that the
toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when it
comes out of a laser printer).
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and
a telephone line. A gateway is used to connect two different computer networks,
especially a connection to the Internet.
Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in
monochrome. Colors are represented by a range of gray shades from white to
black.
Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the
various tones of gray or color are produced by variously sized dots of ink
or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk)
is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly
rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
Glossary of terms 1539
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related
to electricity.
Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to
digitally scan an original source document. The image scanner is a component
of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in
order to identify and communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the
Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An
IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in
one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and
managing print jobs, media size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over
the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP also supports access control,
authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing solution.
ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and
image scanner.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard
with no loss of accuracy or quality. It was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for other images.
1540 Glossary of terms
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method
of loss compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing
and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the
status of a printer (formatter LEDs) or a component in a contact image sensor
(CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.
LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation
method and defines the dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between
clients and devices, as well as the access protocol, event, security, and
discovery methods.
LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to
configure the speed to the printer depending on the customer’s order. LPDC
configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).
LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies
(SMPS) supply direct current (DC) voltages to various printer components and
assemblies.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as
12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e).
This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by the
manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a
large network.
Glossary of terms 1541
MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard
memory through a variety of font- and data-compression methods. MEt is
available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode; it is not functional
when printing in PostScript (PS) mode.
MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple
functionalities in a single physical body. For example, an MFP printer can scan,
digitally send, fax, copy, and print.
MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC
connectors (DC voltage between 500 V and 5 kV).
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics
(DC controller) into a single assembly. The Main PCA (MPCA) controls
printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and
coordinating data placement, storing font and customer configuration
information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control
panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control
panel.
NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and
logic gate). NAND (flash) memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data
even when the power is turned off.
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and
information about the print environment configuration (stored data even when
the power is turned off).
1542 Glossary of terms
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust
colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly
wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced
appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush,
cleaning mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which
is copied, reproduced, or translated to produce additional copies. The original
itself is not copied or derived from something else.
PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete,
electronic components must be assembled to form a functional printed circuit
assembly or PCA.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol. PCL has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems. A PDF represents two dimension documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition
to the standard PCL and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer
can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like dynamic I/O switching, context-
sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one print
job to the next.
PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer
and status read-back from the printer through the I/O ports.
Glossary of terms 1543
PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming
language used primarily in electronic and desktop publishing. PostScript is run
in an interpreter to generate an image.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a
printer, scanner, fax, or copier.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics
into properly formed and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.
Printhead Wiper (PageWide)
The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly
throughout the life of the printer as it performs the wiping and capping
functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue and
particulates. The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and
when the printer is idle.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data
in current use is kept so it can be quickly retrieved by the device's processor.
This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors and printing documents
properly. Printer memory is used to store, and process print jobs as they are
sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job is cleared from the
memory to make room for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to
two print characteristics: speed and print quality. More memory allows you to
print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.
1544 Glossary of terms
REDI sensor
An optical reflective edge detection interrupter (REDI) sensor. Usually used in
conjunction with mirrors to sense the presence or absence of paper in the
paper path. These sensors are carefully aligned and calibrated at the factory, so
care must be taken when servicing these sensors.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image is measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the
DPI, the greater the resolution.
SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner
components in the Sub Scanner Assembly (SSA).
Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)
There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid
management system is contained entirely within the duplex module. Service
fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead, and then collected in a
container inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol
because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer and
collect on the lens of optical sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol
management system transports the aerosol and collects it in a safe place.
Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the
air flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes
in the platen and into the aerosol filter inside the duplex module.
SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or
from an USB port on the printer.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on
a network. SMB also provides an authenticated inter-process communication
mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions
across the internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where
one or more recipient of a message is specified, and the message text is
transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
Glossary of terms 1545
SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory
storage device (a smaller alternative to a standard DIMM device).
SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated
Scanner Assembly (ISA, which includes the document feeder and the image
scanner).
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set
of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
internet and most commercial networks run.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is
included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used
for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer.
Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms
the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of
heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.
1546 Glossary of terms
TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers.
The TPM strengthens protection of encrypted credentials and data stored
on your printer. Certificate private keys are both generated by and protected
by the TPM. Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed, and the
printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device without
losing its ownership from the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might
necessitate a firmware upgrade. The TPM prevents the printer from starting if
the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel error
message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.
NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer
service manual to determine if the TPM is a replaceable service part.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant
scanner with TWAIN-compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the
program. TWAIN is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Macintosh operating systems.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol
to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB
port is usually near the control panel).
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in
Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been used by paper makers to identify
their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government
documents to discourage counterfeiting.
Glossary of terms 1547
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description
Language (PDL) and a new document format developed by Microsoft. This has
benefits for portable document and electronic documents. It is an XML-based
specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-independent
document format.
ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to
secure Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) to a Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA).
1548 Glossary of terms
Index
Symbols/Numerics input accessories 110 accessories, output
10/100/1000 functions jam detection 110 3-bin stapler-
theory of motor control 110, 112 stacker 118
operations 61 other functions 112 acoustic
3 bin staple stacker covers paper path 110, 118 specifications 27
MFP parts and assemblies 2,100-sheet
parts 1480 diagrams 1477 paper deck
3 bin staple stacker main parts, main body 1478 remove and
body MFP pickup and feed replace 1286
parts 1481 functions, other 110 assemblies 3-bin staple
3-bin staple stacker output 550-sheet paper feeder stacker multi-bin
devices covers, panels, and mailbox
parts and doors remove and
diagrams 1480 whole unit replace 1334
3-bin stapler-stacker replacement 1477 assemblies 550-sheet
controller 118 550-sheet paper feeder paper feeder
delivery functions, paper path remove and
other 118 theory of replace 1228
electrical operation 110, 118 assemblies base printer,
components 119 550-sheet tray remove and
fan control 118 jams 450 replace 682
jam detection 118 550-sheet trays auto on / auto off mode
motor control 118, 121, jams 407 setup and
122 76.00.24 406 operation 57
other functions 122 automatic document
A feeder
output
accessories 118 accessories, input whole-unit
paper path 118 550-sheet paper replacement 668
550-sheet paper feeder feeder 110
HCI 113 B
controller 110
electrical backup error
components 110, 111 32.WX.YZ error 404
Index 1549
reset error 404 eject 562 low-voltage power
restore error 404 life detection 82 supply 71
Backup/Restore manually unlock 785 pickup, feed, and
(Maintenance) menu memory chip 82 delivery 96
control-panel presence detection 82 secondary transfer
menu 326 remove 558, 564 roller assembly 95
base printer remove (manually toner cartridge 82
configuration 10 unlocked) 787 configuration
information 4 replacing 559, 565 base printer 10
parts and toner level printer 1
diagrams 1440 detection 82 configuration page
specifications 13 caution vii determine installed
basic printer certificate of firmware 142
operation 55 volatility 1526 find information 257
bin, output Channel partners solve problems 257
locating 6 WISE viii configurations, 5700/
locating SFP checklists X55745 10
managed 4 pre- configurations, 5800/
locating SFP troubleshooting 136 X57945 11
transactional 4 circuit base printer, connectivity and
blank pages diagrams 246 performance
troubleshooting 549 circuit diagrams troubleshooting 548
high-voltage power connector error
C supply 63, 74 65.WX.YZ error 406
cables low-voltage power connector locations
USB, supply 63 external plug and port
troubleshooting 549 cleaning page 326, 327 diagrams 213
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, print 522 printed circuit assembly
control panel 326 clutches diagrams 235
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, theory of operation 63 control panel 60
control-panel cold rest locating 6
menu 327 reset 345 locating SFP
calibration color self calibration managed 4
operations 95 theory 82 locating SFP
calibration, color component diagnostics transactional 4
theory 82 solve problems 210 parts 1440
calibration) components solve problems 147,
operation 95 DC controller 63 369
cartridge engine-control unit 63 control panel diagnostic
developing unit fuser control 75 flowcharts 161
engagement and intermediate transfer control panel
disengagement 82 belt (ITB) 82, 94 messages 381
1550 Index
control panel, system covers definitions and terms
diagnostics remove and replace glossary 1534
solve problems 369 parts 682, 1228, delivery functions, other
control panels 1286, 1334 3-bin stapler-
parts and covers MFP stacker 118
diagrams 1440 parts 1444, 1446 determine problem
control-panel menu covers SFP source 136
Maintenance 326 parts 1442 development
control-panel menu) covers, panels, and doors image formation 88,
Service parts and 89
(Maintenance) 331 diagrams 1442, 1477, development
Troubleshooting 1480 process 82, 83
(Maintenance) 331 CPMD 381 devices, input
USB Firmware Upgrade customer self-repair (CSR) information 28
(Maintenance) 331 A parts and devices, output
controller accessories 557 information 31
550-sheet paper customer self-repair (CSR) diagnostics
feeder 110 B parts and component, solve
floor-standing stapler- accessories 605 problems 210
stacker 118 customer-replaceable engine 357
HCI 113 units diagram
conventions used vii remove and replace 3-bin stapler-
cooling parts 557, 605 stacker 31
areas and fans 63, 70 diagrams, block
copy-quality problems D solve problems 213
light or faint DC controller diagrams, external plug
copies 545 components 63 and port locations 213
modify printer settings fans 63, 70 diagrams, general circuit
to improve scan or motors 63, 68 base printer 246
copy quality 543 theory of operation 63 diagrams, major
vertical lines, bands, or DC controller component
streaks 538 communication error locations 219
copy-quality 55.WX.YZ error 405 diagrams, printed circuit
troubleshooting 535 DC controller firmware assembly connector
Copy/Print (Settings) menu error locations 235
(MFP) 70.WX.YZ error 406 diagrams, sensors and
control-panel DC motors 63, 68 switches 214
menu 166 defeating diagrams, timing
CoV interlocks 357 chart 244
certificate of defeating interlocks digital sending error
volatility 1526 solve problems 200, (firmware)
357 44.WX.YZ error 405
Index 1551
dimensions, printer 21-23 duplexer error engine-control unit
disable cartridge check 69.WX.YZ error 406 components 63
solve problems 208, duplexing unit engine, printer
360 motors 63, 68 parts and
document feeder diagrams 1440
jams 450, 452 E event log 392
locating 6 easy-access USB port event log error (firmware)
locating SFP locating SFP 42.WX.YZ error 405
managed 4 managed 4 exhaust fans 63, 70
paper-feeding problems eject external plug and port
(MFP) 511 toner cartridges 562 diagrams
remove and replace electrical components locations 213
parts 659 550-sheet paper
whole unit feeder 110 F
replacement 1438 HCI 113 factory settings
document feeder / electrical reset 345, 347
scanner specifications 27 failure detection
information, email problems laser/scanner 82
configurations, and get help from motors 63, 68
specifications 2 WISE 548 faint copies
parts and Embedded Jetdirect error copy-quality
diagrams 1438 80.WX.YZ error 406 problems 545
theory of engine fan control
operations 52 diagnostics 357 3-bin stapler-
document feeder and test page 357 stacker 118
scanner engine error (LaserJet) fan error
information 2 46.WX.YZ error 405 58.WX.YZ error 405
document feeder error 63.WX.YZ error 406 fans
31.WX.YZ error 404 engine error (PageWide) DC controller 63, 70
doors 61.WX.YZ error 406 exhaust 63, 70
parts and engine FRUs, internal intake 63, 70
diagrams 1442, 1477, parts and theory of operation 63
1480 diagrams 1448, 1478, Fax (Settings) menu (MFP)
remove and replace 1481 control-panel
parts 682, 1228, engine laser scanner menu 291
1286, 1334 system fax functions
drum laser scanner theory of
remove 568 safety 83 operations 61
replacing 569 engine test fax ports
drum cleaning 82, 83 solve problems 147, locating MFP 8
duplexer 357
jams 407, 450
1552 Index
fax problems firmware, version theory of operation 75
get help from determining 141 fuser control functions
WISE 548 flash memory fuser control 81
field-replaceable units theory of fuser error
covers, panels, and operations 62 41.WX.YZ error 405
doors 682, 1228, flatbed laser scanner
1286, 1334 scanning and image error 405
remove and replace capture MFP only 53 paper path error 405
parts 659, 682, 1228, flowcharts fuser error (LaserJet)
1286, 1334 troubleshooting 136, 50.WX.YZ error 405
firmware 138 fuser heater
determine the installed format disk protection 80
version 142 solve problems 347 fusing
theory of formatter image formation 91
operations 62 locating MFP 8 fusing process 82, 83
firmware communication formatter control
error system 57 G
49.WX.YZ error 405 front door General (Settings) menu
firmware install error locating 6 control-panel
99.WX.YZ error 406 locating SFP menu 264
hard disk error 406 managed 4 glossary
remote firmware locating SFP terms and
upgrade error 406 transactional 4 definitions 1534
firmware locations FRUs
active and remove and replace H
repository 347 parts 659, 682, 1228, hard disk partition error
firmware upgrade 1286, 1334 98.WX.YZ error 406
firmware version FRUS, internal hardware integration
determine 142 parts and pocket (HIP)
firmware upgrade) diagrams 1448, 1478, locating SFP
embedded web 1481 managed 4
server 141 functions hardware integration
USB flash drive, control fuser control 75 pocket (HIP) is not
panel 141 low-voltage power functioning 161, 165
USB flash drive, pre- supply 71, 74 HCI
boot menu 141 toner cartridge 93 controller 113
firmware, upgrade fuser electrical
downloading 141 jams 441, 443, 447, components 113, 115
firmware, version 450, 489, 491, 495 input accessories 113
determine fuser control jam detection 113
find information 142 fuser control motor control 113, 116
functions 81 other functions 116
Index 1553
paper path 113 image formation primary printer base 4
pickup and feed transfer information pages
functions, other 113 theory of operation 89 configuration
HCI paper path image formation page 257
theory of operation 113 secondary transfer Jetdirect page 257
high-voltage power supply theory of operation 90 information,
(HVPS) image formation configurations, and
operations 63, 74 separation specifications
home button is theory of operation 90 ADF / scanner 2
unresponsive 161, 164 image quality document feeder /
HP internal users check toner-cartridge scanner 2
WISE viii status 521 scanner / document
HVPS (high-voltage power image-formation process feeder 2
supply) development initial rotation period 55
operations 63, 74 process 82, 83 input accessory error
drum cleaning 82, 83 67.WX.YZ error 406
I fusing process 82, 83 input devices
I/O functions laser-beam information 28
theory of exposure 82, 83 parts and
operations 61 primary charging 82, diagrams 1477
image capture system 83 remove and replace,
scanning MFP only 53 primary transfer 2,100-sheet paper
image defects, repetitive process 82, 83 deck 1286
ruler 514 secondary transfer remove and replace,
image formation process 82, 83 550-sheet paper
development separation feeder 1228
theory of operation 88 process 82, 83 input, 550-sheet paper
image formation fusing image-information feeder
theory of operation 91 system 82 parts and
image formation ITB image-quality diagrams 1477
cleaning troubleshooting 513 input/output error
theory of operation 91 imaging drums 40.WX.YZ error 405
image formation laser- remove 568 input/output functions
beam exposure replacing 569 theory of
theory of operation 88 individual component test operations 61
image formation pre- solve problems 211 install
exposure information tray 1 pickup roller 600
theory of operation 87 document feeder and installation
image formation primary scanner 2 printer 33
charging input devices 28 installation, base
theory of operation 87 output devices 31 printer 38
printer 1
1554 Index
installation, document internal assemblies (6 of 7), internal parts and
feeder / scanner 34 parts 1473 assemblies
intake fans 63, 70 internal assemblies (6 of parts and
integrated scanner 9), parts 1457 diagrams 1448, 1478,
assembly (ISA) internal assemblies (7 of 7), 1481
ISA parts 1475 internal parts and
whole-unit internal assemblies (7 of assemblies, remove and
replacement, 9), parts 1459 replace 557, 605, 659,
integrated scanner internal assemblies (8 of 783, 1245, 1299, 1377
assembly 674 9), parts 1460 internal parts base printer,
whole-unit internal assemblies (9 of remove and
replacement 674 9), parts 1462 replace 682
interface ports internal assemblies 2,100- internal test and
locating MFP 8 sheet paper deck 1286 information pages
locating SFP 5 internal assemblies 3-bin solve problems 257
interlocks staple stacker multi-bin ITB (intermediate transfer
defeating 357 mailbox 1334 belt)
intermediate transfer belt internal assemblies 550- operation 82, 94
(ITB) sheet paper ITB cleaning
components 82, 94 feeder 1228 image formation 91
operations 82, 94 internal assemblies base
internal assemblies (1 of 6), printer 682 J
parts 1463 internal diagnostics error jam detection
internal assemblies (1 of 9), 90.WX.YZ error 406 3-bin stapler-
parts 1448 video display stacker 118, 122
internal assemblies (2 of 7), error 406 550-sheet feeder 113
parts 1466 internal parts 2,100-sheet 550-sheet paper
internal assemblies (2 of paper deck feeder 110
9), parts 1450 remove and HCI 113, 117
internal assemblies (3 of 7), replace 1286 jam error (LaserJet)
parts 1468 internal parts 3-bin 13.WX.YZ error 404
internal assemblies (3 of staple stacker multi-bin jam error (PageWide)
9), parts 1452 mailbox 13.WX.YZ error 404
internal assemblies (4 of 7), remove and jams
parts 1470 replace 1334 3-bin stapler-
internal assemblies (4 of internal parts 550-sheet stacker 122
9), parts 1454 paper feeder 550-sheet feeder 113
internal assemblies (5 of 7), remove and 550-sheet tray 450
parts 1472 replace 1228 550-sheet trays 407
internal assemblies (5 of auto-navigation 407,
9), parts 1456 451
causes of 408, 451
Index 1555
document feeder 450, laser scanner safety maintenance, document
452 engine laser scanner feeder / scanner 34
duplexer 407, 450 system 83 major component
fuser 441, 443, 447, laser-beam exposure 82, diagrams
450, 489, 491, 495 83 locations 219
HCI 117 image formation 88 major component
in right door 438, 486 laser/scanner locations
locations 407, 450 failure detection 82 diagrams 219
output bin 407, 449, operations 82 Manage Supplies
450, 497, 498, 500, last rotation period 55 (Settings) menu
502 latent image control-panel
Tray 1 407, 450 formation 82, 83 menu 311
Tray 2 407, 412, 450, light copies manual sensor test,
460 copy-quality tray/bin
Tray 4 424, 431, 472, problems 545 solve problems 212
479 lines, bands, streaks manual sensor tests
Jetdirect page copy-quality solve problem 212
solve problems 257 problems 538 memory
job accounting error link speed, change 202, toner cartridge 82
(firmware) 360 Memory Enhancement
48.WX.YZ error 405 low-voltage power supply technology
job management error functions 74 theory of
(firmware) 405 over-current/over- operations 62
job pipeline error voltage Memory Enhancement
(firmware) 405 protection 73 technology (MEt) 57
job parser error (firmware) safety 73 memory error
47.WX.YZ error 405 theory of operation 71 82.WX.YZ error 406
printer calibration voltage EMMC error 406
error 405 descriptions 72 hard disk error 406
low-voltage power supply memory functions
K (HVPS) theory of
keyboard 60 operations 63 operations 62
LVPS (low-voltage power memory, 5700
L supply) included 13
laser scanner operations 63 memory, 5800
failure detection 83 included 16
M memory, X55745
laser scanner error
(LaserJet) maintenance included 14
51.WX.YZ error 405 printer 33 memory, X57945
52.WX.YZ error 405 maintenance, base included 19
laser scanner functions printer 38
failure detection 83
1556 Index
menu, control panel menus, control panel networks, 5800
Backup/Restore Calibrate/ supported 16
(Maintenance) Cleaning 327 networks, X55745
menu 326 motor control supported 14
Backup/Restore 3-bin stapler- networks, X57945
menu 326 stacker 118, 121, 122 supported 19
Calibrate/Cleaning 550-sheet paper no control panel
menu 326, 327 feeder 110, 112 sound 161, 163
Copy/Print (Settings) HCI 113, 116 note vii
menu (MFP) 166 motor error (LaserJet) NVRAM
Fax (Settings) menu 59.WX.YZ error 405 theory of
(MFP) 291 motors operations 62
General (Settings) DC controller 63, 68
menu 264 failure detection 63, 68 O
Manage Supplies pickup, feed, and on/off button
(Settings) menu) 311 delivery system 96, locating 6
Networking (Settings) 100 locating SFP
menu 317 stepping 63, 68 managed 4
Print (Settings) menu theory of operation 63 locating SFP
(SFP) 166 movement of paper transactional 4
Reports menu 261 through printer operating-environment
Scan/Digital Send See pickup, feed, and range
(Settings) menu delivery printer 27
(MFP) 275 operation
Service (Maintenance) N Sleep delay 57
menu 331 Near Field Communication Sleep mode 57
Service menu 326 error operation sequence 55
Settings menu 263 81.WX.YZ error 406 operations
Support Tools Bluetooth error 406 laser/scanner 82
menu 326 external I/O card toner cartridge
Troubleshooting error 406 memory 82
(Maintenance) internal EIO error 406 other functions, 3-bin
menu 331 wireless error 406 stapler-stacker
USB Firmware Upgrade network port theory of
(Maintenance) locating SFP 5 operation 122
menu 331 Networking (Settings) other functions, 550-sheet
USB Firmware Upgrade menu paper feeder
menu 326 control-panel theory of operation 112
menus control panel, menu 317 other functions, HCI
control panel networks, 5700 theory of operation 116
Calibrate/ supported 13 output accessory error
Cleaning) 326 66.WX.YZ error 406
Index 1557
output bin panels paper path
clear jams 407, 449, parts and 3-bin stapler-
450, 497, 498, 502 diagrams 1442, 1477, stacker 118
locating 6 1480 550-sheet paper
locating SFP remove and replace feeder 110
managed 4 parts 682, 1228, HCI 113
locating SFP 1286, 1334 printer 96
transactional 4 paper paper path sensors test
output device, 3-bin staple jams 407, 408, 450, 451 (not available for this
stacker selecting 522 printer)
parts and paper feeder, 550-sheet solve problems 211
diagrams 1480 parts and paper path test
output devices diagrams 1477 solve problems 210
information 31 parts, main body 1478 partial clean (disk)
parts and whole unit replacement solve problems 347
diagrams 1480 part 1477 parts
remove and replace, 3- paper handling 3 bin staple stacker
bin staple stacker solve problems 407 covers MFP 1480
multi-bin paper handling error 3 bin staple stacker
mailbox 1334 (LaserJet) main body MFP 1481
over-current/over-voltage 56.WX.YZ error 405 550-sheet paper feeder
protection paper jams covers, panels, and
low-voltage power 550-sheet tray 450 doors 1477
supply 73 550-sheet trays 407 550-sheet paper feeder
OXPd/Web kit error document feeder 450, main body 1478
45.WX.YZ error 405 452 control panel 1440
duplexer 407, 450 covers MFP 1444, 1446
P fuser 441, 443, 447, covers SFP 1442
page error 450, 489, 491, 495 document feeder and
21.WX.YZ error 404 locations 407, 450 scanner whole
pages output bin 407, 449, units 1438
blank 549 450, 497, 498, 500, parts and diagrams
not printing 549 502 550-sheet paper
printing slowly 549 right door 438, 486 feeder 1477
pages per minute, Stapler stacker 500 ADF / scanner 1438
5700 13 Tray 1 407, 450 base printer 1440
pages per minute, Tray 2 407, 412, 450, control panels 1440
5800 16 460 covers, panels, and
pages per minute, Tray 4 424, 431, 472, doors 1442, 1477,
X55745 14 479 1480
pages per minute, paper movement document feeder /
X57945 19 operation 96 scanner 1438
1558 Index
doors 1442, 1477, 1480 parts, internal assemblies power management
engine, printer 1440 (4 of 9) 1454 theory of operation 58
f3-bin staple stacker parts, internal assemblies power on
output device 1480 (5 of 7) 1472 troubleshooting 353
input devices 1477 parts, internal assemblies power on troubleshooting
internal parts and (5 of 9) 1456 overview 353
assemblies 1448, parts, internal assemblies power switch
1478, 1481 (6 of 7) 1473 locating SFP
output devices 1480 parts, internal assemblies transactional 4
panels 1442, 1477, 1480 (6 of 9) 1457 power-on checks
scanner / document parts, internal assemblies troubleshooting
feeder 1438 (7 of 7) 1475 process 353
parts internal 2,100-sheet parts, internal assemblies pre-boot menu
paper deck (7 of 9) 1459 options 381
remove and parts, internal assemblies pre-exposure
replace 1286 (8 of 9) 1460 image formation 87
parts internal 3-bin parts, internal assemblies pre-troubleshooting
staple stacker multi-bin (9 of 9) 1462 checklist 136
mailbox performance and primary charging
remove and connectivity image formation 87
replace 1334 troubleshooting 548 primary charging
parts internal 550-sheet periods of the operation process 82, 83
paper feeder sequence 55 Print (Settings) menu (SFP)
remove and personal identification control-panel
replace 1228 number (PIN) menu 166
parts internal base printer, service menu 339 print a cleaning
remove and pickup and feed functions, page 522
replace 682 other print bar error (PageWide)
parts, internal assemblies 550-sheet paper 62.WX.YZ error 406
(1 of 6) 1463 feeder 110 print-quality
parts, internal assemblies HCI 113 troubleshooting 514
(1 of 9) 1448 pickup, feed, and delivery print/stop test
parts, internal assemblies components 96 solve problems 209
(2 of 7) 1466 overview 96 printed circuit assembly
parts, internal assemblies PJL (printer job diagrams
(2 of 9) 1450 language) 57, 60 connector
parts, internal assemblies PML (printer management locations 235
(3 of 7) 1468 language) 57 printer
parts, internal assemblies power information,
(3 of 9) 1452 consumption 27 configuration, and
parts, internal assemblies power connection specifications 1
(4 of 7) 1470 locating SFP 5
Index 1559
installation and Process Cleaning document feeder /
maintenance 33 Page 326, 327 scanner 659
operating-environment protection field-replaceable
range 27 fuser heater 80 units 659, 682, 1228,
resets 345 1286, 1334
space R integrated scanner
requirements 26 RAM assembly (ISA), whole-
printer engine theory of unit
parts and operations 62 replacement 674
diagrams 1440 real-time clock error whole-unit
printer information, 11.WX.YZ error 404 replacement 668
configuration, and removal and remove and replace,
specifications replacement 556 internal parts and
document feeder and remove assemblies 557, 605,
scanner imaging drums 568 659, 783, 1245, 1299, 1377
specifications 2 toner cartridges 558, remove and replace,
document feeder and 564 internal parts and
scanner views 2 toner cartridges assemblies base
printer installation and (manually printer 682
maintenance unlocked) 787 repetitive image defect
base printer 38 tray 1 pickup roller 596 ruler 514
document feeder / remove and replace replacing
scanner 34 2,100-sheet paper deck, imaging drums 569
printer job language internal parts and toner cartridges 559,
(PJL) 57, 60 assemblies 1286 565
printer management 3-bin staple stacker reports
language (PML) 57 multi-bin mailbox, event log 392
printer memory error internal parts and supplies status
20.WX.YZ error 404 assemblies 1334 page 381
printer resets 550-sheet paper feeder, Reports menu
solve problems 345 internal parts and control-panel
printer settings assemblies 1228 menu 261
copy-quality remove and replace parts resets
problems 543 automatic document printer 345
printer, base feeder, whole-unit revision history iii
configuration 10 replacement 668 right door
information 4 covers, panels, and locating 6
specifications 13 doors 682, 1228, locating SFP
printing 1286, 1334 managed 4
period in operation customer-replaceable locating SFP
sequence 55 units 557, 605 transactional 4
troubleshooting 549
1560 Index
Right door scanning separation process 82,
jams 438, 486 image capture MFP 83
roller, tray 1 pickup only 53 Service (Maintenance)
install 600 secondary transfer menu
remove 596 image formation 90 control-panel
secondary transfer menu 331
S assembly service and support
safety operation 95 WISE viii
low-voltage power secondary transfer service ID
supply 73 processes 82, 83 restore 345
scan or copy quality secondary transfer roller service menu
improvement assembly personal identification
copy-quality components 95 number (PIN) 339
problems 543 operations 95 solve problems 339
Scan/Digital Send secondary transfer roller Settings (Copy/Print, MFP)
(Settings) menu (MFP) assembly) menu
control-panel operation 95 control-panel
menu 275 security menu 166
scanner dynamic security 82 Settings (Fax) menu (MFP)
remove and replace security error control-panel
parts 659 33.WX.YZ error 405 menu 291
scanner and document sensor error Settings (General) menu
feeder 54.WX.YZ error 405 control-panel
information 2 58.WX.YZ error 405 menu 264
scanner error sensors Settings (Manage
30.WX.YZ error 404 pickup, feed, and Supplies) menu)
scanner tests (MFP) delivery system 96, control-panel
solve problems 207 98 menu 311
troubleshooting 207 theory of operation 63 Settings (Networking)
scanner, image sensors and switches menu
whole unit replacement diagrams control-panel
part 1438 3-bin stapler- menu 317
scanner/document feeder stacker 214 Settings (Print, SFP) menu
information, 550-sheet paper control-panel
configurations, and feeder 214 menu 166
specifications 2 base printer 214 Settings (Scan/Digital
parts and floor-standing stapler- Send) menu (MFP)
diagrams 1438 stacker 214 control-panel
theory of HCI 214 menu 275
operations 52 separation Settings menu
image formation 90 control-panel
menu 263
Index 1561
sleep delay firmware, determine printed circuit assembly
operation 57 version 142 connector location
sleep mode format disk and partial diagrams 235
operation 57 clean functions 347 printer does not pick up
sleep settings 57 image-quality paper 407
solenoids troubleshooting 513 printer does not pick up
pickup, feed, and individual component paper or
delivery system 96, diagnostics 210 misfeeds 407
100 individual component printer feeds incorrect
theory of operation 63 test 211 page size 407, 507
solve connectivity internal test and printer picks up multiple
problems 553 information sheets of paper 407
solve performance pages 257 printer pulls from
problems 549 LED diagnostics 202, incorrect tray 407,
factors affecting print 360 507
performance 549 link speed 202, 360 printer resets 345
print speeds 551 major component printer will not duplex or
printer does not locations duplexes
print 551 diagrams 219 incorrectly 407, 507
printer prints manual sensor scanner tests
slowly 552 test 212 (MFP) 207
solve problems output is curled or sensors and switches
circuit diagrams 246 wrinkled 407, 509 diagrams 214
configuration paper does not feed service menu 339
page 257 automatically 407, system diagnostics,
control panel 147, 369 512 control panel 369
control panel paper does not feed timing chart
messages 381 from Tray 2-X 407, diagrams 244
copy-quality 508 tray/bin manual sensor
troubleshooting 535 paper handling 407 test 212
CPMD 381 paper path sensors test troubleshooting
defeating (not available for this tools 147
interlocks 200, 357 printer) 211 solving
diagrams, block 213 paper path test 210 direct-connect
disable cartridge performance and problems 553
check 208, 360 connectivity space requirements
engine test 147, 357 troubleshooting 548 printer 26
external plug and port power-on checks 353 specifications
location print-quality base printer 13
diagrams 213 troubleshooting 514 electrical and
firmware upgrade 141 print/stop test 209 acoustic 27
printer 1
1562 Index
specifications, document T low-voltage power
feeder and scanner terms and definitions supply 71
printer information, glossary 1534 motors 63
configuration, and tests scanning and image
specifications 2 disable cartridge capture 53
standby period 55 check 357 sensors 63
Stapler stacker engine 357 solenoids 63
clear jams 500 theory of operation 51 switches 63
stepping motors 63, 68 3-bin stapler-stacker toner cartridges 91
supplies other functions 122 theory of operations
eject toner 550-sheet paper feeder 10/100/1000
cartridges 562 other functions 112 functions 61
remove imaging 550-sheet paper feeder ADF / scanner 52
drums 568 paper path 110, 118 base printer 55
remove toner clutches 63 document feeder /
cartridges 558, 564 DC controller 63 scanner 52
remove toner cartridges fans 63 fax functions 61
(manually fuser control 75 firmware 62
unlocked) 787 HCI other flash memory 62
replacing imaging functions 116 I/O functions 61
drums 569 HCI paper path 113 input devices 110
replacing toner image formation input/output
cartridges 559, 565 development 88 functions 61
unlock manually the image formation Memory Enhancement
toner cartridges 785 fusing 91 technology 62
supplies error (LaserJet) image formation ITB memory functions 62
10.WX.YZ error 404 cleaning 91 NVRAM 62
supplies error (PageWide) image formation laser- output devices 118
17.WX.YZ error 404 beam exposure 88 printer, base 55
supplies status page 381 image formation pre- RAM 62
Support Tools menu exposure 87 scanner / document
control-panel image formation feeder 52
menu 326 primary charging 87 USB functions 61
switches image formation USB hosts
pickup, feed, and primary transfer 89 functions 61
delivery system 96, image formation wireless functions 61
98 secondary timing chart,
theory of operation 63 transfer 90 diagrams 244
system error (LaserJet) image formation tip vii
62.WX.YZ error 406 separation 90 toner
image formation, use
during 82, 83
Index 1563
toner cartridge locating SFP trays, X57945
developing unit managed 4 capacity 19
engagement and locating SFP included 19
disengagement 82 transactional 4 troubleshooting
diagnostic test 357 tray 1 pickup roller blank pages 549
functions 93 install 600 check toner-cartridge
life detection 82 remove 596 status 521
memory chip 82 Tray 2 checklist 136
presence detection 82 jams 407, 412, 450, 460 control panel 147, 369
toner level locating 6 defeating
detection 82 locating SFP interlocks 200, 357
toner cartridges 82 managed 4 direct-connect
components 82 locating SFP problems 553
eject 562 transactional 4 disable cartridge
error conditions 82 Tray 3 check 208, 360
manually unlock 785 locating 6 engine test 147, 357
operations 82 locating SFP event log 392
remove 558, 564 managed 4 flowchart 136, 138
remove (manually Tray 4 format disk and partial
unlocked) 787 jams 424, 431, 472, 479 clean functions 347
replacing 559, 565 locating 6 individual component
theory of operation 91 tray motor error (LaserJet) test 211
touchscreen blank, white, 60.WX.YZ error 405 jams 407, 408, 450, 451
or dim (no image) 161 tray/bin, manual sensor LED diagnostics 202,
touchscreen control test 360
panel 60 solve problems 212 link speed 202, 360
touchscreen has an trays manual sensor
unresponsive zone 161, locating 6 test 212
162 locating SFP network problems 553
transfer processes 82, managed 4 pages not printing 549
83 locating SFP pages printing
transfer unit transactional 4 slowly 549
operation 82, 94 trays, 5700 paper path sensors test
tray capacity 13 (not available for this
location assemblies, included 13 printer) 211
550-sheet paper trays, 5800 paper path test 210
feeder 28 capacity 16 print/stop test 209
location assemblies, included 16 printer resets 345
HCI paper feeder 29 trays, X55745 scanner tests
Tray 1 capacity 14 (MFP) 207
jams 407, 450 included 14 service menu 339
locating 6
1564 Index
supplies status U Web-based Interactive
page 381 unlock, manually Search Engine (WISE)
system diagnostics, toner cartridges 785 HP internal users and
control panel 369 upgrade, product Channel
tray/bin manual sensor firmware 141 partners viii
test 212 USB Firmware Upgrade weight, printer 21-23
USB cables 549 (Maintenance) menu whole-unit replacement
wired network 553 control-panel automatic document
Troubleshooting menu 331 feeder 668
(Maintenance) menu USB functions integrated scanner
control-panel theory of assembly (ISA) 674
menu 331 operations 61 remove and replace
troubleshooting process USB hosts functions parts 668
power on 353 theory of wireless functions
power subsystem 353 operations 61 theory of
power-on checks 353 USB port operations 61
troubleshooting process locating 6 WISE
overview locating SFP email problems 548
power on 353 transactional 4 fax problems 548
troubleshooting tools troubleshooting 549 HP internal users and
control panel Channel
messages 381 V partners viii
copy-quality WUR
vertical lines, bands, or
troubleshooting 535 automatic document
streaks
CPMD 381 feeder 668
copy-quality
determine the problem integrated scanner
problems 538
source 136 assembly (ISA) 674
views, document feeder
diagrams, block 213 remove and replace
and scanner
firmware upgrade 141 parts 668
printer information,
image-quality
configuration, and
troubleshooting 513
specifications 2
individual component
voltage descriptions
diagnostics 210
low-voltage power
performance and
supply 72
connectivity
troubleshooting 548 W
print-quality
waiting period 55
troubleshooting 514
warning vii
solve problems 147
Index 1565
You might also like
- HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Service ManualNo ratings yetHP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Service Manual3,778 pages
- HP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700, X557No ratings yetHP Color LaserJet Enterprise 5700, X5571,362 pages
- HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X677, X67755, X67765No ratings yetHP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP X677, X67755, X677651,702 pages
- HP PageWide Managed Color MFP E776 P779 P774 Service Cost Data c05836998No ratings yetHP PageWide Managed Color MFP E776 P779 P774 Service Cost Data c0583699824 pages
- HP Color LaserJet 5700 X557 X55745 5800 X57945 Service ManualNo ratings yetHP Color LaserJet 5700 X557 X55745 5800 X57945 Service Manual1,236 pages
- HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M652, M653 HP Color LaserJet Managed E65050, E65060 HP Color LaserJet Managed E65150, E65160No ratings yetHP Color LaserJet Enterprise M652, M653 HP Color LaserJet Managed E65050, E65060 HP Color LaserJet Managed E65150, E651602,104 pages
- Canon LaserClass 710 Service Manual PDFNo ratings yetCanon LaserClass 710 Service Manual PDF436 pages
- Lexmark Cs720 Cs725 Cs727 Cs728 c4150 SMNo ratings yetLexmark Cs720 Cs725 Cs727 Cs728 c4150 SM548 pages
- Samsung MultiXpress SL - K7500GX Parts BookNo ratings yetSamsung MultiXpress SL - K7500GX Parts Book44 pages
- HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640 Service Cost DataNo ratings yetHP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640 Service Cost Data32 pages
- List of Major Customer: Supplier Name Insert Supplier Logo0% (1)List of Major Customer: Supplier Name Insert Supplier Logo3 pages
- HP Laserjet 4345 MFP Swing Plate Removal PDFNo ratings yetHP Laserjet 4345 MFP Swing Plate Removal PDF3 pages
- Ricoh B202 - B178 - B180 Service Manual PDFNo ratings yetRicoh B202 - B178 - B180 Service Manual PDF906 pages
- Pantum-M6500-6550-6600 Series Spare Parts ManualNo ratings yetPantum-M6500-6550-6600 Series Spare Parts Manual9 pages
- Carburetor: Important: Please Read Through This ManualNo ratings yetCarburetor: Important: Please Read Through This Manual6 pages
- B125 Service Manual: Ricoh Group CompaniesNo ratings yetB125 Service Manual: Ricoh Group Companies431 pages
- 7075 Service Manual: Available On CD ROMNo ratings yet7075 Service Manual: Available On CD ROM58 pages
- HP Designjet 70 Error Codes: Read/DownloadNo ratings yetHP Designjet 70 Error Codes: Read/Download2 pages
- RICOH Aficio-551 Aficio-700 Aficio-1055 Service Manual Pages100% (3)RICOH Aficio-551 Aficio-700 Aficio-1055 Service Manual Pages25 pages
- Sharp Service Manual AL1530 1631 1641 1645100% (2)Sharp Service Manual AL1530 1631 1641 164520 pages
- Brother MFC7420/7820 DCP7010/7025 Parts ListNo ratings yetBrother MFC7420/7820 DCP7010/7025 Parts List33 pages
- Solutions For Using Sage 50 Accounting 2021 1st Edition by Purbhoo100% (1)Solutions For Using Sage 50 Accounting 2021 1st Edition by Purbhoo21 pages
- Only Numbered Service Parts Are Available.: ES-D350 / GT-S55 No.1No ratings yetOnly Numbered Service Parts Are Available.: ES-D350 / GT-S55 No.14 pages
- FS-1030MFP FS-1030MFP/DP FS-1130MFP FS-1035MFP/DP FS-1135MFP ECOSYS M2030dn/PN ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dnNo ratings yetFS-1030MFP FS-1030MFP/DP FS-1130MFP FS-1035MFP/DP FS-1135MFP ECOSYS M2030dn/PN ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dn46 pages
- HP Ent 500 Color M575 Troubleshooting Manual TOCNo ratings yetHP Ent 500 Color M575 Troubleshooting Manual TOC28 pages
- 10-CHP-5 Periodic Classification of ElementNo ratings yet10-CHP-5 Periodic Classification of Element7 pages
- Bohn Instant Electronic Calcualator ManualNo ratings yetBohn Instant Electronic Calcualator Manual16 pages
- EEE111L EXP03 Clipper and Clamper CircuitsNo ratings yetEEE111L EXP03 Clipper and Clamper Circuits6 pages
- Carefree Omega Awning Owner's Manual Installation InstructionsNo ratings yetCarefree Omega Awning Owner's Manual Installation Instructions5 pages
- Konya Province Gelatin Production Pre Feasibility Report With AppendixNo ratings yetKonya Province Gelatin Production Pre Feasibility Report With Appendix77 pages
- Lexmark T640 Parts Catalog With DiagramsNo ratings yetLexmark T640 Parts Catalog With Diagrams69 pages
- Solutions Manual: Modern Auditing & Assurance ServicesNo ratings yetSolutions Manual: Modern Auditing & Assurance Services18 pages
- Exemple Dintroduction de Dissertation de Philosophie Sur Le Bonheur100% (1)Exemple Dintroduction de Dissertation de Philosophie Sur Le Bonheur6 pages
- Powersynth: Multi-Chip Power Module Layout Synthesis: Application of Fast Design Optimization Tools For McpmsNo ratings yetPowersynth: Multi-Chip Power Module Layout Synthesis: Application of Fast Design Optimization Tools For Mcpms1 page
- Non - Ammable Solvent-Free Liquid Polymer Electrolyte For Lithium Metal BatteriesNo ratings yetNon - Ammable Solvent-Free Liquid Polymer Electrolyte For Lithium Metal Batteries12 pages
- Robotic Arm Manipulator (5 DoF) Pick-Place Operation & Gripping Force AnalysisNo ratings yetRobotic Arm Manipulator (5 DoF) Pick-Place Operation & Gripping Force Analysis9 pages
- Definitions Goals and Scope of CounselingNo ratings yetDefinitions Goals and Scope of Counseling1 page
- Thomson Electrac HD Linear Actuator Motion Control per CAN BusFrom EverandThomson Electrac HD Linear Actuator Motion Control per CAN BusNo ratings yet
